JP7622807B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, in which the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which a display device or a rotating body is used to perform a changing display of a pattern is also known in pachinko gaming machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, thereby starting the display of changing patterns, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stopped pattern after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-045989 A

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problem, the present invention provides a game device comprising: a first control means for managing the progress of a game;
A second control means for controlling the execution of a performance based on information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A zone setting means for setting a game zone to a second zone which is more advantageous to a player than the first zone;
A transition expectation setting means for setting the second section to a transition expectation state;
A means for executing a predetermined lottery process in the transition expectation state;
A means for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on a specific winning in the predetermined lottery process;
a means for updating the predetermined reference information stored in the predetermined storage means to approach the predetermined end information based on the occurrence of an update trigger when a game is executed in the advantageous gaming state;
A predetermined update means for updating the predetermined reference information to move away from the predetermined end information when a predetermined grant condition is established in the advantageous game state;
a predetermined transmission means for transmitting predetermined transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the predetermined reference information is updated by the predetermined update means to be away from the predetermined end information;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means to approach the specific end information based on the occurrence of an update trigger during the execution of the game in the second section;
a section end means for ending the second section based on the continuation criterion information becoming the specific end information in the second section;
a means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the predetermined reference information becomes the predetermined end information before the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state in the second section;
When the second section ends based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state in the second section, a means for ending the advantageous gaming state;
Equipped with
The second control means is
A transition expectation performance control means for performing a transition expectation performance in the transition expectation state;
A reception response means for executing a reception response process for executing a performance corresponding to the predetermined reference information being updated to a side moving away from the predetermined end information based on the reception of the predetermined transmission information;
Equipped with
The section setting means includes a section continuation means for continuing the second section based on the end of the advantageous game state in a situation where the continuation reference information in the second section is information included in a range between specific information that the continuation reference information can reach before reaching the specific end information and an initial information of the continuation reference information ,
The reception support means includes:
a notification means for updating continuation information of a notification target in order to allow a player of the game to recognize the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information;
a later notification means for updating continuation information of a later notification target so as to prevent the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information from being recognized by a player in the game;
Equipped with
the latter notification means includes a means for executing a presentation for making the player recognize the information updated by the plurality of updates collectively when the update by the predetermined update means occurs a plurality of times in a specific situation in the advantageous game state and the total amount of information updated by the plurality of updates is equal to or exceeds a predetermined amount of information;
The transition expectation performance control means is characterized by comprising a means for prioritizing the execution of the specific performance over the execution of the transition expectation performance when the transition expectation state is set by the transition expectation setting means in a situation where a specific performance is being executed .

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the patterns visible through the display window and the combination lines. FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. 1A is a front view of a common display area, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of information corresponding to a stop order displayed on the common display section. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating the relationship between the notification content of the stop order in the image display device and the display content of the stop order in the multi-purpose display unit. FIG. 2 is an electrical configuration diagram of the slot machine. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by a main MPU. 10 is a flowchart showing a process during a power outage executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing executed by a main MPU. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided on a main control board. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the role selection process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for a normal mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the normal mode is selected. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the first RT mode is selected. FIG. An explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between the stopping order of the reels and the winning patterns that are achieved when the lottery table for the second RT mode is selected. FIG. 13A to 13C are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values with different winning probabilities among the setting values of "1" to "6." FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an offset table. 13 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process executed by a main MPU. FIG. 2 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel. FIG. 2A is a connection diagram showing a drive system of a stepping motor, and FIG. 2B is a diagram showing drive characteristics of the stepping motor. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of an excitation sequence table. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining required driving characteristics. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an acceleration table. 13 is a flowchart showing an acceleration process executed by a main MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a stepping motor control process executed by a main MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a motor control process executed by a main MPU. 13A to 13F are time charts showing the flow of drive control of the reel when the supply of operating power is stopped while the reel is rotating and then resumed. 13 is a flowchart showing a re-acceleration process during reel presentation executed by the main MPU. 13A to 13I are time charts showing how each reel is re-spinned after a reel effect is executed. 1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game zones existing in a slot machine. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification control process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a notification process executed by the production side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition lottery process for a false premonition state executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the corresponding processing executed by the main MPU when a game ends. A flowchart showing the second control processing of the game area executed by the main MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the transition to the favorable zone and the return to the normal zone occur. 13 is a flowchart showing a transition lottery process for a chance state executed by the master MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a normal process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the chance state processing executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for low probability, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a lottery table for high probability. (a1) to (a4), (b1) to (b4) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to the ART state is executed. 13 is a flowchart showing normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. A flowchart showing the performance control processing for a false premonition state executed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how false premonition effects and chance effects are executed. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the false premonition effect on the image display device, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the chance effect on the image display device. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a bonus process executed by the master MPU at the start of a game. 13 is a flowchart showing the process at the start of a game during a bonus executed by the master MPU. A flowchart showing the bonus state processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a preparation state process executed by a main MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory area of the main RAM, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory area of the production side RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing a top-up process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a continuous lottery process executed by the main MPU. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the common add-on table, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the direct add-on table. 13 is a flowchart showing a direct top-up processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (e) are time charts showing how the number of added games is increased by the constant lottery process and the process for immediate increase. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A loop lottery table, (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining various continuation lottery tables, and (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing an A-loop process executed by the main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing a B-loop process executed by the main MPU; 13 is a flowchart showing ART state processing executed by the main MPU. (a) to (h) are time charts to explain the outline of the effects that occur in the ART state. 13 is a flowchart showing non-normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU. This is a flowchart showing the processing for the direct-once performance executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the A-loop performance processing executed by the performance side MPU. This is a flowchart showing the selection process for special added effects executed by the production side MPU. This is an explanatory diagram to explain the types of special added effects. This is a flowchart showing the processing for special added-on effects executed by the performance side MPU. (a) to (d) are time charts showing how the expected effects and special added effects are executed when loop A occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing the B loop presentation processing executed by the presentation side MPU. 13A to 13C are time charts showing how a special freeze effect is executed when a B loop occurs. 13 is a flowchart showing the stock release process executed by the production side MPU. 1A to 1C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device in the ART state. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how various release effects are executed. 13 is a flowchart showing an ending handling process executed by a main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the ending production process executed by the production side MPU. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams for explaining the display contents of the image display device when an ending performance is being performed. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for ending the ending performance executed by the performance side MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a freeze setting process executed by a main MPU; 13A to 13F are time charts showing how the ending performance is executed. A flowchart showing the presentation control processing for the advantageous maintenance area executed by the presentation side MPU. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus winning notification image, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a bonus type notification image. (a) to (i) are time charts showing the progression of the advantageous maintenance zone. 13 is a flowchart showing a management process executed by a main MPU. 13A to 13E are time charts showing how the results of game history management are displayed using the multipurpose display unit. 13 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU in the second embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus management process executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a pseudo bonus start process executed by the main MPU. FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial continuation game number table, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition game number table. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of a storage area of a main RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a game during a pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU. FIG. 1A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the first add-on table, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second add-on table. 13 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus progression process executed by the main MPU. (a) to (f) are time charts showing how the handling of the number of added games changes depending on the status of the ART winning flag in the pseudo bonus state. A flowchart showing the presentation control processing for pseudo bonuses executed by the presentation side MPU. (a) to (g) are time charts showing how pre-branching effects and branching effects are executed in the pseudo-bonus state. 13A to 13D are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth add-on tables in the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an index correspondence table. 1A to 1D are explanatory diagrams for explaining first to fourth compressed data. 13 is a flowchart showing the additional lottery processing executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring an added index executed by the main MPU. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process executed by a main MPU in the fourth embodiment. An explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of a random number circuit group provided on a main control board in the fifth embodiment. 20 is a flowchart showing normal performance control processing executed by the performance side MPU in the sixth embodiment. A flowchart showing the presentation control processing for a false premonition state executed by the presentation side MPU in the seventh embodiment. A flowchart showing the process for announcing a bonus during an ending executed by the production side MPU in the eighth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a process during a power outage executed by a main MPU in the ninth embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a stop operation determination process executed by a main MPU in the tenth embodiment. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each history area provided in the main RAM. 13 is a flowchart showing a rotation monitoring process executed by a main MPU. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by a main MPU; 23 is a flowchart showing a direct-topping process executed by the main MPU in the eleventh embodiment. 23 is a flowchart showing a direct-topping process executed by the main MPU in the twelfth embodiment. A flowchart showing the chance state processing executed by the main MPU in the thirteenth embodiment. (a1) to (a5), (b1) to (b5) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to the ART state is executed.

First Embodiment
A first embodiment of the present invention applied to a slot machine 10, which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, and Fig. 3 is a front view of the cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is formed into a box shape that is open at the front as a whole by fixing multiple wooden panels.

As shown in Figures 1 and 2, a front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11. The front door 12 is supported by the housing 11 with an axis 12a on the left side of the front door as a pivot axis so that the internal space of the housing 11 can be opened and closed. The front door 12 is locked so that it cannot be opened by a locking device 13 provided on the back side of the front door, and this locked state is released by unlocking the key cylinder 14 with a specified key.

As shown in FIG. 1, a game panel 20 is provided near the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 20 has three vertically long display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R arranged side by side. The display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R are made of a transparent or semi-transparent material, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R.

2 and 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 11a, and a reel unit 31 is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 11a. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R, each of which is formed in a cylindrical shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 21L, 21M, and 21R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

As shown in FIG. 1, a start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the gaming panel 20, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When this start lever 41 is operated when gaming media such as medals and virtual medals have been bet, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate simultaneously.

On the right side of the start lever 41, there are stop buttons 42, 43, 44 that are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 is located directly below the display window 21L, 21M, 21R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, 32R to be stopped. Each stop button 42, 43, 44 becomes capable of stopping the left reel 32L when a predetermined time has elapsed since the reel started spinning.

One game (play) is the period from when the start lever 41 is operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, when the stop buttons 42, 43, and 44 are operated to when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop to when the various processes, such as the awarding of game media and management of the game status, are completed.

On the right side below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, there is a medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals as investment value. As shown in FIG. 2, medals inserted from the medal insertion port 45 are guided by a selector 52 provided on the back side of the front door 12 to a hopper device 53 if reception is permitted, or from a medal discharge port 58 provided on the lower front side of the front door 12 to a medal receiving tray 59 if reception is prohibited (see FIG. 1). Note that the hopper device 53 has the function of dispensing medals stored in the storage tank through the medal discharge port 58 to the medal receiving tray 59 when a winning combination corresponding to the award of game media is established on an active line.

As shown in FIG. 1, below the medal insertion slot 45, there is provided a return button 46 that is pressed when a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 becomes stuck in the selector 52. Also, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R on the left side, there are provided a first credit insertion button 47 for inserting the maximum number of credited virtual medals that can be bet at one time, a second credit insertion button 48 for inserting two virtual medals at one time, and a third credit insertion button 49 for inserting one virtual medal at a time.

A settlement button 51 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and memorizes, as virtual medals, any surplus medals inserted up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) and any medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement button 51 is operated while virtual medals are stored and memorized, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 58 as real medals.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, a power supply unit 54 is provided inside the cabinet 11 to the left of the hopper unit 53. The power supply unit 54 is provided with a power switch 55 that is operated when the power is turned on or off, a reset button 56 for resetting various states of the slot machine 10, and a setting key insertion section 57 that is operated to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 within the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6." Note that the setting state of the slot machine 10 is not limited to six stages from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," and may be any number of stages.

By inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion section 57 and rotating it in a predetermined direction, the setting key insertion section 57 is turned ON. In this state, the supply of operating power to the slot machine 10 is started (i.e., the supply of operating power to the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is started), and the setting state of the slot machine 10 is changed to a changeable state in which it is possible to change the setting state of the slot machine 10. In this state, the setting state of the slot machine 10 is changed by one step in ascending order in the range of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" each time the reset button 56 is pressed once. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated in the "Setting 6" state, the setting state is updated to "Setting 1". In addition, by rotating the setting key inserted in the setting key insertion section 57 from the ON operation position in the opposite direction to the predetermined direction and returning it to the initial position, the setting key insertion section 57 is turned OFF. When the setting key insertion section 57 is turned OFF after the start lever 41 is operated, the changeable state ends, and the game is able to be played with the setting value at that time. In other words, once the changeable state has ended, the setting value cannot be changed even if the reset button 56 is operated.

The setting state of the slot machine 10 determines the degree of advantage per unit time on the slot machine 10, and the larger the value of "setting n" (n is an integer from "1" to "6") (i.e., the higher the setting value), the higher the degree of advantage. Specifically, the higher the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the bonus state (BB state and RB state), and the higher the probability of winning the small role that triggers the award of gaming media.

Next, we will explain the symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 4 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from "0" to "20" are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 70 (described below) to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are seven types of symbols: "Bell" symbol (e.g., 20th on left reel 32L), "Replay" symbol (e.g., 19th on left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., 18th on left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., 15th on left reel 32L), "BAR" symbol (e.g., 10th on left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., 9th on left reel 32L), and "White 7" symbol (e.g., 5th on left reel 32L). The number and arrangement order of the various symbols are different on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 5 is a front view of the display window sections 21L, 21M, and 21R. Each display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is all stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window section 21L, 21M, and 21R.

In this slot machine 10, one main line ML is set to connect the positions where the symbols on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are visible. The main line ML is a line that connects the middle symbols on the left reel 32L, the middle symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbols on the right reel 32R. When a specified number of gaming media have been bet, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, and if a winning combination corresponding to a winning combination is established on the main line ML, either a benefit in the form of gaming media, a benefit in the form of a replay, or a transition to a new gaming state is awarded.

In other words, in this slot machine 10, only one main line ML is set as a line that can result in a win. The main line ML is set as a line that extends in a straight line. Therefore, even if a combination of symbols that can result in a win is formed on a line that extends in a straight line, such as the subline SL1 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL2 connecting the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the upper pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, the subline SL3 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the lower pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and the subline SL4 connecting the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R, no win is formed.

Below, we will explain the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won, with reference to Figure 6. Figure 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the relationship between winning symbol combinations and the benefits that will be awarded if a prize is won.

The minor prizes that award gaming media include the first supplementary prize, the second supplementary prize, the third supplementary prize, the first bell prize, the second bell prize, the first watermelon prize, the second watermelon prize, and the cherry prize. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, it is the first supplementary prize. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, it is the second supplementary prize. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "replay" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "bell" symbol, the third supplementary win will occur. If any of the first to third supplementary wins occurs, the number of game media to be awarded will be "1".

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then the first bell win will occur. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, then the second bell win will occur. If either the first or second bell win occurs, the number of gaming media to be awarded will be "11".

If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "watermelon" pattern, a first watermelon win will be awarded. If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "watermelon" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" pattern, a second watermelon win will be awarded. If either the first or second watermelon win is awarded, the number of game media to be awarded will be "5". If the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "cherry" pattern, a cherry win will be awarded regardless of the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R. If a cherry wins, the number of gaming media awarded will be "2".

Winnings that grant the privilege of replay, which allows you to play the next game without betting gaming media, include the regular replay winnings, first chance replay winnings, second chance replay winnings, first RT replay winnings, second RT replay winnings, first fall replay winnings, and second fall replay winnings. In detail, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, or if the stopping pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopping pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopping pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, then a regular replay will be won.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the first chance replay is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "bell" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the second chance replay is won.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "bell" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, a first RT replay win will be awarded. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "watermelon" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, a second RT replay win will be awarded.

If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "replay" pattern, the first fall replay is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "replay" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "replay" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "bell" pattern, the second fall replay is won.

If any of the above replay wins are won, a replay bonus will be awarded, which allows you to play the next game without having to bet on gaming media. Specifically, if any of the replay wins are won in a game in which you have bet on gaming media "3", you will be able to start playing the next game with gaming media "3" bet on, without having to bet on gaming media.

Of the various replay winnings mentioned above, the first RT replay winning, second RT replay winning, first fall replay winning, and second fall replay winning not only trigger the awarding of the replay winning privilege, but also trigger a transition to a lottery mode. In this slot machine 10, multiple types of lottery modes are set in the role selection process (Figure 17) so that the types of roles to be selected and the winning probability of each role are different, and transitions between these lottery modes occur when a replay winning, which triggers a transition to a lottery mode, is achieved. The contents of each lottery mode and the conditions for transitioning to each lottery mode will be explained in detail later.

State transition winnings, which only result in a transition of the game state, include the 1st BB winning, the 2nd BB winning, the 3rd BB winning, the 4th BB winning, the 1st RB winning, and the 2nd RB winning. In detail, if the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern, then the 1st BB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L on the main line ML is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern, then the 2nd BB winning occurs. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L is a "red 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "white 7" pattern on the main line ML, the third BB is won. If the stopped pattern on the left reel 32L is a "white 7" pattern, the stopped pattern on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" pattern, and the stopped pattern on the right reel 32R is a "red 7" pattern on the main line ML, the first RB is won. If the stopped symbol on the left reel 32L along the main line ML is a "white 7" symbol, the stopped symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white 7" symbol, and the stopped symbol on the right reel 32R is a "BAR" symbol, the second RB will be won.

When the first BB win, the second BB win, the third BB win, or the fourth BB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the BB state. Also, when the first RB win or the second RB win is achieved, the game state transitions to the RB state. Both the BB state and the RB state correspond to the bonus state. The bonus state is a game state in which the expected number of game media given per unit number of games is higher than in game states other than the bonus state. Specifically, a combination that enables the establishment of the first bell win is won with a higher probability (for example, about 1/1.5) than in other game states, and when the combination is won, the first bell win is achieved regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. On the other hand, the number of game media required to start one game in the bonus state is the same as in other game states. Therefore, in the bonus state, the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher than in gaming states other than the bonus state. Note that the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be smaller than in other gaming states, and if the expected net increase in gaming media per unit number of games is higher in the bonus state than in gaming states other than the bonus state, the number of gaming media required to start one game in the bonus state may be greater than in other gaming states.

Of the bonus states, the BB state continues over multiple games and ends when an ending condition is met based on the occurrence of an event that corresponds to the execution of the game. The ending condition can be any, but in this slot machine 10, the ending condition is set to be that the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB ending reference number (specifically, "350"). Note that the ending condition may also be met when the number of games executed in the BB state reaches the BB ending reference number.

Of the bonus states, the RB state continues over multiple games and ends when a termination condition is met based on the occurrence of an event according to the execution of the game. The termination condition is arbitrary, but in this slot machine 10, the termination condition is set to be that the total number of game media awarded since the RB state began is equal to or greater than the RB termination reference number (specifically, "150"). This RB termination reference number is a number smaller than the BB termination reference number. Therefore, the BB state is a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state. Note that the termination condition may be met when the number of games executed in the RB state reaches the RB termination reference number. In this case, by setting the RB termination reference number of games smaller than the BB termination reference number of games, the BB state can be made a more advantageous gaming state for the player than the RB state.

Next, we will explain the devices used to make various announcements and perform various effects.

As shown in FIG. 1, an upper lamp 61 and a speaker 62 are provided on the upper part of the front door 12, and an image display device 63 is also provided. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the abnormality, and is also controlled to emit light in a manner corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the upper lamp 61 is controlled to emit light so that a light-emitting effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed. The speakers 62 are provided as a pair on the left and right, and are controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the abnormality when an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, and are also controlled to output sound or audio corresponding to the winning result. Furthermore, the speakers 62 are controlled to output sound so that a sound output effect corresponding to the display effect on the image display device 63 is performed.

The image display device 63 has a display surface and is configured as a liquid crystal display device equipped with a liquid crystal display, but is not limited to a liquid crystal display device and may be another display device having a display surface such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT, or may be a dot matrix display device. When an abnormality occurs in the slot machine 10, the display is controlled so that an image corresponding to the abnormality is displayed on the display surface. The image display device 63 is also controlled so that an image corresponding to the winning combination in the internal lottery and the winning result in each game is displayed on the display surface. In other words, a display performance is executed on the image display device 63.

The gaming panel 20 of the front door 12 is provided with, below the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R, a credit display section 65 that displays the number of virtual medals stored, a dual-purpose display section 66 that displays the number of gaming media that are awarded when a small win is won, and also displays the content of the notification when the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified on the image display device 63, and also displays the results of the management of the gaming history, and a favorable zone display section 67 that displays whether the gaming zone is a favorable zone. The credit display section 65 is made up of a 7-segment display, and each segment uses a single-color LED that emits green or other light.

Figure 7(a) is a front view of a common display area 68 in which a combined display section 66 and a favorable zone display section 67 are provided. In the common display area 68, the combined display section 66, which is provided by arranging two seven-segment displays 66a, 66b side by side in the horizontal direction as shown in Figure 7(a), and the favorable zone display section 67, which is made up of one light-emitting section, are integrated.

When any of the small prize winnings (first to third compensation winnings, first to second bell winnings, first to second watermelon winnings, or cherry winnings) corresponding to the awarding of game media is achieved, the number of game media awarded corresponding to that small prize winning is displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 at the end of the game in which the small prize winning was achieved. Specifically, when any of the first to third compensation winnings is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is hidden and a "1" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby indicating that "1" game media has been awarded. When any of the first to second bell winnings is achieved, a "1" is displayed on both the left 7-segment display 66a and the right 7-segment display 66b, thereby indicating that "11" game media have been awarded. In addition, when any of the first and second watermelon winnings is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "5", thereby notifying that "5" game media have been awarded. In addition, when a cherry winning is achieved, the left 7-segment display 66a is not displayed and the right 7-segment display 66b displays "2", thereby notifying that "2" game media have been awarded. On the other hand, even if a winning that does not award game media, such as any of the replay winnings, any of the BB winnings, and any of the RB winnings, is achieved, the display corresponding to that winning is not made on the dual-use display unit 66, and in this case, the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are maintained in a non-display state. The display of the number of awarded game media on the dual-use display unit 66 ends when a game media is bet to start the next game after the game in which the display was made, and the 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are in a non-display state at the timing of the bet.

When the image display device 63 notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, information corresponding to the notified stop order is displayed on the combined display unit 66. FIG. 7(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the information corresponding to the stop order displayed on the combined display unit 66. As shown in FIG. 7(b), in this slot machine 10, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R notified on the image display device 63 includes a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a stop order in which the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, and a stop order in which the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R. There are stopping orders where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the left reel 32L and the third stop is on the center reel 32M, where the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, where the first stop is on the left reel 32L and the rest is optional, where the first stop is on the center reel 32M and the rest is optional, and where the first stop is on the right reel 32R and the rest is optional.

Notification of the stopping order on the image display device 63 may be performed when a role including the first bell winning data is won in the role selection process, when a role including the first RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the second RT replay winning data is won, when a role including the first fall replay winning data is won, or when a role including the second fall replay winning data is won. Specifically, when a role including the first bell winning data is won, the first bell winning is achieved if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stopping order corresponding to the current winning role among the above stopping orders. Then, when the first bell winning is achieved, the gaming medium "11" is awarded to the player as already explained.

When a combination including the first RT replay winning data is won, the first RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the first RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the first RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the normal mode. When a combination including the second RT replay winning data is won, the second RT replay winning occurs when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the second RT replay winning occurs, the lottery mode shifts to the second RT mode in which it is easier to win a combination including any replay winning data (i.e., it is easier to win any replay winning) than in the first RT mode.

When a combination including the first fall replay winning data is won, the first fall replay winning is avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the first fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the normal mode, but this transition to the normal mode can be avoided by avoiding the first fall replay winning. Also, when a combination including the second fall replay winning data is won, the second fall replay winning is avoided if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the stop order corresponding to the current winning combination among the above-mentioned respective stop orders. When the second fall replay winning is made, the lottery mode transitions from the second RT mode to the first RT mode, but this transition to the first RT mode can be avoided by avoiding the second fall replay winning.

When any of the above stop orders is notified by the image display device 63, the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 remains in a non-display state, while the right 7-segment display 66b displays the stop order of the order to be notified. The display contents are as shown in FIG. 7(b), and the display contents of the stop order of the combined display unit 66 are set in a one-to-one correspondence with the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63. However, this is not limited to this, and multiple types of display contents of the combined display unit 66 may be set in correspondence with some or all of the notification contents of the stop order of the image display device 63.

The display content of the stop order on the dual-purpose display unit 66 is different from the display content that is displayed when the dual-purpose display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the awarding of game media. This makes it easier to distinguish whether the content displayed on the dual-purpose display unit 66 corresponds to the number of game media awarded or the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figures 8(a) and 8(b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the relationship between the notification content of the stop order on the image display device 63 and the display content of the stop order on the combined display unit 66.

When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is announced on image display device 63, as shown in Fig. 8(a), the same number of unit display images G1 to G3 as the number of stopping operations required to end the game are displayed on image display device 63, and an image corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on each unit display image G1 to G3. Specifically, a left unit display image G1 corresponding to left reel 32L, a middle unit display image G2 corresponding to middle reel 32M, and a right unit display image G3 corresponding to right reel 32R are displayed. FIG. 8(a) shows the stop order being notified when the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, so the left unit display image G1 displays an image of "2" corresponding to the stop order of the left reel 32L, the middle unit display image G2 displays an image of "1" corresponding to the stop order of the middle reel 32M, and the right unit display image G3 displays an image of "3" corresponding to the stop order of the right reel 32R.

In the image display device 63, an image is displayed that notifies the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as described above, whereas in the combined display unit 66, as shown in FIG. 8(b), an "L" corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. In other words, in the image display device 63, unit display images G1 to G3 corresponding to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed, and an image corresponding to the stop order of the corresponding reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed in each unit display image G1 to G3, whereas in the combined display unit 66, a display unrelated to the number of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed. As a result, even if the combined display unit 66 displays a display corresponding to the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the display content on the image display device 63.

The display range of the combined display unit 66 is narrower than that of the image display unit 63. This also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66 compared to the image display unit 63. The combined display unit 66 is also located on the opposite side to the image display unit 63, across the display windows 21L, 21M, and 21R that allow the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be viewed. This means that the combined display unit 66 is positioned away from the image display unit 63, which also makes it possible to reduce the player's attention to the combined display unit 66.

When the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63 are started after the lottery process for the winning combination is performed and before the stop operation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is enabled. In this case, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 is started before the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the image display unit 63, but these displays may be configured to start simultaneously or approximately simultaneously, or the display start order may be reversed. In addition, the display corresponding to the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R on the combined display unit 66 and image display device 63 ends when a stop command is issued for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the game for which the display is executed.

The dual-purpose display section 66 is disposed in the center of the common display area 68, whereas the advantageous zone display section 67 is disposed in a corner of the common display area 68. The advantageous zone display section 67 is a display section for notifying that the gaming zone is an advantageous zone between the normal zone and the advantageous zone. The advantageous zone is either a zone in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, which allows for the establishment of an advantageous winning for the player when the winning combinations that are the target of establishment are different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, or a zone in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state, which is a gaming state advantageous to the player, is higher than in the normal zone. On the other hand, the normal section is a section in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows for a winning combination advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is not announced, and is a section in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state, which is a game state advantageous to the player, is lower than in the advantageous section, or a section in which transition to the ART state does not occur.

When the conditions for transitioning to the advantageous zone are met in the normal zone and a transition to the advantageous zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 turns on to start notifying that the zone is advantageous. When the conditions for transitioning to the normal zone are met in the advantageous zone and a transition to the normal zone occurs, the advantageous zone display unit 67 turns off to end the notification that the zone is advantageous. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall, etc. that the zone is advantageous. The dual-purpose display unit 66, which is provided in a common display area 68, turns on when a game medium is awarded and turns off when the next game starts, and turns on when the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is displayed on the image display unit 63 and turns off when the game ends. Therefore, by locating the advantageous zone display unit 67 within the common display area 68, the configuration prevents it from being too noticeable to players, and it is possible to actively create a situation in which only the advantageous zone display unit 67 is lit in the common display area 68 when the advantageous zone is present, making it easier for the manager of the amusement hall to check the advantageous zone display unit 67.

In addition, instead of maintaining the favorable zone display unit 67 in a lit state during favorable zones, the favorable zone display unit 67 may be configured to flash at a predetermined cycle during favorable zones. Also, other displays such as liquid crystal display devices may be used as the combined display unit 66 and the favorable zone display unit 67.

The slot machine 10 is provided with various control devices. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 3, a main control device 70 is provided above the reel unit 31. The main control device 70 is attached to the back plate 11b that forms the back surface of the housing 11. The main control device 70 is configured by housing a main control board 71 in a board box 81. An MPU 72 is mounted on one of the board surfaces of the main control board 71, which is the element mounting surface. The board box 81 is formed transparent so that the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from outside the board box 81. The board box 81 is formed colorless and transparent, but may be formed colored and transparent as long as the MPU 72 housed in the board box 81 can be seen from outside the board box 81. The main control device 70 is mounted on the back plate 11b of the housing 11 so that the opposing wall portion 82 facing the element mounting surface of the main control board 71 in the board box 81 faces the front of the slot machine 10. Therefore, by opening the front door 12 toward the front of the slot machine 10 relative to the cabinet 11 and exposing the internal space of the cabinet 11, it becomes possible to visually observe the opposing wall portion 82 of the board box 81 and the MPU 72 through the opposing wall portion 82.

The board box 81 is formed by combining a number of case bodies in front and behind, and these case bodies are provided with joints 83 that prevent the separation of these case bodies and leave a trace when the case bodies are separated. The joints 83 are arranged in a row on one side of the board box 81, which is approximately a rectangular parallelepiped. As a result, even if some of the joints 83 are used to prevent the separation of the case bodies and the case bodies are separated by destroying the part of the joints 83, it is possible to prevent the separation of the case bodies again by connecting another joint 83 thereafter. In addition, since the joints 83 are destroyed when the case bodies are separated and a trace is left, it is possible to visually check the joints 83 to see whether the case bodies have been separated illegally. In addition, a seal seal 84 is attached to another side of the board box 81 other than the side on which the joints 83 are arranged in a row so as to straddle the boundary between the case bodies. When the seal seal 84 is peeled off, an adhesive layer remains on the case body. This makes it possible to leave a trace if the seal 84 is peeled off when the case body is separated.

As shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 10 is provided with a performance control device 90 in addition to the main control device 70. The performance control device 90 is arranged behind the image display device 63 and stacked on the front door 12. The performance control device 90 controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 based on commands received from the main control device 70. Note that, like the main control device 70, the performance control device 90 is configured with a control board housed in a board box.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagram in FIG. 9.

As already explained, the main control board 71 of the main control device 70 is equipped with an MPU 72. The MPU 72 incorporates a ROM 73 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 72, a RAM 74 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 73, a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, a random number generating circuit, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 73 and RAM 74 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 72, and each may be integrated into a separate chip.

The MPU 72 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 72, various sensors are connected, such as the reel unit 31, the start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, the stop detection sensors 42a, 43a, 44a that individually detect the operation of each stop button 42, 43, 44, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45, the credit insertion detection sensors 47a, 48a, 49a that individually detect the operation of each credit insertion button 47, 48, 49, the settlement detection sensor 51a that detects the operation of the settlement button 51, the payout detection sensor of the hopper device 53, the reset detection sensor that detects the operation of the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54, and the setting key detection sensor that detects the insertion of a setting key into the setting key insertion section 57, and the like, and the signals from each of these sensors are input to the MPU 72.

The output side of the MPU 72 is connected to the reel unit 31, the selector drive unit 52a provided in the selector 52, the payout motor of the hopper device 53, the combined display unit 66, the advantageous zone display unit 67, the performance control device 90, etc. In each game, the rotation drive control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R of the reel unit 31 is performed by the MPU 72. The selector 52 has a function of guiding a medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 to the hopper device 53 after detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is permitted, and discharging it to the medal tray 59 without detecting it with the inserted medal detection sensor 45a when acceptance is prohibited. The selector drive unit 52a has a function to switch the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state, and specifically, it operates the path switching piece provided in the selector 52 between an acceptance permission position and an acceptance prohibition position. The MPU 72 switches the state of the selector 52 between an acceptance permission state and an acceptance prohibition state by switching between the output state and the stop state of the drive signal to the selector drive unit 52a.

When a small winning combination is achieved and a medal is paid out, the MPU 72 executes drive control of the hopper device 53. When a game medium is awarded, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that the number of game media to be awarded is displayed. When an advantageous zone is reached, the MPU 72 controls the display of the advantageous zone display unit 67 so that a notification of the advantageous zone is given. When an advantageous zone is reached, the MPU 72 controls the display of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the management result of the game is given. When the MPU 72 transmits a command to the performance control device 90 at each timing of each game, and when a command for notifying the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is transmitted to the performance control device 90 on the image display device 63, the MPU 72 executes display control of the combined display unit 66 so that a display corresponding to the content to be notified is given. In this case, the direct display control of the image display device 63 is performed by the performance control device 90, whereas the direct display control of the combined display unit 66 is performed by the MPU 72. In other words, for the image display device 63, which is the subject of relatively complex display control, direct display control is performed by the performance control device 90, and for the dual-purpose display unit 66, which is the subject of relatively simple display control, direct display control is performed by the MPU 72. This makes it possible to perform both displays that emphasize increasing attention to the performance and displays that emphasize reliability, while reducing the processing load on the MPU 72.

A power failure monitoring circuit provided in the power supply 54 is connected to the input side of the MPU 72 (not shown). The power supply 54 is equipped with a power supply unit and a power failure monitoring circuit that supply drive power to the main control unit 70 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10. The power failure monitoring circuit monitors the voltage applied to the power supply unit from an external power source, and outputs a power failure signal to the MPU 72 when the voltage falls below a reference voltage. The MPU 72 executes power failure processing by receiving the power failure signal, and enables the processing state before the power failure to be restored after power is restored. In addition, the power supply 54 is provided with a power failure power supply unit for supplying backup power to the RAM 74 as power failure power when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off. As a result, even when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, data is stored and retained in the RAM 74 when the power failure power supply unit can supply backup power (for example, for one or two days). However, by pressing the reset button 56 on the power supply device 54 and then turning on the slot machine 10, the data stored in the RAM 74 is initialized.

The performance control device 90 is equipped with a performance control board 91 for controlling the execution of various notifications and various performances. The performance control board 91 is equipped with an MPU 92. The MPU 92 has a built-in ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 92, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control programs stored in the ROM 93 are executed. It also has built-in a clock circuit that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an interrupt circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a random number generating circuit.

It is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into a single chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into a separate chip. In addition, while backup power is not supplied to the RAM 94 from the power-off power supply unit of the power supply device 54 when the supply of operating power from the external power source is cut off, backup power may be supplied to the RAM 94.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port. As already explained, the MPU 72 of the main control device 70 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92, and various commands are received from the MPU 72. The upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92. Based on the commands received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, the MPU 92 controls the light emission of the upper lamp 61, the sound output of the speaker 62, and the display of the image display device 63, thereby enabling various notifications and various performances to be performed.

Although not shown, the performance control board 91 is equipped with a video display processor (VDP), character ROM, video RAM, etc. in addition to the MPU 92. The VDP is a type of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the image display device 63. The VDP is involved in reading and writing data from the video RAM, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM from the character ROM at a predetermined timing and displays it on the image display device 63. The character ROM serves as an image data library for storing character data such as patterns to be displayed on the image display device 63. This character ROM holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referenced when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, etc. The video RAM is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the image display device 63. When the MPU 92 determines the execution content of the performance based on a command received from the MPU 72 of the main control device 70, it outputs a drawing list to the VDP that indicates the image content corresponding to each update timing according to the determined execution content of the performance. The VDP reads image data from the character ROM according to the drawing list, and creates display data in the video RAM using the read image data. The VDP then outputs an image signal corresponding to the created display data to the image display device 63, causing the image display device 63 to display an image corresponding to the display data.

In the following explanation, for the sake of convenience, the MPU 72, ROM 73, and RAM 74 of the main control device 70 are referred to as the main MPU 72, main ROM 73, and main RAM 74, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the performance control device 90 are referred to as the performance MPU 92, performance ROM 93, and performance RAM 94, respectively.

Next, the processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. First, the main processing executed by the main MPU 72 when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 10.

First, power-on wait processing is executed (step S101). In this power-on wait processing, for example, the system waits until a predetermined wait time (specifically, one second) has elapsed since the main processing was started, without proceeding to the next processing. During the execution period of this power-on wait processing, the image display device 63 starts operating and is initialized. After that, access to the main RAM 74 is permitted (step S102).

Then, it is determined whether the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned ON (step S103). If the setting key insertion unit 57 is turned ON (step S103: YES), a process for setting the setting value of the slot machine 10 is executed. Specifically, first, an all-clear process is executed (step S104). In the all-clear process, all areas in the master RAM 74 are initialized. In this case, each area of the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0", including the area in the master RAM 74 that stores the setting value of the slot machine 10, the area in which data indicating whether or not it is in a bonus state is stored, the area in which data indicating the total number of game media given in the bonus state is stored, the area in which data indicating the game state is stored, the area in which data for specifying the end condition of the ART state is stored, the area in which data indicating the game section is stored, and the area in which data of the management result of the game history is stored. Then, the initial setting is performed for each of these areas. As a result, when the all-clear process is executed, the normal game state is entered into the normal section regardless of the state before the power cut, and if the state before the power cut was a state in which the progress of the game was restricted due to the occurrence of an abnormality, the abnormal state is released. In addition, in step S104, various registers of the master MPU 72 are also cleared to "0" and then initialized. Note that the area in which the data of the management result of the game history is stored (specifically, the total number of games counter 74a and the advantageous number of games counter 74b) may be excluded from the target of clearing to "0" during the all-clear process. Also, even if an operation to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 is performed, if the reset button 56 is not pressed, the all-clear process of the master RAM 74 is not executed, and the all-clear process may be executed if an operation to change the setting state of the slot machine 10 is performed and the reset button 56 is pressed.

Then, the setting value update process is executed (step S105). In the setting value update process, the current setting value is first displayed in the credit display unit 65. Note that since the all clear process (step S104) is executed before the setting value update process is executed, the credit display unit 65 displays a value corresponding to "Setting 1" when the setting value update process starts. In the setting value update process, the setting value is updated by 1 each time the reset button 56 is operated, and the updated setting value is displayed in the credit display unit 65. Note that if the reset button 56 is operated when the setting value is "Setting 6", the setting value is updated to "Setting 1". The setting value update process ends when the ON operation of the setting key is released after the start lever 41 is operated. In this case, the display of the setting value in the credit display unit 65 ends.

After the setting value update process is executed, the initialization process of the favorable zone is executed (step S106). In the initialization process of the favorable zone, a process is executed to initialize information related to the favorable zone. As a result, when the setting value update process is executed, the game zone is reliably set to the normal zone. After the initialization process of the favorable zone is executed, the process moves to the normal process (FIG. 13) described below (step S107).

If the setting key has not been turned ON during the main processing (step S103: NO), the power restoration processing from step S108 onwards is executed. The power restoration processing is a process for restoring the state of the slot machine 10 to the state before the power was cut off. In the power restoration processing, it is first determined whether or not the power failure flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S108). The power failure flag is provided in the main RAM 74, and if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped and the predetermined power failure processing is executed normally, the power failure flag is set to "1".

If the power failure flag is set to "1" (step S108: YES), the checksum calculation process is executed (step S109). The checksum calculation method is arbitrary, but an example is a calculation method in which all the numerical values of the memory area to be calculated for the checksum are added. This checksum calculation method is the same as the checksum calculation method in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) described later. The checksum calculated in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) described later will be stored in the main RAM 74, but the memory area of the main RAM 74 in which this checksum is stored is excluded from the memory area to be calculated when the checksum is calculated. In other words, when the checksum is calculated, a portion of the memory area in the main RAM 74 is the object of calculation. The storage area to be calculated is a storage area in which information is not basically rewritten if the supply of power such as backup power to the main RAM 74 continues from when the checksum is calculated in the power failure process (FIG. 12) when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed and the process of step S109 is executed. Therefore, if the information in the main RAM 74 is not changed from when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped until the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the checksum for the main RAM 74 is the same as that immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped. The storage area to be calculated when calculating this checksum includes an area in the main RAM 74 in which information on the setting value indicating the setting state of the slot machine 10 is set. Then, the checksum calculated during the power outage processing (FIG. 12) executed immediately before the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 was stopped and stored in the main RAM 74 is read, and it is determined whether the read checksum matches the checksum calculated in step S109 (step S110).

If the checksums match (step S110: YES), it is determined whether the setting value is normal (step S111). If the setting value is any of "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is determined to be normal, and if it is "0" or "7" or greater, it is determined to be abnormal.

If the answer is yes in all of steps S108, S110, and S111, this means that the power outage processing (FIG. 12) at the time of the previous power outage was executed normally. In this case, on the condition that the reset button 56 has been pressed (step S112: YES), a clearing process other than the setting values is executed (step S113). In this clearing process, the areas in the main RAM 74 other than the area that stores the setting values of the slot machine 10 are cleared to "0" and then initial settings are performed. Then, the process proceeds to normal processing (step S107).

On the other hand, if the reset button 56 has not been pressed (step S112: NO), the value of the stack pointer stored in the main RAM 74 is written to the stack pointer of the main MPU 72, and the data saved in the main RAM 74 is restored to the register of the main MPU 72, thereby restoring the state of the register of the main MPU 72 to the state before the power was cut off (step S114). In addition, the power outage flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S115).

Then, a clear process for reel control (step S116) and a return address adjustment process (step S117) are executed. The details of these processes will be explained later. After that, a power recovery command is sent to the performance side MPU 92 to make it aware that the power recovery process has been executed (step S118), and then the address before the power was cut off is returned to (step S119).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in any of steps S108, S110, and S111, an operation prohibition process is executed. In the operation prohibition process, the execution of the next timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is prohibited (step S120), all output ports of the main MPU 72 are cleared to "0" to turn off all actuators connected to the output ports (step S121), and an error notification process is executed to notify the hall manager or the like of the occurrence of an error (step S122). Then, an infinite loop is formed. The operation prohibition process is released by executing the all clear process (step S104). Note that the operation prohibition process is not released even if the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, but may be configured to be released when either the all clear process (step S104) or the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed.

Next, the timer interrupt process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 11. Note that the timer interrupt process is initiated, for example, every 1.49 milliseconds.

In the register save process (step S201), the values of all registers in the main MPU 72 used in the normal process (FIG. 13) described below are saved to the main RAM 74. In step S202, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set to "1", and if the power outage flag is set to "1", the process proceeds to step S203 and power outage processing is executed. The power outage flag is set when a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the power supply device 54 is input to the main MPU 72.

Figure 12 is a flowchart showing the power failure processing. In the power failure processing, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed (step S301). If the transmission has not been completed (step S301: NO), this processing is terminated and the timer interrupt processing is returned to, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed (step S301: YES), the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 (step S302). Then, the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off (step S303). Then, after the checksum calculation processing is executed (step S304), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S305). The processing content of the checksum calculation processing is the same as step S109 in the main processing (Figure 10). Then, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S306). After the above processing is executed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11), if the power outage flag is not set to "1" in step S202, various processes from step S204 onwards are carried out. In step S204, a watchdog timer clear process is carried out to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S205, an interrupt end declaration process is carried out to enable the main MPU 72 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S206, a stepping motor control process is carried out to drive the stepping motors provided on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in order to spin these reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In step S207, a sensor monitoring process is carried out to read the status of various sensors connected to the input ports and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not.

In step S208, a timer subtraction process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S209, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the outside. In step S210, a command output process is performed to send various commands to the performance side MPU 92. In step S211, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port. In step S212, the values of each register saved in the main side RAM 74 in the previous step S201 are restored to the corresponding register in the main side MPU 72. In step S213, a management process is performed to manage the game history and to display the contents corresponding to the management results on the dual-purpose display unit 66. After that, in step S214, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 13.

First, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt (step S401). After that, a start waiting process is performed (step S402). In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay win occurred in the previous game. If any replay win occurred, a re-play process is performed to set the same number of bets as the previous number of bets, and the start waiting process is terminated. If no replay win occurred, it is determined whether the settlement button 51 was operated, and if the settlement button 51 was operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals. After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement button 51 is not operated, it is determined whether medals were inserted or the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either was performed, a medal insertion process is performed to change the number of bets, and the start waiting process is terminated. Also, if neither medals were inserted nor the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 were operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is terminated as it is.

After the start waiting process of step S402 is executed, it is determined whether the number of medal bets has reached a specified number (specifically, "3") (step S403), and if the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S402). If the number of bets has reached the specified number, it is determined whether the start lever 41 has been operated (step S404). If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process (step S402). On the other hand, if the start lever 41 has been operated, the main line ML is enabled and then the acceptance prohibition process is executed (step S405). By executing the acceptance prohibition process, even if a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 45, the medal is discharged into the medal tray 59 without being detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a.

After that, a regular lottery process is executed (step S406), and then a role selection process is executed to select a role for the current game (step S407). Then, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S408: YES), a reel control process is executed to drive and control each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in a manner corresponding to the result of the current role selection process (step S409).

Then, the medium granting process is executed (step S410). In the medium granting process, if a small win has been achieved in the current game, a process is executed to grant the player a number of game media corresponding to the small win. Specifically, when granting virtual medals, a value corresponding to the current small win is added to the credit counter provided in the main RAM 74, and if the value of the credit counter has reached the upper limit of the number of medals stored, the hopper device 53 is driven and controlled so that the number of medals exceeding the upper limit of the number of medals stored is paid out to the medal tray 59. In addition, in the medium granting process, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the number of game media to be granted this time is displayed. The display corresponding to the number of game media on the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until a new bet of game media is made.

After that, a response process at the end of the game is executed to enable the setting of the game state and game zone corresponding to the result of this game (step S411). In addition, an external output setting process is executed to output the state of the slot machine 10 to the management computer of the game hall (step S412). In addition, on the condition that the value of the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S413: YES), an acceptance permission process is executed (step S414). By executing the acceptance permission process, the medal inserted from the medal insertion port 45 is detected by the inserted medal detection sensor 45a and then collected by the hopper device 53.

<Configuration for conducting lottery>
Next, prior to the explanation of the lottery process of the hand in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the configuration for performing various lotteries in the main MPU 72 will be explained. FIG. 14 and FIG. 15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the random number circuit group 100 provided on the main control board 71.

As shown in FIG. 14, the random number circuit group 100 includes first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d. The random number circuit group 100 also includes first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively. The random number circuit group 100 also includes a shared clock circuit 104 that inputs a clock signal in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d that input clock signals individually to the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, respectively.

As shown in Figure 15, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l, each having an 8-bit memory area. The values of these first to twelfth random number counters 106a to 106l are updated by inputting a clock signal to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from a shared clock circuit 104 provided in common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l as shown in Figure 14. For example, in the case of the first shared random number circuit 101a, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the first shared random number circuit 101a, and when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal, the 8-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the first random number counter 106a is updated. Also, for example, in the case of the 8th shared random number circuit 101h, the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the 8th shared random number circuit 101h, and when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal, the 8-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 8th random number counter 106h is updated. A random number generating circuit is provided in each of the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The signal path that transmits the clock signal output from the shared clock circuit 104 is branched into 12 paths on the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to a corresponding random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. Therefore, the clock signal is input to each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at the same timing. As a result, the update period of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is constant, which is the period when the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104, and the update timing of the random numbers is also constant, which is the timing when the clock signal is output from the shared clock circuit 104.

The 8-bit random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated by generating random numbers from "0" to "255" in a predetermined order, and one update cycle is completed when all of these random numbers have been generated once. This update cycle is then repeated. In this case, the update sequences of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are mutually different. For example, the first shared random number circuit 101a has a random number update order set so that the random numbers increase by one in ascending order from "0" to "255", the second shared random number circuit 101b has a random number update order set so that the random numbers decrease by one in descending order from "255" to "0", the third shared random number circuit 101c has a random number update order set so that all even numbers are updated in ascending order and then all odd numbers are updated in ascending order, and the fourth to twelfth shared random number circuits 101d to 101l have update orders different from these update orders and are set to different update orders from each other. This makes it possible to prevent the random numbers of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from always being the same at each update timing, even if the update period and update timing of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are configured to be constant as described above.

In addition, when the random number updating in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l has completed one cycle of updating the random numbers, a new update cycle will start from an initial value different from the initial value of the update cycle, but the selection manner of the initial value in relation to the number of update cycles differs between the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of the random numbers in each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at each update timing.

As shown in FIG. 15, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are provided with a 13th random number counter 106m and a 14th random number counter 106n, each having a 16-bit memory area, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is provided with a 15th random number counter 106o, having an 8-bit memory area, and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is provided with a 16th random number counter 106p, having a 7-bit memory area. The values of these 13th to 16th random number counters 106m to 106p are updated by inputting clock signals to the corresponding first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d from the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d, which are provided individually corresponding to the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, as shown in FIG. 14.

For example, in the case of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and the 16-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 13th random number counter 106m is updated when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal. Also, in the case of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, and the 16-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 14th random number counter 106n is updated when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal. In the case of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the 8-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 15th random number counter 106o is updated when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal. In the case of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is input to a random number generating circuit (not shown) provided in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, and the 7-bit data input from the random number generating circuit to the 16th random number counter 106p is updated when the random number generating circuit receives the clock signal.

As described above, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are not provided with individual clock circuits, but rather are provided with a common shared clock circuit 104, which makes the random number update period and random number update timing constant in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. In contrast, the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are provided with individual first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d, respectively. In detail, the signal path transmitting the clock signal output from the first dedicated clock circuit 105a is connected to the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, the signal path transmitting the clock signal output from the second dedicated clock circuit 105b is connected to the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, the signal path transmitting the clock signal output from the third dedicated clock circuit 105c is connected to the third dedicated random number circuit 102c, and the signal path transmitting the clock signal output from the fourth dedicated clock circuit 105d is connected to the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d.

The output periods of the clock signals in the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d are different from each other. This makes it possible to make the random number update periods and random number update timings in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d unique. In addition, the output period of the clock signals in the first to fourth dedicated clock circuits 105a to 105d is also different from the output period of the clock signal in the shared clock circuit 104. This makes it possible to make the random number update periods and random number update timings in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d different from the random number update periods and random number update timings in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The 16-bit random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b are updated by generating random numbers from "0" to "65535" in a predetermined order, and one update cycle is completed when all of these random numbers have been generated once. This update cycle is then repeated. In this case, the update order of the random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is different from each other. For example, the update order of the random numbers in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is set so that all even numbers are updated in ascending order, and then all odd numbers are updated in ascending order, and the update order of the random numbers in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is set so that all odd numbers are updated in ascending order, and then all even numbers are updated in ascending order. This makes it possible to make the random number update sequence, as well as the random number update period and random number update timing, different between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b, thereby ensuring the uniqueness of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the above, and the random number update order may be the same for the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b. Even in this case, it is possible to make it difficult to obtain the same random number by making the initial values for starting random number update when the supply of operating power to the main control device 70 is started different between the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and the second dedicated random number circuit 102b.

The 8-bit random numbers in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c are updated by generating random numbers from "0" to "255" in a predetermined order, with one update cycle being completed when all of these random numbers have been generated once each. This update cycle is then repeated. The 7-bit random numbers in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d are updated by generating random numbers from "0" to "127" in a predetermined order, with one update cycle being completed when all of these random numbers have been generated once each. This update cycle is then repeated.

The random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are written into the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p provided corresponding to each of the random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d, respectively, when the start lever 41 is operated to trigger the start of a new game in a situation where it is possible to start the game. As shown in FIG. 14, the main MPU 72 is provided with a latch signal output unit 107 for outputting a latch signal when the start lever 41 is operated to trigger the start of a new game in a situation where it is possible to start the game. The signal path for transmitting the latch signal output from the latch signal output unit 107 is branched into 16 on the main control board 71, and each of the branched signal paths is connected to a corresponding register among the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p. As a result, when a latch signal is output from the latch signal output unit 107 based on the operation of the start lever 41, the random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are written to the latch registers 103a to 103p corresponding to the respective random number circuits 101a to 101l and 102a to 102d. The random numbers written to the first to sixteenth latch registers 103a to 103p are then acquired and used as necessary when various lotteries are performed by the main MPU 72.

Here, the type of lottery process to be used is uniquely determined for the random numbers generated in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d and written to the thirteenth to sixteenth latch registers 103m to 103p. Specifically, the 16-bit random number generated in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a and written to the thirteenth latch register 103m is used in the lottery process for the hand described later, the 16-bit random number generated in the second dedicated random number circuit 102b and written to the fourteenth latch register 103n is used in the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone described later, the 8-bit random number generated in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c and written to the fifteenth latch register 103o is used in the constant lottery process described later, and the 7-bit random number generated in the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written to the sixteenth latch register 103p is used in the lottery process for transition to the ART state described later. As already explained, the random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are updated in a unique update cycle and timing, and in a unique update order. In this case, by configuring the random numbers in the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d to be used in the process of selecting a role, the process of selecting a transition to an advantageous zone, the process of selecting a continuous lottery, and the process of selecting a transition to an ART state, it becomes possible to perform each of these lottery processes independently without synchronizing them with each other.

In addition, the lottery process for the winning combination is performed in each game regardless of the game state, the constant lottery process is performed in each game when in the ART state, and the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone is frequently performed in each game in the normal zone. In addition, the lottery process for transition to the ART state is likely to be performed in a game in which the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone has been performed, and is the lottery process that determines whether or not there will be a transition to the ART state. In this situation, by configuring each of these lottery processes to use random numbers from the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d, it is possible to perform each lottery process precisely while preventing the results of each lottery process from being synchronized.

On the other hand, the random numbers generated in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l and written to the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l are not uniquely determined as to the type of lottery process to be used, and are used in one of a number of predetermined types of lottery processes. The number of the predetermined types of lottery processes is set to a number greater than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The order of use of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is predetermined, and when it is time to execute a predetermined lottery process among the multiple types of lottery processes, for example, if the first shared random number circuit 101a is to be used, the random number written to the first latch register 103a is used, and for example, if the eighth shared random number circuit 101h is to be used, the random number written to the eighth latch register 103h is used. In other words, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in multiple types of lottery processes that are set to a number greater than the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits compared to a configuration in which a random number circuit is set individually for each of the multiple types of lottery processes.

In this configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in multiple types of lottery processes, as already explained, the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated at the same update period and at the same update timing. In addition, the random numbers generated by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are all 8-bit random numbers. As a result, for example, when executing a predetermined lottery process included in multiple types of lottery processes, even if a random number is obtained from the first shared random number circuit 101a at the first lottery timing and a random number is obtained from the eighth shared random number circuit 101h at the second lottery timing, these random numbers can be treated as having been updated in a certain manner. On the other hand, the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are updated in different update orders and are not completely synchronized. This makes it possible to prevent the random numbers obtained in the multiple types of lottery processes from becoming the same value when multiple types of lottery processes are executed in the same game. Incidentally, the multiple types of lottery processes include a lottery process for transitioning to a false premonition state, a lottery process for transitioning to a chance state, a lottery process for the number of added games, a lottery process for transitioning to an A loop, and a lottery process for transitioning to a B loop, which will be described later.

Next, the random number acquisition process executed by the main MPU 72 to acquire each of the random numbers will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 16. The random number acquisition process is executed as a common subroutine process each time it becomes necessary to perform various lotteries in the main MPU 72.

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a lottery process for a winning combination, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is used for the random number (step S501: YES). In this case, the random number numerical information is obtained from the 13th latch register 103m in which the random number of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S502).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a lottery process for transition to an advantageous zone, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is the one to use for the random number (step S503: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is obtained from the 14th latch register 103n in which the random number of the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S504).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a continuous lottery process, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is used for the random number (step S505: YES). In this case, the random number numerical information is obtained from the fifteenth latch register 103o in which the random number of the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S506).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is the one to use for the random number (step S507: YES). In this case, the numerical information of the random number is obtained from the 16th latch register 103p in which the random number of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is written when the start lever 41 is operated to start the current game (step S508).

If the lottery process to be executed this time is not a lottery process for a role, a lottery process for transition to an advantageous zone, a constant lottery process, or a lottery process for transition to an ART state, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l will be the target for using random numbers (step S507: NO). In this case, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is first incremented by 1 (step S509). The random number pointer is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l will be the target for using random numbers, and can take on numerical information from "0" to "11". When the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is the target for using random numbers, when the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is the target for using random numbers, when the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is the target for using random numbers, and so on. When the random number pointer is "m", the (m+1)th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are the targets for using random numbers (m is an integer equal to or greater than 0).

If the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "11" (step S510: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S511). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it becomes the subject of use in the lottery process in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and if it exceeds the maximum value of the numerical range, it is looped back to the minimum value. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are the subject of use for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to be used are changed in sequence according to a predetermined order each time they become the subject of use in the lottery process, and after the last shared random number circuits 101a to 101l become the subject of use, the first shared random number circuits 101a to 101l become the subject of use again.

If a negative judgment is made in step S510, or if the processing of step S511 is executed, the random number of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained from the latch register into which the random number was written when the start lever 41 was operated to start the current game (step S512). As a result, even if the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are shared in a number of lottery processes that exceeds the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, it is possible to obtain random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each lottery process within the range of the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is equal to or less than the number of lottery processes that occur simultaneously in one game among the lottery processes that use the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. As a result, even if multiple lottery processes that use the lottery processes occur simultaneously in one game, it is possible to obtain random numbers generated by different random number circuits 101a to 101l in each of the multiple lottery processes.

<Role selection process>
Next, the lottery process for determining a winning combination executed in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S601). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the role selection process, the random number written to the 13th latch register 103m is acquired from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a. In detail, as already explained, the first dedicated random number circuit 102a generates random numbers between "0" and "65535", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written to the 13th latch register 103m by the first dedicated random number circuit 102a is acquired.

After obtaining the random number, the lottery table for determining whether the hand is a winning combination is read from the main ROM 73 (step S602). In this slot machine 10, six winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion section 57 and turning it ON and performing a predetermined operation, it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the lottery process for the hand. "Setting n+1" has a more advantageous winning probability for the player than "Setting n". Specifically, "Setting n+1" has a higher winning probability for the hand that triggers the transition to the BB state than "Setting n", so "Setting n+1" is more advantageous for the player than "Setting n". In addition, even if the setting value is the same, there are three types of lottery modes in which the lottery table differs in the main MPU 72: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In addition, as a game state, a bonus state (BB state and RB state) exists in addition to the state of each lottery mode. In step S602, a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current setting value, the current lottery mode, and the current game state is selected.

Using "Setting 3" as an example, we will explain the lottery tables corresponding to the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode in the non-bonus state. First, we will explain the lottery table for normal mode that is selected in normal mode. Figure 18 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table for normal mode. Note that the following explanation will refer to the explanatory diagram in Figure 19 as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 18, index values IV are set in the lottery table for normal mode, and each index value IV is associated with a winning role and a point value PV is set. The point value PV determines the winning probability of the corresponding lottery role in relation to the maximum value ("65535") of the first dedicated random number circuit 102a.

Specifically, the first bell winning data and the first compensation winning data are set for index value IV=1. When a win occurs with index value IV=1, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop (the reel on which the first stop command was issued) is the left reel 32L, the first bell winning will occur reliably regardless of the types of the second and third stop targets, reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the first compensation winning will occur reliably.

In this slot machine 10, reel control that allows up to four symbols to slide after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. In other words, reel control that stops each reel 32L, 32M, 32R within a specified time (190 milliseconds) after the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is performed on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. By performing such reel control, it is possible to easily achieve a winning combination corresponding to a winning role, and it is possible to prevent a winning combination corresponding to a non-winning role from being achieved. However, since the amount of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that can be slid is limited as described above, if there are five or more symbols among the constituent symbols that make up the combination of symbols for achieving a winning combination on one reel 32L, 32M, 32R, depending on the operation timing of the corresponding stop buttons 42-44, the constituent symbols may not stop on the main line ML (this event is also called a "missed win"). The first to third compensation wins, the first bell win, the second bell win, and the various replay wins are winning patterns that will not result in a missed win if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the corresponding order, while the first watermelon win, second watermelon win, cherry win, first BB win, second BB win, third BB win, fourth BB win, first RB win, and second RB win are winning patterns that may result in a missed win depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 relative to the rotational positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

As shown in FIG. 18, the first bell winning data and the second compensation winning data are set for index value IV=2. When a win occurs with index value IV=2, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop is center reel 32M, the first bell winning is achieved regardless of the types of reels 32L, 32M, 32R that are the second and third stop targets and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the second compensation winning is achieved.

As shown in FIG. 18, the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data are set for index value IV=3. When a win occurs with index value IV=3, as shown in FIG. 19, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the types of the second and third stop targets reels 32L, 32M, 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in all other cases the third compensation winning is guaranteed to occur.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first bell winning data is set for index value IV=4. When a win occurs with index value IV=4, as shown in FIG. 19, the first bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second bell winning data is set for index value IV=17. When a win occurs with index value IV=17, as shown in FIG. 19, the second bell winning is guaranteed to occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=5. When a win occurs with index value IV=5, as shown in FIG. 19, the first watermelon winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the first watermelon winning may not be achieved. As shown in FIG. 18, only the second watermelon winning data is set for index value IV=18. When a win occurs with index value IV=18, as shown in FIG. 19, the second watermelon winning may be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, the second watermelon winning may not be achieved.

As shown in FIG. 18, only cherry winning data is set for index value IV=6. When a win occurs with index value IV=6, as shown in FIG. 19, a cherry winning can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of left stop button 42 in relation to the spinning position of left reel 32L, there is a possibility that a cherry winning will not occur.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the 3rd BB winning data is set for index value IV=7. When a win occurs with index value IV=7, as shown in FIG. 19, the 3rd BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the 3rd BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the 4th BB winning data is set for index value IV=8. When a win occurs with index value IV=8, as shown in FIG. 19, the 4th BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the 4th BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the 1st RB winning data is set for index value IV=9. When an index value IV=9 is reached, the first RB win can occur regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, as shown in FIG. 19. However, depending on the operation timing of the stop buttons 42 to 44, the first RB win may not occur.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first BB winning data is set for index value IV=19. When a win occurs with index value IV=19, as shown in FIG. 19, the first BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the first BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second BB winning data is set for index value IV=20. When a win occurs with index value IV=20, as shown in FIG. 19, the second BB winning can be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second BB winning may not be achieved. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second RB winning data is set for index value IV=21. When a win occurs with index value IV = 21, as shown in Figure 19, the second RB win can occur regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, depending on the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, the second RB win may not occur.

Here, winning data other than the bonus winning data including the first to fourth BB winning data and the first to second RB winning data is erased in the game in which the winning was made, regardless of whether or not a win was made, and is not carried over to games following the winning game. In contrast, the bonus winning data is stored and held until the corresponding bonus win is made, even in games following the winning game, except when the main RAM 74 is cleared. In this case, in a game in which the bonus winning data is carried over, the index value IV corresponding to all of the bonus winning data is excluded from the lottery. This makes it possible to prevent new bonus winning data from being stored even when bonus winning data has already been stored and to prevent multiple bonus winning data from being accumulated and stored.

As shown in FIG. 18, only the first chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=10. When a win occurs with index value IV=10, as shown in FIG. 19, the first chance replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. Also, as shown in FIG. 18, only the second chance replay winning data is set for index value IV=22. When a win occurs with index value IV=22, as shown in FIG. 19, the second chance replay winning is surely achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

Regular replay winning data and 1st RT replay winning data are set for index values IV = 11 to 16, as shown in Figure 18. In this case, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11, as shown in Figure 19, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop (the reel on which the second stop command was issued) is the center reel 32M, and the third stop (the reel on which the last stop command was issued) is the right reel 32R, then the 1st RT replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise, a regular replay winning is definitely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=12, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=15, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the first RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if a win occurs with index value IV=16, and the first stop is on the right reel 32R, the second stop is on the center reel 32M, and the third stop is on the left reel 32L, then the first RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44; otherwise, a regular replay win is guaranteed regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44.

When the normal mode lottery table of FIG. 18 is selected, the probability of winning when the index value IV=1, the probability of winning when the index value IV=2, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=3 are each approximately 1/6.6. The probability of winning when the index value IV=4 is approximately 1/13.1. The probability of winning when the index value IV=5 is approximately 1/164. The probability of winning when the index value IV=6 is approximately 1/423. The probability of winning when the index value IV=7 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=8 are each approximately 1/437. The probability of winning when the index value IV=9 is approximately 1/328. The probability of winning when the index value IV=10 is approximately 1/655. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=11, the probability of winning when the index value IV=12, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, the probability of winning when the index value IV=13, the probability of winning when the index value IV=14, the probability of winning when the index value IV=15, and the probability of winning when the index value IV=16 are each about 1/41. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=17 is about 1/16.4. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=18 is about 1/146. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=19 and the probability of winning when the index value IV=20 are each about 1/437. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=21 is about 1/328. Also, the probability of winning when the index value IV=22 is about 1/655.

As already explained, in the normal mode lottery table, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the first RT replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/41. If any of index values IV = 11 to 16 is won, and the stop order of the first, second, and third stops of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds to the winning combination, a first RT replay win is established, and the lottery mode transitions from normal mode to first RT mode. When transitioning to first RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 17) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the first RT mode that is selected when the game is set to "Setting 3" and the game is in the first RT mode. Figures 20 and 21 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the first RT mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18). In addition, the winning data set for each of the index values IV = 23 to 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those for the index values IV = 17 to 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 are set with roles that can award game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 are the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 17-18 in the normal mode lottery table, so the types of roles that can award game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in both normal mode and first RT mode.

In addition, bonus winning data is set for index values IV=7-9, 25-27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, similar to index values IV=7-9, 19-21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same. In addition, chance replay winning data is set for index values IV=10, 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, similar to index values IV=10, 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and the winning probability is the same as that of the lottery table for the normal mode. In other words, the probability of winning each chance replay role in the normal mode and the first RT mode is the same.

The winning data set for index values IV = 11 to 22 is different from that in normal mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, as shown in FIG. 20, second RT replay winning data is set as winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16 in addition to normal replay winning data. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

When the index value IV = 11 is a winning combination, as shown in Figure 21, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, when the index value IV = 12 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the second RT replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is surely achieved regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the second RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when the winning is made with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the second RT replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the normal replay winning is surely made regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=15, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. In addition, if the winning combination is an index value IV=16, and the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, then the second RT replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44, and in other cases, the normal replay win is guaranteed regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

In the first RT mode, if a win occurs with index value IV = 11 to 16 and the first, second and third stops of reels 32L, 32M and 32R are in the stopping order corresponding to the winning combination, a second RT replay win is established and the lottery mode transitions from the first RT mode to the second RT mode. When transitioning to the second RT mode, the lottery table referenced in the combination lottery process (Figure 17) becomes the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the lottery table for the first RT mode, in addition to the regular replay winning data, the first fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 17 to 22. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 17 to 22 is approximately 1/10.9.

21, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and otherwise the first fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=19, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=20, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a first fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=21 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. In addition, when the index value IV=22 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44, and in other cases, the first fall replay winning combination will occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42-44. When the first fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode. When the lottery mode transitions to the normal mode, the lottery table referenced in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) becomes the lottery table for the normal mode.

In the lottery table for the first RT mode, roles that make it possible to achieve a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 22, 28. And because the winning probabilities of these roles are set to the probabilities already explained, the winning probability of roles that make it possible to achieve a replay win in the first RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is approximately 1/4.1. In contrast, the replay probability in normal mode is approximately 1/6.7. In other words, the first RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than normal mode.

Next, we will explain the lottery table for the second RT mode that is selected when the game is set to "Setting 3" and the game is in the second RT mode. Figures 22 and 23 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the lottery table for the second RT mode.

As shown in FIG. 22, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=1 to 10 and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those in the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18) and the lottery table for the first RT mode (FIG. 20). In addition, the winning data set for each of the index values IV=18 to 23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode and the winning probability of each index value IV are the same as those for the index values IV=17 to 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV=23 to 28 in the lottery table for the second RT mode.

In this case, the index values IV = 1-6, 18-19 are set with roles that allow for the award of game media, and the winning data and winning probabilities set for each of the index values IV = 1-6, 18-19 are the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 17-22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, and are also the same as those for the index values IV = 1-6, 23-24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode. As a result, the types of roles that allow for the award of game media and the winning probabilities of those roles are the same in each of the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

In addition, the index values IV = 7 to 9, 20 to 22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are set with bonus winning data in the same way as the index values IV = 7 to 9, 19 to 21 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 7 to 9, 25 to 27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning each bonus role in the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode is the same. In addition, the index values IV = 10, 23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are set with chance replay winning data in the same way as the index values IV = 10, 22 in the lottery table for the normal mode and the index values IV = 10, 28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the winning probability is the same as that in the lottery table for the normal mode and the lottery table for the first RT mode. In other words, the probability of winning each chance replay role is the same in normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode.

The winning data set for index values IV = 11 to 17 differs from that in normal mode and first RT mode. In detail, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, as shown in FIG. 22, in addition to the normal replay winning data, the second fall replay winning data is set as the winning data for index values IV = 11 to 16. The probability of winning any of these index values IV = 11 to 16 is approximately 1/6.8.

23, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Also, if the index value IV = 12 is won, if the first stop is the left reel 32L, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay prize will definitely occur regardless of the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=13, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the right reel 32R, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. Furthermore, when a winning combination occurs with index value IV=14, if the first stop is the center reel 32M, the second stop is the right reel 32R, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, a normal replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, a second fall replay winning combination will occur reliably regardless of the operation timing of each of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=15 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the left reel 32L, and the third stop is the center reel 32M, the normal replay winning combination will occur without any difference in the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination will occur without any difference in the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. In addition, when the index value IV=16 is a winning combination, if the first stop is the right reel 32R, the second stop is the center reel 32M, and the third stop is the left reel 32L, the normal replay winning combination will occur without any difference in the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44, and in other cases, the second fall replay winning combination will occur without any difference in the timing of operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. When the second fall replay winning combination is achieved, the lottery mode transitions to the first RT mode. When the first RT mode is entered, the lottery table referenced in the role selection process (Figure 17) becomes the lottery table for the first RT mode.

Only normal replay winning data is set for index value IV=17 in the lottery table for the second RT mode. The probability of winning with index value IV=17 is set higher than the probability of winning other roles, specifically, the winning rate is about 1 in 5.5. If a win occurs with index value IV=17, a normal replay win will be achieved regardless of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the operation timing of each stop button 42 to 44.

In the lottery table for the second RT mode, the combinations that allow a replay win are set for index values IV = 10 to 17, 23. The winning probability of these combinations is set as already explained, so that the winning probability of the combinations that allow a replay win in the second RT mode (hereinafter also referred to as the replay probability) is about 1/3.0. In contrast, the replay probability in the normal mode is about 1/6.7, and the replay probability in the first RT mode is about 1/4.1. Therefore, the second RT mode is a lottery mode with a higher replay probability than the normal mode and the first RT mode. However, this is not limited to this, and the replay probability may be the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or may be substantially the same in the first RT mode and the second RT mode, although the replay probability is slightly different.

In addition to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, the main ROM 73 also stores a bonus lottery table that is referenced in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17) when in the BB or RB state, and also stores an internal lottery table that is referenced in the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17) when a bonus combination is won but the corresponding bonus win is not achieved.

In the bonus lottery table, the odds of winning a combination that allows the first bell win to occur are approximately 1/1.5, and if the combination is won, the first bell win will occur regardless of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, in the bonus lottery table, the odds of winning a combination that allows the first watermelon win to occur are approximately 1/6.6, and the odds of winning a combination that allows the cherry win to occur are approximately 1/7.8. The first watermelon win and cherry win will not occur depending on the timing of the stop operation of the stop buttons 42-44 relative to the rotation positions of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. As described above, the bonus lottery table is set, so that in the BB state or RB state, the first bell win is basically established in each game and "11" game media is awarded, but the first watermelon win or cherry win may also be established, and when the first watermelon win is established, "5" game media is awarded, and when the cherry win is established, "2" game media is awarded. On the other hand, the BB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the BB state is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (e.g., "350"), and the RB state ends when the total number of game media awarded since the start of the RB state is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (e.g., "150"). Therefore, the number of games required until the BB state and the RB state end will vary depending on the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the role and whether or not a miss occurs. The bonus lottery table is common to all settings between "1" and "6" that change the advantage of the slot machine 10.

The internal lottery table is set so that winning data corresponding to index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18) is set with the winning probability of those index values IV, and in addition, index values to which only normal replay winning data is set are set so that the total winning probability of index values IV = 11 to 16 in the normal mode lottery table. Therefore, when the internal winning state of the bonus role is reached, the role that allows the award of game media and the winning probability of that role are the same as in the normal mode, and the replay probability is the same as in the normal mode, but the bonus role will not be won, and furthermore, the role that triggers a transition to the normal mode, the first RT mode, or the second RT mode will not be won.

Here, in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, there are index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" and index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6". Figures 24(a) to 24(c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values of "1" to "6", where Figure 24(a) shows the case of the normal mode lottery table, Figure 24(b) shows the case of the first RT mode lottery table, and Figure 24(c) shows the case of the second RT mode lottery table.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index values IV=17-22 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6", and the index values IV=1-16 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6". As shown in FIG. 24(b), in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index values IV=23-28 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6", and the index values IV=1-22 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6". As shown in FIG. 24(c), in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=18-23 are index values IV with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6", and the index values IV=1-17 are index values IV with the same winning probabilities between the set values of "1"-"6".

In other words, in any lottery table, index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" are collected in the index value IV of the front range, which is consecutive from index value IV = 1, and index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" are collected in the index value IV of the rear range, which is consecutive from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. In this way, by collecting index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" in the front range and collecting index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" in the rear range, it becomes easier to set and modify index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" and index values IV with different winning probabilities at the design stage of the slot machine 10.

Although the index value IV included in the rear range, which has different winning probabilities between the set values "1" to "6" in each lottery table, is different, the winning data and winning probabilities set for each index value IV included in the rear range are common between each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 24(a), the rear range includes index values IV=17 to 22, in the first RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 24(b), the rear range includes index values IV=23 to 28, and in the second RT mode lottery table, as shown in FIG. 24(c), the rear range includes index values IV=18 to 23. In this case, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=17 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=18 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=18 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=24 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical, and the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=19 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=25 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=20 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are mutually identical. The set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=20 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=26 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=21 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same, the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=21 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=27 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=22 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same, and the set winning data and winning probability of the index value IV=22 in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV=28 in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV=23 in the lottery table for the second RT mode are the same. This makes it possible to make the types of roles with different winning probabilities between the setting values of "1" to "6" common in each lottery table, and to make the winning probability of each setting value of the role the same in each lottery table.

Incidentally, the winning probability of each of the index values in which only the second bell winning data is set, the index value in which only the second watermelon winning data is set, the index value in which only the first BB winning data is set, the index value in which only the second BB winning data is set, the index value in which only the second RB winning data is set, and the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set are all set so that the larger set value tends to have a higher winning probability than the smaller set value. However, this is not limited to this, and as long as the larger set value is more advantageous for the player than the smaller set value, it may be configured so that for some index values, the larger set value tends to have a lower winning probability than the smaller set value.

As already explained, the index values IV = 1 to 10 included in the front range in each lottery table have the same winning data set, and the winning probabilities are also the same. This makes it possible to make the winning probabilities of roles with the same winning probability between the setting values "1" to "6" in each lottery table and roles with the same type of winning data set the same.

In the configuration in which the front range and the rear range are set as described above, the front range includes roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning, while the rear range includes roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning. In other words, roles that allow the award of game media are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, roles that allow replay winning are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. Similarly, roles that allow bonus winning are mixed in the front range and the rear range, and the index values IV of these roles have lost continuity between the front range and the rear range. This could result in a complicated processing configuration for determining the winning role in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 17) is executed.

In addition, the index values set in the latter half of the front range in the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table are set with winning data for generating a transition opportunity between lottery modes and winning data for changing the replay probability, so the first index value IV of the rear range is different in each lottery table. For example, an index value IV in which only the second bell winning data is set is "17" in the normal mode lottery table, "23" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "18" in the second RT mode lottery table. In addition, for example, an index value IV in which only the first BB winning data is set is "19" in the normal mode lottery table, "25" in the first RT mode lottery table, and "20" in the second RT mode lottery table. Also, for example, the index value IV in which only the second chance replay winning data is set will be "22" in the lottery table for the normal mode, "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and "23" in the lottery table for the second RT mode. In this case, if different index values IV are to be used in various processes after the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) is executed, even though the role is the same, it will be necessary to grasp not only the index value IV but also the current lottery mode every time the process for identifying the role is performed, which may complicate the processing configuration.

To eliminate the above-mentioned inconveniences, in this slot machine 10, an offset table 111 is pre-stored in the main ROM 73 during the design stage of the slot machine 10. Figure 25 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the offset table 111.

As shown in FIG. 25, the offset table 111 is set with winning number information. Numerical information of "1" to "41" is set as winning number information in consecutive numbers. In the offset table 111, each index value IV of the lottery table for the normal mode, each index value IV of the lottery table for the first RT mode, and each index value IV of the lottery table for the second RT mode are associated with winning number information of any one of "1" to "41". This association is made so that a group of small roles that allow the award of game media, a group of bonus roles that allow the establishment of a bonus win, and a group of replay roles that allow the establishment of a replay win are each formed by consecutive winning number information. In addition, this association is made so that roles in which the same type of winning data is set can be treated as the same winning number information even between different lottery modes.

Specifically, the offset table 111 is set so that a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "1" to "8" is a group of small winning combinations, a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "9" to "14" is a group of bonus winning combinations, and a group of information on consecutive winning numbers "15" and onwards is a group of replay winning combinations. In addition, in the replay winning combination group, replay winning combinations for which normal replay winning data is not set are collected in the winning number information for "15" and "16," and replay winning combinations for which normal replay winning data is set are collected in the winning number information for "17" and onwards.

In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the first compensation winning data are set to the index value IV of "1", but the winning number information of "1" is set for the index value IV = 1 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the second compensation winning data are set to the index value IV = 2, but the winning number information of "2" is set for the index value IV = 2 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, the first bell winning data and the third compensation winning data are set to the index value IV = 3, but the winning number information of "3" is set for the index value IV = 3 in any lottery table. In each lottery table, only the first bell winning data is set to the index value IV of "4", but the winning number information of "4" is set for the index value IV = 4 in any lottery table.

Only the second bell winning data is set for the index value IV of "17" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "5". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

In each lottery table, only the first watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV of "5", but the winning number information of "6" is set for that index value IV = 5 in all lottery tables.

Only the second watermelon winning data is set for the index value IV of "18" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "24" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "7". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

In each lottery table, only cherry winning data is set for the index value IV of "6", but the winning number information of "8" is set for the index value IV = 6 in all lottery tables. In each lottery table, only 3rd BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "7", but the winning number information of "9" is set for the index value IV = 7 in all lottery tables. In each lottery table, only 4th BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "8", but the winning number information of "10" is set for the index value IV = 8 in all lottery tables.

Only the first BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "19" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "25" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "11". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the roles (Figure 17).

Only the second BB winning data is set for the index value IV of "20" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "26" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with winning number information of "12". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

In each lottery table, only the first RB winning data is set for the index value IV of "9", but the winning number information of "13" is set for the index value IV = 9 in all lottery tables.

Only the second RB winning data is set for the index value IV of "21" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "27" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "14". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

In each lottery table, only the first chance replay winning data is set for the index value IV of "10", but the winning number information of "15" is set for the index value IV = 10 in all lottery tables.

Only the second chance replay winning data is set in the index value IV of "22" in the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV of "28" in the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the index value IV of "23" in the lottery table for the second RT mode, but these index values IV are set with the winning number information of "16". This makes it possible to treat roles that have the same winning data set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

For winning numbers "17" and after, the index value IV is not commonized in each lottery table, and individual winning number information is set for each index value IV of each lottery table. This is because the type of winning data set in the index value IV associated with winning numbers "17" and after is not common between each lottery table. Specifically, in the lottery table for normal mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which normal replay winning data and first RT replay winning data are set have winning number information of "17" to "22", respectively. In addition, in the lottery table for first RT mode, the index values IV = 11 to 16 in which normal replay winning data and second RT replay winning data are set have winning number information of "23" to "28", respectively, and the index values IV = 17 to 22 in which normal replay winning data and first fall replay winning data are set have winning number information of "29" to "34", respectively. In addition, in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index values IV=11-16 in which the normal replay winning data and the second fall replay winning data are set have the winning number information of "35"-"40" set, respectively, and the index value IV=17 in which only the normal replay winning data is set has the winning number information of "41" set.

By providing the offset table 111 as described above, it is possible to handle the state in which roles that allow the award of game media, roles that allow replay winning, and roles that allow bonus winning are mixed in the front and back ranges in a state where they are aggregated for roles of the same group in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 17). In addition, roles that have different index values IV set between each lottery table despite having the same winning data set can be treated as the same information in various processes after the role selection process (Figure 17). Furthermore, when the result of the role selection process (Figure 17) is sent to the production side MPU 92, the winning number information can be set in the command for sending the result, making it possible to reduce the amount of information in the command.

Although detailed explanations are omitted, the index values IV of the bonus lottery table and the internal lottery table are also associated in the offset table 111 with winning number information that is common to the index values IV of the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table. In the bonus lottery table, an index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set, an index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set, and an index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set are set, but the index value IV in which only the first bell winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "4", the index value IV in which only the first watermelon winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "6", and the index value IV in which only the cherry winning data is set is associated with winning number information of "8". Also, as already explained, in the case of the internal lottery table, the winning data corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the lottery table for normal mode is set with the winning probability of those index values IV, and in addition, the index value in which only the normal replay winning data is set is set to have the total winning probability of the index values IV = 11 to 16 in the lottery table for normal mode. Therefore, the index values IV corresponding to the index values IV = 1 to 6, 10, 17, 18, 22 in the lottery table for normal mode are associated with the winning number information corresponding to those index values IV in the lottery table for normal mode, and the index value IV in which only the normal replay winning data is set is associated with the winning number information of "41" in the same manner as the index value IV = 17 in which only the normal replay winning data is set in the lottery table for the second RT mode.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 17), after a lottery table is selected (step S602), the first round flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S603). In the lottery process for winning combinations, a lottery is performed from the index value IV in the front range among the index value IV in the front range, which has the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6", and the index value IV in the back range, which has different winning probability among the set values "1" to "6". In this case, the first round flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether the current lottery target is in the front range or not.

Then, a first reference value is set in the target index counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S604). The target index counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify the type of role that is the target of the lottery. The first reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the front range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the case of the lottery table for the normal mode, the index value IV = 1 to 16 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "16", in the lottery table for the first RT mode, the index value IV = 1 to 22 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "22", and in the lottery table for the second RT mode, the index value IV = 1 to 17 falls in the front range, so the first reference value is "17".

Although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of a bonus lottery table, only three index values IV are set, and the winning probability is the same for all of these index values IV between the set values "1" and "6", so the first reference value is "3". Also, although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV that fall into the front range is set as the first reference value.

Then, a judgment value DV to be used when judging whether the hand is a hit or a miss is set (step S605). In this judgment value setting process, a new judgment value DV is set by adding the point value PV set for the index value IV currently being selected to the current judgment value DV. In the initial judgment value setting process, the random number acquired in step S601 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV set for the index value IV corresponding to the first reference value is added to this random number to set the new judgment value DV. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, the first reference value is "16", so the point value PV set for the index value IV = 16 in the normal mode lottery table is added to the random number acquired in step S601 to set the judgment value DV.

After that, a win/loss determination is made for the role currently being selected (step S606). In determining whether the role is a win/loss determination, it is determined whether the determination value DV exceeds "65535". If it does not exceed "65535", the value of the target index counter is subtracted by 1 (step S607), and it is determined whether the value of the target index counter after the subtraction of 1 is "0" (step S608). If the value of the target index counter is not "0" (step S608: NO), the process returns to step S605, and a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the updated value of the target index counter.

If the value of the target index counter is "0" (step S608: YES), it is determined whether or not the current state is a bonus state (step S609). Since the index value IV of the rear range is not set in the bonus lottery table, if the current state is a bonus state (step S609: YES), it is determined that no winning combination was won in this game, and the process proceeds directly to step S614.

If the current state is not a bonus state (step S609: NO), it is determined whether or not the first lap flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S610). In other words, it is determined whether or not the index value IV group for which the winning/losing judgment of the role has been completed is in the front range. If the first lap flag is set to "1" (step S610: YES), the first lap flag is cleared to "0" (step S611), and then a second reference value is set in the target index counter (step S612). The second reference value is set as the number of index values IV included in the rear range in each lottery table. Specifically, in the normal mode lottery table, index values IV = 17 to 22 correspond to the rear range, in the first RT mode lottery table, index values IV = 23 to 28 correspond to the rear range, and in the second RT mode lottery table, index values IV = 18 to 23 correspond to the rear range, so that the second reference value is "6" in any lottery table. In addition, in the case of a bonus lottery table, since there is no index value IV included in the rear range, the second reference value is not set. Also, although a detailed explanation is omitted, in the case of an internal lottery table, the number of index values IV that fall into the rear range is set as the second reference value. After setting the second reference value, the process returns to step S605, and a win/loss determination is made for the role corresponding to the second reference value. In addition, if a negative determination is made in step S610, it is assumed that no role was won in this game, and the process proceeds directly to step S614.

On the other hand, if the number exceeds "65535" in step S606, information on the winning number corresponding to the currently selected role is acquired, and a winning data acquisition process is executed to set the winning data corresponding to the currently selected role in the master RAM 74 (step S613). Figure 26 is a flowchart showing the winning data acquisition process.

First, it is determined whether the first lap flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the currently winning combination is an index value IV included in the front range (step S701). If the first lap flag is set to "1" (step S701: YES), the value of the target index counter in the main RAM 74 corresponds to the currently winning index value IV, so the process from step S703 onwards is executed as is.

On the other hand, if the value of the first lap flag is "0", it means that the winning combination this time is an index value IV included in the rear range. When making a win/loss judgment of the index value IV included in the rear range, a second reference value is set in the target index counter, but since the second reference value is the number of index values IV included in the rear range, the index value IV of the winning combination this time does not match the value of the target index counter. The difference between the index value IV of the winning combination this time and the value of the target index counter matches the first reference value of the lottery table that was the subject of the lottery this time. Therefore, if a negative judgment is made in step S701, the first reference value of the lottery table that was the subject of the lottery this time is added to the value of the target index counter (step S702). In this case, the first reference value added is "16" if the lottery table is for the normal mode, "22" if the lottery table is for the first RT mode, and "17" if the lottery table is for the second RT mode.

If a positive judgment is made in step S701, or if the processing of step S702 is executed, the offset table 111 is read from the master ROM 73 (step S703). Then, information on the type of lottery table currently being selected and the winning number corresponding to the current value of the target index counter is read from the offset table 111, and the winning number information is stored in the master RAM 74 as winning number information for the current game (step S704). Naturally, if no winning combination is achieved, the winning number information is not stored in the master RAM 74.

Then, the information on the winning data included in the currently winning combination is expanded in the master RAM 74 (step S705). The master RAM 74 has the same number of winning corresponding areas as the number of winning data existing in the slot machine 10, and in step S705, the winning corresponding areas corresponding to the winning data included in the currently winning combination are set to "1", and the winning corresponding areas corresponding to the winning data other than the various bonus winning data such as the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, the third BB winning data, the fourth BB winning data, the first RB winning data, and the second RT winning data, which are not included in the currently winning combination, are cleared to "0". The value of the winning corresponding area corresponding to the various bonus winning data is set to "1" when a combination including the corresponding winning data is won, and the state in which "1" is set is maintained until the corresponding winning is established unless the clearing process of the master RAM 74 is executed. The winning corresponding area corresponding to the bonus winning data set to "1" is cleared to "0" when the corresponding winning is established or the clearing process of the master RAM 74 is executed. In addition, the winning corresponding areas corresponding to winning data other than various bonus winning data are cleared to "0" even if no winning combination is achieved in the combination selection process (Figure 17).

After that, a lottery process for reel effects is executed to determine whether or not to execute reel effects at the start of the current game. Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "8" to "16" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17) (step S706). The winning number "8" corresponds to the cherry winning data, the winning number "9" corresponds to the third BB winning data, the winning number "10" corresponds to the fourth BB winning data, the winning number "11" corresponds to the first BB winning data, the winning number "12" corresponds to the second BB winning data, the winning number "13" corresponds to the first RB winning data, the winning number "14" corresponds to the second RB winning data, the winning number "15" corresponds to the first chance replay winning data, and the winning number "16" corresponds to the second chance replay winning data. Of these, the 1st to 4th BB winning data and the 1st to 2nd RB winning data correspond to winning data that triggers a transition to the bonus state, and the cherry winning data, the 1st chance replay winning data, and the 2nd chance replay winning data correspond to winning data that can trigger a transition to the ART state or an opportunity to add to the number of games in the ART state.

If the determination is affirmative in step S706, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S707). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. 16. In the lottery process for the reel effect, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers ranging from "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive determination is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired. Then, the random number acquired in step S707 is compared with a reel effect table stored in advance in the main ROM 73 to determine whether or not the reel effect has been executed successfully (step S708). In the reel effect table, the probability of the reel effect being executed successfully is set to 20% for any winning number between "8" and "16". However, this is not limited to this, and the winning probability may be higher or lower than this, and furthermore, the probability of the reel effect being executed successfully may differ depending on the winning number between "8" and "16".

If the reel effect is selected (step S708: YES), the reel effect selection flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S709). The reel effect selection flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that the reel effect should be executed at the start of the current game. In the reel effect, after all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, a selection is made in which the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped with a combination of symbols for the performance (for example, a combination of symbols in which "BAR" symbols are arranged in a straight line) displayed on the main line ML without requiring a stopping operation. This makes it possible to notify that one of the winning data described above has been selected in the current role selection process (FIG. 17) by using the movement of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Returning to the explanation of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17), if a positive judgment is made in step S609, if a negative judgment is made in step S610, or if the process of step S613 is executed, a first stop information setting process is executed to set stop information for reel stop control (step S614), and then a process for determining the content of the performance is executed (step S615). In the process for determining the content of the performance, a process is executed to determine the general content of the performance to be executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 in the current game. As the general content, in the normal game state, high expectation content, medium expectation content, and low expectation content are set so that the expectation of the occurrence of the bonus state or the ART state gradually decreases. In the process for determining the content of the performance, the general content of the performance is determined by lottery using a lottery table corresponding to the combination of the current game state, the current game section, and the result of the lottery process for the winning combination.

Then, a process for transmitting a game start command is executed (step S616). In this transmission process, information corresponding to the outline of the content determined in the process for determining the content of the performance, information on the winning number corresponding to the winning role if a winning role was determined in the current role selection process (FIG. 17), and information corresponding to the current selection mode and the current game status are set in the game start command, and the game start command is transmitted to the production side MPU 92. The game start command is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize that a new game has started, and is a command for making the production side MPU 92 recognize the outline of the performance determined by the main side MPU 72 and the winning number information.

When the production side MPU 92 receives a game start command, it grasps the general content of the production for the current game from the game start command. The production side MPU 92 then determines the details of the production in a manner that corresponds to the general content of the production that it has grasped, taking into account the winning number information set in the game start command, information corresponding to the current lottery mode, and information corresponding to the current game status. It then reads a data table corresponding to the determined content of the production from the production side ROM 93 to the production side RAM 94, and executes light emission control of the upper lamp 61, sound output control of the speaker 62, and display control of the image display device 63 according to the read data table.

Then, in step S617, the first control process for the game section is executed, in step S618, the process for the bonus at the start of the game is executed, in step S619, the process for the addition is executed, and in step S620, the notification control process is executed. The contents of these processes will be explained in detail later.

Next, the reel control process executed in step S409 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 27.

In the reel control process, it is first determined whether the constant speed flag 74c provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S801). The constant speed flag 74c is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the situation after the acceleration period of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended and constant speed rotation has begun after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started to rotate. Details will be described later, but the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" when the acceleration period of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended and constant speed rotation has begun after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started to rotate.

When the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" (step S801: NO), that is, when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is started, or when the acceleration period of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is not completed after each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts rotating, an acceleration process is executed (step S802). In the acceleration process, if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, a process is executed to start the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, provided that a predetermined wait period (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R started in the previous game. In addition, in the acceleration process, if each reel 32L, 32M, 32R has started rotating, a process is executed to accelerate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R toward a constant speed rotation.

If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" (step S801: YES), it is determined whether any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated (step S803). If none of the stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, the process of step S803 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated, it is determined whether or not the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are spinning have been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been generated (step S804). If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S803, and the process of step S803 is repeated until any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S805). The stop command command is a command for causing the production side MPU 92 to recognize which of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been operated to generate a stop command. If a stop command is set, the stop control process shown in steps S806 to S812 is performed to stop the reels that are spinning.

In the stop control process, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (specifically, the lower row) at the time the stop buttons 42-44 are operated is confirmed (step S806). Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed based on the number of excitation pulses output from the time the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 (see FIG. 28) is input. After that, the number of slips of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that should be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 (step S807).

In this slot machine 10, five stop patterns are prepared for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated: a stop pattern in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as is, a stop pattern in which the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop pattern in which the reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S807, one of the values "0" to "4" is calculated as the number of slips based on the stop information stored in the main RAM 74.

Then, the calculated slip count is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol, and the symbol number of the stopped symbol to be actually stopped at the base position is determined (step S808). Then, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped this time is equal to the symbol number of the stopped symbol (step S809), and if so, a reel stop process is performed to stop the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R (step S810). In the reel stop process, braking of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped in the motor control process (FIG. 35) described later is started, and the process waits until the braking is completed. Then, it is determined whether all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped (step S811). If all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed (step S812), and the process returns to step S803.

The stop information here refers to information for making the stop mode of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R correspond to the result of the lottery process for winning combinations (FIG. 17). By using this stop information, it is possible to calculate the number of slips (specifically, "0" to "4") for the reaching symbol that reaches the base position when each stop button 42 to 44 is stopped. As the stop information, slip number data showing the correspondence between each symbol and the number of slips is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 in correspondence with each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. However, this is not limited to this, and the slip number data corresponding to each lottery result and the stopping order of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R may be derived during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, etc.

The processes for setting the above stop information include a first stop information setting process executed in step S614 of the role selection process (FIG. 17) and a second stop information setting process executed in step S812 of the reel control process (FIG. 27). In the first stop information setting process, the stop information is set according to the result of the role selection process. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information stored in the main RAM 74 in the first stop information setting process or the previous second stop information setting process is changed after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning data, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the stop results of the stopped reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

If it is determined in step S811 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, the spinning flag 74d in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S813), and the constant speed flag 74c in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S814). As already explained, the constant speed flag 74c is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the situation after the acceleration period of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has ended and constant speed rotation has started after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started to spin. The spinning flag 74d is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the situation after each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R has started to spin, that the regular spin stop process has not been completed for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Then, the winning determination process is executed (step S815). In the winning determination process, the type of the symbols stopped on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is identified. Then, based on the contents of the winning data expanded in the main RAM 74, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the main line ML on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning role in the role selection process. If the combination of symbols corresponds to the winning role, the winning role is considered to have been won and the winning corresponding process is executed. In the winning corresponding process, if the winning is a small role winning, information on the number of game media to be awarded is set in the main RAM 74 so that game media can be awarded in the media awarding process. On the other hand, if the winning is a replay winning, a flag setting process is executed so that the replay setting process is executed in the next start waiting process (step S402).

After executing the winning determination process, a winning result command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S816). The winning result command contains data indicating whether or not a win has been achieved this time, and if a win has been achieved, contains data indicating the type of win.

<Details of drive control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R>
Here, the details of the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described. Figure 28 is an assembled perspective view of the left reel 32L. The center reel 32M and the right reel 32R have the same configuration as the left reel 32L.

The left reel 32L comprises a cylindrical skeleton member 161 forming a cylindrical basket, and a band-shaped belt (not shown in FIG. 28) wound endlessly around its outer periphery. The belt is attached to the cylindrical skeleton member 161 via a pair of seals formed along both long sides of the belt so as to maintain the wound state. A large number of patterns serving as identification information are printed at equal intervals on the outer periphery of the band-shaped belt. The center of the cylindrical skeleton member 161 is attached to the drive shaft of a stepping motor 162. Therefore, when the drive shaft of the stepping motor 162 rotates, the cylindrical skeleton member 161 rotates around the drive shaft, causing the left reel 32L to rotate.

The stepping motor 162 is screwed to the side of the motor plate 163 that is arranged in an upright position in the reel unit 31. A reel index sensor 164 is installed on the motor plate 163, in which a light-emitting element 164a and a light-receiving element 164b are held at a predetermined interval. On the other hand, a sensor cut band 165 extending in the radial direction is screwed to the cylindrical frame member 161. The tip 165a of the sensor cut band 165 is bent at a substantially right angle and aligned so that it can pass between the elements 164a and 164b of the reel index sensor 164. Then, the reel index sensor 164 detects the passage of the tip 165a of the sensor cut band 165 every time the left reel 32L rotates, and a detection signal is output to the main MPU 72 each time. Therefore, the main MPU 72 can check and correct the angular position of the left reel 32L every rotation based on this detection signal.

The stepping motor 162 is set to rotate once by advancing 504 steps by giving an excitation signal of, for example, 504 pulses, and this number of steps controls the rotational position of the stepping motor 162, i.e., the rotational position of the left reel 32L. On each belt of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, multiple patterns, specifically 21 patterns, are drawn in the long side direction (circumference direction). Therefore, 24 pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 patterns) are required to switch from one pattern to the next pattern at a specified position. Then, depending on the number of pulses from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor 164 is output, it is possible to recognize which pattern is visible from the display window 21L, or to control the state in which any pattern is visible from the display window 21L.

Figure 29(a) is a connection diagram showing the drive system of stepping motor 162, and Figure 29(b) is a diagram showing the drive characteristics of stepping motor 162.

A hybrid (HB) type two-phase stepping motor is used as the stepping motor 162. Note that the stepping motor 162 is not limited to the hybrid type, and various types of stepping motors can be used.

As shown in FIG. 29(a), the hybrid stepping motor 162 is equipped with a rotor 171 arranged in the center and a stator 172 having first to fourth poles 173 to 176 arranged around the rotor 171. The rotor 171 is composed of a front rotor 171a magnetized to an N pole and a rear rotor 171b magnetized to an S pole, and is attached to the rotating shaft in a state where the teeth around the rear rotor 171b are relatively shifted by 1/2 pitch so that they are positioned between the teeth around the front rotor 171a. A cylindrical magnet (not shown) is attached between the front rotor 171a and the rear rotor 171b.

As shown in FIG. 29(b), the first pole 173 and the third pole 175 are bifilar-wound with the end of the excitation coil L0 and the beginning of the excitation coil L2 connected together, and a predetermined DC power supply +B (e.g., +24 volts) is applied to this. Similarly, the second pole 174 and the fourth pole 176 are bifilar-wound with the excitation coil L1 and the excitation coil L3 connected together, and the DC power supply +B is applied to this.

The phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L0 of the first pole 173 to excite the first pole 173 to the south pole and the third pole 175 to the north pole is called the A phase, and the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L2 of the third pole 175 to excite the first pole 173 to the north pole and the third pole 175 to the south pole is called the inverse A phase. Similarly, the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L1 of the second pole 174 to excite the second pole 174 to the south pole and the fourth pole 176 to the north pole is called the B phase, and the phase in which an excitation signal is applied to the excitation coil L3 of the fourth pole 176 to excite the second pole 174 to the north pole and the fourth pole 176 to the south pole is called the inverse B phase.

The excitation signal for the stepping motor 162 is given as excitation data to the motor driver 177 shown in FIG. 29(b). This excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74, and appropriate excitation data is output by timer interrupt processing. The excitation phase for the stepping motor 162 is determined by this excitation data, and an excitation signal (current) is applied to that excitation phase.

In the case where the stepping motor 162 is of a one-phase excitation drive type, the rotor 171 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise by sequentially applying excitation signals to phase A, phase B, reverse phase A, and reverse phase B. That is, for example, when current is first applied to phase A, the protrusion of the first pole 173, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 171a, and the protrusion of the third pole 175, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 171b face each other due to attraction, and then when current is applied to phase B, the protrusion of the second pole 174, which has become an S pole, and the teeth of the front rotor 171a, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 176, which has become an N pole, and the teeth of the rear rotor 171b face each other due to attraction. When current is applied to the reverse A phase, the protrusion of the first pole 173, which has become an N pole, faces the teeth of the rear rotor 171b, and the protrusion of the third pole 175, which has become an S pole, faces the teeth of the front rotor 171a, due to their respective attractive forces. When current is applied to the reverse B phase, the protrusion of the second pole 174, which has become an N pole, faces the teeth of the rear rotor 171b, and the protrusion of the fourth pole 176, which has become an S pole, faces the teeth of the front rotor 171a, due to their respective attractive forces. By exciting in this order, the rotor 171 rotates in the clockwise direction in FIG. 29(a).

In the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, 1-2 phase excitation drive is adopted, which alternates between 1-phase excitation and 2-phase excitation, during the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate at a constant speed, and during the constant speed period for maintaining the constant speed rotation. In order to perform 1-2 phase excitation drive during the acceleration period and constant speed period, an excitation sequence table exists as a table referenced by the main MPU 72. The excitation sequence table is stored in advance in the main ROM 73 during the manufacturing stage of the slot machine 10. Figure 30 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the excitation sequence table.

As shown in FIG. 30, the excitation order table has excitation order pointers "0" to "7" set, and each excitation order pointer is set to a type of excitation phase. The "0" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes phase A, the "1" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase A and phase B, the "2" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes phase B, the "3" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase B and reverse phase A, the "4" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes reverse phase A, the "5" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase A and phase B, the "6" excitation order pointer is set to one-phase excitation that energizes reverse phase B, and the "7" excitation order pointer is set to two-phase excitation that energizes both phase B and phase A. If the acceleration period or constant speed period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R continues while the excitation order pointer is "7", the excitation order pointer to be controlled returns to "0", and drive control is performed using the excitation order pointer of "0". Note that in the slot machine 10 of this embodiment, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate once with a 504-pulse excitation signal, so the angle change based on a one-pulse excitation signal, i.e., the angle change per step, is approximately 0.714°.

When using a stepping motor 162 with the above configuration, the drive characteristics shown in Figure 31 are required.

These drive characteristics can be broadly divided into an acceleration period Ta, during which the stepping motor 162 starts to rotate after the start lever 41 is operated and reaches a constant constant speed, and a constant speed period. The constant speed period is further divided into a maintenance period Tb during which the rotation speed is maintained until the stop buttons 42-44 are operated, and a stop period Tc during which the motor stops with a certain amount of slippage based on the operation of the stop buttons 42-44.

While there is no regulation regarding the length of the acceleration period Ta, there is a regulation that the total time of the acceleration period Ta and the maintenance period Tb when the stop buttons 42 to 44 are not operated must be 30 seconds or more. As for the stop period Tc, it is also required that the stepping motor 162 be stopped within a maximum of approximately 190 msec after the stop buttons 42 to 44 are operated.

Next, we will explain the configuration for driving and controlling the stepping motor 162.

As already explained, the stepping motor 162 transitions to a constant speed rotation state after an acceleration period, but since this acceleration period results in a forced waiting time for play, it is desirable for the stepping motor 162 to transition from the acceleration state to the constant speed rotation state as quickly as possible. This can be achieved by quickly switching the excitation phase of the stepping motor 162, but this can cause loss of synchronism and unstable rotation.

In particular, in the stepping motor 162, when the teeth of the rotor 171 are attracted to the protrusions of the poles 173 to 176 during initial excitation, an initial rotational oscillation (a small vibration accompanied by a reciprocating motion) occurs in the rotor 171. Although this varies depending on the specifications of the reel unit 31, for example, about 5 to 6 reciprocating oscillations occur, with one reciprocating oscillation occurring every 30 msec. Therefore, it is necessary to set the switching mode of the excitation phase during the acceleration period while taking such initial rotational oscillations into consideration.

A method of accelerating the stepping motor 162 while suppressing the effects of such initial rotational fluctuation can be to maintain the initial excitation state by two-phase excitation to a certain extent while gradually shortening the switching interval between two-phase excitation and one-phase excitation thereafter. For example, a configuration can be considered in which the excitation phase is switched at the timing shown in FIG. 32. In this case, the state in which two-phase excitation is set as the initial excitation is held for 130 interrupts (i.e., 130 timer interrupt processing (FIG. 11)), and then it is switched to one-phase excitation, and after that state is held for eight interrupts, it is switched to two-phase excitation, and then the switching interval of the excitation phase is gradually shortened. With this configuration, 193.7 msec (= 1.49 msec x 130 interrupts) is set as the initial excitation period, and it is possible to eliminate the initial rotational fluctuation during this period.

Next, we will explain the specific processing executed by the main MPU 72 to control the drive of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 33 is a flowchart showing the acceleration process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the acceleration process is executed in step S802 of the reel control process (Figure 27).

In the acceleration process, first, it is determined whether the start setting flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S901). The start setting flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the process for starting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed. If the start setting flag is not set to "1" (step S901: NO), it is determined whether the value of the wait counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" to determine whether a predetermined wait period (e.g., 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R was started in the previous game (step S902). The value set in the wait counter is subtracted by the timer subtraction process in step S208 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11) is executed.

If the wait period has not elapsed (step S902: NO), the acceleration process is terminated. If the wait period has elapsed (step S902: YES), it is determined whether the reel performance winning flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S903). As already explained, the reel performance winning flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to specify that a reel performance should be executed at the start of the current game.

If the reel performance winning flag is not set to "1" (step S903: NO), the acceleration counters corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "25" (steps S904 to S906). Then, the normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S907).

Each acceleration counter is provided in the main RAM 74, and the main MPU 72 determines which acceleration excitation sequence data in the acceleration table should be referenced when the excitation phase switching timing occurs during the acceleration period of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the numerical information of each acceleration counter. The normal acceleration table is a table that defines the excitation phase switching timing for accelerating each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R in a situation where the reel performance is not performed, and the type of excitation phase at each switching timing, and is specifically shown in FIG. 32. For example, when the acceleration counter value is "25", the switching interval and type of excitation phase defined as the first excitation sequence in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. 32 are used, and when the acceleration counter value is "15", the switching interval and type of excitation phase defined as the 11th excitation sequence in the normal acceleration table shown in FIG. 32 are used. By referencing the normal acceleration table and performing drive control for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R that corresponds to the value of each acceleration counter, each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating at the same time, and acceleration is completed at the same time or almost the same time, resulting in a constant speed state.

If the reel performance winning flag is set to "1" (step S903: YES), the acceleration counters corresponding to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are set to "150" (steps S908 to S910). Then, a performance drive table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S911). The performance drive table is a table that defines the excitation phase switching timing for accelerating and stopping each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R so that a reel performance is executed, and the type of excitation phase at each switching timing. By referencing the performance drive table and performing drive control corresponding to the value of each acceleration counter on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts spinning simultaneously, and the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped with a performance symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination in which "BAR" symbols are lined up in a straight line) displayed stationary on the main line ML without the need for a stopping operation.

When the process of step S907 or step S911 is executed, the start setting completed flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S912). In addition, in order to ensure a minimum wait period from the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game until the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the next game, information on the wait period (e.g., 4.1 seconds) is set in the wait counter of the main RAM 74 (step S913). After that, the rotation in progress flag 74d of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S914). When the rotation in progress flag 74d is set to "1", the process for driving and controlling each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed in the stepping motor control process in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11).

Figure 34 is a flowchart showing the stepping motor control process. Note that the stepping motor control process is executed in step S206 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

If the spinning flag 74d of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1001: YES), the control object counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "3" (step S1002). The control object counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to determine which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R the processing of steps S1003 to S1007 will be performed on. If the value of the control object counter is "3", the left reel 32L will be the control object, if the value of the control object counter is "2", the center reel 32M will be the control object, and if the value of the control object counter is "1", the right reel 32R will be the control object.

Then, for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the control target counter, the rotation position is grasped based on the detection result of the reel index sensor 164 and the number of times the excitation data is output (step S1003). In addition, a motor control process is executed (step S1004). In the motor control process, a process of generating excitation data for rotation control of the stepping motor 162 is executed. Then, the generated excitation data is output in a state in which it corresponds to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the control target counter (step S1005). As a result, the excitation data for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the control target counter is supplied to the motor driver 177. As a result, the stepping motor 162 of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the control target counter immediately performs a process of energizing the excitation phase specified by the excitation data, and the excitation process for the rotor 171 is performed. If the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the controlled counter has already been stopped, no new excitation data is set and step S1005 is not executed.

Then, the value of the controlled counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1006), and it is determined whether the value of the controlled counter after decrement is "0" (step S1007). If the value of the controlled counter is not "0" (step S1007: NO), steps S1003 to S1007 are executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that correspond to the new controlled counter value. On the other hand, if the value of the controlled counter is "0" (step S1007: YES), this stepping motor control process is terminated.

Figure 35 is a flowchart showing the motor control process in step S1004.

First, it is determined whether the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled are being braked (step S1101). If the processing of step S810 in the reel control process (FIG. 27) has been executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled and braking of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has not been completed, a positive determination is made in step S1101.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1101, it is judged whether the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled is 1 or greater (step S1102). If a positive judgment is made in step S1102, the value of the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled is decremented by 1 on the condition that the value of the switching interval counter is 1 or greater (step S1103). Then, if the value of the switching interval counter is "0" (step S1104: YES), this means that it is time to switch the excitation phase, and the process proceeds to step S1105.

In step S1105, a process for setting the switching interval counter is executed. In this process, numerical information is set in the switching interval counter by referring to the currently read acceleration table from among the normal acceleration table and the performance drive table. Specifically, for the normal acceleration table, when the acceleration counter value is "25", it means that it is the start of the acceleration period. In this case, the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled is set to "130", which corresponds to 130 interrupts, which is the switching interval set in the first excitation sequence for acceleration in the normal acceleration table. Also, when the acceleration counter value is "24", the second excitation sequence for acceleration in the normal acceleration table is targeted. In this case, the switching interval counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be controlled is set to "8", which corresponds to 8 interrupts, which is the switching interval set in the second excitation sequence for acceleration.

Then, the excitation order pointer is updated (step S1106). Specifically, the numerical information of the excitation order pointer is incremented by 1, and if the numerical information after the increment exceeds the maximum value of the excitation order pointer, which is "7", the numerical information is cleared to "0". Then, the excitation data set in the excitation order table (FIG. 30) corresponding to the numerical information of the current excitation order pointer is read, and the read excitation data is stored in the main RAM 74 as the current excitation data for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled (step S1107).

Then, the acceleration counter value corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled is decremented by 1 (step S1108). As a result, when the next excitation phase switching is performed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled, the switching interval data corresponding to the acceleration counter value after this decrement is set.

If the value of the acceleration counter corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R currently being controlled is "0" (step S1102: NO), it is determined whether the constant speed flag 74c in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1109). If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" (step S1109: YES), this means that the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a constant speed period rotating at a constant speed, so constant speed processing is executed (step S1110). In the constant speed processing, processing is executed to alternate between one-phase excitation and two-phase excitation at one interruption interval.

After the constant speed process is executed in step S1110, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start braking the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being controlled (step S1111). Specifically, when the process of step S810 in the reel control process (FIG. 27) is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are currently being controlled, it is determined that it is the timing to start braking, and the braking setting process is executed (step S1112). In the braking setting process, the stop table is read from the main ROM 73, and control according to the stop table is started. Specifically, the excitation data for performing four-phase excitation is stored in the main RAM 74. By executing the braking setting process, in the next motor control process that is currently being controlled, a positive determination is made in step S1101, and braking processing is executed (step S1113). This allows four-phase excitation to continue for 100 interrupts according to the stop table, and when the four-phase excitation for 100 interrupts has ended, the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are the subject of control is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the acceleration process (FIG. 33), if a positive determination is made in step S901 or if the process of step S914 is executed, it is determined whether the values of the acceleration counters corresponding to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are "0" (step S915). If the values of the acceleration counters corresponding to all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are "0", this means that the acceleration period has ended for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, if the reel performance winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S916: YES), a re-acceleration process during reel performance is executed (step S917). The processing content of the re-acceleration process will be explained later. On the other hand, if the reel performance winning flag of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S916: NO), the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S918), and the start setting completion flag of the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S919).

As explained above, when the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the reel control process (FIG. 27) makes a positive determination in step S801 and executes the processes from step S803 onwards. In other words, when the acceleration period ends and constant speed rotation begins for each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the operation of the stop buttons 42-44 of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is enabled, and stop control of the corresponding reel 32L, 32M, 32R is executed based on the operation of the stop buttons 42-44. Note that when the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the master MPU 72 notifies the player that it is now possible to issue a stop command by lighting the lamps (not shown) of the stop buttons 42-44 corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R for which a stop command has not yet been issued.

Here, in the main process (FIG. 10) that is executed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is started, as already explained, if neither the all clear process (step S104) nor the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed and the state of the main RAM 74 is normal (steps S108, S110, and S111: YES), a clear process for reel control (step S116) is executed and a return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed before returning to the address before the power was cut off.

In the reel control clear process (step S116), the constant speed flag 74c, the spinning flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel performance winning flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S117), if the return address is the reel control process (Figure 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (Figure 27). By executing these processes, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, and a return to the address before the power cut (step S119) is performed, it becomes possible to start normal processing from the start address of the reel control process (Figure 27). Furthermore, because the constant speed flag 74c, the spinning flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel performance winning flag of the main RAM 74 are all cleared to "0," it is possible to start accelerating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the normal acceleration table, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped after reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to spin.

Figure 36 is a time chart showing the flow of drive control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is stopped while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning and then the supply of operating power is resumed. Figure 36(a) shows the period when operating power is supplied to the main MPU 72, Figure 36(b) shows the state of the constant speed flag 74c in the main RAM 74, Figure 36(c) shows the period when main processing is being executed in the main MPU 72, Figure 36(d) shows the acceleration period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, Figure 36(e) shows the constant speed period of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and Figure 36(f) shows the effective operation period of stop buttons 42 to 44.

When the game start operation is performed at time t1, when operating power is being supplied to the main MPU 72, acceleration of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins as shown in FIG. 36(d), and when acceleration of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed at time t2, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(b) and constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins as shown in FIG. 36(e). Also, operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled at time t2 as shown in FIG. 36(f).

After that, at timing t3, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped as shown in FIG. 36(a). Therefore, at timing t3, the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is stopped as shown in FIG. 36(e). In this case, the storage state of the information in the main RAM 74 is maintained by backup power, so the constant speed flag 74c remains set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(b) even while the supply of operating power is stopped.

After that, at timing t4, the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed as shown in FIG. 36(a). At timing t4, the main processing (FIG. 10) is started in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 36(c). In this case, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 36(b).

After that, at the timing of t5, the execution of the main process (FIG. 10) in the main MPU 72 is terminated as shown in FIG. 36(c). In the main process (FIG. 10), neither the all clear process (step S104) nor the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, and furthermore, since the state of the main RAM 74 is normal (steps S108, S110, and S111: YES), the address before the power cut is returned to, but before returning to the address before the power cut, the reel control clear process (step S116) is executed and the return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed. Therefore, at the timing of t5, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" as shown in FIG. 36(b). Also, at the timing of t5, the normal process (FIG. 13) is resumed from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Therefore, at time t5, as shown in Figure 36(d), acceleration of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R begins, and at time t6, the acceleration of each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, causing the constant speed flag 74c to be set to "1" as shown in Figure 36(b), and causing constant speed rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to begin as shown in Figure 36(e). Also, at time t6, operation of stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled as shown in Figure 36(f).

If the reel control clear process (step S116) and the return address adjustment process (step S117) are not performed when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the reel control process (FIG. 27) will execute the process for the address after the start address after the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, but the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not actually rotate normally, which will impede the progress of the game. In particular, if the above-mentioned event occurs when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped during the constant speed rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stop operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 may be validly accepted and stop control may be executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that are not rotating normally, even though the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not rotating normally. In response to this, by executing the reel control clear process (step S116) and return address adjustment process (step S117) as described above, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped after the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has begun, when the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, it becomes possible to start accelerating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the normal acceleration table in a situation where the stopping operation of stop buttons 42-44 is disabled.

<About re-acceleration processing during reel performance>
Next, the re-acceleration process during reel presentation executed in step S917 of the acceleration process (FIG. 33) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. The re-acceleration process during reel presentation is executed when the reel presentation winning flag is set to "1", the constant speed flag is not set to "1", and all acceleration counter values are "0". Therefore, even if the reel presentation winning flag is set to "1" and the constant speed flag is not set to "1", if any one acceleration counter value is 1 or more, the re-acceleration process during reel presentation is not executed, and then, when all acceleration counter values become "0", the re-acceleration process during reel presentation is executed.

First, it is determined whether the value of the start target counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or greater (step S1201). The start target counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to identify whether there are any reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the re-acceleration process during reel presentation has not been completed, and to identify the types of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R for which the re-acceleration process during reel presentation is to be performed. If the value of the start target counter is "0" (step S1201: NO), the start target counter is set to "3" (step S1202).

If a positive judgment is made in step S1201, or if the processing of step S1202 is executed, it is judged whether the value of the standby counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203). In the reel performance, after the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R has started, the rotation of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped with the combination of performance symbols displayed stopped on the main line ML without requiring a stop operation. Then, after the reel performance ends, the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is restarted to enable normal play in which the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped in response to the stop operation of stop buttons 42 to 44. In this case, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is resumed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start rotating one by one in a predetermined order (specifically, the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R), and the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R ends and the reel starts rotating at a constant speed, and then the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating. Then, when the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R ends, a lottery process is executed to determine whether or not a standby period should be generated and, if a standby period is generated, how long the standby period should be. If the generation of a standby period is determined, the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts rotating after the determined standby period has elapsed. By configuring the system so that a waiting period can occur in this way, it is possible to prevent bias in the rotational position of the symbols when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are re-spinned after the execution of the reel performance. The waiting counter is a counter for measuring the waiting period, and is a counter for the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not the measurement of the waiting period is in progress.

If the value of the waiting counter is "0" (step S1203: NO), the lottery process for the waiting period from step S1204 onwards is executed. Specifically, first the waiting period table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1204). The waiting period table contains 0 seconds, 0.1 seconds, 0.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds, 0.4 seconds, 0.5 seconds, 0.6 seconds and 0.7 seconds, each of which has the same probability of winning. In this case, 0 seconds corresponds to no waiting period occurring, and 0.1 seconds to 0.7 seconds correspond to the occurrence of a waiting period.

After that, an acquisition process from the random number counter is executed (step S1205). In this acquisition process, the random number is not acquired from the random number circuit group 100, but from the random number counter provided in the main RAM 74. The random number counter is configured to update its value at relatively short intervals, and if the updated value exceeds the maximum value, it is updated to the minimum value. Specifically, the value is updated each time the timer interrupt process (Figure 11) is executed once. Also, the time required for the random number counter to update the random number once is 160 interrupts of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11). This time is shorter than the acceleration period when one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is accelerated using the normal acceleration table (Figure 32).

Then, by comparing the random number acquired in step S1205 with the waiting period table read out in step S1204, it is determined whether or not a waiting period has been generated (step S1206). If a waiting period has not been generated, i.e., if 0 seconds has been selected in the waiting period lottery process (step S1206: NO), the process from step S1210 onwards is executed to start accelerating one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that is to start re-spinning. If a waiting period has been generated (step S1206: YES), the waiting period selected in the waiting period lottery process is set in the waiting counter of the main RAM 74 (step S1207). This starts the measurement of the waiting period to wait for the start of acceleration of one of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R that is to start re-spinning.

If the value of the standby counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S1203: YES), the value of the standby counter is decremented by 1 (step S1208). Then, it is determined whether the value of the standby counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1209). If the value of the standby counter is 1 or more (step S1209: YES), the re-acceleration process during this reel performance is terminated.

If the value of the standby counter is "0" and a positive judgment is made in step S1209, or if 0 seconds is selected in the lottery process for the standby period (step S1206: NO), proceed to step S1210. In step S1210, "25" is set to the acceleration counter corresponding to one reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is the target of the re-spinning start. Then, the normal acceleration table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1211). Note that if the reel 32L, 32M, 32R that is the target of the re-spinning start this time is the second or later in the re-spinning start order, the normal acceleration table has already been read at the start of the re-spinning of the left reel 32L that was the first target of the re-spinning start, so the normal acceleration table is not read again. In addition, the normal acceleration table is the same as the normal acceleration table read in step S907 in the acceleration process (FIG. 33), and specifically, the table content is as shown in FIG. 32.

By executing the processes of steps S1210 and S1211, in the next acceleration process (FIG. 33), a negative judgment is made in step S915, and the process of step S917 is not executed. Also, in the motor control process (FIG. 35) of step S1004 in the stepping motor control process (FIG. 34), if the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R that is the target for starting the current re-spin becomes the control target, a positive judgment is made in step S1102, and a process for accelerating it according to the normal acceleration table is executed. As a result, the one reel 32L, 32M, or 32R that is the target for starting the current re-spin is accelerated according to the normal acceleration table.

Then, the value of the start target counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S1212), and it is determined whether the value of the start target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S1213). If the determination is positive in step S1213, this means that the process for starting re-spinning for all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been completed, so the reel performance winning flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1214).

Next, we will explain how each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is re-spinned after the reel performance is executed, with reference to the time chart in Figure 38. FIG. 38(a) shows the timing when the random number in the random number counter of the main RAM 74 is updated once, FIG. 38(b) shows the execution period of the reel effect, FIG. 38(c) shows the waiting period during which the re-spin of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is awaited, FIG. 38(d) shows the acceleration period of the left reel 32L when re-spin is performed, FIG. 38(e) shows the constant speed period during which the left reel 32L spins at a constant speed after the acceleration period during re-spin ends, FIG. 38(f) shows the acceleration period of the center reel 32M when re-spin is performed, FIG. 38(g) shows the constant speed period during which the center reel 32M spins at a constant speed after the acceleration period during re-spin ends, FIG. 38(h) shows the acceleration period of the right reel 32R when re-spin is performed, and FIG. 38(i) shows the constant speed period during which the right reel 32R spins at a constant speed after the acceleration period during re-spin ends.

As shown in FIG. 38(b), at timing t1, a reel effect is performed on each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Then, at timing t2, the reel effect ends and each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R comes to a stopped state.

At this timing t2, the left reel 32L becomes eligible to start re-spinning, but the waiting period lottery process results in a winning waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the start of re-spinning of the left reel 32L is waited for from timing t2 to timing t3. Then, at timing t3, the left reel 32L starts re-spinning as shown in FIG. 32(d). In other words, the left reel 32L starts spinning and accelerating using the normal acceleration table.

After that, at timing t4, as shown in FIG. 32(d), the acceleration period of the left reel 32L ends, and constant speed rotation of the left reel 32L begins, as shown in FIG. 32(e). Note that, since the center reel 32M and right reel 32R are not rotating at a constant speed at this timing, the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", and operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not enabled.

At time t4, the middle reel 32M becomes the target for starting re-spinning, but the waiting period lottery process results in a winning waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the start of re-spinning of the middle reel 32M is waited for from time t4 to time t5. Then, at time t5, the middle reel 32M starts re-spinning as shown in FIG. 32(f). In other words, the normal acceleration table is used to start the rotation of the middle reel 32M and accelerate it.

After that, at timing t6, as shown in FIG. 32(f), the acceleration period of the center reel 32M ends, and constant speed rotation of the center reel 32M begins, as shown in FIG. 32(g). Note that at this timing, the right reel 32R is not rotating at a constant speed, so the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is not set to "1", and operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not enabled.

At time t6, the right reel 32R is targeted to start re-spinning, but the waiting period lottery process results in a winning waiting period. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32(c), the right reel 32R is put on hold for the start of re-spinning from time t6 to time t7. Then, at time t7, the right reel 32R starts re-spinning as shown in FIG. 32(h). In other words, the right reel 32R starts spinning and accelerating using the normal acceleration table.

After that, at timing t8, the acceleration period of the right reel 32R ends as shown in Figure 32(h), and constant speed rotation of the right reel 32R begins as shown in Figure 32(i). Note that at this timing, all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, so the constant speed flag 74c of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" and operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled.

Here, the period T required for the random number counter used in the lottery process during the waiting period to complete one cycle of updating the random number is shorter than the acceleration periods (from timing t3 to timing t4, from timing t5 to timing t6, and from timing t7 to timing t8) in which acceleration is performed using the normal acceleration table in each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the period required for the random number counter to complete one cycle of updating the random number is 160 interrupts in terms of the number of interrupts in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11), whereas the acceleration period in which acceleration is performed using the normal acceleration table in each of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is 213 interrupts. This allows a configuration in which a single random number counter in the main RAM 74 is used to determine the waiting period when re-spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started, and the random number in the random number counter has been updated one or more times between the time a random number is obtained from the random number counter to determine the waiting period for one of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the time a random number is obtained from the random number counter to determine the waiting period for the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R. This allows the lottery process for the waiting period for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be performed independently.

<About game status and game area>
Next, the game states and game sections will be described. Figure 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the game states and game sections that exist in the slot machine 10.

The slot machine 10 has the following game states: normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, false premonition state ST5, real premonition state ST6, chance state ST7, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9. These game states ST1 to ST9 do not occur in parallel with each other.

The normal game state ST1 is a game state in which the player remains by executing the full clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 or the clear process (step S113) of the non-set value. In addition, when the BB state ST3 ends and there is no transition to the preparation state ST8, when the RB state ST4 ends and there is no transition to the preparation state ST8, when the false premonition state ST5 ends, when the chance state ST7 ends and there is no transition to the preparation state ST8, and when the ART state ST9 ends without being triggered by a transition to the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. In terms of the expected value of the game medium to be awarded in one game, the normal game state ST1 is a game state with a lower advantage than the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, and ART state ST9, and has approximately the same advantage as the bonus internal state ST2, false premonition state ST5, real premonition state ST6, and chance state ST7. As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In the normal game state ST1, the player can stay in any of these lottery modes. When the process of clearing all of the main RAM 74 (step S104) or the process of clearing everything other than the set value (step S113) is executed, the player enters the normal game state ST1 and enters the normal mode.

The bonus internal state ST2 is a game state in which a player remains if a bonus win corresponding to any bonus winning data is not achieved in a game in which the bonus winning data is set, and is a game state that ends if a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data is achieved. As already explained, in the bonus internal state ST2, the internal lottery table is referenced in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17). In this case, since the internal lottery table does not have a winning combination (i.e., index value IV) that transitions the lottery mode, the lottery mode does not transition in the bonus internal state ST2. Since the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 is the same as when the lottery table for the normal mode (FIG. 18) is referenced, the bonus internal state ST2 can also be said to be a game state in which the replay probability is maintained in the normal mode. However, without being limited to this, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be higher than in normal mode, for example, may be the same as the replay probability in the first RT mode, may be the same as the replay probability in the second RT mode, may be a replay probability between the normal mode and the first RT mode, may be a replay probability between the first RT mode and the second RT mode, or may be a replay probability higher than in the second RT mode. Also, the replay probability in the bonus internal state ST2 may be lower than in normal mode.

The contents of BB state ST3 and RB state ST4 have already been explained. In BB state ST3 and RB state ST4, a transition to lottery mode does not occur.

The player remains in the false premonition state ST5 by winning the transition lottery process to the false premonition state ST5 in the normal game state ST1. The number of continuing games in the false premonition state ST5 is determined by lottery within the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the winning probability for a shorter number of continuing games is set higher than the winning probability for a longer number of continuing games. The false premonition state ST5 continues for this determined number of continuing games unless a bonus role is won, a transition to the real premonition state ST6, or a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs during the transition.

In the false premonition state ST5, the image display device 63 is more likely to execute effects that have a high expectation of a transition to the ART state ST9 as the effect content of each game. In addition, in the false premonition state ST5, more flashy effects are executed in the final game than in the starting game. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game in the false premonition state ST5, effects in which the same character is displayed in multiple games or effects that follow a series of stories may be executed. Then, effects are displayed to make the player aware that a transition to the ART state ST9 will not occur in the final game. As already explained, there are normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode as lottery modes, and in the false premonition state ST5, any of these lottery modes may be stayed in.

The premonition state ST6 remains in the normal game state ST1 or the false premonition state ST5 when a transition lottery is won in the transition lottery process to the premonition state ST6, and when the premonition state ST6 ends, the state transitions to the preparation state ST8, which is a state preceding the transition to the ART state ST9. In addition, if a bonus role is won during the premonition state ST6, the premonition state ST6 ends, but after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus role ends, the state transitions to the preparation state ST8. The number of continued games in the premonition state ST6 is determined by lottery within the range of 5 to 10 games. In this case, the probability of winning a long number of continued games is set higher than the probability of winning a short number of continued games. In addition, the expected value of the number of continued games selected in the premonition state ST6 is a number of games longer than the expected value of the number of continued games selected in the false premonition state ST5.

In this premonition state ST6, as the presentation content of each game in the image display device 63, a presentation with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is more likely to be executed. The presentation executed in this case can also be executed in the false premonition state ST5, but the present premonition state ST6 is more likely to execute a presentation with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 than the false premonition state ST5. Also, in this premonition state ST6, a more flashy presentation is executed on the final game side than on the starting game side. Specifically, in some consecutive games including the final game of this premonition state ST6, a presentation in which the same character is displayed between multiple games or a presentation according to a series of stories may be executed. Then, a presentation is displayed to make the player aware that a transition to the ART state ST9 will occur in the final game. As described above, due to the existence of the false premonition state ST5 and the present premonition state ST6, when a premonition presentation corresponding to these premonition states ST5 and ST6 is executed, the player will expect a transition to the ART state ST9. As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode. In this premonition state ST6, the player may stay in any of these lottery modes. Note that the number of games to continue in this premonition state ST6 may be fixed to a predetermined number of games, such as 10 games.

The chance state ST7 remains when the player wins the lottery process to transition to the chance state ST7 in the normal game state ST1 or the false premonition state ST5. The chance state ST7 is a game state that continues for five games, and if the result of the lottery process for the hand (FIG. 17) is a predetermined lottery result, the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed with the winning probability corresponding to the lottery result. If the player wins the lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9, the game transitions to the preparation state ST8, which is the state preceding the transition to the ART state ST9. In this case, if the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is a lottery win, the game transitions to the preparation state ST8 in the game following the game that won the lottery, even if the number of continued games in the chance state ST7 has not been played out. In addition, if a bonus hand win occurs during the chance state ST7, the chance state ST7 ends.

In the chance state ST7, the presentation of each game on the image display device 63 corresponds to the chance state ST7. Then, in the game that was selected in the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, a presentation is executed to indicate that the transition has been selected. As already explained, there are normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode as lottery modes, and in the chance state ST7, the player may stay in any of these lottery modes. Note that the number of games to continue in the chance state ST7 may be determined by lottery from among multiple types of game numbers.

The preparation state ST8 is a game state in which the player remains as a prelude to transitioning to the ART state ST9, and can be transitioned to from the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, premonition state ST6, and chance state ST7. As already explained, there are normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode as lottery modes, and the preparation state ST8 can remain in any of these lottery modes. In the preparation state ST8, if a winning number of "1" to "3" is set, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Then, when the first bell is won, "11" game media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of game media to be awarded in one game in the preparation state ST8. In addition, in the preparation state ST8, if a winning number of "17" to "22" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay winning is announced, if a winning number of "23" to "28" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay winning is announced, and if a winning number of "29" to "34" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first fall replay winning to be avoided is announced. In the preparation state ST8, the second RT replay winning is realized and the lottery mode transitions to the second RT mode, and the game state transitions to the ART state ST9. In addition, a transition to the preparation state ST8 may occur when the lottery mode is the second RT mode, in which case the lottery mode will transition to the first RT mode, and if a transition to the second RT mode occurs after that, it will transition to the ART state ST9.

As described above, the ART state ST9 is a game state to which a player enters when a second RT replay win is achieved in the preparation state ST8. The ART state ST9 ends when the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9 becomes "0". In this case, the game state becomes the normal game state ST1. Also, if a bonus is won during the ART state ST9, the game state will enter the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, or RB state ST4. In this case, the game state will enter the preparation state ST8 after the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 ends, and will eventually return to the ART state ST9.

As already explained, there are three lottery modes: normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, and in ART state ST9, any of these lottery modes can be selected. When a winning number between "1" and "3" is set in ART state ST9, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. When the first bell is won, "11" gaming media is awarded. This makes it possible to increase the expected number of gaming media awarded in one game in ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART state ST9, when the winning number of "17" to "22" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay winning is announced, when the winning number of "23" to "28" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second RT replay winning is announced, when the winning number of "29" to "34" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first fall replay winning to be avoided is announced, and when the winning number of "35" to "40" is set, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the second fall replay winning to be avoided is announced. As a result, in the ART state ST9, the lottery mode is basically maintained in the second RT mode. The second RT mode is a mode in which the replay probability is higher than the normal mode and the first RT mode. In other words, the ART state ST9 is a game state in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is notified, and is a game state in which the replay probability is basically maintained high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expected net increase in the number of game media in the ART state ST9. Note that even if the lottery mode in the ART state ST9 transitions from the second RT mode to the first RT mode or from the first RT mode to the normal mode, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 is subtracted even if the ART state ST9 is maintained and the situation is not the second RT mode.

In a configuration in which various game states ST1 to ST9 exist as described above, a game zone is set in addition to these game states ST1 to ST9. A normal zone SC1 and an advantageous zone SC2 are set as game zones. In other words, in this slot machine 10, the factors that determine the game situation are the setting values of "1" to "6," the lottery modes of the normal mode, first RT mode, and second RT mode, the various game states ST1 to ST9, and the game zones of the normal zone SC1 and advantageous zone SC2.

The normal section SC1 is a section in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows a player to win a prize advantageous to the player when different winning combinations are achieved depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is not announced, and the probability of the transition condition to the ART state ST9, which is a game state advantageous to the player, being established is lower than in the advantageous section SC2. More specifically, in the normal section SC1, the transition condition to the ART state ST9 is not established. When the full clear process (step S104) of the main RAM 74 or the clear process other than the set value (step S113) is executed, the normal game state ST1 and normal mode are established, and the normal section SC1 is entered. In addition, when the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 is executed in the advantageous section SC2, the normal section SC1 is also entered.

The advantageous section SC2 is a section that corresponds to at least one of a section in which the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified, which allows a player to win a favorable winning combination when the winning combinations that are the target of winning are different depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a section in which the probability of transitioning to the ART state ST9, which is a game state that is favorable to the player, is higher than that of the normal section SC1. The advantageous section SC2 continues reliably until the notification of the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, which allows a winning combination that has the largest number of game media among the winning combinations that are the target of winning depending on the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, is executed at least once. Specifically, the advantageous zone SC2 continues reliably until a winning number "1" to "3" is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) and the announcement of the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is made at least once. The minimum end condition is met when the announcement of the stopping sequence is made at least once, and the minimum end condition is met regardless of whether the first bell is actually won. When the announcement is made at least once, the advantageous zone SC2 continues until either the end condition determined according to the situation in which the advantageous zone SC2 was set, or the condition that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is met.

As shown in FIG. 39, the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4 can be in either the normal section SC1 or the advantageous section SC2. On the other hand, the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9 are never in the normal section SC1, but only in the advantageous section SC2.

Next, a specific processing configuration that enables the setting of the game states ST1 to ST9 and game sections SC1 and SC2 as described above will be described. Figure 40 is a flowchart showing the first control processing of the game section executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the first control processing of the game section is executed in step S617 in the role selection processing (Figure 17). This processing in step S617 is executed after the role selection has been determined at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether the current game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the bonus state ST3, ST4, the preparation state ST8, or the ART state ST9 (step S1301). If a negative determination is made in step S1301, the processing from step S1302 onwards is executed.

In step S1302, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The advantageous zone flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether the gaming zone is an advantageous zone SC2 or not. When the advantageous zone flag is set to "1", it is an advantageous zone SC2, and when the advantageous zone flag value is "0", it is a normal zone SC1.

If the game zone is the normal zone SC1 (step S1302: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17) (step S1303). If a positive determination is made in step S1303, a lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is executed.

Specifically, first, the advantageous transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current role lottery process (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1304). In this case, the advantageous transition table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being a transition win to the advantageous zone SC2. Incidentally, the advantageous transition table is common regardless of the setting value of "1" to "6". In this way, the fact that the table is common regardless of the setting value applies to all lottery processes other than the role lottery process (Figure 17). In addition, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1305). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone SC2, the random number written to the 14th latch register 103n from the second dedicated random number circuit 102b is acquired. In detail, as already explained, the second dedicated random number circuit 102b generates random numbers between "0" and "65535", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the second dedicated random number circuit 102b obtains the random number written in the 14th latch register 103n. Then, the random number obtained in step S1305 is compared with the advantageous transition table read in step S1304 to determine whether or not a transition to the advantageous zone SC2 has been won (step S1306).

If the transition to the favorable zone SC2 is successful (step S1306: YES), the favorable zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", the value of the favorable continuation counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0", and the unannounced flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1307). The favorable continuation counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the number of games that have been continuously played in the favorable zone SC2. The unannounced flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify whether or not a winning number of "1" to "3" has been set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) after transition to the favorable zone SC2 and an announcement of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has already occurred.

As already explained, the first control process of the play area is executed at the start of the game. In this case, if a transition lottery process to the advantageous area SC2 is selected, the advantageous area flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the first control process of the play area. As a result, a transition to the advantageous area SC2 occurs at the start of the game in which a transition to the advantageous area SC2 is selected. However, this is not limited to this, and a transition to the advantageous area SC2 may occur in the game following the game in which a transition to the advantageous area SC2 is selected, or a transition to the advantageous area SC2 may occur in a game two or more games after the game in which a transition to the advantageous area SC2 is selected.

After the transition setting to the favorable zone SC2 has been made, the favorable zone display unit 67 is switched from an off state to an on state (step S1308). This causes the favorable zone display unit 67 to start notifying the user that they are now in the favorable zone SC2.

When the advantageous zone SC2 is reached, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be announced. Here, the announcement control process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 41. The announcement control process is executed in step S620 in the winning combination lottery process (FIG. 17). This process of step S620 is executed after the winning combination has been determined at the start of the game.

When the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1401: YES), if any of the winning numbers "1" to "3" is set in the role selection process (Figure 17) (step S1402: YES), and either of the following conditions is met: the game state is in the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9, and the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1403 or step S1404: YES), a process is executed to announce the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow the first bell to be won.

Specifically, first, a stop order determination process for the first bell winning is executed (step S1405). In the stop order determination process, information on the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell winning corresponding to the current winning number is determined. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the determined stop order information is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S1406). The display on the combined display unit 66 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game. Then, a bell winning command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1407). The bell winning command is set with information that enables the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell winning in the current game.

Then, the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S1408). In this case, if the value of the unannounced flag is already "0", that state is maintained, and if the value of the unannounced flag is "1", it is changed to "0". This enables the main MPU 72 to determine that an announcement of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has already been made in the current advantageous zone SC2.

In the notification control process, if any of the winning numbers "17" to "28" is set in the role selection process (Figure 17) (step S1409: YES), and the game state is in the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S1410: YES), a process is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win.

Specifically, first, a stop order grasping process for the promotion replay is executed (step S1411). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, the display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the dual-purpose display unit 66 (step S1412). The display of the dual-purpose display unit 66 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped in the current game. Then, a command for the promotion replay is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1413). The promotion replay command is set with information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first RT replay win or the second RT replay win in the current game.

In the notification control process, if any of the winning numbers "29" to "40" is set in the role selection process (Figure 17) (step S1414: YES), and the game state is in the ART state ST9 (step S1415: YES), a process is executed to notify the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can prevent the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning from occurring.

Specifically, first, a stop order grasping process for avoiding a fall replay is executed (step S1416). In the stop order grasping process, information on the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning corresponding to the current winning number is grasped. Then, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that a display corresponding to the grasped stop order information is started on the combined display unit 66 (step S1417). The display of the combined display unit 66 continues until all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game. Then, a fall replay avoidance command is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S1418). The fall replay avoidance command is set with information for enabling the production side MPU 92 to specify the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that can avoid the establishment of the first fall replay winning or the second fall replay winning in the current game.

...

Figure 42 is a flowchart showing the notification process executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the notification process is repeatedly executed by the production side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds).

When a bell winning command, a promotion replay command, or a fall replay avoidance command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S1501: YES), data necessary for displaying an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received stop order command on the image display device 63 is set (step S1502). However, at this timing, an image of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the currently received stop order command is not displayed on the image display device 63. After that, a value corresponding to the notification delay period is set in a measurement counter provided in the performance RAM 94 (step S1503). The notification delay period is set to a period shorter than the acceleration period from when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate until they reach a constant speed, and is set to, for example, 0.5 milliseconds. The value set in the measurement counter is subtracted each time the notification process is started.

In the notification process, when the notification delay period measured using the measurement counter in the presentation side RAM 94 has elapsed (step S1504: YES), notification start processing is executed (step S1505). In the notification start processing, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 based on the data set in step S1502. As a result, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current stopping order command is displayed on the image display device 63, as shown in FIG. 8(a), for example. This display on the image display device 63 continues until all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in the current game.

In the above configuration, after the timing when the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on the combined display unit 66, which is directly controlled by the main MPU 72, notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R is started on the image display device 63, which is directly controlled by the performance MPU 92. As a result, when a notification regarding a winning role is being executed on the image display device 63, a notification regarding a winning role is reliably executed on the combined display unit 66, and when the display content of the combined display unit 66 is used to check whether the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R executed on the image display device 63 is due to fraudulent activity, the check can be performed at any timing.

Note that the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 and the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display unit 63 will end at the same or approximately the same timing, but this is not limited to this, and the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the combined display unit 66 may end after the notification corresponding to the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, 32R on the image display unit 63 has ended, or this order may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the first control process for the game zone (FIG. 40), if the advantageous zone flag was set to "1" in a game prior to the current game (step S1302: YES), or if the advantageous zone flag was set to "1" in the current game (step S1307), it is determined whether or not the current game state is in the chance state ST7 (step S1309). If it is in the chance state ST7 (step S1309: YES), chance state processing is executed (step S1310). The chance state processing will be explained later.

If it is not in the chance state ST7 (step S1309: NO), it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17) (step S1311). If a positive determination is made in step S1311, and the current game state is not in the real premonition state ST6 (step S1312: NO), at least one transition lottery process is executed from among the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state.

In detail, the transition lottery process for the main premonition state will be described first. In this transition lottery process, the main premonition transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current role lottery process (Figure 17) is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S1313). In this case, the main premonition transition table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of transitioning to the main premonition state ST6. In addition, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1314). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the transition lottery process for the main premonition state, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer obtain the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1314 with the main premonition transition table read in step S1313, it is determined whether or not a transition to the main premonition state ST6 has been selected (step S1315).

If a win has been made to transition to the main premonition state ST6 (step S1315: YES), the main premonition win flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1316). The main premonition win flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win has been made to transition to the main premonition state ST6 at the start of the current game, and if the main premonition win flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition to the main premonition state ST6 at the end of the game. In other words, the game state will transition to the main premonition state ST6 in the game following the game in which a win has been made to transition to the main premonition state ST6.

If the transition to the premonition state ST6 is not successful (step S1315: NO), a transition lottery process for the chance state is executed (step S1317). The details of the transition lottery process for the chance state will be explained later. After that, it is determined whether or not the transition to the chance state ST7 has been successful in the current game, or whether or not the current game state is the false premonition state ST5 (step S1318). If a negative determination is made in step S1318, a transition lottery process for the false premonition state is executed (step S1319).

Figure 43 is a flow chart showing the transition lottery process for the false premonition state. In this transition lottery process, first, the false premonition transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1601). In this case, the false premonition transition table is set so that the winning number with a higher winning probability has a higher probability of transitioning to the false premonition state ST5. In addition, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S1602). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the transition lottery process to the false premonition state ST5, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit corresponding to the current random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer obtain the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Then, by comparing the random number obtained in step S1602 with the false premonition transition table read in step S1601, it is determined whether or not a transition to the false premonition state ST5 has been selected (step S1603).

If a win has been made to transition to the false premonition state ST5 (step S1603: YES), the false premonition win flag stored in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1604). The false premonition win flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that a win has been made to transition to the false premonition state ST5 at the start of the current game, and if the false premonition win flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition to the false premonition state ST5 at the end of the game. In other words, the game state will transition to the false premonition state ST5 in the game following the game in which a win has been made to transition to the false premonition state ST5.

By executing each transition lottery process as described above, when the present premonition state ST6 or chance state ST7 is in effect, none of the transition lottery process for the false premonition state, the transition lottery process for the present premonition state, and the transition lottery process for the chance state are executed. This makes it possible to prevent the false premonition state ST5, the present premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7 from being newly set in a situation where the present premonition state ST6 or the chance state ST7 has already started.

On the other hand, even if the player is in the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state and the transition lottery process for the chance state are executed. This makes it possible to prioritize a new transition to the real premonition state ST6 or chance state ST7 that leads to a transition to the ART state ST9 over the execution of the false premonition state ST5 that does not lead to a transition to the ART state ST9.

If the false premonition state ST5 has already been set, the transition lottery process for the false premonition state is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent a new false premonition state ST5 from being executed redundantly even when the false premonition state ST5 is already being executed.

When the state is not the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7, the execution priority of each of the transition lottery processes is set to the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state. Also, when the state is the false premonition state ST5, the execution priority of the transition lottery process for the real premonition state is set to be higher than the transition lottery process for the chance state. This makes it possible to give top priority to the transition to the real premonition state ST6, which will definitely result in a transition to the ART state ST9, and to give a higher priority to the chance state ST7, in which a transition to the ART state ST9 may occur, than the false premonition state ST5, in which a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur.

In a game in which a winning number of "4" to "8", "15", or "16" is set, if the transition lottery process for the real premonition state does not result in a transition win, the transition lottery process for the chance state is executed, and if the transition lottery process for the chance state does not result in a transition win, the transition lottery process for the false premonition state is executed. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the false premonition state ST5, real premonition state ST6, or chance state ST7 is set.

The lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is executed when the winning number is set to any of "4", "6", "8", or "15" in the role selection process (Figure 17). The roles corresponding to these winning numbers all have the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone SC2 is executed when a role with no set difference in winning probability is won. This makes it possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the set values of "1" to "6" regarding the probability of transition to the advantageous zone SC2.

On the other hand, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state are executed when any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" is set in the role lottery process (FIG. 17). Of these winning numbers, "4", "6", "8", and "15" are roles with the same winning probability between the set values "1" to "6" as described above. These winning numbers are the same as the winning number that triggers the execution of the transition lottery process to the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, the transition lottery process to the advantageous zone SC2 and at least one of the transition lottery processes for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state may be executed in the same game.

Of the winning numbers, "5", "7", and "16" are combinations with different winning probabilities between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state are executed when a combination with no set difference in winning probability is won, and are also executed when a combination with a set difference in winning probability is won. This makes it possible to make it possible for advantageous or disadvantageous combinations to occur between the set values of "1" to "6" with regard to the transition probability to the false premonition state ST5, the transition probability to the real premonition state ST6, and the transition probability to the chance state ST7.

However, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state are executed on the condition that the game zone is the advantageous zone SC2. In other words, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state, the transition lottery process for the chance state, and the transition lottery process for the false premonition state are executed on the condition that the game zone is already in the advantageous zone SC2, or the game is a game that has been selected to transition to the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an advantage or disadvantage from occurring between the setting values of "1" to "6" for the transition to the advantageous zone SC2, which is a preliminary step for causing a transition to the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7, while making it possible for an advantage or disadvantage to occur between the setting values of "1" to "6" for the transition to the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7 after the transition to the advantageous zone SC2.

Next, the response process at the end of a game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 44. The response process at the end of a game is executed in step S411 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This step S411 process is executed after the reel control process (step S409), and therefore is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have been stopped in one game.

First, a bonus process is executed to control the transition and progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S1701). The bonus process will be described in detail later. After that, on the condition that the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, and RB state ST4 are not in effect (step S1702: NO), a lottery mode control process is executed (step S1703). In the lottery mode control process, if the first RT replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the normal mode to the first RT mode, if the second RT replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the first RT mode to the second RT mode, if the first fall replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the first RT mode to the normal mode, and if the second fall replay win is established in the current game, the mode is changed from the second RT mode to the first RT mode.

Then, jump to the process corresponding to the current game state (step S1704). Specifically, if the game state is the normal game state ST1, the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7, execute the normal process (step S1705), if the game state is the preparation state ST8, execute the preparation state process (step S1706), and if the game state is the ART state ST9, execute the ART state process (step S1707). Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S1702, or if any of the processes in steps S1705 to S1707 is executed, execute the second control process of the game zone (step S1708). In the second control process of the game zone, execute the process to transition the game zone to the normal zone SC1 when the transition condition from the advantageous zone SC2 to the normal zone SC1 is established.

Figure 45 is a flowchart showing the second control process for the play area. As described above, the response process at the end of play is executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the second control process for the play area is also executed after all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

In steps S1801 to S1811, if the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, processing is executed to end the advantageous section SC2. The details of these processing steps will be explained in detail later.

If it is in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S1803: YES) and a negative judgment is made in step S1806, it is judged whether the game state is the normal game state ST1 and the value of the advantageous maintenance counter provided in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1812). The advantageous maintenance counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to identify the remaining number of advantageous maintenance games when the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained for the advantageous maintenance game number even after the transition to the normal game state ST1 when the ART state ST9 ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1812, it is judged whether the value of the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1813). As already explained, the unannounced flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to determine whether or not a winning number from "1" to "3" has been set in the role selection process (Figure 17) after moving to the advantageous zone SC2 and an announcement of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will enable the first bell win has already occurred. If an announcement of the stopping order has already occurred, the value of the unannounced flag is "0".

If the positive judgment is made in step S1813, the initialization process of the advantageous zone is executed (step S1814). In the initialization process of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, even if the player is in any of the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the initialization process of the advantageous zone shifts the game state to the normal game state ST1 by clearing various data indicating the game state ST5 to ST9, including the counters for storing the number of games continued in the game states ST5 to ST9. Note that the process of step S1814 is executed on the condition that the game state is the normal game state ST1, and therefore the process of clearing the various data is not executed, and the process of clearing the advantageous zone flag to "0" is executed. After that, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from the on state to the off state (step S1815). This ends the notification of the advantageous zone in the advantageous zone display unit 67.

As already explained, when a transition to the favorable zone SC2 occurs, a transition to the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7 may occur. In this case, the favorable zone SC2 ends on the condition that the normal game state ST1 is in effect, so if the state is the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7, the favorable zone SC2 will be maintained even after the notification of the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has been executed.

Details will be described later, but if BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is initiated in the advantageous section SC2, it is easier to transition to the ART state ST9 than if BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 is initiated in the normal section SC1. In this case, if the false premonition state ST5 is present as described above, by maintaining it in the advantageous section SC2, it is possible to make the false premonition state ST5 not just a state used for presentation to make the player hope that it may be the real premonition state ST6, but also a state that increases the expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the false premonition state ST5.

In addition, even if the normal game state ST1 is in progress, the favorable zone SC2 will not end if the unannounced flag is set to "1". As a result, even if the false premonition state ST5 ends, or the chance state ST7 ends without transitioning to the ART state ST9, the favorable zone SC2 will continue from the start of the favorable zone SC2 until the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced once. If the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 starts while the favorable zone SC2 is continuing, the expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST9 will increase. Therefore, the player will pay attention to whether the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has been announced in the false premonition state ST5 or chance state ST7, which will increase the interest of the game.

The processing of steps S1816 to S1822 in the second control process of the play area is executed in a predetermined bonus internal state ST2. This processing will be explained in detail later.

Here, the manner in which the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 and the return to the normal zone SC1 are performed will be explained with reference to the time chart in FIG. 46. FIG. 46(a) shows the period in the normal zone SC1, FIG. 46(b) shows the period in the advantageous zone SC2, FIG. 46(c) shows the timing when a role with no setting difference is won in the role selection process (FIG. 17) and the role that triggers the execution of the various transition selection processes described above, FIG. 46(d) shows the timing when a role with a setting difference is won in the role selection process (FIG. 17) and the role that triggers the execution of the various transition selection processes described above, FIG. 46(e) shows the execution period of the real precursor state ST6, and FIG. 46(f) shows the execution period of the false precursor state ST5.

First, we will explain the case where a transition to this premonition state ST6 also occurs in a game in which the game zone has transitioned to the advantageous zone SC2.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), at the timing of t1 in the normal zone SC1, the winning number (hereinafter also referred to as the trigger winning number without the setting difference) of "4", "6", "8", or "15" is set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the role as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the transition lottery process to the favorable zone SC2 is executed and the transition win is obtained. As a result, the game zone transitions from the normal zone SC1 to the favorable zone SC2 at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b). Also, at the timing of t1, the setting of the trigger winning number without the setting difference is used as a trigger to execute the transition lottery process for the main premonition state and the transition win is obtained. As a result, the game state transitions to the main premonition state ST6 as shown in FIG. 46(e). In other words, a transition to the main premonition state ST6 also occurs in a game in which the game zone transitions to the favorable zone SC2. And when the game zone transitions to the main premonition state ST6, the game zone will finally transition to the ART state ST9.

Next, we will explain the case where a transition to the false premonition state ST5 occurs in a game after the game in which the gaming zone transitions to the advantageous zone SC2, and when the false premonition state ST5 ends, the advantageous zone SC2 also ends.

As shown in FIG. 46(a), at timing t2 when the situation is normal section SC1, one of the winning numbers "5", "7", or "16" (hereinafter also referred to as the trigger winning number with setting difference) is won in the role selection process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46(d). In this case, even if the situation is normal section SC1 and the trigger winning number with setting difference is set, the transition selection process to the advantageous section SC2 is not executed, so the transition selection process for the false premonition state and the transition selection process for the real premonition state are not executed. In addition, the transition selection process for the chance state is not executed either.

After that, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 46(c), a trigger winning number with no setting difference is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17), and the transition lottery process to the advantageous zone SC2 executed as a result results in a transition winning, and the game zone transitions from the normal zone SC1 to the advantageous zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b). However, at the timing of t3, although the transition lottery process for the false premonition state and the transition lottery process for the real premonition state were executed, neither transition lottery process resulted in a transition winning.

After that, at timing t4, a trigger winning number with a setting difference is set in the role selection process (Fig. 17) as shown in Fig. 46 (d). In this case, since it has already been set to the advantageous zone SC2, the transition selection process for the false premonition state and the transition selection process for the main premonition state are executed. Then, as a transition win is obtained in the transition selection process for the false premonition state, a transition occurs to the false premonition state ST5 as shown in Fig. 46 (f).

After that, at the timing of t5, the number of remaining games in the false premonition state ST5 becomes "0" and the end condition of the false premonition state ST5 is met, and as shown in FIG. 46(f), the false premonition state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. In this case, the winning number information of one of "1" to "3" has already been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) between the timing of t4 and the timing of t5, and the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has been notified, so the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Therefore, the end condition of the false premonition state ST5 is met at the timing of t5, and the end condition of the advantageous zone SC2 is also met. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b), the game zone returns from the advantageous zone SC2 to the normal zone SC1 at the timing of t5.

Next, we will explain the case where a transition to the false premonition state ST5 occurs in a game in which the game zone transitions to the advantageous zone SC2, and the advantageous zone SC2 ends in a game after the game in which the false premonition state ST5 ends.

At the timing of t6 when the normal zone SC1 is in the situation as shown in FIG. 46(a), the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) sets a trigger winning number without a setting difference as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the lottery process for the transition to the favorable zone SC2 is executed, resulting in a transition win. As a result, the game zone transitions from the normal zone SC1 to the favorable zone SC2 at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b). Also, at the timing of t6, the setting of the trigger winning number without a setting difference is used as a trigger to execute the lottery process for the transition to the false premonition state, resulting in a transition win. As a result, the game state transitions to the false premonition state ST5 as shown in FIG. 46(f). In other words, a transition to the false premonition state ST5 also occurs in a game in which the game zone transitions to the favorable zone SC2.

After that, at the timing of t7, the number of remaining games in the false premonition state ST5 becomes "0", and the end condition of the false premonition state ST5 is met, and as shown in FIG. 46(f), the false premonition state ST5 ends and returns to the normal game state ST1. However, since the winning number information of "1" to "3" has not been set in the lottery process (FIG. 17) between the timing of t6 and the timing of t7, the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won has not been notified, and the unnotified flag of the main RAM 74 remains set to "1". Therefore, even if the end condition of the false premonition state ST5 is met at the timing of t7, the end condition of the advantageous zone SC2 is not met. Therefore, the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained at the timing of t7, as shown in FIG. 46(b).

After that, at the timing of t8, the winning number information of one of "1" to "3" is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17), and the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced, and the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0." As a result, the gaming zone returns from the advantageous zone SC2 to the normal zone SC1 at the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b).

As described above, depending on the timing of the notification of the stop order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won, the advantageous zone SC2 may end in the game in which the false premonition state ST5 ends, or in a game after the game in which the false premonition state ST5 ends. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of the end of the advantageous zone SC2, and to make the player expect that the advantageous zone SC2 will be maintained even if the false premonition state ST5 ends. Note that the advantageous zone SC2 does not end before the false premonition state ST5 ends. In addition, with regard to the chance state ST7, the advantageous zone SC2 may end in the game in which the chance state ST7 ends, or in a game after the game in which the chance state ST7 ends.

Next, we will explain the case where a transition to the false premonition state ST5 occurs in a game in which the playing zone has transitioned to the advantageous zone SC2, and then a transition to the real premonition state ST6 occurs in the middle of the false premonition state ST5.

At the timing of t9 when the normal zone SC1 is in the situation as shown in FIG. 46(a), the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) sets a trigger winning number without a setting difference as shown in FIG. 46(c), and the lottery process for the transition to the favorable zone SC2 is executed, resulting in a transition win. As a result, the game zone transitions from the normal zone SC1 to the favorable zone SC2 at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 46(a) and FIG. 46(b). Also, at the timing of t9, the setting of the trigger winning number without a setting difference is used as a trigger to execute the lottery process for the transition to the false premonition state, resulting in a transition win. As a result, the game state transitions to the false premonition state ST5 as shown in FIG. 46(f). In other words, a transition to the false premonition state ST5 also occurs in a game in which the game zone transitions to the favorable zone SC2.

After that, at timing t10 when the false premonition state ST5 continues as shown in FIG. 46(f), a trigger winning number with a setting difference is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) as shown in FIG. 46(d). In this case, since it has already been set in the advantageous zone SC2 and is in the false premonition state ST5, the transition selection process for the main premonition state is executed. Then, as a transition win is obtained in the transition selection process for the main premonition state, the false premonition state ST5 is ended midway as shown in FIG. 46(e) and FIG. 46(f) and the main premonition state ST6 is newly started. If it transitions to the main premonition state ST6, it will ultimately transition to the ART state ST9.

As described above, if a trigger winning number with a setting difference is set even during the false premonition state ST5, a transition to the real premonition state ST6 will occur, so the player will expect to win the role corresponding to the trigger winning number with a setting difference even during the execution of the effects corresponding to the premonition states ST5 and ST6. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention in situations where the effects corresponding to the premonition states ST5 and ST6 are being executed.

<Regarding execution control of the effects of the premonition states ST5, ST6 and chance state ST7>
Next, the execution control of the presentation of the premonition states ST5, ST6 and the chance state ST7 will be described. First, the transition lottery process for the chance state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. The transition lottery process for the chance state is executed in step S1317 in the first control process of the game section (FIG. 40). Since the first control process of the game section is executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning/losing role is completed at the start of the game, the transition lottery process for the chance state is also executed after the winning/losing judgment of the winning/losing role is completed at the start of the game.

First, the chance transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S1901). In this case, the chance transition table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of being a winning number for transition to the chance state ST7. Also, the chance state ST7 has a high probability mode and a low probability mode so that the probability of being a winning number for transition to the ART state ST9 is relatively high and low. In the chance transition table, the random number range for the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode, and the random number range for the chance state ST7, which is the low probability mode, are set separately as the random number range for transition to the chance state ST7. In this case, the chance transition table is set so that the winning number with a lower winning probability has a higher probability of transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S1902). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the chance state transition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and at the timing when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S1902 is compared with the chance transition table read in step S1901 to determine whether or not a transition to chance state ST7 has been won (step S1903).

If the transition to the chance state ST7 is successful (step S1903: YES), the chance win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1904). The chance win flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify that the transition to the chance state ST7 has been successful at the start of the current game, and if the chance win flag is set to "1", a process for transitioning to the chance state ST7 is executed at the end of the game. In other words, the game state will transition to the chance state ST7 in the game following the game in which the transition to the chance state ST7 has been successful. Also, if the transition to the chance state ST7, which is the high probability mode, is successful (step S1905: YES), the high probability flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1906). The high probability flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to identify whether the chance state ST7 is in the high probability mode or not.

Next, the normal processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 48. The normal processing is executed in step S1705 of the response processing at the end of a game (FIG. 44). Since the response processing at the end of a game is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the normal processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the chance win flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2001: YES), this means that a win to transition to chance state ST7 occurred at the start of the current game. In this case, the chance state ST7 transition setting process is executed. Specifically, the chance state counter in the master RAM 74 is set to "5" as information on the number of games to be continued in chance state ST7 (step S2002). The chance state counter is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine whether the game is in chance state ST7 and the number of games remaining to be continued in chance state ST7. If a positive determination is made in step S2001, the chance win flag is cleared to "0".

Then, a chance start command indicating that the chance state ST7 is to start is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2003). By receiving the chance start command, the production side MPU 92 starts the production corresponding to the chance state ST7.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the false premonition counter provided in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2004). The false premonition counter is a counter for the master MPU 72 to identify the false premonition state ST5 and the remaining number of games to continue in the false premonition state ST5. If the value of the false premonition counter is 1 or more (step S2004: YES), an end process for the false premonition state ST5 is executed to end the false premonition state ST5 (step S2005). Specifically, the value of the false premonition counter in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In other words, the chance state ST7 may start even in the middle of the false premonition state ST5, and if the chance state ST7 starts in the middle of the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition state ST5 is ended even if it is in the middle, rather than interrupted.

When the chance state ST7 is entered, a positive judgment is made in step S1309 in the first control process (FIG. 40) for the play section, which is executed after the winning/losing hand determination is completed at the start of one game, and the chance state process is executed (step S1310).

<About chance state processing>
Here, the chance state process will be described. Figure 49 is a flow chart showing the chance state process.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current chance state ST7 is in the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S2101). If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S2101: NO), the lottery table 112 for low probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2102). On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S2101: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2103).

Figure 50(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table 112 for low probability, and Figure 50(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the lottery table 113 for high probability.

In both the low probability lottery table 112 and the high probability lottery table 113, the lottery value information is set in accordance with the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17). All of these lottery value information have a data capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In both the low probability lottery table 112 and the high probability lottery table 113, the lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers "9" to "14" corresponding to the bonus winning data is set so that the winning of the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. In addition, for the other winning numbers, in both the low probability lottery table 112 and the high probability lottery table 113, the lottery value information corresponding to the winning numbers is set so that the lottery numbers with a lower probability of winning in the lottery process (FIG. 17) have a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9. In this case, when comparing the same winning numbers, the lottery value information is set so that the lottery table 113 for high probability has a higher probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 than the lottery table 112 for low probability. In particular, for the winning numbers "15" and "16," the lottery value information is set in the lottery table 112 for low probability so that there is a possibility that the winning number will not result in a transition to ART state ST9, whereas the lottery value information is set in the lottery table 113 for high probability so that the winning number will definitely result in a transition to ART state ST9.

When the processing of step S2102 or step S2103 is executed, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2104). The processing contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the lottery process for transition to ART state ST9, the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d updates 7-bit random numbers, generating random numbers from "0" to "127". When the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d is acquired. The acquired random number is stored in the acquired random number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 17) is obtained from the lottery tables 112, 113 read in step S2102 or step S2103 (step S2105). For example, if the winning number "15" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode, the lottery value information is "80" in decimal and "01010000" in binary. Also, if the winning number "15" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the lottery value information is "255" in decimal and "11111111" in binary.

Subtraction processing is then performed (step S2106). In the subtraction processing, calculation processing is performed to obtain a result obtained by subtracting the lottery value information obtained from the low probability lottery table 112 or the high probability lottery table 113 in step S2105 from the random number obtained in the obtained random number counter 74e of the main RAM 74 in step S2104. This calculation processing may be configured to actually subtract the lottery value information from the random number obtained in the obtained random number counter 74e, or may be configured to calculate the two's complement of the lottery value information and add the calculated two's complement to the obtained random number counter 74e to derive a result similar to that obtained when the lottery value information is actually subtracted from the random number obtained in the obtained random number counter 74e.

In the case of a configuration in which the lottery value information is actually subtracted, if a further subtraction is performed during the subtraction process from the all-zero state of the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e, causing the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e to become all "1", i.e., if the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the minimum value to the maximum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main MPU 72 is set to "1", and if the update from the minimum value to the maximum value is not performed, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Then, if the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the subtraction result falls below all zero and a carry has occurred.

On the other hand, in the case of a configuration in which the two's complement of the lottery value information is added, if further addition is performed during the addition process from the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e being all "1" to the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e being all zero, that is, if the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main MPU 72 is set to "1", and if the update from the maximum value to the minimum value is not performed, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Then, if the carry flag 114 is set to "0", it is determined that the subtraction result falls below all zero and a carry has occurred.

If the result of the subtraction process is below all zero and a carryover occurs (step S2107: YES), it is determined that a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9, and the ART win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2108). The ART win flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9 at the start of the current game, and if the ART win flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition to the preparation state ST8 at the end of the game. In other words, in the game following the game in which a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9, the game state will transition to the preparation state ST8, which is the stage preceding the ART state ST9.

The handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to ART state ST9 is executed will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in FIG. 51. Note that a case will be explained in which the lottery value information is actually subtracted from the random number of the acquired random number counter 74e in the subtraction process in step S2106.

First, we will explain the case where the result of the subtraction process does not fall below all zero, with reference to Figures 51(a1) to 51(a4).

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51 (a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquired random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51 (a2). After that, since the current mode is low probability and the winning number "15" was selected in the role selection process (FIG. 17), the information "01010000" is acquired as the selection value information from the low probability selection table 112 as shown in FIG. 51 (a3). The selection value information is stored in a register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51(a3) is subtracted from the acquired random number counter 74e, which is in the state shown in FIG. 51(a2), so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "00010000" as shown in FIG. 51(a4). In this case, since no further subtraction is performed from the all-zero state of the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e, causing the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e to become all "1", that is, no event occurs in which the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the minimum value to the maximum value, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Therefore, there is no winning in transitioning to the ART state ST9.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the subtraction process is less than all zero, with reference to Figures 51 (b1) to 51 (b4).

In the random number acquisition process (step S2104), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 51 (b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquired random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 51 (b2). After that, since the current mode is high probability and the winning number "15" was selected in the role selection process (FIG. 17), the information "11111111" is acquired as lottery value information from the high probability selection table 113 as shown in FIG. 51 (b3). The lottery value information is stored in a register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 51(b3) is subtracted from the acquired random number counter 74e, which is in the state shown in FIG. 51(b2), so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "01100001" as shown in FIG. 51(b4). In this case, a further subtraction is performed from the all-zero state of the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e, causing the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e to become all "1"s, i.e., an event occurs in which the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the minimum value to the maximum value, and therefore "1" is set to the carry flag 114. Therefore, a transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is fewer than the number of bits in 1 byte. This makes it possible to use a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9, while still being able to use 1 byte of lottery value information in both situations, when creating a 100% winning situation and a situation that may result in a loss.

When the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, if the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for generating a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, unless the situation of all zeros after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, the lottery value information corresponding to 100% will not result in 100% winning. On the other hand, if the situation of all zeros after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to prevent all zeros from being obtained as a random number. Therefore, when the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to 100% at least to a number of bits greater than the number of bits in 1 byte. On the other hand, since the random number used in the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of bits in 1 byte, as described above, it becomes possible to use 1 byte of lottery value information corresponding to 100%. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the lottery value information in advance.

Returning to the explanation of the normal processing (FIG. 48), if the value of the chance state counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more and the game state is the chance state ST7 (step S2006: YES), it is determined whether the ART win flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2007). If the ART win flag is set to "1" (step S2007: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S2008). In this setting process, both the ART win flag and the chance state counter in the master RAM 74 are cleared to "0". In addition, information in the master RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is to be started is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2009). By receiving the preparation start command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S2007: NO), the value of the chance state counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S2010). Then, if the value of the chance state counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2011: YES), the chance state ST7 ends and a return to the normal gaming state ST1 occurs. In this case, a chance end command indicating that the chance state ST7 ends and a return to the normal gaming state ST1 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2012). By receiving the chance end command, the presentation side MPU 92 starts a presentation corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and a return to the normal gaming state ST1.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2006, it is judged whether the main premonition winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2013). If the main premonition winning flag is set to "1", it means that a transition to the main premonition state ST6 was won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for the main premonition state ST6 is executed. Specifically, the setting process for the main premonition counter is executed (step S2014). The main premonition counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the main premonition state ST6 is in the main premonition state ST6 and the remaining number of games to be continued in the main premonition state ST6. In the setting process for the main premonition counter, the number of games to be continued in the main premonition state ST6 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuing games selected by this lottery is between 5 and 10 games, and the winning probability for a longer number of continuing games is set to be higher than the winning probability for a shorter number of continuing games. If a positive determination is made in step S2013, the main premonition winning flag is cleared to "0."

Then, a premonition start command indicating that the premonition state ST6 has started is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2015). The premonition start command contains information about the number of games to continue in the premonition state ST6 that is currently started. By receiving the premonition start command, the presentation side MPU 92 starts the presentation corresponding to the premonition state ST6.

After that, on condition that the value of the false precursor counter is 1 or more (step S2016: YES), a process for terminating the false precursor state ST5 is executed to terminate the false precursor state ST5 (step S2017). Specifically, the value of the false precursor counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In other words, the main precursor state ST6 may start even in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, and if the main precursor state ST6 starts in the middle of the false precursor state ST5, the false precursor state ST5 is not interrupted but is terminated even if it is in the middle.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2013, the value of the main premonition counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2018: YES), the value of the main premonition counter is decremented by 1 (step S2019). Then, if the value of the main premonition counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S2020: YES), a preparation state setting process is executed (step S2021). In this setting process, as already explained, both the ART winning flag and the chance state counter in the master RAM 74 are cleared to "0", and information in the master RAM 74 is set so that the preparation state process of step S1706 is executed in the response process at the end of the game (FIG. 44). After that, a preparation start command indicating that the preparation state ST8 is to be started is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S2022). By receiving the preparation start command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2018, it is judged whether the false premonition winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2023). If the false premonition winning flag is set to "1", it means that a transition to the false premonition state ST5 was won at the start of the current game. In this case, the transition setting process for the false premonition state ST5 is executed. Specifically, the setting process for the false premonition counter is executed (step S2024). The false premonition counter is a counter for the main MPU 72 to specify that the game is in the false premonition state ST5 and the number of games remaining in the false premonition state ST5. In the setting process for the false premonition counter, the number of games remaining in the false premonition state ST5 to be started this time is determined by lottery. In this lottery, the random numbers written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the random number circuit designated by the random number pointer among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used. The number of continuing games selected by this lottery is between 5 and 10 games, and the winning probability for a shorter number of continuing games is set to be higher than the winning probability for a longer number of continuing games. If a positive determination is made in step S2023, the false omen winning flag is cleared to "0."

Then, a false premonition start command indicating that the false premonition state ST5 has started is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2025). The false premonition start command contains information about the number of games to continue in the false premonition state ST5 that is currently started. By receiving the false premonition start command, the presentation side MPU 92 starts a presentation corresponding to the false premonition state ST5.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2023, the value of the false premonition counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2026: YES), and the value of the false premonition counter is decremented by 1 (step S2027). If the value of the false premonition counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 determines that the game state is in the false premonition state ST5, and if the value of the false premonition counter after decrementing by 1 becomes "0", it determines that the false premonition state ST5 has ended.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2026, the value of the advantage maintenance counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S2028: YES), and the value of the advantage maintenance counter is decremented by 1 (step S2029). As already explained, when the ART state ST9 ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state ST1, the advantage maintenance counter is a counter used by the main MPU 72 to determine the number of remaining games in the advantage maintenance game count when the advantage maintenance zone SC2 is to be maintained for the advantage maintenance game count even after transitioning to the normal game state ST1. If the value of the advantage maintenance counter is 1 or more, the main MPU 72 determines that it is an advantage maintenance zone, and if the value of the advantage maintenance counter after decrementing by 1 becomes "0", determines that the advantage maintenance zone has ended.

Next, the normal presentation control process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 52. The normal presentation control process is repeatedly executed in the presentation side MPU 92 at a relatively short cycle (e.g., every 4 milliseconds) when the game state is the normal game state ST1, the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, or the chance state ST7.

First, it is determined whether the real premonition effect flag stored in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2201). The real premonition effect flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the real premonition state ST6 is being executed. If the value of the real premonition effect flag is "0" (step S2201: NO), it is determined whether the real premonition start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2202). If the real premonition start command has been received (step S2202: YES), it is determined whether the false premonition effect flag stored in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2203). The false premonition effect flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the false premonition state ST5 is being executed.

If the false premonition effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2203: NO), the start setting process for the real premonition effect is executed (step S2204). In the start setting process for the real premonition effect, information on the number of games to continue in the real premonition state ST6 set in the currently received real premonition start command is read. Then, a determination table for the real premonition effect corresponding to the information on the number of games to continue is read, and the contents of the series of real premonition effects in the current real premonition state ST6 are determined by lottery using the determination table for the real premonition effect, and the real premonition effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the real premonition effect table, and the real premonition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

Note that, as will be described in detail later, there are cases where the game state in the master MPU 72 is not in the chance state ST7, but a chance presentation corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. In such a situation, when a premonition start command is received from the master MPU 72, the start setting process of the premonition presentation in step S2204 is executed, thereby ending the chance presentation and starting the premonition presentation. In this case, the chance presentation flag set in the presentation RAM 94 is cleared to "0".

If the false premonition effect flag is set to "1" (step S2203: YES), it means that the real premonition state ST6 has started in the middle of the false premonition state ST5. In this case, the premonition effect adjustment process is executed (step S2205). In the premonition effect adjustment process, the real premonition effect table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that the real premonition effect with the continuity of the effect is executed for the content of the false premonition effect at that time. In this case, the real premonition effect table corresponds to the information on the number of games to be continued in the real premonition state ST6 set in the real premonition start command received this time. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the real premonition effect table, and the real premonition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 with the content having continuity with the content of the false premonition effect executed up to that point. In addition, if the real premonition effect starts in the middle of the false premonition effect, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will execute the premonition effect for the total number of games equal to the number of games of the false premonition effect that have been executed up until that point and the number of games of the real premonition effect that will be executed from now on.

When the processing of step S2204 or step S2205 is executed, the real premonition effect flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the value of the false premonition effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S2206).

If the present premonition effect flag is set to "1" (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2207). Receiving the preparation start command means that the present premonition state ST6 has ended and transitioned to the preparation state ST8. In this case, the start setting process for the preparation effect is executed (step S2208). In the start setting process for the preparation effect, a preparation effect table that enables the execution of the preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. The presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the preparation effect table, and the preparation effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can understand that the preparation state ST8 is in by checking the presentation. After that, the value of the present premonition effect flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2209).

If a preparation start command has not been received (step S2207: NO), an update setting process for the main premonition effect is executed (step S2210). In this update setting process, if the timing for updating the main premonition effect has arrived due to the execution of a new game, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the main premonition effect table currently being referenced in response to the start of a new game. This causes the execution content of the main premonition effect to change depending on the number of games that the main premonition effect will continue.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2202, it is determined whether or not the chance performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2211). The chance performance flag is a flag that allows the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance performance flag is "0" (step S2211: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2212). If a chance start command has been received (step S2212: YES), it is determined whether or not the false premonition performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2213).

If the false premonition effect flag is not set to "1" (step S2213: NO), the chance effect start setting process is executed (step S2214). In the chance effect start setting process, a chance effect table that enables the execution of a chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. As already explained, the chance state ST7 continues for five games unless a transition to the ART state ST9 is won during the process. Therefore, the chance effect table is set with data corresponding to an effect that continues for five games. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the chance effect table, and the chance effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that the chance state ST7 is in progress by checking the effect. After that, the chance effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2215).

On the other hand, if the false premonition effect flag is set to "1" (step S2213: YES), the chance waiting flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2216). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that the false premonition effect corresponding to the false premonition state ST5 is being executed and that the chance effect is waiting to start. Here, in the master MPU 72, if a transition to the chance state ST7 is selected in the middle of the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition state ST5 is terminated in the middle and transitioned to the chance state ST7. In contrast, even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the middle of the false premonition effect, the performance side MPU 92 does not terminate the false premonition effect in the middle, and continues the false premonition effect even if the master MPU 72 is executing control corresponding to the chance state ST7. This allows the game state to prioritize transition to chance state ST7 over the continuation of false premonition state ST5, thereby ensuring the player's benefit from the occurrence of chance state ST7, while allowing the false premonition presentation to continue, making it possible to avoid creating a sense of incongruity in the presentation content.

If the chance performance flag is set to "1" (step S2211: YES), it is determined whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S2217). Receiving a preparation start command means that the chance state ST7 has been selected to transition to the ART state ST9, resulting in a transition to the preparation state ST8. In this case, a preparation performance start setting process is executed (step S2218). In the preparation performance start setting process, a preparation performance table that enables the execution of a preparation performance corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the preparation performance table, and the preparation performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. Then, the player can understand that the preparation state ST8 is in place by checking the performance.

If the preparation start command has not been received (step S2217: NO), the chance effect end timing is determined by determining whether the information to be referenced in the chance effect table stored in the performance RAM 94 corresponds to the end timing of the chance effect (step S2219). When the number of continued games is consumed in the chance state ST7, a chance end command is transmitted from the master MPU 72, but the performance MPU 92 does not specify whether the chance end command has been received when determining the end timing of the chance effect. Furthermore, even if the chance end command is received from the master MPU 72, if the information to be referenced in the chance effect table does not correspond to the end timing of the chance effect, it is not determined that the chance effect end timing has occurred. This makes it possible to execute the chance effect for five games, which is the number of continued games in the chance state ST7, when the execution of the chance effect is delayed because a false premonition effect is being executed, as will be described in detail later.

If it is the timing to end the chance effect (step S2219: YES), the chance effect end setting process is executed (step S2220). In the chance effect end setting process, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to these effect tables, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute the normal return effect corresponding to the end of the chance state ST7 and the return to the normal game state ST1, and then the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed. Then, the player can understand that the chance state ST7 has ended and the return to the normal game state ST1 has been returned by checking the effect.

When the processing of step S2218 or step S2220 is executed, the value of the chance effect flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2221). Also, when a negative judgment is made in step S2219, an update setting process for the chance effect is executed (step S2222). In this update setting process, if the timing for updating the chance effect has arrived due to the execution of a new game, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the currently referenced chance effect table in accordance with the start of a new game. As a result, the execution content of the chance effect changes depending on the number of continuing games of the chance effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2212, or if the processing of step S2216 is executed, a performance control process for a false premonition state is executed (step S2223). FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the performance control process for a false premonition state.

If the false premonition effect flag in the performance side RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2301: NO), it is determined whether or not a false premonition start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S2302). If a false premonition start command has been received (step S2302: YES), a false premonition effect start setting process is executed (step S2303). In the false premonition effect start setting process, information on the number of continued games in the false premonition state ST5 set in the currently received false premonition start command is read. Then, a false premonition effect determination table corresponding to the information on the number of continued games is read, and the content of a series of false premonition effects in the current false premonition state ST5 is determined by lottery using the false premonition effect determination table, and the false premonition effect table corresponding to the determination result is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false premonition effect table, and the false premonition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the false premonition effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2304).

If the false premonition effect flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2301: YES), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the false premonition effect by determining whether the information to be referenced in the false premonition effect table stored in the presentation RAM 94 corresponds to the end timing of the false premonition effect (step S2305). If it is the end timing of the false premonition effect (step S2305: YES), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the false premonition effect by determining whether the chance waiting flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2306).

If the chance waiting flag is set to "1" (step S2306: YES), a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S2307). In the chance effect start setting process, a chance effect table that enables the execution of a chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the chance effect table, and the chance effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. The player can then recognize that the chance state ST7 is being entered by checking the effect.

Even in the chance effect start setting process triggered by the chance standby flag being set to "1", a chance effect table is used in which data corresponding to the chance effect continuing for five games, which is the number of games continued in the chance state ST7, is set, just like the chance effect start setting process executed immediately when a chance start command is received from the main MPU 72. And, as already explained, in a situation where a chance effect is being executed, unless the information to be referred to in the chance effect table corresponds to the timing of the chance effect's end, the chance effect will not end even if a chance end command is received from the main MPU 72. As a result, even if the chance state ST7 is entered while the false premonition effect is being executed and the chance effect is put on hold until the false premonition effect ends, and even if the chance effect starts after the false premonition effect ends, the chance effect is executed for five games, which is the number of games continued in the chance state ST7. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the chance state ST7 continues for five games.

After that, the chance waiting flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0", the chance presentation flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1", and the false premonition presentation flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2308).

When the false premonition effect is to end and the chance waiting flag in the performance RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S2305: YES, step S2306: NO), it is determined whether or not a false premonition start command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2309). As already explained, in the master MPU 72, if a transition to the chance state ST7 is selected during the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition state ST5 ends and the chance state ST7 starts, whereas the performance MPU 92 continues the false premonition effect. In this case, for example, if the first false premonition state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games and then the chance state ST7 is entered one game later, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is not selected in the chance state ST7, the game state of the master MPU 72 at the stage when the seventh game of the false premonition effect is executed in the performance MPU 92 is not the false premonition state ST5 or the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. In this case, when the main MPU 72 decides to transition to the false premonition state ST5 under these circumstances, the performance MPU 92 will receive a new false premonition start command while the false premonition performance is being executed.

If the false premonition start command has not been received (step S2309: NO), the system executes the false premonition effect end setting process (step S2310). In the false premonition effect end setting process, the normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false premonition state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effects according to these effect tables, so that the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 execute the normal return effect corresponding to the end of the false premonition state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1, and then executes the normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. The player can then confirm that the premonition effect has ended and the game has returned to the normal game state ST1 by checking the effect.

If a false premonition start command has been received (step S2309: YES), a false premonition effect adjustment process is executed (step S2311). In the false premonition effect adjustment process, a false premonition effect table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that a false premonition effect with continuity of effect is executed for the content of the false premonition effect at that time. In this case, the false premonition effect table corresponds to the information on the number of games to be continued in the false premonition state ST5 set in the currently received false premonition start command. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false premonition effect table, and a false premonition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 with content that has continuity with the content of the false premonition effect that has been executed up until that point. In addition, if a false premonition effect is started in the middle of a false premonition effect, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will execute premonition effects for the total number of games of the false premonition effect that has been executed up until that point and the number of games of the false premonition effect that will be executed from now on.

If it is not the time to end the false premonition effect (step S2305: NO), it is determined whether the chance wait flag in the presentation RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S2312). If the chance wait flag is set to "1" (step S2312: YES), it is determined whether a preparation start command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2313). As already explained, even if the presentation MPU 92 is executing control to execute the false premonition effect, a situation may occur in which the game state in the master MPU 72 is in the chance state ST7. In such a situation, if the master MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7, the master MPU 72 will send a preparation start command to the presentation MPU 92 even if the false premonition effect is being executed.

If a preparation start command has been received (step S2313: YES), a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S2314). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables the execution of a preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the preparation effect table, and the preparation effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Then, the player can understand that the preparation state ST8 is reached by checking the effect. Note that if the preparation effect start setting process is executed when a false premonition effect is being executed, an effect corresponding to a win to transition to the ART state ST9 is executed in a manner that interrupts the series of stories of the false premonition effect. After that, the false premonition effect flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" and the chance waiting flag in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2315).

When the chance waiting flag is set to "1" and a preparation start command has not been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2312: YES, step S2313: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance end command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2316). When the number of continued games in the chance state ST7 controlled by the master MPU 72 while the false premonition performance is being executed has been exhausted, a chance end command is received from the master MPU 72 while the chance waiting flag is set to "1". When a chance end command has been received (step S2316: YES), the chance waiting flag in the performance RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S2317).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2312 or if a negative judgment is made in step S2316, it is judged whether or not a false premonition start command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S2318). As already explained, in the master MPU 72, if a transition to the chance state ST7 is won during the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition state ST5 is ended and the chance state ST7 is started, whereas the performance MPU 92 continues the false premonition performance. In this case, for example, if the first false premonition state ST5 is determined to continue for 10 games and then the chance state ST7 is entered one game later, and the transition to the ART state ST9 is not won in the chance state ST7, the game state of the master MPU 72 at the stage when the performance MPU 92 executes the seventh game of the false premonition performance is not the false premonition state ST5 or the chance state ST7, but the normal game state ST1. In this case, when the main MPU 72 decides to transition to the false premonition state ST5 under these circumstances, the performance MPU 92 will receive a new false premonition start command while the false premonition performance is being executed.

If a false premonition effect start command has not been received (step S2318: NO), a false premonition effect update setting process is executed (step S2319). In this update setting process, if the timing for updating the false premonition effects has come due to the execution of a new game, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the currently referenced false premonition effect table in response to the start of a new game. This causes the execution content of the false premonition effect to change depending on the number of games that the false premonition effect will continue.

If a false premonition effect command has been received (step S2318: YES), a false premonition effect adjustment process is executed (step S2320). In the false premonition effect adjustment process, a false premonition effect table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that a false premonition effect with continuity of effect is executed for the content of the false premonition effect at that time. In this case, the false premonition effect table corresponds to the information on the number of games to be continued in the false premonition state ST5 set in the currently received false premonition start command. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false premonition effect table, and a false premonition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 with content that has continuity with the content of the false premonition effect that has been executed up until that point. In addition, if a false premonition effect is started in the middle of a false premonition effect, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will execute premonition effects for the total number of games of the false premonition effect that has been executed up until that point and the number of games of the false premonition effect that will be executed from now on.

Next, the manner in which the false premonition effect and chance effect are executed will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 54. FIG. 54(a) shows the period during which the player is in the false premonition state ST5, FIG. 54(b) shows the period during which the player is in the chance state ST7, FIG. 54(c) shows the period during which the player is in the preparation state ST8, FIG. 54(d) shows the period during which the false premonition effect is being executed, FIG. 54(e) shows the period during which the chance effect is being executed, and FIG. 54(f) shows the period during which the effect indicating that the player has won the ART state ST9 is being executed.

First, we will explain the case where the false premonition state ST5 transitions to the chance state ST7, but the chance state ST7 ends before the end of the false premonition effect.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), at timing t1, the false premonition state ST5 is started under control of the master MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 54(d), a false premonition presentation is started under control of the presentation MPU 92. After that, at timing t2, the game state transitions from the false premonition state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under control of the master MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). However, even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation is not started, as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false premonition presentation continues, as shown in FIG. 54(d).

After that, at the timing of t3 when the false premonition effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 54(d), the number of games to continue in the chance state ST7 is consumed, and the chance state ST7 ends under the control of the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 54(b). Even in this case, the number of games to continue in the false premonition effect that was set at the timing of the transition to the false premonition state ST5 at the timing of t1 has not been consumed, so the false premonition effect continues as shown in FIG. 54(d). After that, at the timing of t4, the number of games to continue in the false premonition effect is consumed, and the false premonition effect ends as shown in FIG. 54(d).

Next, we will explain the case where the false premonition state ST5 transitions to the chance state ST7 and the transition to the ART state ST9 is won while the false premonition effect is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), at timing t5, the false premonition state ST5 is started under control of the master MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 54(d), a false premonition presentation is started under control of the presentation MPU 92. After that, at timing t6, the game state transitions from the false premonition state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under control of the master MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). However, even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation is not started, as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false premonition presentation continues, as shown in FIG. 54(d).

After that, at the timing of t7, a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 is executed in the chance state ST7 under the control of the master MPU 72, and a transition lottery process results in a winning transition. Therefore, at the timing of t7, the game state transitions from the chance state ST7 to the preparation state ST8 under the control of the master MPU 72, as shown in Figures 54(b) and 54(c). Also, at the timing of t7, the false premonition presentation ends, as shown in Figures 54(d) and 54(f), and a presentation indicating that the ART state ST9 has been won is started. This presentation is then executed until the timing of t8.

As described above, a sudden presentation indicating that ART state ST9 has been won can be executed during the false premonition presentation, providing a sense of surprise to the player. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Next, we will explain the case where the false premonition state ST5 transitions to the chance state ST7 and the chance effect continues to start even when the false premonition effect has ended because the chance state ST7 remains.

As shown in FIG. 54(a), at timing t9, the false premonition state ST5 is started under control of the master MPU 72, and as shown in FIG. 54(d), a false premonition presentation is started under control of the presentation MPU 92. After that, at timing t10, the game state transitions from the false premonition state ST5 to the chance state ST7 under control of the master MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 54(a) and FIG. 54(b). However, even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in this way, the chance presentation is not started, as shown in FIG. 54(e), and the false premonition presentation continues, as shown in FIG. 54(d).

After that, at the timing of t11, when the chance state ST7 is maintained under the control of the main MPU 72, the false premonition effect ends as shown in FIG. 54(d), and the chance effect starts as shown in FIG. 54(e). In this case, at the timing of t11, a predetermined number of games have already been played since the transition to the chance state ST7, so the number of games remaining to continue in the chance state ST7 is less than the 5 games that is the reference number of games to end the chance state ST7. However, the number of games to continue in the chance effect that starts at the timing of t11 is set to 5 games, which is the reference number of games to end the chance state ST7.

After that, at the timing of t12, the chance state ST7 ends as shown in FIG. 54(b). However, because there are still games remaining for the chance presentation at the timing of t12, the chance presentation continues as shown in FIG. 54(e). Therefore, even though the game state is not in the chance state ST7 after the timing of t12, the chance presentation is executed. After that, at the timing of t13, the chance presentation ends as shown in FIG. 54(e).

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 before and after the timing of t11 will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagrams of Figures 55(a) and 55(b). Figure 55(a) shows the state in which an image corresponding to a false premonition effect is displayed on the image display device 63 before the timing of t11, and Figure 55(b) shows the state in which the image display device 63 starts to display an image corresponding to a chance effect after the timing of t11.

As shown in FIG. 55(a), in the false premonition performance, the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are displayed on the image display device 63, and a video display is performed in which the first character image G4 and the second character image G5 are facing off against each other. This video display of a confrontation is also performed in the actual premonition performance. If the premonition performance ends without a win for transition to the ART state ST9, a video display is performed in which the first character image G4 is ultimately defeated by the second character image G5, and if a win for transition to the ART state ST9 is achieved and the premonition performance ends, a video display is performed in which the first character image G4 is ultimately victorious over the second character image G5.

As shown in FIG. 55(b), in the chance presentation, the image display device 63 displays a suggestion image G6 indicating the chance state ST7, and a game number image G7 indicating the remaining number of games to continue in the chance presentation is displayed. In this case, in either case where the chance presentation starts at the timing of transition to the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72, or where the false premonition presentation ends in a situation where the chance presentation is in the chance state ST7 under the control of the main MPU 72 and the chance presentation starts following the false premonition presentation, an image indicating 5 games, which is the reference number of games to end the chance state ST7, is displayed as the game number image G7. As a result, even if the number of games remaining in the chance state ST7 to continue is less than the reference number of games to end at the timing when the chance presentation starts following the false premonition presentation because the games in the chance state ST7 have already been consumed when the false premonition presentation is being executed, it is possible to make the player expect to win the transition to the ART state ST9 over the reference number of games to end.

In addition, in the chance state ST7, each game is given the opportunity to execute a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9, and if a transition to the ART state ST9 is selected even in the middle of the chance state ST7, a transition to the preparation state ST8 occurs. Therefore, if a chance effect is executed following a false premonition effect and the number of continuing games in the chance effect is greater than the number of remaining continuing games in the chance state ST7, a transition to the preparation state ST8 can occur while the chance effect is being executed if it is before the chance state ST7 ends, and if the chance effect is being executed after the chance state ST7 ends, it is possible to make the player recognize that the transition to the ART state ST9 was not selected in the chance state ST7.

<Regarding bonus status processing>
Next, the processing related to the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) will be described. Fig. 56 is a flowchart showing the bonus processing executed by the master MPU 72. The bonus processing is executed in step S1701 in the response processing at the end of a game (Fig. 44). Since the response processing at the end of a game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, the bonus processing is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

If a BB win occurs that corresponds to the BB winning data stored in the main RAM 74 (step S2401: YES), the BB flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2402). The BB flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to identify that the game is in the BB state ST3.

If the BB winning that has been established this time is the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning (step S2403: YES), the specific bonus flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2404). The 3rd BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 3rd BB winning is set to an index value IV = 7 in any of the normal mode lottery table (Figure 18), the 1st RT mode lottery table (Figure 20), and the 2nd RT mode lottery table (Figure 22), and the 4th BB winning data that enables the establishment of the 4th BB winning is set to an index value IV = 8 in any of these lottery tables. These index values IV = 7, 8 are set as roles with the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". In other words, the specific bonus flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to specify whether or not a bonus winning with no set difference in the winning probability has been established. Details will be explained later, but when a bonus win occurs in which there is a set difference in the probability of winning, the game zone is not set to shift from the normal zone SC1 to the advantageous zone SC2 at the start of the bonus state, whereas when a bonus win occurs in which there is no set difference in the probability of winning, the game zone is set to shift from the normal zone SC1 to the advantageous zone SC2 at the start of the bonus state.

On the other hand, if an RB win corresponding to the RB winning data stored in the master RAM 74 is achieved (step S2405: YES), the RB flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2406). The RB flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the RB state is ST4.

If the currently established RB win is a first RB win (step S2407: YES), the specific bonus flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2408). The first RB winning data that allows the first RB win to be established is set to index value IV=9 in any of the normal mode lottery table (FIG. 18), the first RT mode lottery table (FIG. 20), and the second RT mode lottery table (FIG. 22). The index value IV=9 is set as a role with the same winning probability between the set values of "1" to "6". Therefore, in order for the master MPU 72 to determine that the current RB win corresponds to the establishment of a bonus win with no set difference in the winning probability, the specific bonus flag is set to "1" in step S2408.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2403, if the processing of step S2404 is executed, if a negative judgment is made in step S2407, or if the processing of step S2408 is executed, it is judged whether the game state when the bonus role corresponding to the current bonus winning is won is the present premonition state ST6 (step S2409). The present premonition state ST6 is a game state in which a transition to the preparation state ST8 is confirmed when the number of continued games in the present premonition state ST6 is consumed. Therefore, if it is the present premonition state ST6 (step S2409:: YES), an ART winning process is executed to transition to the preparation state ST8 after the end of the current bonus state (step S2410). In the ART winning process, the ART winning flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1". The ART winning flag is a flag for the main MPU 72 to specify that it is necessary to transition to the preparation state ST8 after the end of the bonus state. In addition, in the ART winning process, an ART winning command indicating that a transition to ART state ST9 has been won is sent to the production side MPU 92. By receiving the ART winning command, the production side MPU 92 executes a performance indicating that the ART state ST9 will be reached after the current bonus state ends at the start of the current bonus state.

If a negative determination is made in step S2409, or if the processing of step S2410 is executed, the total payout counter provided in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S2411). The total payout counter is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to determine the total number of gaming media granted to the player in the bonus state. The main MPU 72 determines whether the condition for ending the bonus state has been met based on the value of the total payout counter.

Then, a bonus start command indicating that the bonus state is to be started is sent to the production side MPU92 (step S2412). The bonus start command contains information indicating whether the bonus state to be started this time is BB state ST3 or RB state ST4. By receiving the bonus start command, the production side MPU92 starts a performance corresponding to the type of bonus state to be started this time.

Then, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2413). The master ending performance flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that an ending performance is being executed, which is initiated when the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, as will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S2413, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2414).

In the freeze counter setting process, a freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the start of the bonus. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus process, the game waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. In this way, when the game waits for the start of a new game, the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 are displayed to show the effect of the bonus state starting, so that the player can clearly recognize that a transition to the bonus state has occurred, and the transition to the bonus state is emphasized, giving the player a sense of satisfaction. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

If the BB flag or RB flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2415: YES), the bonus state process is executed (step S2416). The bonus state process controls the progress of the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4.

Next, the bonus processing at the start of the game executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 57. The bonus processing at the start of the game is executed in step S618 in the lottery process for winning or losing the winning combination (FIG. 17). The processing in step S618 is executed after the winning or losing combination has been determined at the start of the game.

If this is the start game of the bonus state, which is the first game executed after transitioning to the bonus state (step S2501: YES), the process for the start game of the bonus state shown in steps S2502 to S2520 is executed. Specifically, it is first determined whether the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current bonus state has started in a situation in which the bonus state is in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S2502). If the advantageous zone flag is set to "1" (step S2502: YES), processing is executed to grant the player benefits related to the ART state ST9 from step S2506 onwards. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of starting the bonus state in a situation in which the bonus state is in the advantageous zone SC2.

As already explained, when the false premonition state ST5 is reached, a false premonition effect is executed, but a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the false premonition state ST5 ends. However, when in the false premonition state ST5, the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained. In this case, if the bonus state is initiated in the advantageous zone SC2 as described above, the player may be granted benefits related to the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to make the false premonition state ST5 function not only as a game state that makes the player expect the real premonition state ST6 to be reached, but also as a game state that is advantageous to the player when the bonus state is initiated. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the premonition effect.

Even if the favorable zone flag is not set to "1" (step S2502: NO), if the specific bonus flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2503: YES), the favorable zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2504), and the favorable zone display unit 67 is switched from the off state to the on state (step S2505). As already explained, when the specific bonus flag is set to "1", this bonus state is triggered by a bonus role in which there is no set difference in the winning probability. In other words, when the bonus state corresponding to a bonus role in which there is no set difference in the winning probability is reached, even if the game zone before the bonus state was the normal zone SC1, it will be set to the favorable zone SC2 in the game in which the bonus state was started. Then, by setting the favorable zone SC2 in the game in which the bonus state was started, a process for granting the player the profit related to the ART state ST9 after step S2506 is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role where there is no set difference in the probability of winning more advantageous than a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role where there is a set difference in the probability of winning.

Here, as bonus roles with no set difference in winning probability, there are roles with 3rd BB winning data (index value IV = 7) and roles with 4th BB winning data (index value IV = 8). When the bonus internal state ST2 in which the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data is set is reached in the favorable section SC2, an opportunity to transition from the favorable section SC2 to the normal section SC1 is given. Since the favorable section SC2 is forcibly terminated when the number of continued games reaches the upper limit number of games, it is preferable that the number of games consumed in a situation other than the ART state ST9 is not measured as the number of continued games in the favorable section SC2 as much as possible. In this case, if the bonus state is reached and the favorable section SC2 is definitely set in the starting game, it is possible to transition to the normal section SC1 before the bonus state is started, for example, when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role with no set difference in winning probability is started in the false premonition state ST5, the number of games consumed in the situation of the false premonition state ST5 and the favorable section SC2 is cleared once, and then a new transition to the favorable section SC2 is made possible.

The processing configuration for producing this action will be described. In the second control process of the game zone (FIG. 45), if the bonus internal state ST2 in which the 3rd BB winning data or the 4th BB winning data is set (step S1816: YES), it is determined whether the game state in which the winning data is set is the present premonition state ST6, the preparation state ST8, or the ART state ST9 (step S1817). If a positive determination is made in step S1817, the initialization process of the favorable zone SC2 is not executed. If the normal zone SC1 is to be transitioned to, the initialization process of the favorable zone SC2 is executed and the right to execute the ART state ST9 is also lost, so in the present premonition state ST6, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the initialization process of the favorable zone SC2 is not executed in order to prevent the loss of the right.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1817, it is judged whether or not the winning number information of any of "1" to "3" has been set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) (step S1818). These winning numbers are winning numbers that will result in the first bell win if the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the correct stopping sequence. Note that in the bonus internal state ST2, even if the advantageous zone SC2 is present and the winning number information is set, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not be announced.

If a positive judgment is made in step S1818, it is judged whether the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the current game is a stopping sequence corresponding to a fall (step S1819). The stopping sequence corresponding to a fall is a stopping sequence in which the first bell winning is not achieved, and is set as a different stopping sequence for each winning number from "1" to "3". In addition, the stopping sequence corresponding to a fall is a stopping sequence in which the stopping sequence of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at the first stop, second stop, and third stop is determined. By setting the stopping sequence corresponding to a fall in this way, it is possible to execute the initialization process of the advantageous zone SC2 when the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R by the player coincidentally matches the stopping sequence corresponding to a fall. The stop sequence corresponding to the fall is not limited to the stop sequence of all reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the first stop, second stop, and third stop, and may be determined only by the type of reels 32L, 32M, 32R at the first stop. Also, although the stop sequence corresponding to the fall does not execute a performance that suggests to the player that the advantageous zone SC2 is temporarily ending, the configuration may be such that such a performance is executed.

If the stopping sequence corresponds to a fall (step S1819: YES), and the value of the unannounced flag in the main RAM 74 is "0" (step S1820: YES), the initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2 is executed (step S1821), and the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1822). As a result, the game zone temporarily transitions to the normal zone SC1. Even if the game zone has temporarily transitioned to the normal zone SC1 in this way, if a third BB win or a fourth BB win is achieved and the game zone transitions to the BB state ST3, the game zone will definitely transition to the advantageous zone SC2 in the first game of the BB state ST3, and the profit arising from being in the advantageous zone SC2 will also be awarded.

The player may be notified of the order in which the falls are prevented from occurring. In this case, it is possible to proactively cause a transition to the normal section SC1 in the above-mentioned situation.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus processing at the start of the game (FIG. 57), if a positive judgment is made in step S2502 or if the processing of step S2505 is executed, it is judged whether or not the bonus winning that triggered the start of the current bonus state has been achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone in the normal gaming state ST1 (step S2506). If a positive judgment is made in step S2506, the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2507). In other words, if a bonus winning is achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone in the normal gaming state ST1, the game corresponding to the bonus winning will be executed in the advantageous zone SC2, and the game will transition to the preparation state ST8 after the bonus state corresponding to the bonus winning ends. This allows the player to expect a bonus winning to be achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone. Then, an ART winning command indicating that a transition to the ART state ST9 has been achieved is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S2508). By receiving the ART win command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the ART state ST9 will occur after the current bonus state ends in the start game of the bonus state.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2506 or when the process of step S2508 is executed, on the condition that the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2509: YES), or on the condition that the ART winning flag of the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2510: YES), a process is executed to add the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. As the process for adding, first, the add-on table at the start of the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2511). The add-on table at the start of the bonus is common regardless of the type of the current bonus state, but at least one of the probability of winning the add-on and the number of games expected to be added may be configured to differ depending on the type of bonus state. In addition, the add-on table at the start of the bonus is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the add-on and the number of games expected to be added may be configured to differ depending on the setting value.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2512). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the bonus start lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S2512 is compared with the bonus start add-on table read in step S2511 to determine whether or not an add-on win has been made (step S2513). Specifically, the bonus start add-on table has a lottery result set indicating that the number of added games is "0" games, and multiple lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more games are set. In step S2513, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more games has been selected.

If an additional bonus is awarded (step S2513: YES), an additional bonus setting process is executed (step S2514). In the additional bonus setting process, the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 is added with the value of the additional bonus game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result. After that, an additional bonus command during bonus indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2515). The additional bonus command contains information about the currently generated number of additional bonus games. By receiving the additional bonus command during bonus, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of additional bonus games has been awarded.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (steps S2509 and S2510: NO), a process is executed to determine whether to transition to the ART state ST9. As a process to determine whether to transition to the ART state ST9, the ART direct hit table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2516). The ART direct hit table is common regardless of the type of the current bonus state, but the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the type of bonus state. Also, the ART direct hit table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the setting value.

Then, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2517). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the lottery process for transition to ART state ST9, the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d is acquired at the timing when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). Then, the random number acquired in step S2517 is compared with the ART direct hit table read out in step S2516 to determine whether or not the transition to ART state ST9 has been won (step S2518).

If a win has been made to transition to ART state ST9 (step S2518: YES), the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2519). After that, an ART win command indicating that a win has been made to transition to ART state ST9 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2520). By receiving the ART win command, the presentation side MPU 92 causes a presentation indicating that the ART state ST9 will occur after the current bonus state ends to be executed in the start game of the bonus state.

When a negative judgment is made in step S2501, when a negative judgment is made in step S2503, when a negative judgment is made in step S2513, when the processing of step S2515 is executed, when a negative judgment is made in step S2518, or when the processing of step S2520 is executed, a process at the start of the game during the bonus is executed (step S2521). In other words, in a game in which a bonus state has been started, even if the process of adding the number of continued games in the ART state ST9, the process of selecting a transition to the ART state ST9, or the process of selecting a transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, the process at the start of the game during the bonus is executed. Then, in the process at the start of the game during the bonus, the process of selecting a lottery for adding the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 or the process of selecting a transition to the ART state ST9 is executed.

Figure 58 is a flowchart showing the processing at the start of a game during a bonus. In the processing at the start of a game during a bonus, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1", i.e., whether or not the playing zone is advantageous zone SC2 (step S2601). If it is advantageous zone SC2 (step S2601: YES), it is determined whether or not a lottery trigger role has been won in the current game (step S2602). Specifically, it is determined that a lottery trigger role has been won if a role that allows the first watermelon win or a role that allows the cherry win has been won.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2602, on the condition that the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won is the preparation state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2603: YES), or on the condition that the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2604: YES), a process is executed to add the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. As the process for adding, first, the add-on table during the bonus is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2605). The add-on table during the bonus is common regardless of the type of the current bonus state, but at least one of the probability of winning the add-on and the number of games expected to be added may be configured to differ depending on the type of the bonus state. In addition, the add-on table during the bonus is common regardless of the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time, but at least one of the probability of winning the add-on and the number of games expected to be added may be configured to differ depending on the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time. In addition, the bonus add-on table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning the add-on and the expected number of games to be added may be configured to differ depending on the setting value.

Here, the add-on table during the bonus is set to have a lower probability of winning an add-on and a smaller number of games with an expected add-on than the add-on table at the start of the bonus read from the main ROM 73 in step S2511 in the bonus processing at the start of the game (Figure 57). This makes it possible to increase the expectation of an add-on for the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 in the game where the bonus state has started compared to the second game or later in the bonus state. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning an add-on and the number of games with an expected add-on may be the same or approximately the same for the add-on table during the bonus and the add-on table at the start of the bonus.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2606). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the bonus addition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S2606 is compared with the bonus add-on table read in step S2605 to determine whether or not an add-on win has been obtained (step S2607). Specifically, the bonus add-on table has a lottery result set indicating that the number of added games is "0" games, and multiple lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more games are set. In step S2607, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more games has been selected.

If an additional bonus is awarded (step S2607: YES), an additional bonus setting process is executed (step S2608). In the additional bonus setting process, the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 is added with the value of the additional bonus game number corresponding to the currently selected lottery result. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to identify the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. After that, an additional bonus command during the bonus indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state is sent to the presentation MPU 92 (step S2609). The additional bonus command contains information about the number of additional bonus games that has been generated this time. By receiving the additional bonus command during the bonus, the presentation MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of additional bonus games has been awarded.

On the other hand, if the game state at the time of winning the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state is neither the preparation state ST8 nor the ART state ST9, and the ART winning flag in the main RAM 74 is not set to "1" (steps S2603 and S2604: NO), a process is executed to determine whether to transition to the ART state ST9. As a process to determine whether to transition to the ART state ST9, the bonus transition table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2610). The bonus transition table is common regardless of the type of the current bonus state, but the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the type of bonus state. In addition, the bonus transition table is common regardless of the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time, but the probability of transition to the ART state ST9 may be different depending on the type of the lottery trigger role that was won this time. In addition, the bonus transition table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 may be different depending on the setting value.

Here, the transition table during a bonus is set to have a lower probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 than the ART direct hit table read from the main ROM 73 in step S2516 in the bonus processing (Figure 57) at the start of the game. This makes it possible to increase the expectation of winning the transition to ART state ST9 in a game in which the bonus state has been started compared to the second game or later in the bonus state. However, this is not limited to this, and the probability of winning the transition to ART state ST9 may be the same or approximately the same for the transition table during a bonus and the ART direct hit table.

Then, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2611). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained with reference to FIG. 16. In the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, as already explained, the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "255", and the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p by the 4th dedicated random number circuit 102d is acquired at the timing when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13). Then, the random number acquired in step S2611 is compared with the bonus transition table read out in step S2610 to determine whether or not the transition to the ART state ST9 has been won (step S2612).

If a win has been made to transition to ART state ST9 (step S2612: YES), the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2613). After that, an ART win command indicating that a win has been made to transition to ART state ST9 is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2614). By receiving the ART win command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation in the current game indicating that the game will transition to ART state ST9 after the current bonus state ends.

Next, the bonus state process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 59. Note that the bonus state process is executed in step S2416 in the bonus process (FIG. 56). Since the bonus process is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the bonus state process is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If game media has been awarded in the current game (step S2701: YES), a value corresponding to the number of game media awarded this time is added to the total payout counter in the main RAM 74 (step S2702). Then, it is determined whether the value of the total payout counter after the addition is equal to or greater than the end reference number corresponding to the current bonus state (step S2703). Specifically, if the current bonus state is BB state ST3, it is determined whether it is equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (e.g., "350"), and if the current bonus state is RB state ST4, it is determined whether it is equal to or greater than the RB end reference number (e.g., "150").

If a positive judgment is made in step S2703, on the condition that the game state at the time when the bonus role that triggered the current bonus state was won was the ready state ST8 or the ART state ST9 (step S2704: YES), or on the condition that the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2705: YES), a ready state setting process is executed (step S2706). In this setting process, the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". Also, information in the main RAM 74 is set so that the ready state process in step S1706 is executed in the response process at the end of play (Figure 44). As a result, the game state after the end of the current bonus state becomes the ready state ST8.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2705, or if the processing of step S2706 is executed, a bonus end command indicating that the bonus state will end is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S2707). The bonus end command contains information indicating whether the game state after the bonus state ends will be the normal game state ST1 or the preparation state ST8. By receiving the bonus end command, the presentation side MPU92 starts a presentation indicating that the bonus state ends, and after the presentation ends, starts a presentation corresponding to the game state after the bonus state ends.

Then, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2708). The master ending performance flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that an ending performance is being executed, which is initiated when the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 approaches the upper limit number of games, as will be described in detail later. If a negative determination is made in step S2708, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S2709).

In the freeze counter setting process, a freeze counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 10 seconds) at the end of the bonus. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the bonus state process, the game waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. In this state of waiting for the start of a new game, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 are activated to display an effect corresponding to the end of the bonus state, allowing the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state has ended. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

<About ART state ST9>
Next, the ART state ST9 will be described. First, the preparation state process executed in the preparation state ST8 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 60. The preparation state process is executed in step S1706 in the response process at the end of a game (FIG. 44). The response process at the end of a game is executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, so the preparation state process is also executed after all the rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the current role selection process (FIG. 17) (step S2801). If a positive determination is made in step S2801, the direct addition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current role selection process (FIG. 17) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2802). In this case, the direct addition table is set so that the winning number with a lower probability of winning has a higher probability of winning a direct addition and a larger number of games expected to be added. Note that the direct addition table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but at least one of the probability of winning a direct addition and the number of games expected to be added may be configured to differ depending on the setting value.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2803). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the direct addition lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S2803 is compared with the direct-addition table read in step S2802 to determine whether or not a direct-addition win has been made (step S2804). Specifically, the direct-addition table contains a lottery result indicating that the number of added games is "0", and multiple lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more are set. In step S2804, it is determined whether any of the lottery results for the number of added games that is 1 or more has been selected.

If a direct addition win is obtained (step S2804: YES), an addition setting process is executed (step S2805). In the addition setting process, the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74 is added with the value of the number of added games corresponding to the currently selected lottery result. After that, in the preparation state ST8, an addition command in preparation indicating that the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S2806). The addition command contains information on the number of added games that has occurred this time. By receiving the addition command in preparation, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of added games has been added.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2801, if a negative judgment is made in step S2804, or if the processing of step S2806 is executed, it is judged whether or not a second RT replay has been won in the current game (step S2807). If a second RT replay has been won (step S2807: YES), this means that an opportunity has occurred to transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9, so ART start processing is executed (step S2808). In the ART start processing, information is set in the main RAM 74 so that the ART state processing of step S1707 is executed in the response processing at the end of play (Figure 44). This changes the game state to the ART state ST9.

In addition, in the ART start process, if the game state before the start of the preparation state ST8 is the bonus state and the game state immediately before the bonus state is the ART state ST9, this means that the game has returned to the ART state ST9, so settings are made to return to the game state in the ART state ST9 immediately before transitioning to the bonus state. However, if an addition to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 occurs in the bonus state, the game will return to the ART state ST9 from the state in which the added number of games has been added. In addition, in the ART start process, if the current preparation state ST8 is triggered by a win to transition to the ART state ST9 in the BB state ST3, RB state ST4, this precursor state ST6, or chance state ST7, the information on the number of games starting the ART state ST9, which is 50 games, is added to the ART game number counter in the master RAM 74. In this case, if the game state before the preparation state ST8 is a bonus state and not only has a win to transition to the ART state ST9 occurred in that bonus state, but also an additional win has occurred for the number of continued games remaining in the ART state ST9, the ART state ST9 will start with the number of continued games granted for the additional win being added. Also, if an additional win has occurred in the preparation state ST8 for the number of continued games remaining in the ART state ST9, the ART state ST9 will start with the number of continued games granted for the additional win being added.

Then, an ART start command indicating that a transition to ART state ST9 has occurred is sent to the production side MPU92 (step S2809). The ART start command contains information indicating whether or not the current transition to ART state ST9 corresponds to a return to ART state ST9, and if it does not correspond to a return to ART state ST9, contains information indicating that 50 games have been added as the starting game number for ART state ST9. By receiving the ART start command, the production side MPU92 executes a presentation indicating that ART state ST9 has started, and executes a presentation corresponding to ART state ST9 after the presentation ends. Furthermore, if it corresponds to a return to ART state ST9, the production side MPU92 resumes the execution state of the presentation at the timing when ART state ST9 ended midway the previous time.

<About the addition in ART state ST9>
Next, we will explain the addition in ART state ST9.

Figure 61 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory area of the master RAM 74 used by the master MPU 72 in the ART state ST9. As shown in Figure 61 (a), the master RAM 74 is provided with an ART game number counter 121, a B loop continuation counter 122, and a provisional setting flag 123. The ART game number counter 121 is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. The B loop continuation counter 122 is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the number of games in the B loop, which is a state in which the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added in each game, in which the number of games continues. The provisional setting flag 123 is a flag for the master MPU 72 to specify whether or not a direct addition win has been made in the constant lottery process (Figure 63) executed before the role lottery process (Figure 17) when one game is started in the ART state ST9.

Figure 61 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the memory area of the presentation side RAM 94 used by the presentation side MPU 92 in the ART state ST9. As shown in Figure 61 (b), the presentation side RAM 94 is provided with an ART subtraction target counter 125, a display counter 126, a stock game number counter 127, and a stock area 128 for special added presentation.

The ART subtraction target counter 125 is a counter that is subtracted by 1 by the presentation side MPU 92 each time a game is played in the ART state ST9. When the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 becomes "0", a presentation is executed indicating whether or not the ART state ST9 will end.

The display counter 126 is a counter that is decremented by 1 by the presentation side MPU 92 each time one game is played in the ART state ST9, similar to the ART decrement target counter 125. In the ART state ST9, the value set in the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

The stock game number counter 127 is a counter in which the difference between the actual remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 and the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 is set. In other words, the stock game number counter 127 is a counter that allows the production side MPU 92 to identify the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 that has not been notified to the player but has actually been acquired.

The special add-on effect stock area 128 is an area for storing information indicating that a special add-on effect, which is an effect in which the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is added over multiple games, should be executed, and information on the type of the special add-on effect.

Next, the process for adding bonuses executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 62. The process for adding bonuses is executed in step S619 in the process for selecting the winning combination (FIG. 17). The process in step S619 is executed after the winning combination has been determined at the start of the game.

First, it is determined whether or not the game is in the ART state ST9 (step S2901). If the game is not in the ART state ST9, the processing from step S2902 onwards is not executed. As a result, in a game state other than the ART state ST9, the processing from step S2902 onwards is not executed.

Here, for example, any BB winning data or RB winning data may be set during the ART state ST9, but in the bonus internal state ST2 in which the bonus winning data is set, the processing from step S2902 onwards is not executed. Even if the bonus internal state ST2 is entered in the favorable zone SC2, it will be maintained in the favorable zone SC2 unless the transition condition to the normal zone SC1 as already explained is met, and the favorable zone SC2 will also be maintained in the subsequent bonus state. Also, if the ART state ST9 transitions to the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 during the ART state ST9, the processing from step S2902 onwards is not executed regardless of whether the transition went through the bonus internal state ST2 or not. In this case, after the end of the bonus state, the ART state ST9 will be returned to via the preparation state ST8, but when the ART state ST9 is returned to, the status of the ART state ST9 will be the status immediately before the ART state ST9 was interrupted midway. For example, if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the A loop described below, the A loop will be resumed after returning to the ART state ST9, and if the ART state ST9 is interrupted in the middle of the B loop described below, the B loop will be resumed after returning to the ART state ST9. This is also true for the presentation in the presentation side MPU 92.

In the case of ART state ST9 (step S2901: YES) and the processing of steps S2902 to S2905 is executed, the processing of steps S2906 and after is executed. In the processing of steps S2906 and after, a lottery process for the occurrence of a direct addition, a lottery process for the occurrence of a loop A, and a lottery process for the occurrence of a loop B are executed as a process for determining whether or not to add on the number of continued games in ART state ST9. A direct addition is an addition mode in which an addition occurs only in a game that is a direct addition winning in the lottery process for a direct addition, and the number of added games is notified to the player. In contrast, the A loop and the B loop are an addition state in which a fixed number of added games (specifically, 50 games) is granted in each game while the continuation lottery process results in a win. However, even if the number of added games is granted in the A loop and the B loop, the number of added games is not immediately notified to the player, and the number of added games is notified to the player when the notification condition is established. Additionally, the conditions for transitioning to these added states differ between Loop A and Loop B, and the manner in which the number of added games is notified to the player also differs.

In step S2906, a process for direct addition is executed. In the process for direct addition, it is determined whether or not the number of continued games in ART state ST9 is to be added in the current game, and if an addition is to be generated, the number of games to be added is determined. In the process for direct addition, the number of games to be added may be determined based on the results of the constant lottery process executed in step S406 of the normal process (Figure 13). Therefore, the constant lottery process will first be explained. Figure 63 is a flowchart showing the constant lottery process.

First, it is determined whether or not the game is in the ART state ST9 (step S3001). If the game is not in the ART state ST9 (step S3001: NO), the continuous lottery process ends. As a result, if the game is in a gaming state other than the ART state ST9, the process from step S3002 onwards will not be executed.

If it is in the ART state ST9 (step S3001: YES), the common add-on table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3002). Figure 64 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the common add-on table. In the common add-on table, a random number corresponding to a win is set so that the probability of a direct add-on win is 5%. In addition, only one type of add-on game number is set in the case of a direct add-on win, specifically 10 games. Here, the regular lottery process is executed before the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is executed in the normal process (Figure 13). Therefore, the regular lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process for the role (Figure 17). In other words, the regular lottery process is executed in the same manner regardless of whether or not any role is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17), and regardless of the type of role that is won in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

Then, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3003). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the continuous lottery process, the random number written to the 15th latch register 103o is acquired from the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. In detail, as already explained, the third dedicated random number circuit 102c generates random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written to the 15th latch register 103o by the third dedicated random number circuit 102c is acquired.

Then, the random number acquired in step S3003 is compared with the common add-on table read out in step S3002 to determine whether or not a direct add-on win has occurred (step S3004). As already explained, the common add-on table contains random numbers corresponding to wins that result in a direct add-on win, so in step S3004, it is determined whether or not the random number acquired in step S3003 matches any of the random numbers corresponding to wins set in the common add-on table. If a positive determination is made in step S3004, the provisional setting flag 123 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3005).

Next, the direct addition process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 65. The direct addition process is executed in step S2906 of the addition process (FIG. 62).

In step S3101, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17). If a positive determination is made in step S3101, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S3101, the processes of steps S3102 to S3107 are not executed.

The winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV whose winning probability is the same among the set values "1" to "6". In other words, if an index value IV whose winning probability is the same among the set values "1" to "6" is selected in the role selection process (FIG. 17), an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the role selection process (FIG. 17) shown in steps S3102 to S3107 is executed, and if the role selection process (FIG. 17) results in a loss or if an index value IV whose winning probability differs among the set values "1" to "6" is selected, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, by configuring the role selection process (Figure 17) to execute an additional selection process corresponding to the result of the role selection process (Figure 17) shown in steps S3102 to S3107 on the condition that an index value IV with the same winning probability is selected among the setting values of "1" to "6" in the role selection process (Figure 17), it becomes possible to make it impossible to predict the setting value based on the addition of the number of additional games selected in the additional selection process.

In the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), first, the direct add-on table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3102). Figure 64 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the direct add-on table. In the direct add-on table, the winning probability and the range of the number of added games in the event of a win are set in correspondence with each of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15".

Specifically, for the winning number "4", a random number corresponding to a win is set so that the winning probability is 10%, and 15 to 30 games are set as the number of added games. The number of added games for 15 to 30 games is 15, 20, 25, and 30 games, and the random number corresponding to a win that results in a direct added win is associated with one of these numbers of added games. For the winning number "6", a random number corresponding to a win is set so that the winning probability is 25%, and 20 to 40 games are set as the number of added games. The number of added games for 20 to 40 games is 20, 25, 30, 35, and 40 games, and the random number corresponding to a win that results in a direct added win is associated with one of these numbers of added games. For the winning number "8", a random number corresponding to a win is set so that the winning probability is 60%, and 25 to 50 games are set as the number of added games. The number of added games for 25 games to 50 games are 25 games, 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games, and the random number corresponding to a direct added win corresponds to one of these numbers of added games. For the winning number "15," a random number corresponding to a win is set so that the probability of winning is 100%, and 50 to 100 games are set as the number of added games. The number of added games for 50 games to 100 games are 50 games and 100 games, and the random number corresponding to a direct added win corresponds to one of these numbers of added games.

As described above, when the add-on lottery process is executed using the direct add-on table, the probability of winning the direct add-on is higher than the probability of winning the direct add-on when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table in the regular lottery process (Figure 63). In addition, the number of add-on games selected as a result of winning the direct add-on is greater when the add-on lottery process is executed using the direct add-on table than when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table in the regular lottery process (Figure 63). This makes it possible to make the advantage of executing the add-on lottery process using the direct add-on table higher than the advantage of executing the regular lottery process.

In order to make the advantage of executing the add-on lottery process using the direct add-on table higher than the advantage of executing the regular lottery process, the expected value of the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the direct add-on table may be configured to be higher than the expected value of the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table in the regular lottery process. In this case, the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the direct add-on table may be configured to be a number of games less than the number of add-on games selected when the add-on lottery process is executed using the common add-on table.

After executing the process of step S3102, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3103). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer.

Then, the random number acquired in step S3103 is compared with the direct addition table read out in step S3102 to determine whether or not a direct addition has been won (step S3104). If it corresponds to any of the numbers of games to be added (step S3104: YES), the add-on setting process is executed (step S3105). In the add-on setting process, the value of the number of games to be added corresponding to the lottery result selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. Then, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S3106). The direct addition command contains information on the number of games to be added this time and also contains information on the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct addition command, the performance side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the number of games to be added this time has been added.

Then, the provisional setting flag 123 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3107). As already explained, the provisional setting flag 123 is set to "1" when a direct addition win occurs in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63). In this case, by configuring the provisional setting flag 123 to be cleared to "0" in step S3107, even if a direct addition win occurs in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), if a direct addition win occurs in the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (FIG. 17), the result of the direct addition win in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is invalidated. This makes it possible to prevent the number of added games from being awarded in duplicate, and makes it possible to award the number of added games on the side where the player has a higher advantage.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3101 or if a negative judgment is made in step S3104, it is judged whether or not the provisional setting flag 123 in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S3108). In other words, it is judged whether or not a direct addition win has been made in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63). If a positive judgment is made in step S3108, the addition setting process is executed (step S3109). Specifically, the value of "10", which is the fixed number of added games selected in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63), is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3110). The direct addition command is set with information on the number of added games that has occurred this time, and also with information on the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct add command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of added games has been awarded. After that, the provisional setting flag 123 in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3111).

Figure 66 is a time chart showing how the number of added games is directly added by the constant lottery process (Figure 63) and the direct addition process (Figure 65). Figure 66(a) shows the execution period of one game, Figure 66(b) shows the timing when the constant lottery process (Figure 63) is executed, Figure 66(c) shows the timing when the role lottery process (Figure 17) is executed, Figure 66(d) shows the timing when the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17) is executed, and Figure 66(e) shows the timing when the number of added games is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

First, we will explain the case where both the regular lottery process (Figure 63) and the additional lottery process corresponding to the results of the role lottery process (Figure 17) are executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), a new game is started at timing t1, and as shown in FIG. 66(b), a regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed at timing t1, and then, as shown in FIG. 66(c), a role lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed at timing t2. In this case, one of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" is selected in the role lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, at the following timing t3, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed as shown in FIG. 66(d).

In this case, if a direct addition win is made in the add-on lottery process, the number of added games selected in the add-on lottery process is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e). On the other hand, even if a direct addition win is not made in the add-on lottery process, if a direct addition win is made in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) executed beforehand, a fixed number of added games is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 as shown in FIG. 66(e).

Next, we will explain the case where the regular lottery process (Figure 63) is executed, but the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17) is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), a new game starts at the timing of t4, and as shown in FIG. 66(b), a regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed at the timing of t4, and then, as shown in FIG. 66(c), a role lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed at the timing of t5. In this case, none of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" is selected in the role lottery process (FIG. 17). Therefore, in this game, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (FIG. 17) is not executed, as shown in FIG. 66(d).

However, a direct addition win occurs in the continuous lottery process (Figure 63) executed at timing t4. Therefore, at timing t6, a fixed number of added games is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the master RAM 74, as shown in Figure 66 (e).

As described above, the lottery process (FIG. 63) is executed at all times, regardless of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17). This makes it possible to award an additional number of games in the ART state ST9 regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17). This makes it possible for the player to expect the award of an additional number of games in each game in the ART state ST9.

If the result of the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is a predetermined result, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for that role (Figure 17) is executed. Then, if an immediate additional win is achieved in the additional lottery process, the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is awarded regardless of the result of the regular lottery process (Figure 63). This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of additional games is awarded in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (Figure 17).

Returning to the explanation of the addition process (FIG. 62), after the direct addition process (step S2906) is executed, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", or "16" has been set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) (step S2907). If a positive determination is made in step S2907, it is determined whether or not "1" is set in either the A loop flag or the B loop flag in the main RAM 74, thereby determining whether the current situation is in the A loop or the B loop (step S2908). If a negative determination is made in step S2908, the A loop generation selection process is executed. Specifically, first, the A loop selection table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S2909). The A loop selection table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the current A loop generation selection process, and is common between the setting values of "1" to "6".

Figure 67 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the A loop lottery table. In the A loop lottery table, there are a losing result, a selection result of the first continuation lottery table, a selection result of the second continuation lottery table, a selection result of the third continuation lottery table, and a selection result of the fourth continuation lottery table as lottery results. When any of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables is selected in the A loop occurrence lottery process, the A loop occurrence wins. In addition, in the A loop lottery table, the selection rates of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables are the same, but this is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other. In addition, the A loop lottery table may be configured such that the probability of the A loop occurrence win differs depending on the type of winning number that triggers the execution of the A loop occurrence lottery process. For example, the A loop lottery table may be configured so that the winning number with a low winning probability has a higher probability of the A loop occurrence win. In addition, the A loop lottery table is common between the setting values of "1" to "6", but the probability of the A loop occurrence win may differ depending on the setting value.

In the first to fourth continuation lottery tables, data is set that determines the continuation rate of the A loop according to the number of games in which the A loop continues, as shown in FIG. 67(b). In this case, the setting manner of the continuation rate differs depending on the type of the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, the continuation rate of the first game is set to 90% in the first continuation lottery table, 50% in the second continuation lottery table, 30% in the third continuation lottery table, and 10% in the fourth continuation lottery table. The continuation rate of the second game is set to 10% in the first continuation lottery table, 20% in the second continuation lottery table, 30% in the third continuation lottery table, and 90% in the fourth continuation lottery table. The continuation rate of the third game is set to 10% in the first continuation lottery table, 20% in the second continuation lottery table, 30% in the third continuation lottery table, and 30% in the fourth continuation lottery table. The continuation rate for the fourth to tenth games is set to 10% in the first continuation lottery table, 20% in the second continuation lottery table, 30% in the third continuation lottery table, and 10% in the fourth continuation lottery table. When the A loop enters the 11th game, the continuation rate for the first game is used again. In other words, ten games constitute one cycle, and the continuation lottery table to be used is used in a loop for each cycle.

Returning to the explanation of the topping-up process (Figure 62), after the A-loop lottery table is read in step S2909, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2910). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the A-loop generation lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained from the random number circuit among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer obtain the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l. Then, the random number obtained in step S2910 is compared with the A loop lottery table read out in step S2909 to determine whether or not the A loop has been generated (step S2911).

If the A loop has been generated (step S2911: YES), the A loop flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2912). This will result in an A loop addition from the next game. In addition, the continuation lottery table selected using the A loop lottery table in step S2911 is stored in the master RAM 74 (step S2913).

After that, an addition process is executed on the ART game number counter 121 (step S2914). In this addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if an A loop occurrence is won in a game in which the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is "0", it is possible to continue the ART state ST9 and generate an addition due to the A loop. In addition, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even if a direct addition is won. As a result, if an addition of 10 games occurs as a result of an A loop occurrence being won, it is possible to prevent the player from distinguishing whether it is due to a direct addition or an A loop occurrence.

Then, an A-loop winning command indicating that the A-loop has been won is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S2915). The A-loop winning command contains not only information indicating that the A-loop has been won, but also information indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been increased by "10" and information on the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the A-loop winning command, the presentation side MPU92 executes an expectation presentation to make the player look forward to the occurrence of a special addition to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S2907, it is judged whether the current state is in the A loop or the B loop by judging whether either the A loop flag or the B loop flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2916). If a negative judgment is made in step S2916, it is judged whether the value of the cycle counter provided in the master RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the cycle reference value (step S2917). The cycle counter is a counter for the master MPU 72 to specify the timing for executing the B loop occurrence lottery process, and is incremented by 1 when a new game is started in the ART state ST9, which is neither the A loop nor the B loop, and is cleared to "0" when the B loop occurrence lottery process is executed. The cycle reference value is set to "100". Therefore, when 100 or more games have been executed in the ART state ST9, which is neither the A loop nor the B loop, the B loop occurrence lottery process is executed.

Here, even if the value of the period counter becomes equal to or greater than the period reference value, if the direct addition occurrence lottery process or the A loop occurrence lottery process is executed, the B loop occurrence lottery process will not be executed. This makes it possible to reduce the number of lottery processes that occur overlappingly at the start of one game. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 72.

If the value of the period counter is equal to or greater than the period reference value (step S2917: YES), the B loop generation lottery process from step S2919 onwards is executed. Also, even if the value of the period counter is not equal to or greater than the period reference value, if the winning number "41" is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) (step S2918: YES), the B loop generation lottery process from step S2919 onwards is executed. The winning number "41" corresponds to the index value IV=17 in the second RT mode selection table (FIG. 22), and only normal replay winning data is set for that role.

In the B loop generation lottery process, the B loop lottery table is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S2919). The B loop lottery table is common regardless of the winning number that triggered the execution of the current B loop generation lottery process, and is common between the setting values of "1" to "6".

Figure 67 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the B loop lottery table. In the B loop lottery table, there are a miss result, a selection result of the fifth continuation lottery table, a selection result of the sixth continuation lottery table, a selection result of the seventh continuation lottery table, and a selection result of the eighth continuation lottery table as lottery results. When any of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is selected in the B loop occurrence lottery process, the B loop occurrence is a win. In this case, the probability of the B loop occurrence being a win is set lower than the probability of the A loop occurrence being a win, but the probability of the B loop occurrence being a win may be the same or approximately the same as the probability of the A loop occurrence being a win, or the probability of the B loop occurrence being a win may be set higher than the probability of the A loop occurrence being a win. In addition, in the B loop lottery table, the selection rates of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables are the same, but this is not limited to this, and the selection rates may be different from each other.

The probability of a B loop occurring as a winning combination may be different when the value of the period counter is equal to or greater than the period reference value and when the winning number "41" is set in the role selection process (Figure 17). For example, the probability of a B loop occurring as a winning combination may be higher in the former case than in the latter case, or may be lower in the former case than in the latter case. The B loop selection table is common between the setting values "1" to "6", but the probability of a B loop occurring as a winning combination may differ depending on the setting value.

In the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables, data is set that determines the continuation rate of the B loop according to the number of games in which the B loop continues, as shown in FIG. 67(b). In this case, the setting manner of the continuation rate differs depending on the type of the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables. Specifically, as the continuation rate of the first game, the fifth continuation lottery table sets 10%, the sixth continuation lottery table sets 100%, the seventh continuation lottery table sets 25%, and the eighth continuation lottery table sets 60%. As the continuation rate of the second game, the fifth continuation lottery table sets 90%, the sixth continuation lottery table sets 50%, the seventh continuation lottery table sets 80%, and the eighth continuation lottery table sets 60%. As the continuation rate of the third game, the fifth continuation lottery table sets 90%, the sixth continuation lottery table sets 100%, the seventh continuation lottery table sets 80%, and the eighth continuation lottery table sets 60%. The continuation rate for the fourth to tenth games is set to 90% in the fifth continuation lottery table, 50% in the sixth continuation lottery table, 80% in the seventh continuation lottery table, and 60% in the eighth continuation lottery table. When the B loop enters the eleventh game, the continuation rate for the first game is used again. In other words, ten games constitute one cycle, and the continuation lottery table to be used is used in a loop for each cycle.

Returning to the explanation of the topping-up process (Figure 62), after the B loop lottery table is read in step S2919, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S2920). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the B loop generation lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the 1st to 12th latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained from the random number circuit among the 1st to 12th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer is obtained. Then, the random number obtained in step S2920 is compared with the B loop lottery table read out in step S2919 to determine whether or not the B loop has occurred (step S2921).

If a B loop has been generated (step S2921: YES), the B loop flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S2922). This will result in an additional bonus from the B loop from the next game. In addition, the continuation lottery table selected using the B loop lottery table in step S2921 is stored in the master RAM 74 (step S2923).

After that, an addition process is executed on the ART game number counter 121 (step S2924). In this addition process, "10" is added to the ART game number counter 121. As a result, if a B loop is generated in a game in which the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 becomes "0", it is possible to continue the ART state ST9 and generate an additional bonus by the B loop.

In step S2924, a direct-add command corresponding to the addition of 10 games is sent, instead of a command indicating that the B loop has been won. The direct-add command also contains information about the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct-add command, the presentation side MPU92 executes a presentation indicating that an additional game number of 10 games has been granted. On the other hand, it does not execute a presentation corresponding to the winning of the B loop. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is internally added in a situation that the player is not aware of. Incidentally, 10 games is the number of games that can be selected even when a direct-add win is made. This makes it possible to prevent the player from distinguishing whether an additional 10 games is due to a direct-add win or a B loop win when an additional 10 games is generated as a result of a B loop win.

Next, the A-loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 68. The A-loop processing is executed in step S2903 when the A-loop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the top-up processing (FIG. 62) (step S2902: YES). As already explained, the top-up processing is executed after the winning/losing role determination is completed at the start of the game, so the A-loop processing is also executed after the winning/losing role determination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 (step S3201). That is, in the A loop, 50 games are added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 each time a game is played. After that, an A loop addition command indicating that an addition has occurred due to the A loop is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3202). Upon receiving the A loop addition command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a process to add the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation side RAM 94, but does not execute a presentation corresponding to the reception of the A loop addition command. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is internally added to without the player being aware of it.

After that, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is obtained from the continuation lottery table to be used that is stored in the main RAM 74 among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables (step S3203). Specifically, a continuation rate pointer is provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" when the A loop is started. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set in the first game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. In addition, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 each time one game is played in the A loop. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set in the second game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is "3", the continuation rate set in the third game in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and when the value of the continuation rate pointer is any of "4" to "10", the continuation rate set in the fourth game or later in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. Furthermore, if the value of the continuation rate pointer exceeds "10" after adding 1, the value of the continuation rate pointer is returned to its initial value of "1". As a result, the continuation lottery table that is the target of use among the first through fourth continuation lottery tables will be used repeatedly every 10 game cycles.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3204). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the continuation lottery process of the A loop, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S3204 is compared with the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate determined in step S3203 to determine whether or not a continuation win has occurred (step S3205).

If a continuation win occurs (step S3205: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3206). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after incrementing by 1 exceeds "10" (step S3207: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value of "1" (step S3208). This causes the continuation lottery table that is the target of use among the first to fourth continuation lottery tables to be used repeatedly in 10 game cycles.

On the other hand, if the continuation win is not obtained (step S3205: NO), the A-loop flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3209). This ends the A-loop. After that, an A-loop end command indicating that the A-loop has ended is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S3210). By receiving the A-loop end command, the production side MPU 92 executes processing corresponding to the end of the A-loop.

As described above, in the A loop, each time a game is executed, the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games and the continuation lottery process of the A loop is executed. The continuation rate of this A continuation lottery process is determined as a scenario according to the number of continued games in the A loop in the first to fourth continuation lottery tables. Then, the A loop will continue as long as a continuation win is obtained in the continuation lottery process of the A loop. This makes it possible to significantly increase the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 by entering the A loop.

Next, the B loop processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Figure 69. The B loop processing is executed in step S2905 when the B loop flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" in the top-up processing (Figure 62) (step S2904: YES). As already explained, the top-up processing is executed after the winning/losing role determination is completed at the start of the game, so the B loop processing is also executed after the winning/losing role determination is completed at the start of the game.

First, "50" is added to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74 (step S3301). That is, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 each time a game is executed. This number of games added is the same as the number of games added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 each time a game is executed in the A loop. This makes it possible to make the degree of advantage the same for the number of games added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the A loop and the B loop. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of games added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game may be different but approximately the same for the A loop and the B loop, the number of games in the A loop may be greater than the B loop, or the number of games in the B loop may be greater than the A loop.

Then, the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 in the master RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S3302). As already explained, the B loop continuation counter 122 is a counter that allows the master MPU 72 to determine the number of games in which the B loop is continuing.

Then, a B loop addition command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92, indicating that an addition has occurred due to the B loop (step S3303). Upon receiving the B loop addition command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a process to add to the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation side RAM 94, but does not execute a presentation corresponding to the reception of the B loop addition command. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is internally added to without the player being aware of it.

Then, the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate of the current game is obtained from the continuation lottery table to be used that is stored in the main RAM 74 among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables (step S3304). Specifically, a continuation rate pointer is provided in the main RAM 74, and the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to "1" when the B loop has started. Note that the continuation rate pointer is also used in the A loop, but since the A loop and the B loop do not occur at the same time, there is no problem if it is used in both the A loop and the B loop.

When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "1", the continuation rate set in the first game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. In addition, the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by one each time one game is played in the B loop. When the value of the continuation rate pointer is "2", the continuation rate set in the second game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, when the value of the continuation rate pointer is "3", the continuation rate set in the third game in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time, and when the value of the continuation rate pointer is any of "4" to "10", the continuation rate set in the fourth game or later in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables becomes the continuation rate to be used this time. In addition, when the value of the continuation rate pointer after incrementing by one exceeds "10", the value of the continuation rate pointer is reset to the initial value of "1". As a result, the continuation lottery table to be used among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables is repeatedly used in a 10-game cycle.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3305). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the B loop continuation lottery process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S3305 is compared with the continuation winning value corresponding to the continuation rate determined in step S3304 to determine whether or not a continuation win has occurred (step S3306).

If a continuation win occurs (step S3306: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is incremented by 1 (step S3307). If the value of the continuation rate pointer after incrementing by 1 exceeds "10" (step S3308: YES), the value of the continuation rate pointer is set to the initial value of "1" (step S3309). This causes the continuation lottery table that is the target of use among the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables to be used repeatedly in 10 game cycles.

On the other hand, if the continuous win is not obtained (step S3306: NO), the B loop flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3310). This ends the B loop.

Then, it is determined whether the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 in the main RAM 74 is 21 or more (step S3311). In other words, it is determined whether the B loop has continued for 21 games or more.

As already explained, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the number of continued games in ART state ST9 for each game. Therefore, if the B loop continues for 21 games or more, this means that the number of continued games has been increased by 1050 games or more in the B loop. Even if the number of continued games is increased in the B loop, a presentation to notify the occurrence of this increase is not performed each time, but rather, when the B loop ends after it has continued for 21 games or more, a presentation to notify the addition of the number of continued games is performed all at once.

In this case, the condition that the number of continued games in the B loop is 21 or more is set as the condition for performing the effect, so that it is possible to notify the addition of 1000 games or more at once. In other words, if 1000 games are to be added, it is sufficient for the B loop to continue for 20 games, but since the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 will also be consumed over the 20 games that the B loop continues, if the B loop is started under a situation where the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is 10 games, it will be necessary to consume the number of games added in the B loop from the 11th game of the B loop. In that case, since part of the 1000 games has already been consumed before the notification of the addition of 1000 games is executed, it will not be possible to execute the effect of notifying the addition of 1000 games. In contrast, the condition for executing the effect of announcing the additions in the B loop collectively is that the B loop must continue for 21 games or more. This means that the number of added games resulting from the number of games exceeding 20 will be equal to or greater than the number of games played in the B loop, making it possible to guarantee the announcement of an addition of 1,000 games or more.

If the value of the B loop continuation counter 122 is 21 or more, it is determined whether or not the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 exceeds the upper limit number of games (specifically, 1500 games) for the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 (step S3312). Then, if a positive determination is made in step S3312, the processing in steps S3313 and S3314 is not executed, and the presentation of announcing an addition of 1000 games or more is not executed.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous zone SC2 is forcibly terminated, and accordingly, the ART state ST9 is forcibly terminated even if there is still a remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. In this case, if the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is notified including the amount exceeding the upper limit number of games even though the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 has been exceeded, there is a risk that the player will be given a strong impression that the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 has been forcibly invalidated when the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, and the stronger this impression becomes the greater the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9. On the other hand, if the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 exceeds the upper limit of the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, 1500 games), the presentation that notifies the player of the addition of 1000 or more games at once is not executed, thereby making it possible to prevent the player from feeling disadvantaged as described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3312, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S3313). In addition, a special freeze command indicating that a special freeze effect should be executed is sent to the effect side MPU 92 (step S3314). The special freeze command includes information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop.

In the freeze counter setting process, the freeze counter in the main RAM 74 is set with numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in the B loop process, it waits in step S408 in the normal process (FIG. 13). As a result, even if a new game has started, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a waiting state for the start of rotation. In this way, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are in a waiting state for the start of rotation, the performance side MPU 92 causes the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 to execute a special freeze effect in response to receiving a special freeze command. In the special freeze effect, a performance is executed in which an addition of 1000 games or more is announced at once. In addition, since the special freeze command contains information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop, the production side MPU 92 derives ("number of games continued in the B loop" - "value obtained by dividing "number of games played in the B loop" by "number of games added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games)" rounded up to the nearest whole number") x "number of games added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games)" and announces the result of this derivation. This makes it possible to announce the addition of more than 1000 games that have not yet been played, even when the number of games played in the B loop is taken into account.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3312, or if the processing of step S3314 is executed, the B loop continuation counter 122 in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S3315).

As described above, in the B loop, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time a game is executed, and the continuation lottery process of the B loop is executed. The continuation rate of this continuation lottery process is determined in the fifth to eighth continuation lottery tables as a scenario corresponding to the number of continued games in the B loop. The B loop continues as long as a continuation win occurs in the continuation lottery process of the B loop. This makes it possible to significantly increase the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 by entering the B loop. Furthermore, the number of games added in the B loop is notified to the player on the condition that a situation exists in which an addition of 1000 games or more can be notified. This makes it possible to proactively provide an impactful addition notification of an addition of 1000 games or more.

Next, the ART state processing executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 70. Note that the ART state processing is executed in step S1707 in the response processing at the end of play (FIG. 44). Since the response processing at the end of play is executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game, the ART state processing is also executed after all of the rotations of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped in one game.

First, the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S3401). Then, on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S3402: YES), the ART termination process from step S3403 onwards is executed.

In the ART termination process, first, termination processing of the ART state ST9 is executed (step S3403). In this termination processing, data is set to transition the game state from the ART state ST9 to the normal game state ST1. As a result, for example, in the response processing at the time of game termination (Figure 44), the normal processing of step S1705 is executed.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued (step S3404). The number of games that can be continued is set to 1200 games. In other words, it is determined whether the timing to end the ART state ST9 has arrived when the number of games that can be continued in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, which is 1200 games. This number of games that can be continued is set to a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games that can be continued in the advantageous zone SC2, and is also set to a number of games that is less than the number of games that can be continued at which the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2 starts.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3404, the advantage maintenance lottery table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S3405). A winning value corresponding to the advantage maintenance winning is set in the advantage maintenance lottery table. The advantage maintenance lottery table is common regardless of the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 that ends this time or the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9, but a configuration in which multiple types are set so that the selection targets differ depending on the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 or the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 may be configured. For example, when the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number of games, an advantage maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning the advantage maintenance winning compared to when the number of games is greater than the predetermined number may be configured to be selected, and when the number of game media acquired in the ART state ST9 is less than a predetermined number, an advantage maintenance lottery table with a higher probability of winning the advantage maintenance winning compared to when the number of game media is greater than the predetermined number may be configured to be selected. In this case, the smaller the profit obtained in ART state ST9, the higher the probability that the favorable zone SC2 will be maintained after the end of ART state ST9.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S3406). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the lottery process for generating the advantageous maintenance section, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number obtained in step S3406 is compared with the advantage maintenance lottery table read in step S3405 to determine whether or not an advantage maintenance win has been obtained (step S3407).

If an advantage maintenance win is obtained (step S3407: YES), a value corresponding to the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically, "10") is set in the advantage maintenance counter in the main RAM 74 (step S3408). As a result, even after the ART state ST9 has ended, the play area is maintained in the advantage maintenance area SC2 until the advantage maintenance number of games has been played. After that, an advantage maintenance command indicating a transition to the advantage maintenance area is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S3409). By receiving the advantage maintenance command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation corresponding to the end of the ART state ST9, and executes a presentation corresponding to the advantage maintenance area after the presentation ends.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3404, or if a negative judgment is made in step S3407, an ART end command indicating that ART state ST9 has ended is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S3410). By receiving the ART end command, the presentation side MPU92 causes a presentation corresponding to the end of ART state ST9 to be executed, and after the end of the presentation, causes a presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 that is not an advantageous maintenance zone to be executed.

<About the performance in ART state ST9>
Next, the performance in the ART state ST9 will be described. First, an overview of the performance occurring in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 71. FIG. 71(a) shows the execution period of the A loop, FIG. 71(b) shows the execution period of the B loop, FIG. 71(c) shows the timing of the direct addition, FIG. 71(d) shows the execution period of the direct addition performance, FIG. 71(e) shows the execution period of the special addition performance, FIG. 71(f) shows the execution period of the special freeze performance, FIG. 71(g) shows the execution period of the stock release performance, and FIG. 71(h) shows the execution period of the ending performance.

At timing t1 in ART state ST9, the master MPU 72 generates a direct addition to the number of games to be continued in ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 71(c). In this case, a direct addition effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 from timing t1 to timing t2, as shown in FIG. 71(d). In this direct addition effect, an effect corresponding to the occurrence of a direct addition to the number of games to be continued in ART state ST9 is executed, and an image indicating the number of games to be directly added that has been determined by the master MPU 72 is displayed on the image display device 63.

In the ART state ST9, at the timing of t3, the A loop is started by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71(a). At the timing of t3, the special add-on effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 71(e), but an expectation effect that makes the player expect the occurrence of the special add-on effect is started by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. The expectation effect can be executed even in a situation where the special add-on effect is not executed. If the expectation effect is executed, the player will expect the special add-on effect to occur after that. Then, the expectation effect ends at the timing of t4. In this case, even if the A loop is continued by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 71(a), a special add-on effect corresponding to the number of add-on games generated by the A loop by the timing of t4 is started as shown in FIG. 71(e). The special add-on effect continues over multiple games, and the number of add-on games corresponding to the execution of the current special add-on effect is distributed and notified in each game of the multiple games. For example, if the special bonus effect corresponds to an additional 100 games and continues over two games, an additional 50 games will be announced for each game.

Even if the special add-on effect is being executed as shown in FIG. 71(e), at timing t5, the main MPU 72 generates a direct add-on for the remaining number of games to be played in ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 71(c), and the direct add-on effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 from timing t5 to timing t6 as shown in FIG. 71(d).

As shown in FIG. 71(a), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends at the timing of t7. In this case, while the A loop is being executed, it is determined whether or not multiple special add-on effects will be executed depending on the number of add-on games generated by the A loop. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(e), the special add-on effect may continue to be executed even after the A loop has ended. The special add-on effect ends at the timing of t8.

At timing t9 in ART state ST9, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the master MPU 72 starts a B loop. At timing t9, no effect corresponding to the occurrence of a B loop is executed. Even when a B loop is being executed as shown in FIG. 71(b), at timing t10, as shown in FIG. 71(c), the master MPU 72 generates a direct addition to the remaining number of games to be continued in ART state ST9, and as shown in FIG. 71(d), a direct addition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 from timing t10 to timing t11.

Then, as shown in FIG. 71(b), the main MPU 72 ends the B loop at timing t12. In this case, the number of continued games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, although one game has been started in the main MPU 72, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are waiting to start spinning, and a special freeze effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 from timing t12 to timing t13, as shown in FIG. 71(f). In the special freeze effect, an additional number of 1000 or more games is announced as the additional number of games remaining to be continued in the ART state ST9.

After that, at the timing of t14, the presentation-side continued game count to be subtracted, which is measured by the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the presentation-side RAM 94, becomes "0". In this case, if a value of 1 or more is set in the stock game count counter 127 of the presentation-side RAM 94, this means that there is a remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 that is not subject to subtraction. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71(g), a stock release presentation corresponding to the continuation of the ART state ST9 is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 from the timing of t14 to the timing of t15.

At time t16 in ART state ST9, when the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST9 corresponds to the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in advantageous zone SC2, the number of continuing games in advantageous zone SC2 becomes the number of games that triggers the start of the ending presentation. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 71 (h), at time t16, the ending presentation is started by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. The ending presentation then continues until time t17 when the number of continuing games in advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

The processing contents in the presentation side MPU 92 to enable the execution of the various presentations described above will be explained below. Figure 72 is a flowchart showing the non-normal presentation control processing executed by the presentation side MPU 92. Note that the non-normal presentation control processing is repeatedly executed in the presentation side MPU 92 at relatively short intervals (e.g., 4 milliseconds) when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, or ART state ST9.

If an ending performance command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S3501: YES), the production side ending performance flag stored in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3502). If the production side ending performance flag is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), the ending performance process is executed (step S3504). The ending performance process will be described in detail later.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3503, it is judged whether or not a preparation-in-progress add-on command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3505). As already explained, the preparation-in-progress add-on command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when a direct-in-progress add-on win occurs in the direct-in-progress lottery process in the preparation state ST8. If a preparation-in-progress add-on command has been received (step S3505: YES), the current number of added games set in the preparation-in-progress add-on command is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S3506). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current number of added games becomes the object of subtraction after transition to the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of continued games resulting from the addition of the current number of added games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 after transition to the ART state ST9.

After that, the preparation additional effect setting process is executed (step S3507). In the preparation additional effect setting process, an additional table that enables the execution of an effect indicating that an additional addition to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has occurred in the preparation state ST8 is read from the presentation side ROM 93. The additional table corresponds to the current number of additional games. The presentation side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the additional table, whereby a direct additional effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and an image indicating the current number of additional games is displayed on the image display device 63.

As already explained, the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 may be added even in the bonus state. In this case, the master MPU 72 sends a bonus-time add-on command. When the performance MPU 92 receives a bonus-time add-on command from the master MPU 72, it adds the current number of added games set in the bonus-time add-on command to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 in the performance RAM 94 in other performance processing (step S3520). It also reads out an add-on table that enables the execution of a performance indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state. The add-on table corresponds to the current number of added games. The performance execution control is performed by the performance MPU 92 according to the add-on table, so that a direct add-on performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and an image indicating the current number of added games is displayed on the image display device 63.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3505, or if the processing of step S3507 is executed, it is judged whether or not an ART start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3508). As already explained, the ART start command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when ART state ST9 is started. If an ART start command has been received (step S3508: YES), it is judged whether or not the current transition of ART state ST9 corresponds to a return to ART state ST9 based on the information set in the ART start command (step S3509).

If it does not correspond to a return to the ART state ST9 (step S3509: NO), the start game number (specifically, 50 games) corresponding to the new start of the ART state ST9 set in the ART start command is added to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 of the production side RAM 94 (step S3510). In this case, if the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has not been added in the bonus state and preparation state ST8 before the ART state ST9 is started, the values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are "50" corresponding to the start game number. On the other hand, if the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added in the bonus state and preparation state ST8 before the ART state ST9 is started, the value obtained by adding the number of games generated by the addition to the start game number is set in the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3509, or if the processing of step S3510 is executed, the ART start performance setting process is executed (step S3511). In the ART start performance setting process, if this is not a return of the ART state ST9 but a new start of the ART state ST9, the ART start performance table corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and the ART during performance table corresponding to the ART state ST9 are read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. First, the performance execution control is performed in the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART start performance table, so that the performance corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 is executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the performance execution control is performed in the performance side MPU 92 according to the ART during performance table, so that the performance corresponding to the ART state ST9 is executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In this case, the image display device 63 displays the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, in the ART start performance setting process, if the current time is a return to ART state ST9, data setting is performed to return to the performance execution content immediately before ART state ST9 was interrupted. Data for specifying the execution content of this return destination performance is stored in the performance side RAM 94 when ART state ST9 is interrupted. Then, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the performance table stored in the performance side RAM 94 by the data setting for this return, and the performance corresponding to ART state ST9 is resumed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In this case, the number of games corresponding to the value of the display counter 126 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3508, or if the processing of step S3511 is executed, processing for the direct-on top effect is executed in step S3512, processing for the A-loop effect is executed in step S3513, and processing for the B-loop effect is executed in step S3514. These processes will be explained in detail later.

After that, when a game start command indicating the start of a new game is received from the master MPU 72 in a situation where the ART state ST9 is reached (steps S3515 and S3516: YES), the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the presentation RAM 94 is subtracted by 1, and the value of the display counter 126 in the presentation RAM 94 is subtracted by 1 (step S3517). Then, if the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 after the subtraction is "0" (step S3518: YES), a stock release process is executed (step S3519). The stock release process will be explained in detail later.

In addition to the various processes described above, the non-normal presentation control process also executes other presentation processes (step S3520). In the other presentation processes, processes are executed to control the execution of presentations when the game state is the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, the RB state ST4, or the preparation state ST8.

Figure 73 is a flowchart showing the direct-addition effect processing of step S3512 in the non-normal effect control processing (Figure 72).

First, it is determined whether or not a direct add-on command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S3601). As already explained, the direct add-on command is sent from the master MPU 72 when a direct add-on win occurs in the direct add-on occurrence lottery process in ART state ST9, or when B loop is set. The direct add-on command contains information about the number of added games that has occurred this time, as well as information about the number of continuing games in the current advantageous zone SC2.

If a direct addition command is received (step S3601: YES), it is determined whether the sum of the number of continuing games in the current advantageous zone SC2 set in the direct addition command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the value of the stock game number counter 127, and the number of added games that has been generated this time set in the direct addition command exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S3602). In other words, even if the number of added games that has been generated this time is added to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9, it is determined whether at least a part of the added number of added games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2. As described above, by referring to not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 to determine whether or not the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2 has been exceeded, it is possible to prioritize the notification to the player and consumption of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 (i.e., the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that has already been granted but has not yet been notified to the player, over the number of added games due to the direct addition that has occurred this time.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3602, the number of added games that has occurred this time is added to both the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S3603). By being added to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of added games this time becomes the target for subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being added to the display counter 126, the number of continued games resulting from adding the number of added games this time is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3602, it is judged whether the sum of the number of continuing games in the current advantageous zone SC2 set in the currently received additional command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S3604). In other words, it is judged whether the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 will be exceeded by consuming the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 already granted, without even adding the number of additional games generated this time.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3604, the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the current number of continued games in the favorable zone SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the value of the stock game number counter 127 from the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone SC2 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 as the number of added games that has occurred this time (step S3605). By adding to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the number of added games after this adjustment becomes the object of subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by adding to the display counter 126, the number of continued games resulting from adding the number of added games after this adjustment is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. By adding the number of added games after this adjustment to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126, it is possible to add the number of games within the range of the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone SC2.

When the processing of step S3603 or step S3605 is executed, it is determined whether or not a special add-on effect is currently being executed (step S3606). The special add-on effect is a type of effect for notifying the player of the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. The special add-on effect is an effect that is performed, for example, when an A loop occurs, and as already explained, an effect is executed in which the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added over multiple games.

If the special add-on effect is not being executed (step S3606: NO), the normal direct add-on effect setting process is executed (step S3607). In the direct add-on effect setting process, a normal direct add-on table that enables the execution of an effect indicating that the number of games added this time has been added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the normal direct add-on table, so that the direct add-on effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and an image indicating the number of games added this time is displayed on the image display device 63.

If the special add-on effect is being executed (step S3606: YES), a direct add-on effect setting process during the special add-on effect is executed (step S3608). In the direct add-on effect setting process, while continuing the currently executed special add-on effect, a direct add-on table during the special add-on effect that enables the execution of an effect indicating that the number of games added this time has occurred to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the direct add-on table during the special add-on effect, so that the direct add-on effect is executed in a situation where the special add-on effect is being executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and an image indicating the number of games added this time is displayed on the image display device 63. This allows the direct add-on effect to be executed even when the special add-on effect is being performed, so that when the special add-on effect is being performed, the player can expect not only the generation of an added number of games due to the execution of the special add-on effect, but also the generation of an added number of games based on the results of the lottery process for the roles in each game (Figure 17).

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3604, the number of added games that has occurred this time is not added to any of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the display counter 126, and the stock game count counter 127, and the direct add-on effect is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the direct add-on effect from being executed when it has already been determined that the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2 will be exceeded.

Next, the A-loop performance processing executed in step S3513 of the non-normal performance control processing (FIG. 72) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 74.

First, it is determined whether or not the expectation effect by the A loop is being executed (step S3701). The expectation effect by the A loop is an effect that is executed before the special added-on effect is executed, and continues over three games as the execution period of the expectation effect. In the expectation effect by the A loop, an effect is executed that allows the player to expect the occurrence of a special added-on effect in each game included in the execution period of this expectation effect. By executing the expectation effect by the A loop in this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for the occurrence of a special added-on effect.

Note that the false expectation effect can be executed even in a situation where the A loop has not occurred and the special add-on effect is not executed. When the expectation effect of the A loop is started, the false expectation effect is started following the execution of the direct add-on effect, which adds 10 games, which is the same as the number of added games, in response to the addition of 10 games based on the occurrence of the A loop winning. Then, like the expectation effect of the A loop, the false expectation effect also continues for three games as the execution period of the expectation effect, and in each game included in the execution period of this expectation effect, an effect that can also be executed in the expectation effect of the A loop is executed. By executing the false expectation effect in this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not a special add-on effect will be executed after the expectation effect is executed in the ART state ST9.

If the A-loop expectation performance is not being performed (step S3701: NO), it is determined whether or not an A-loop winning command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3702). As already explained, the A-loop winning command is sent from the main MPU 72 when the main MPU 72 transitions to the A-loop. If an A-loop winning command has been received (step S3702: YES), it is determined whether or not the sum of the number of continuing games in the current favorable zone SC2 set in the A-loop winning command, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, the value of the stock game number counter 127, and the information on the number of added games set in the A-loop winning command, which is "10", exceeds the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S3703).

In other words, even if the number of added games at the time of the current A loop win is added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9, it is determined whether or not at least a portion of the added number of added games will be invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2. As described above, by referring to not only the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 but also the value of the stock game number counter 127 to determine whether the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 is exceeded, it is possible to prioritize the notification to the player and consumption of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 (i.e., the number of games stored in the stock game number counter 127) that has already been granted but has not yet been notified to the player, over the number of added games at the start of the newly generated A loop.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3703, even if the A loop is being executed by the main MPU 72, the expected presentation by the A loop will not be executed, and the special added presentation will not be executed. This makes it possible to prevent presentations that notify of a further increase in the number of continued games from being executed, even if it has already been determined that the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 will be exceeded.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3703, a start setting process for the expected performance is executed (step S3704). In the start setting process, a direct addition table for the A loop win that enables the execution of a performance indicating that an addition of 10 games, which is the number of added games when the A loop wins, has occurred, is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In addition, the execution pattern of the expected performance to be executed this time over the execution period of the expected performance is determined by lottery, and the expected performance table corresponding to the execution pattern determined by lottery is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, in the expected performance by the A loop, a performance with a higher execution expectation of the special addition performance is more likely to be selected than the false expected performance. After the performance side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the direct addition table, the performance side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the expected performance table, so that the direct addition performance of 10 games is first executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and an image indicating the current number of added games of 10 games is displayed on the image display device 63, and then the expected performance is executed over the execution period of the expected performance.

Then, the expected performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "3" corresponding to the execution period of the expected performance (step S3705). The expected performance counter is a counter that allows the performance side MPU 92 to determine that the expected performance is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the expected performance. The value set in the expected performance counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started.

Then, the values of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 are each incremented by "10" (step S3706). By being incremented to the ART subtraction target counter 125, the current number of added games becomes the object of subtraction in the ART state ST9, and by being incremented to the display counter 126, the number of continued games resulting from the increment of the current number of added games is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

Then, the A-loop performance flag stored in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3707). The A-loop performance flag is a flag that identifies to the performance side MPU 92 that the main side MPU 72 is in the A-loop and that a performance corresponding to the A-loop should be executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3702, if a positive judgment is made in step S3703, or if the processing of step S3707 is executed, it is judged whether or not the A-loop performance flag of the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S3708). If the A-loop performance flag is set to "1" (step S3708: YES), on the condition that an A-loop addition command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S3709: YES), an addition process is executed to the stock game number counter 127 (step S3710). As already explained, in the A-loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed, so "50" is added to the stock game number counter 127 in the addition process of step S3710. If a negative judgment is made in step S3709, or if the processing of step S3710 is executed, a process for special additional performance is executed (step S3711). The process for special additional performance will be explained in detail later.

If the expected performance is being performed by the A loop (step S3701: YES), it is determined whether an update trigger has occurred for the expected performance counter in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3712). Specifically, it is determined whether a new game has started. If a positive determination is made in step S3712, the value of the expected performance counter is decremented by 1 (step S3713), and it is determined whether the value of the expected performance counter after the decrement is "0" (step S3714). If the value of the expected performance counter is not "0" (step S3714: NO), an update setting process for the expected performance is executed (step S3715). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the currently referenced expected performance table in response to the start of a new game. As a result, the execution content of the expected performance changes according to the number of games that the expected performance will continue.

On the other hand, if the value of the expected performance counter is "0" (step S3714: YES), the special added performance selection process is executed (step S3716). Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the special added performance selection process.

First, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games to be continued in the current advantageous zone SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special added games exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S3801). The number of games to be continued in the current advantageous zone SC2 is derived by adding the number of games played since receiving the A loop winning command to the number of games to be continued in the advantageous zone SC2 determined from the A loop winning command when the A loop winning command is received. In addition, in the special added-on effect, an effect is executed to make the player recognize that the number of games already stored in the stock game number counter 127 has been added to the number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9.

Figure 76 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the types of special add-on effects. As shown in Figure 76, the special add-on effects include a first special add-on effect in which an effect that makes it seem as if 25 games have been added is performed in each of two games, thereby enabling the player to recognize an add-on of 50 games; a second special add-on effect in which an effect that makes it seem as if 25 games have been added is performed in each of four games, thereby enabling the player to recognize an add-on of 100 games; a third special add-on effect in which an effect that makes it seem as if 50 games have been added is performed in each of two games, thereby enabling the player to recognize an add-on of 100 games; and a fourth special add-on effect in which an effect that makes it seem as if 50 games have been added is performed in each of three games, thereby enabling the player to recognize an add-on of 150 games. The following are set: a fifth special add-on effect in which an effect as if an add-on of 50 games has occurred is performed in each of the four games, making the player aware of the add-on of 200 games; a sixth special add-on effect in which an effect as if an add-on of 100 games has occurred is performed in each of the two games, making the player aware of the add-on of 200 games; a seventh special add-on effect in which an effect as if an add-on of 100 games has occurred is performed in each of the three games, making the player aware of the add-on of 300 games; and an eighth special add-on effect in which an effect as if an add-on of 200 games has occurred is performed in each of the three games, making the player aware of the add-on of 600 games. In this case, as already explained, in the A loop, 50 games are added each time one game is executed, so that the number of added games finally notified is 50×n games (n is an integer of 1 or more) regardless of the first to eighth special add-on effects. Since the first through eighth special add-on effects are set as described above, the minimum number of special add-on games is 50 games when the first special add-on effect is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the special add-on effect selection process (Figure 75), in step S3801, it is determined whether the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of games already played in the current advantageous zone SC2 and the number of games already notified to the player as the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST9 from the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the minimum number of special add-on games. If the number of games is not equal to or greater than the minimum number of special add-on games, the special add-on effect is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring in which, even though a special add-on effect has occurred and the number of added games has been notified, part of the notified number of added games is invalidated in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3801, a special add-on lottery table corresponding to the situation is read from the presentation side ROM 93 (step S3802). Here, the number and type of special add-on effects that can be executed differ depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. In addition, it is necessary to set the number and type of special add-on effects so that they do not exceed the remaining upper limit game number, which is the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of games already consumed in the current ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 from the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, a special add-on lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit game number is read from the presentation side ROM 93.

In the special add-on lottery table, there are lottery results that select only one unit of special add-on effect, as well as lottery results that select multiple units of special add-on effects. For example, in the special add-on lottery table referenced when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "800" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 800 or more, there are lottery results that determine the type and execution order of the special add-on effects, 2nd special add-on effect → 5th special add-on effect → 6th special add-on effect → 7th special add-on effect, and there are lottery results that determine the type and execution order of the special add-on effects, 5th special add-on effect → 8th special add-on effect. In addition, in the special add-on lottery table referenced when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "300" and the remaining upper limit number of games is 300 or more, there are lottery results that determine the type and execution order of the special add-on effects, 3rd special add-on effect → 6th special add-on effect, and there is also a lottery result of only the 7th special add-on effect.

Here, when multiple types of special add-on effects are selected, the type of special add-on effect with the greater total number of games reported will be executed later. As a result, when one unit of special add-on effect is executed immediately after the end of one unit of special add-on effect, the latter unit of special add-on effect will announce a greater number of games added than the former unit of special add-on effect, making it possible to appropriately increase the player's expectations. However, this is not limited to this, and the type of special add-on effect with the smaller total number of games reported may be executed later, or the execution order may be set regardless of the total number of games reported.

After the special add-on lottery table is read, a lottery process for the special add-on effects is executed (step S3803). In this lottery process, the current numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared with the special add-on lottery table read in step S3802 to identify the type of special add-on effect to be executed this time, and, if there are multiple types of special add-on effects to be executed this time, to identify the order of execution of those effects.

On the other hand, if a positive judgment is made in step S3801, this means that there is no room to execute the special add-on effect in relation to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, the A-loop effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" so that the execution of the special add-on effect is not possible (step S3804).

Returning to the explanation of the A-loop presentation process (Figure 74), after the special add-on presentation selection process is executed in step S3716, it is determined whether the value of the A-loop presentation flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is "0" (step S3717). If the value of the A-loop presentation flag is "0" (step S3717: YES), the special add-on presentation cannot be executed due to the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2, so the process from step S3718 onwards is not executed.

If the A loop effect flag is set to "1" (step S3717: NO), a setting process for the special add-on effect is executed (step S3718). In this setting process, the type of special add-on effect to be executed first, selected in the special add-on effect selection process, is identified, and a special add-on effect table that enables the execution of the identified special add-on effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to this stored special add-on effect table, so that the special add-on effect currently being executed is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 for the number of continued games corresponding to the special add-on effect.

Then, the special add-on effect counter provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to a value of the number of continuing games corresponding to the currently executed special add-on effect (step S3719). For example, if the currently executed special add-on effect is the first special add-on effect, "2" is set, and if it is the fifth special add-on effect, "4" is set. The special add-on effect counter is a counter that allows the effect side MPU 92 to determine that a special add-on effect is being executed and the number of games remaining in the execution period of the special add-on effect. The value set in the special add-on effect counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started.

After that, on the condition that multiple units of special add-on effects are selected in the special add-on effect selection process in step S3716 (step S3720: YES), a stock process for the special add-on effects is executed (step S3721). As already explained, a stock area 128 for special add-on effects is provided in the performance side RAM 94. The stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and it is possible to store information on the types of special add-on effects waiting to be executed according to the order of their execution.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3720, or if the processing of step S3721 is executed, the total number of added games announced by the special added effects selected in the special added effect selection processing in step S3716 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3722), and the total number of added games is further subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S3723). In this case, if multiple units of special added effects are selected in the special added effect selection processing in step S3716, the total number of added games announced by the multiple units of special added effects is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and subtracted from the stock game number counter 127.

However, the increment process on the display counter 126 is not executed. The increment process on the display counter 126 is executed each time the number of added games is notified in conjunction with the execution of the special added effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special added effect. After the process of step S3723 is executed, the processes of steps S3709 to S3711 already explained are executed.

Next, the special add-on effect processing executed in step S3711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 77.

If the special add-on effect is being executed (step S3901: YES), it is determined whether an update trigger for the special add-on effect counter in the effect side RAM 94 has occurred (step S3902). Specifically, it is determined whether a new game has started. If a positive determination is made in step S3902, the value of the special add-on effect counter is decremented by 1 (step S3903). In addition, the number of add-on games to be notified in the current game in the currently set one unit of special add-on effect is grasped from the currently referenced special add-on effect table, and the grasped number of add-on games is added to the display counter 126 (step S3904). As a result, the number of add-on games notified in the current game as a special add-on effect is added to the display of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. In addition, an update setting process for the special add-on effect is executed (step S3905). In the update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referred to in the currently referenced special add-on effect table in response to the new start of a game. This means that the execution of the special add-on effect will change depending on the number of games that the special add-on effect continues for.

Then, by judging whether the value of the special add-on effect counter in the performance side RAM 94 is "0", it is judged whether the currently executed unit of special add-on effect has ended (step S3906). If a negative judgment is made in step S3906, it is judged whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or greater than a creation reference value corresponding to the number of games for which it is possible to newly create one unit of special add-on effect (step S3907). Specifically, the creation reference value is set to 50 games, which is the minimum number of special add-on games.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3907, a creation lottery process is executed (step S3908). In the creation lottery process, the numerical information read from the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the production side RAM 94, is compared with the creation lottery table stored in the production side ROM 93. The creation lottery table is set to have a 50% probability of a creation win. If a creation win is made in the creation lottery process (step S3909: YES), it is determined whether or not a situation is present in which a special added performance can be stocked (step S3910).

Specifically, similar to step S3801 in the special add-on effect selection process (Figure 75), it is determined whether the sum of the number of continuing games in the current advantageous zone SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special add-on games (specifically, "50") exceeds the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500"), and it is also determined whether there is free space in the special add-on effect stock area 128 in the performance side RAM 94 to store information about the special add-on effect. If the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 has not been exceeded and there is free space in the special add-on effect stock area 128, a positive determination is made in step S3910.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3910, an intermediate lottery process is executed (step S3911). In the intermediate lottery process, a special add-on lottery table corresponding to the situation is first read from the performance side ROM 93. Specifically, the type of special add-on performance that can be executed varies depending on the value stored in the stock game number counter 127. In addition, it is necessary to set the type of special add-on performance so that it is within a range that does not exceed the remaining upper limit game number, which is the number of games obtained by subtracting the sum of the number of games already consumed in this ART state ST9 and the ART subtraction target counter 125 from the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2. Therefore, a special add-on lottery table corresponding to the combination of the value of the stock game number counter 127 and the remaining upper limit game number is read from the performance side ROM 93. In this case, the special add-on lottery table read in step S3802 in the special add-on effect selection process (Figure 75) contains a lottery result in which multiple special add-on effects are selected at once, but the special add-on lottery table read in step S3911 does not contain a lottery result in which multiple special add-on effects are selected at once. In the mid-way lottery process, the numerical information of the random number counter, which is periodically updated in the performance side RAM 94, is read, and the read numerical information is compared against the read special add-on lottery table. This identifies the type of special add-on effect to be stocked this time.

Then, the special add-on effect stock process is executed (step S3912). As already explained, the effect side RAM 94 is provided with a special add-on effect stock area 128. This stock area 128 is provided as a ring buffer, and is capable of storing information on the types of special add-on effects waiting to be executed according to the order of their execution. In step S3912, information on the type of special add-on effect selected in step S3911 is written to the area that is to be executed first among the free areas in the special add-on effect stock area 128.

Then, the total number of added games notified by the special added effect selected in step S3911 is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3913), and the total number of added games is further subtracted from the stock game count counter 127 (step S3914). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is executed each time the number of added games is notified in conjunction with the execution of the special added effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special added effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step S3906 in the special add-on performance processing, that is, if the special add-on performance that was being executed is terminated, the special add-on performance stock area 128 is referenced to determine whether or not a stock of the special add-on performance exists (step S3915). If a stock exists (step S3915: YES), a setting process for the special add-on performance is executed (step S3916). In the setting process, information on the type of special add-on performance stored in the area that is the first to be executed in the special add-on performance stock area 128 is grasped, and a special add-on performance table that enables the execution of the grasped special add-on performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to this stored special add-on performance table, and the special add-on performance that is the target of execution this time is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 for the number of continued games corresponding to the special add-on performance. After that, the special add-on effect counter in the effect side RAM 94 is set to the value of the number of continuing games corresponding to the special add-on effect that was currently being executed (step S3917).

If no stock exists (step S3915: NO), the A loop end command has not yet been received from the main MPU 72 and it is determined whether or not a special add-on effect can be created (step S3918). To determine whether or not a special add-on effect can be created, similar to step S3801 in the special add-on effect selection process (Figure 75), it is determined whether or not the sum of the current number of continuing games in the favorable zone SC2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125, and the minimum number of special add-on games (specifically, "50") exceeds the upper limit number of games in the favorable zone SC2 (specifically, "1500").

If a positive judgment is made in step S3918, a mid-way lottery process is executed as in step S3911 to select the type of special add-on effect by lottery (step S3919). In this mid-way lottery process, one unit of special add-on effect is also selected. Then, a setting process for the special add-on effect is executed (step S3920). In this setting process, a special add-on effect table that enables the execution of the special add-on effect selected in step S3919 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed in the performance side MPU 92 according to this stored special add-on effect table, so that the special add-on effect currently being executed is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 for the number of continued games corresponding to the special add-on effect. Then, a value of the number of continued games corresponding to the special add-on effect currently being executed is set in the special add-on effect counter in the performance side RAM 94 (step S3921).

Then, the total number of added games announced by the special added effect set as the current execution target is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S3922), and the total number of added games is further subtracted from the stock game count counter 127 (step S3923). However, the addition process to the display counter 126 is not executed. The addition process to the display counter 126 is performed each time the number of added games is announced in conjunction with the execution of the special added effect. This makes it possible to make the display content of the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 displayed on the image display device 63 correspond to the execution of the special added effect.

If the special add-on performance is not being executed (step S3901: NO) and the expected performance is not being executed either (step S3924: NO), it is determined whether or not an A-loop end command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S3925). As already explained, the A-loop end command is sent when the A-loop is ended in the main MPU 72. If the A-loop end command has been received (step S3925: YES), the A-loop performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S3926). As a result of the A-loop performance flag being cleared to "0", a negative determination is made in step S3708 of the A-loop performance processing (Figure 74), and the special add-on performance processing is no longer executed.

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 78, we will explain how the expected performance and special added-on performance are executed under the control of the performance side MPU 92 when the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72. Figure 78(a) shows the execution period of the A loop in the main MPU 72, Figure 78(b) shows the execution period of the expected performance, Figure 78(c) shows the execution period of the special added-on performance, and Figure 78(d) shows the period during which the special added-on performance is stocked.

First, we will explain what happens when special bonus effects are not stocked.

At timing t1, loop A is started by the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 78(a). As a result, the number of remaining games to be continued in ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time a game is played, although this is not notified to the player. Also, at timing t1, the expectation presentation is started as shown in FIG. 78(b). As already explained, the expectation presentation is executed over three games regardless of whether loop A is continuing in the main MPU 72.

After that, at timing t2 when the expected performance is continuing as shown in FIG. 78(b), the A loop in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 78(a). However, even if the A loop ends, the expected performance continues because it is executed continuously for three games.

Then, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the expectation effect ends at the timing of t3. At the timing of t3, the number and type of special add-on effects to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the effect side RAM 94 at that time. In this case, one unit of special add-on effect is selected because the A loop in the main MPU 72 ended early and the number of add-on games stored in the stock game number counter 127 is small. Then, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the selected one unit of special add-on effect is executed from the timing of t3 to the timing of t4. The special add-on effect continues over multiple games, and the number of add-on games is notified to the player in each game.

Next, we will explain what happens when special bonus effects are stocked.

At timing t5, the main MPU 72 starts loop A as shown in FIG. 78(a). As a result, the number of remaining continuing games in ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time a game is executed. Also, at timing t5, the expectation presentation starts as shown in FIG. 78(b). As already explained, the expectation presentation is executed over three games regardless of whether loop A is continuing in the main MPU 72.

Then, at the timing of t6, when the A loop is continuing in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 78(a), the expected presentation ends as shown in FIG. 78(b). At the timing of t6, the number and type of special add-on presentation to be executed are selected according to the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation RAM 94 at that time. In this case, it is decided that three units of special add-on presentation will be executed. Therefore, one unit of special add-on presentation is started at the timing of t6 as shown in FIG. 78(c), and two units of special add-on presentation are stocked as shown in FIG. 78(d).

Then, one unit of the special added effect ends at timing t7 as shown in FIG. 78(c). In this case, as the execution of the special added effect is stocked as shown in FIG. 78(d), a new special added effect starts at timing t8 as shown in FIG. 78(c). Note that, as shown in FIG. 78(a), since the A loop is still continuing in the main MPU 72, the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 in each game has been added by 50 games, although this is not notified to the player.

After that, at the timing of t9, when the special add-on performance that started at the timing of t8 is being executed, loop A in the main MPU 72 ends as shown in FIG. 78(a). Then, at the timing of t10, one unit of the special add-on performance ends as shown in FIG. 78(c). In this case, since the execution of the special add-on performance is stocked as shown in FIG. 78(d), a new special add-on performance starts at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 78(c). With the start of this special add-on performance, the execution of the special add-on performance is no longer stocked as shown in FIG. 78(d). After that, the special add-on performance ends at the timing of t12 as shown in FIG. 78(c).

Next, the B loop presentation process executed in step S3514 of the non-normal presentation control process (FIG. 72) will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 79.

If a B loop addition command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S4001: YES), an addition process is executed on the stock game number counter 127 (step S4002). As already explained, in the B loop, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 each time one game is executed, so in the addition process of step S4002, "50" is added to the stock game number counter 127.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4001, or if the processing of step S4002 is executed, it is judged whether or not a special freeze command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S4003). The special freeze command is a command sent from the master MPU 72 when the number of consecutive games in the B loop in the master MPU 72 becomes 21 or more, and even if all of the number of games added by the B loop is added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9, it does not exceed the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2. Also, as already explained, a situation in which the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more means that even if the number of games consumed in the B loop is taken into account, the number of added games that has not been notified to the player at the end of the B loop is 1000 or more. Therefore, when a special freeze command is received, the performance MPU 92 executes a performance in which an addition of 1000 or more games is notified.

If a special freeze command has been received (step S4003: YES), a start setting process for the special freeze effect is executed (step S4004). In this start setting process, information corresponding to the number of games continued in the B loop set in the special freeze command is grasped. Then, ("number of games continued in the B loop" - "value obtained by dividing "number of games played in the B loop" by "number of games added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games)" and rounding up the result) x "number of games added to the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 for each game in the B loop (50 games)" is derived as the special added game number, and a special freeze effect table that enables the derived number of special added games to be notified is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94.

The special freeze effect table is set with information that enables the display of the derived number of special added games, and also with information that enables the execution of a special freeze effect. In addition, since the special freeze effect is executed over the freeze period (specifically 30 seconds) for the special freeze effect set by the main MPU 72, the execution period of the effect is set to the freeze period for the special freeze effect regardless of the special freeze effect table showing any number of added games. The execution control of the effect is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the special freeze effect table, so that the special freeze effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, and an image showing the derived number of added games of 1000 or more is displayed on the image display device 63.

Then, the derived number of special added games is added to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and to the display counter 126 (step S4005). As a result, the number of special added games becomes the number of games to be subtracted as games are played in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92, and the number of special added games is added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 in the image display device 63. Then, the number of special added games is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S4006).

Next, referring to the time chart in Figure 80, we will explain how the special freeze effect is executed under the control of the effecting MPU 92 when the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72. Figure 80(a) shows the execution period of the B loop in the main MPU 72, Figure 80(b) shows the execution period of one game, and Figure 80(c) shows the execution period of the special freeze effect.

First, we'll explain what happens when the special freeze effect isn't performed.

At timing t1, as shown in FIG. 80(a), loop B is started by the main MPU 72. As a result, the number of remaining games to be continued in ART state ST9 is increased by 50 games each time a game is played, although this is not notified to the player. Note that when loop A is started, as already explained, the expectation presentation is started by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63, but the expectation presentation triggered by the start of loop B is not executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 80(a), one game is played from timing t1 to timing t2, timing t3 to timing t4, and timing t5 to timing t6, where the B loop is continuing, as shown in FIG. 80(b). Since each of these games is played in the B loop situation, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 in each game, and a continuation win is made in the B loop continuation lottery process.

After that, at timing t7 when the B loop is continuing as shown in FIG. 80(a), one game is started as shown in FIG. 80(b). The start of this one game increases the number of remaining continued games in ART state ST9 by 50 games. However, the continuation lottery process of the B loop results in a failure to continue. Therefore, at timing t7, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the B loop in the master MPU 72 ends. In this case, because the number of consecutive games in the B loop is not 21 or more, the special freeze effect is not executed as shown in FIG. 80(c).

Next, we will explain when the special freeze effect is executed.

At timing t9, as shown in FIG. 80(a), the main MPU 72 starts loop B. As a result, the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST9 is increased by 50 each time a game is played, although this is not notified to the player.

After that, in a situation where the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80(a), 20 games are executed, including timing t9 to timing t10, timing t11 to timing t12, and timing t13 to timing t14, as shown in FIG. 80(b). Then, at timing t15, when the B loop continues as shown in FIG. 80(a), one game is started as shown in FIG. 80(b). The start of this one game increases the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9 by 50 games. However, the continuation lottery process of the B loop results in a continuation failure. Therefore, the B loop in the master MPU 72 ends at timing t15, as shown in FIG. 80(a).

In this case, the number of consecutive games in the B loop is 21 or more. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 80(b), a game starts at the timing of t15, but because a freeze period for the special freeze effect is set in the master MPU 72, even if a new game has started, the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is put into a waiting state from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Also, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the special freeze effect is executed from the timing of t15 to the timing of t16. Then, at the timing of t16, the freeze period for the special freeze effect in the master MPU 72 elapses, and the special freeze effect ends as shown in FIG. 80(c). As a result, a game involving the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed from the timing of t16 to the timing of t17.

Next, the stock release process executed in step S3519 in the non-normal performance control process (FIG. 72) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 81. The stock release process is executed when the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the performance side RAM 94 becomes "0".

First, it is determined whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation RAM 94 is 1 or more (step S4101). A situation in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more means a situation in which the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 to be consumed in the host MPU 72 is 1 or more and the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 to be consumed in the presentation MPU 92 has become "0". In this situation, the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9 to be consumed in the host MPU 72 is stored in the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation RAM 94.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4101, it is judged whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value (step S4102). The first release reference value corresponds to a value of 10 games. As already explained, various additional effects exist in the ART state ST9, and the minimum number of games that can be announced in these various additional effects is 10 games. In other words, the first release reference value is set as the minimum number of games that can be announced in the various additional effects.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4102, all values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set to the ART subtraction target counter 125 (step S4103). As a result, all game numbers stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be played in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. After that, the display counter 126 in the production side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4104). As a result, although the number of games to be played in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is newly set, that number of games is not displayed as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 on the image display device 63. In addition, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4105).

Then, the start setting process for the first release effect is executed (step S4106). In this start setting process, the first release effect table that enables the execution of the first release effect is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 in accordance with the first release effect table, and the first release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In the first release effect, an effect is executed indicating that the end of the ART state ST9 is near. Also, in the first release effect, an image is displayed on the image display device 63 indicating that the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is unknown.

Here, the display contents of the image display device 63 in the ART state ST9 will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIG. 82(a) and FIG. 82(b). When the value of the display counter 126 in the ART state ST9 is 1 or more and various additional effects are not being executed, as shown in FIG. 82(a), a moving image is displayed by the effect character G8 for the ART state ST9, and a game number image G9 is displayed to notify the value stored in the display counter 126 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. The number of games displayed in the game number image G9 is subtracted by 1 each time one game is played. Then, as a result of the subtraction of 1, if the number of games displayed in the game number image G9 becomes "0" and the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more and less than 10, the first release effect is started. In the first release effect, as shown in FIG. 82(b), an end suggestion image G10 indicating that the end of the ART state ST9 is near is displayed, and an unknown number of games image G11 indicating that the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is unknown is displayed. When the first release effect is executed in this way, the player recognizes that the ART state ST9 is nearing its end.

When the first release effect is being executed, if the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added directly, added by the A loop, or added by the B loop, the first release effect is terminated and the effect corresponding to the addition is executed. Then, after that, the normal effect for the ART state ST9 is executed as shown in FIG. 82(a). Also, although a description of the specific process is omitted, when the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added while the first release effect is being executed, the number of added games corresponding to the effect that triggered the addition is not reported as it is, but the sum of the number of added games corresponding to the effect that triggered the addition and the remaining number of continued games in the first release effect is reported as the number of added games, and is reported as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 in the normal effect for the ART state ST9 that starts afterwards.

Returning to the explanation of the stock release process (FIG. 81), if a negative judgment is made in step S4102, it is judged whether the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or greater than the first release reference value and equal to or less than the second release reference value (step S4107). The second release reference value corresponds to a value of 100 games. As already explained, in the ART state ST9, a direct addition effect is present, and the maximum number of games that can be announced in the direct addition effect is 100 games. In other words, the second release reference value is set as the maximum number of games that can be announced in the direct addition effect.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4107, all values stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126, respectively (step S4108). As a result, all game numbers stored in the stock game number counter 127 are set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. In addition, the number of games newly set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92 is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. After that, the stock game number counter 127 is cleared to "0" (step S4109).

Then, the start setting process for the second release effect is executed (step S4110). In this start setting process, the second release effect table that enables the execution of the second release effect is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the second release effect table, and the second release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63. In the second release effect, an effect is executed indicating that the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added, and an image is displayed on the image display device 63 showing that the added number of games has been added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

Figure 82 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the image display device 63 when the second release effect is executed. In the second release effect, an add-on notification image G12 is displayed indicating that 100 games have been added, and an image is displayed in which the number of games displayed in the add-on notification image G12 is added to the game count image G9, which is set to 0 games. This allows the player to recognize that an add-on of 100 games has occurred. After the second release effect is executed, a normal effect for ART state ST9 as shown in Figure 82 (a) is executed.

Returning to the explanation of the stock release process (FIG. 81), if a negative judgment is made in step S4107, it means that the number of games stored in the stock game counter 127 exceeds 100 games. In this case, a selection process for the number of games to be released is executed (step S4111). In this selection process, a release selection table corresponding to the current value of the stock game counter 127 is read from the presentation side ROM 93, and the numerical information of the random number counter that is periodically updated in the presentation side RAM 94 is read. Then, the read numerical information is collated with the release selection table to select the number of games to be released as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. In this case, the release selection table has multiple types of release game numbers set at 10 game intervals with the value stored in the stock game number counter 127 as the upper limit, and the selection rate for each release game number is constant or approximately constant.

Then, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released is set to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 (step S4112). As a result, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released is set as the number of games to be consumed in the ART state ST9 in the production side MPU 92. In addition, the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released is displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. Then, the value of the number of games selected in the process of selecting the number of games to be released is subtracted from the stock game number counter 127 (step S4113).

Then, the start setting process for the third release effect is executed (step S4114). In this start setting process, the third release effect table that enables the execution of the third release effect is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the third release effect table, and the third release effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In the third release effect, an effect is executed indicating that the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added, and an image is displayed on the image display device 63 showing that the added number of games has been added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. The specific content of the third release effect is the same as the content of the second release effect shown in FIG. 82(c).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S4101 because the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", a start setting process for the ART end effect is executed (step S4115). In this start setting process, an ART end effect table that enables the execution of the ART end effect is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the ART end effect table, and the ART end effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. In the ART end effect, an effect indicating that the ART state ST9 has ended is executed, and the image display device 63 announces the number of games played in the current ART state ST9 and the number of gaming media granted to the player in the current ART state ST9.

Next, the manner in which various release effects are executed will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 83. FIG. 83(a) shows the execution period of ART state ST9, FIG. 83(b) shows the execution period of normal effects in ART state ST9, FIG. 83(c) shows the period in which the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, FIG. 83(d) shows the execution period of the first release effect, FIG. 83(e) shows the execution period of the second release effect, FIG. 83(f) shows the execution period of the third release effect, and FIG. 83(g) shows the occurrence timing of the direct-once effect.

First, we will explain the case where only the first release effect is executed among the first to third release effects.

At the timing of t1, the ART state ST9 starts as shown in FIG. 83(a), and at the timing of t1, the normal presentation in the ART state ST9 starts as shown in FIG. 83(b). After that, at the timing of t2, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the presentation side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 83(c), the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the release presentation starts. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2 is less than the first release reference value, the first release presentation starts at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 83(d). This first release presentation continues for the number of games corresponding to the value set in the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t2. Note that at the timing of t2, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" as shown in FIG. 83(c).

After that, since the remaining number of games to be continued in ART state ST9 is not added while the first release presentation is being executed, the remaining number of games to be continued in ART state ST9 measured by both the main MPU 72 and the presentation MPU 92 at the timing of t3 becomes "0". Therefore, at the timing of t3, the ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(a), and the first release presentation ends as shown in FIG. 83(d).

Next, we will explain when each of the first to third release effects is executed.

At the timing of t4, the ART state ST9 starts as shown in FIG. 83(a), and at the timing of t4, the normal presentation in the ART state ST9 starts as shown in FIG. 83(b). After that, at the timing of t5, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the presentation side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more as shown in FIG. 83(c), the ART state ST9 does not end immediately, but the release presentation starts. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t5 is less than the first release reference value, the first release presentation starts at the timing of t5 as shown in FIG. 83(d).

After that, at the timing of t6 when the first release effect is being executed, a direct addition effect occurs as shown in FIG. 83(g). In this direct addition effect, the number of games added by the direct addition plus the number of games remaining in the first release effect is announced as the number of added games. Also, at the timing of t6, the first release effect ends as shown in FIG. 83(b) and FIG. 83(d), and the normal effect in ART state ST9 starts.

After that, at the timing of t7, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 in the presentation side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 83(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the release presentation is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t7 exceeds the second release reference value, the third release presentation is executed from the timing of t7 to the timing of t8, as shown in FIG. 83(f). In this case, the number of games selected in the selection process for the number of release games (step S4111) is announced as the number of added games, and the number of added games is displayed as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the normal presentation of the ART state ST9 is executed from the timing of t8 to the timing of t9. Then, at the timing of t9, the value of the ART subtraction target counter 125 of the presentation side RAM 94 becomes "0". In this case, as shown in FIG. 83(c), since the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more, the ART state ST9 is not immediately ended, but the release presentation is started. Since the value of the stock game number counter 127 at the timing of t9 is equal to or more than the first release reference value and equal to or less than the second release reference value, the second release presentation is executed from the timing of t9 to the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 83(e). In this case, the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is notified as the number of added games, and the number of added games is displayed as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. Note that, at the timing of t9, the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0" as shown in FIG. 83(c).

After that, as shown in FIG. 83(b), the normal presentation of ART state ST9 is executed from timing t10 to timing t11. Then, at timing t11, the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9 measured by both the host MPU 72 and the presentation MPU 92 becomes "0". Therefore, at timing t11, ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(a), and the normal presentation of ART state ST9 ends as shown in FIG. 83(b).

<About the ending performance of the advantageous area SC2>
Next, the ending presentation of the advantageous section SC2 will be described. First, the processing of steps S1801 to S1811 in the second control processing of the game section will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, it is determined whether the freeze standby flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1801). The freeze standby flag is a flag that the master MPU 72 uses to identify that if a bonus state is entered during an ending performance and the number of games continued in the advantageous section SC2 during that bonus state reaches the upper limit number of games, the freeze setting at the end of the ending performance is being waited for until the bonus state ends.

If the freeze waiting flag is set to "1" (step S1801: YES), a freeze setting process is executed (step S1802). The freeze setting process is described in detail later. If the freeze waiting flag is not set to "1" (step S1801: NO), a determination is made as to whether the favorable zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the game zone is the favorable zone SC2 (step S1803). If the favorable zone flag is set to "1" (step S1803: YES), the value of the favorable continuation counter in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S1804). Thereafter, an ending corresponding process is executed (step S1805).

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the ending response processing executed by the main MPU 72. The ending response processing is executed in step S1805 in the second control processing of the game area (Figure 45). As already explained, the second control processing of the game area is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, so the ending response processing is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

First, it is determined whether the master ending performance flag stored in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4201). The master ending performance flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to identify that the ending performance of the advantageous section SC2 is being executed.

If the host ending performance flag is not set to "1" (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter, which is a counter for measuring the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 in the host RAM 74, is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to an ending (specifically, "1450") (step S4202). If a positive determination is made in step S4202, it is determined whether the sum of the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the host RAM 74 and the value of the ART game number counter 121 in the host RAM 74 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S4203). In other words, it is determined whether the sum of the number of games played in the ART state ST9 and the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4203, it means that it is confirmed that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. In this case, the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4204). In addition, an ending performance command indicating that an ending performance should be started is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S4205). By receiving the ending performance command, the performance side MPU 92 starts the ending performance even if other performances such as an expected performance or a special added performance are being executed. In addition, information corresponding to the remaining number of games until the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is set in the ending performance command. This makes it possible for the performance side MPU 92 to grasp the remaining number of games until the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games.

Due to the above configuration, when the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, and it is determined that the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9, the execution period of the ending effect is entered. In this case, the execution period of the ending effect is entered on the condition that the value of the ART game number counter 121 is 1 or greater, so the game state in which the execution period of the ending effect starts is either the ART state ST9, a bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) that occurs during the ART state ST9, or the preparation state ST8 after the bonus state that occurs during the ART state ST9 ends.

The content of the processing executed by the production side MPU 92 will be explained. When the production side MPU 92 receives an ending performance command from the main side MPU 72, it makes a positive judgment in step S3501 in the non-normal performance control processing (Figure 72), and sets the production side ending performance flag stored in the production side RAM 94 to "1" (step S3502). The production side ending performance flag is a flag that allows the production side MPU 92 to identify that it is the execution period of the ending performance of the advantageous zone SC2. If the production side ending performance flag is set to "1" (step S3503: YES), it executes the ending performance processing (step S3504).

Figure 85 is a flowchart showing the ending production process executed by the production side MPU 92.

If it is the timing to start an ending performance (step S4301: YES), a process for determining the number of games to be played in the ending performance is executed (step S4302). In this process, the number of games remaining until the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games is determined from the ending performance command received this time. The determined number of games is then set in an ending performance counter provided in the performance side RAM 94. The ending performance counter is a counter that specifies the remaining number of games to be played in the ending performance by the performance side MPU 92. If the ending performance counter is set to a value of 1 or more, the value of the ending performance counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is started, and if the value of the ending performance counter is already "0", that state is maintained even if a new game is started.

Then, the start setting process for the ending performance is executed (step S4303). In this start setting process, an ending performance table that enables the execution of the ending performance for the number of games determined in step S4302 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ending performance table, and the ending performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63.

If it is not the time to start an ending effect (step S4301: NO), it is determined whether it is the time to update the ending effect (step S4304). Specifically, it is determined whether a new game has started. If a positive determination is made in step S4304, an update setting process for the ending effect is executed (step S4305). In this update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the ending effect table currently being referenced in response to the start of a new game. As a result, the execution content of the ending effect changes depending on the number of continuing games of that ending effect.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4304, or if the processing of step S4305 is executed, it is judged whether or not any bonus winning data has been set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306). Note that the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command containing information that enables identification of the type of bonus winning data set at the start of a game in which bonus winning data has been set, and transmits a corresponding command when a bonus win is achieved, so that the presentation MPU 92 can identify whether or not bonus winning data has been set in the main RAM 74 based on these commands.

If any of the bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4306: YES), and provided that neither the first nor second announcement has been executed (step S4307: NO), the first announcement performance setting process is executed (step S4308). In the first announcement performance setting process, data is set so that an image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed in a reduced size when a video corresponding to the ending performance is displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 86 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the first notification in which an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed when an ending performance is being performed. As shown in Figure 86 (a), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63 is set to be larger than the partial display area. Then, in the area other than the partial display area, an image G13 for the ending performance is displayed as a moving image, and a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to any bonus winning data being set in the main RAM 74 is displayed in the partial display area. By displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is possible to establish a bonus win even in a situation in which an ending performance is being performed. Also, in the first notification, the image G13 for the ending performance is displayed more prominently than the bonus notification image G14. This makes it possible to display the bonus notification image G14 while minimizing the reduction in visibility of the image G13 for the ending performance. The first notification will end when the second notification, which will be described later, begins or when a bonus is won.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4306, if a positive judgment is made in step S4307, or if the processing of step S4308 is executed, it is judged whether or not a predetermined number of games (specifically, 5 games) have been played since the bonus internal state ST2 was reached (step S4309). If a positive judgment is made in step S4309, on the condition that the second announcement has not been executed (step S4310: NO), the second announcement presentation setting processing is executed (step S4311). In the second announcement presentation setting processing, data is set so that, in a situation where the video corresponding to the ending presentation is displayed in a reduced size on the image display device 63, the image corresponding to the bonus win is displayed in a larger size than in the case of the first announcement.

Figure 86 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the second notification in which an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed in a situation where an ending performance is being executed. As shown in Figure 86 (b), a partial display area is set so as to partition the lower right corner of the display surface of the image display device 63. In this case, the area other than the partial display area is set wider than the partial display area on the display surface of the image display device 63. In addition, an image G13 for the ending performance is displayed as a moving image in the partial display area, and a bonus notification image G14 corresponding to any bonus winning data set in the main RAM 74 is displayed in the area other than the partial display area. In other words, the areas in which the images G13 and G14 are displayed are in the opposite relationship to the first notification. By enlarging and displaying the bonus notification image G14 in this way, it is possible to emphasize that a bonus has been won to a player who is concentrating on the ending performance and does not notice that a bonus has been won. The situation where the second notification is being executed ends when a bonus win is established.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4309, if a positive judgment is made in step S4310, or if the processing of step S4311 is executed, the BB performance standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4313) on the condition that any BB winning is established (step S4312: YES), and the RB performance standby flag provided in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4315) on the condition that any RB winning is established (step S4314: YES). The BB performance standby flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the BB state ST3 is in effect during the execution of the ending performance, and the RB performance standby flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the RB state ST4 is in effect during the execution of the ending performance. In addition, in a situation where the BB performance standby flag is set to "1", if the final game of the BB state ST3 is started before the remaining number of games executed in the ending performance becomes "0", the BB performance standby flag is cleared to "0". In addition, if the RB effect standby flag is set to "1" and the final game of RB state ST4 starts before the remaining number of games to be played in the ending effect becomes "0", the RB effect standby flag will be cleared to "0".

Here, as already explained, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 is started, the setting process of the freeze counter is executed in step S2414 in the bonus processing (FIG. 56) of the master MPU 72, and the start of a new game is put into a waiting state. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting is performed, the performance side MPU 92 executes a performance corresponding to the start of the bonus state. In this case, if the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S2413, and the processing of step S2414 is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the start of the bonus state from being executed even if the bonus state is started while the ending performance is being executed. When the bonus state is entered in the situation where the ending performance is being executed, the master MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state, but the performance side MPU 92 continues the ending performance as it is without executing and controlling the execution of the performance corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, even if the bonus state starts while the ending performance is being performed as described above, the freeze setting will not be performed, so it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending performance from being interrupted by the freeze setting.

As already explained, when the BB state ST3 or the RB state ST4 ends, the start of a new game is awaited by executing the freeze counter setting process in step S2709 in the bonus state process (FIG. 59) of the master MPU 72. Then, in the situation where the freeze setting is performed, the performance side MPU 92 executes a performance corresponding to the end of the bonus state. In this case, if the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S2708, and the processing of step S2709 is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the freeze setting corresponding to the end of the bonus state from being performed even if the bonus state ends while the ending performance is being performed. When the ending performance is performed in the middle of the bonus state, or when the bonus state is entered while the ending performance is being performed, the master MPU 72 executes control corresponding to the bonus state, but the performance side MPU 92 executes execution control of the ending performance without executing execution control of the performance corresponding to the bonus state. In this case, as described above, even if the bonus state ends while the ending performance is being performed, the freeze setting will not be performed, so it is possible to prevent the flow of the ending performance from being interrupted by the freeze setting.

In the ending effect processing (Fig. 85), if the value of the ending effect counter in the effect side RAM 94 reaches "0" in a game and all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning (step S4316: YES), the ending effect end processing is executed (step S4317). In other words, the ending effect end processing is executed when the game ends and the remaining number of games to be executed for the ending effect, which was set when the ending effect was started, reaches "0".

Figure 87 is a flowchart showing the process for completing the ending performance.

First, it is determined whether the effect extension flag provided in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4401). The effect extension flag is a flag that allows the effect side MPU 92 to determine whether the ending effect is being extended due to the bonus state being entered during the ending effect and the bonus state continuing even when the remaining number of games to be executed in the ending effect becomes "0".

If the performance extension flag is not set to "1" (step S4401: NO), the BB performance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is determined to be set to "1" to determine whether or not the BB state ST3 is in progress (step S4402). If the BB performance standby flag is set to "1" (step S4402: YES), the BB performance standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4403), and then it is determined whether or not the total number of game media granted to the player in the current BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number (step S4404). As already explained, the BB state ST3 ends when the total number of game media granted in the BB state ST3 becomes equal to or greater than the BB end reference number (specifically, "350"). This total number of game media is measured not only by the main side MPU 72 but also by the performance side MPU 92 based on a command sent from the main side MPU 72. In addition, the specific reference number is set to a number less than the BB end reference number. Specifically, the specific criterion number is set to "100", which is less than half the BB termination criterion number. However, this is not limited to this, and the specific criterion number may be set to 1/3 or less of the BB termination criterion number, or may be set to 1/4 or less.

If the total number of game media awarded to the player in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number (step S4404: YES), the process for setting the start of the BB performance is executed (step S4405). After that, the performance-side ending performance flag in the performance-side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4406).

In the BB performance start setting process, an ending end performance table that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to the end of the ending performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and a BB performance table that enables the execution of a BB performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ending end performance table, and the ending end performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In addition, the performance execution control is then performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the BB performance table, and the BB performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. In other words, if the remaining number of games to be executed for the ending performance set at the start of the ending performance becomes "0" in the middle of the BB state ST3, if the total number of game media granted to the player in the BB state ST3 is still below a specific reference number, the ending performance is ended and the BB performance is started even in the middle of the BB state ST3. This makes it possible to create a situation in which, if the BB state ST3 is started just before the end of the ending performance, the BB performance is executed immediately after the ending performance.

Here, as will be described in detail later, when the ending end effect is executed, including when the game ends and the ending effect counter value reaches "0" in a situation where the total number of game media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 is below a specific reference number, the main MPU 72 performs a freeze setting that forcibly waits for the start of a new game for the freeze period at the end of the ending. This freeze period at the end of the ending corresponds to the execution period of the ending end effect, and is specifically set to 15 seconds. By executing the ending end effect in this way while forcibly waiting for the start of a new game, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the ending end effect.

In addition, when a BB effect is executed following an ending end effect, an image indicating that the BB state ST3 will subsequently start is displayed in the display effect of the image display device 63 corresponding to the ending end effect. In other words, when a BB effect starts following an ending end effect, a freeze period corresponding to the ending end effect is set, but a freeze period at the start of the bonus corresponding to the start of the bonus state is not set. This makes it possible to ensure a sufficient execution period for the ending end effect while preventing the freeze period from becoming excessively long.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4402, it is judged whether or not the RB state ST4 is in effect by judging whether or not the RB performance standby flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4407). If the RB performance standby flag is set to "1" (step S4407: YES), the RB performance standby flag is cleared to "0" (step S4408).

If a negative judgment is made in step S4404, or if the processing of step S4408 is executed, processing is executed to extend the ending presentation. In other words, if the remaining number of games to be played set at the start of the ending presentation becomes "0", and the BB state ST3 is in effect and the total number of gaming media granted to the player in the BB state ST3 has already exceeded a specific reference number, the ending presentation is extended until the BB state ST3 ends. Also, if the remaining number of games to be played set at the start of the ending presentation becomes "0", and the RB state ST4 is in effect, the ending presentation is extended until the RB state ST4 ends.

To extend the ending performance, first, an extension setting process for the ending performance is executed (step S4409). In this extension setting process, an extension table for extending the ending performance by one game is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the extension table, so that the execution of the ending performance in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, a one-game performance is executed that has a continuity of the performance with respect to the contents of the immediately preceding ending performance. After that, the performance extension flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4410).

If none of the presentation extension flag, BB presentation standby flag, and RB presentation standby flag in the presentation side RAM 94 are set to "1" in the ending presentation end processing (step S4401, step S4402, and step S4407: NO), the start setting processing for the normal presentation is executed (step S4411). In the start setting processing, the ending end presentation table that enables the execution of the presentation corresponding to the end of the ending presentation is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94, and the normal presentation table that enables the execution of the presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. In this case, first, the presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the ending end presentation table, and the ending end presentation is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the normal presentation table, and the presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

If the presentation extension flag in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S4401: YES), it is determined whether the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S4412). If the bonus state has not ended (step S4412: NO), an extension setting process for the ending presentation is executed (step S4413). In this extension setting process, as in step S4409, an extension table for extending the ending presentation by one game is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. The presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the extension table, so that the execution of the ending presentation in the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 is extended by one game. In this case, a presentation of one game is executed that has a continuity of presentation with respect to the content of the immediately preceding ending presentation.

If the bonus state (BB state ST3 or RB state ST4) has ended (step S4412: YES), the performance extension flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4414), and the performance side ending performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is cleared to "0" (step S4415). After that, the start setting process for the normal performance is executed (step S4416). In the start setting process, the ending end performance table that enables the execution of the performance corresponding to the end of the ending performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and the normal performance table that enables the execution of the performance corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, first, the performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the ending end performance table, and the ending end performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. After that, the presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the normal presentation table, and the presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Returning to the explanation of the second control process of the game zone (FIG. 45), after executing the ending corresponding process in step S1805, it is judged whether the value of the advantageous continuation counter in the main RAM 74 has reached a value corresponding to the upper limit game number of the advantageous zone SC2 (specifically, "1500") (step S1806). If the judgment is affirmative in step S1806, the initialization process of the advantageous zone is executed (step S1807). In the initialization process of the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0". In addition, in the initialization process of the advantageous zone, even if the player is staying in any of the false premonition state ST5, the real premonition state ST6, the chance state ST7, the preparation state ST8, and the ART state ST9, the various data indicating the game states ST5 to ST9, including the counters for storing the number of continued games in those game states ST5 to ST9, are cleared to shift the game state to the normal game state ST1. After that, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is switched from the lit state to the unlit state (step S1808). This ends the notification in the advantageous zone display section 67 that the zone is now advantageous.

Then, it is determined whether the master ending effect flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S1809). If a positive determination is made in step S1809, a freeze setting process is executed (step S1810).

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S1809, a forced termination command is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S1811). If the presentation side MPU 92 receives the forced termination command, it executes the start setting process for the normal presentation in the other presentation processing of step S3520 in the non-normal presentation control processing (FIG. 72). In this start setting process, the normal return presentation table that enables the execution of the normal return presentation indicating a return to the normal game state ST1 and the normal presentation table that enables the execution of the presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. In this case, first, the presentation execution control is performed in the presentation side MPU 92 according to the normal return presentation table, so that the normal return presentation is executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the presentation execution control is performed in the presentation side MPU 92 according to the normal presentation table, so that the presentation corresponding to the normal game state ST1 is executed in the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Next, the freeze setting process executed in step S1802 or step S1810 in the second control process of the play area (FIG. 45) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 88. Note that since the second control process of the play area is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game, the freeze setting process is also executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the freeze waiting flag in the master RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S4501: NO), it means that the number of games continued in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games in the situation where the ending performance is being executed. In this case, first, the master ending performance flag in the master RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S4502). After that, if the game state at the timing when the current game is started is BB state ST3 (step S4503: YES), it is determined whether or not the current game is the final game of BB state ST3 (step S4504). If the current game is not the final game of BB state ST3 (step S4504: NO), it is determined whether or not the total number of game media granted to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than the specific reference number (step S4505). The specific reference number is the same as the specific reference number determined in step S4404 of the ending performance end processing (FIG. 87) in the performance side MPU 92. In other words, the specific criterion number is set to a number that is smaller than the BB termination criterion number; specifically, the specific criterion number is set to "100," which is less than half the BB termination criterion number.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4504 or if a positive judgment is made in step S4505, a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4506). In the freeze counter setting process, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4506, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the start of a new game into a waiting state. In this state in which the start of a new game is waited for, as already explained, the ending end performance is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, so that the player can be drawn to the ending end performance. The waiting state in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in both steps S4504 and S4505, the freeze standby flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process. If it is not the final game of BB state ST3 and the total number of game media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 is not equal to or less than a specific reference number, the execution of the ending presentation in the presentation side MPU 92 is extended in the normal section SC1 and in the BB state ST3 even after the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games and the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending presentation is put on hold until the timing when the extension of the ending presentation ends, that is, until the timing when the BB state ST3 ends. The freeze standby flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the freeze setting is in a standby state.

If the game state at the time when the current game is started is not BB state ST3 (step S4503: NO), it is determined whether the current game is other than the final game in RB state ST4 (step S4508). If the current game is not RB state ST4, or if the current game is the final game in RB state ST4 (step S4508: NO), a freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4509). In the freeze counter setting process, similar to step S4506, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted in the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). If a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4509, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the process into a state where the start of a new game is on hold. In this state where the start of a new game is on hold, as already explained, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 execute an ending effect, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the ending effect. The state on hold in step S413 in normal processing (FIG. 13) is released when the freeze counter value becomes "0".

As described above, by executing the freeze counter setting process in each of steps S4506 and S4509, if the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games during the execution period of the ending performance, and the game is not in a bonus state, if the game is in a bonus state but is the final game of the bonus state, or if the total number of gaming media awarded to the player in BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number, a freeze period at the end of the ending will occur at the end of the game. Then, the ending performance will be executed during the freeze period at the end of the ending.

If the current game is in RB state ST4 and is not the final game of the RB state ST4 (step S4508: YES), the freeze wait flag in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" without executing the freeze counter setting process (step S4510). If the current game is in RB state ST4 and is not the final game of the RB state ST4, the execution of the ending presentation in the presentation side MPU 92 is extended in the normal section SC1 and in the RB state ST4 even after the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 has reached the upper limit number of games and the initialization process of the advantageous section SC2 has been executed. Therefore, in such a situation, the freeze setting at the end of the ending presentation is put on hold until the timing when the extension of the ending presentation ends, that is, until the timing when the RB state ST4 ends. The freeze wait flag is a flag for the master MPU 72 to identify that the freeze setting is in a waiting state.

If the freeze wait flag is set to "1" (step S4501: YES), it is determined whether or not it is the final game of BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 (step S4511). If a positive determination is made in step S4511, the state in which the ending presentation is being extended in this game will end. Therefore, after clearing the freeze wait flag in the main RAM 74 to "0" (step S4512), the freeze counter setting process is executed (step S4513).

In the freeze counter setting process, similar to steps S4506 and S4509, numerical information corresponding to the freeze period (specifically, 15 seconds) at the end of the ending is set in the freeze counter of the main RAM 74. The numerical information set in the freeze counter is periodically subtracted by the timer subtraction process (step S208) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 11). When a numerical value is set in the freeze counter in step S4509, the process waits in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13). This puts the game into a state of waiting for the start of a new game. In this state of waiting for the start of a new game, as already explained, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 execute the ending end performance, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the ending end performance. The state of waiting in step S413 in the normal process (FIG. 13) is released when the value of the freeze counter becomes "0".

Next, the manner in which the ending effect is executed will be explained with reference to the time chart in Figure 89. Figure 89(a) shows the execution period of advantageous section SC2, Figure 89(b) shows the execution period of BB state ST3, Figure 89(c) shows the execution period of RB state ST4, Figure 89(d) shows the execution period of the ending effect, Figure 89(e) shows the execution period of the bonus effect (BB effect or RB effect), and Figure 89(f) shows the freeze period.

First, we will explain the cases where the ending performance ends in a situation other than BB state ST3 or RB state ST4.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), at the timing of t1 when the advantageous zone SC2 is in a situation where the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, and the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9, the ending performance is started at the timing of t1 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, at the timing of t2 as shown in FIG. 89(a), the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the end timing of the game where the upper limit number of games is reached, and a freeze period is started in which the start of a new game is forcibly put on hold as shown in FIG. 89(f). During the freeze period, the ending end performance is executed. After that, at the timing of t3 as shown in FIG. 89(f), the freeze period ends, and the ending performance is ended as shown in FIG. 89(d).

Next, we will explain what happens when the ending performance ends in the middle of BB state ST3.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), at the timing of t4 when the advantageous zone SC2 is in a situation where the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 becomes equal to or exceeds the number of games corresponding to the ending, and it is determined that the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9, so that the ending presentation starts at the timing of t4 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, at the timing of t5 when the ending presentation is being executed, the BB state ST3 starts as shown in FIG. 89(b). In this case, as shown in FIG. 89(f), no freeze setting is made in response to the start of the BB state ST3. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending presentation from being interrupted by the freeze setting.

After that, at the timing of t6 when the BB state ST3 is being executed as shown in FIG. 89(b), the game ends when the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89(a). In this case, the total number of game media awarded up to that point in the BB state ST3 is equal to or less than a specific reference number, so the ending effect is not extended. Therefore, at the timing of t6, a freeze period begins as shown in FIG. 89(f), during which the start of a new game is forcibly put on hold. During this freeze period, the ending end effect is executed. After that, the freeze period ends at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 89(f), and the ending effect ends as shown in FIG. 89(d). Also, at the timing of t7, an effect corresponding to the BB state ST3 begins as shown in FIG. 89(e).

After that, at the timing t8, the game ends with the BB state ST3 ending. Therefore, at the timing t8, a freeze period begins in which the start of a new game is forcibly put on hold, as shown in FIG. 89(f). During this freeze period, a presentation corresponding to the end of BB state ST3 is executed. After that, at the timing t9, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89(f), and the presentation corresponding to BB state ST3 ends as shown in FIG. 89(e).

Next, we will explain the case where the ending performance is extended because the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in the middle of the RB state ST4.

As shown in FIG. 89(a), at the timing of t10 when the advantageous zone SC2 is in a situation where the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 becomes equal to or exceeds the number of games corresponding to the ending, and in relation to the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9, it is determined that the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, and the ending presentation starts at the timing of t10 as shown in FIG. 89(d). After that, at the timing of t11 when the ending presentation is being executed, the RB state ST4 starts as shown in FIG. 89(c). In this case, as shown in FIG. 89(f), no freeze setting is performed in response to the start of the RB state ST4. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending presentation from being interrupted by the freeze setting.

After that, at the timing of t12 when RB state ST4 is being executed as shown in FIG. 89(c), the game ends when the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games as shown in FIG. 89(a). In this case, the ending performance is extended because RB state ST4 continues.

After that, at the timing of t13, it is the end of the game when RB state ST4 ends. Therefore, at the timing of t13, a freeze period begins in which the start of a new game is forcibly put on hold as shown in FIG. 89(f). During this freeze period, the ending end presentation is executed. After that, at the timing of t14, the freeze period ends as shown in FIG. 89(f), and RB state ST4 ends as shown in FIG. 89(c), and the ending presentation ends as shown in FIG. 89(d).

<About the advantageous maintenance zone>
Next, the advantageous maintenance period will be explained.

As already explained, by executing the processing of steps S3404 to S3409 of the ART state processing (FIG. 70), when the ART state ST9 ends and the number of games continued in the advantageous zone SC2 up to that point is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued (specifically, "1200"), a lottery process for the generation of an advantageous maintenance zone is executed, and if the advantageous maintenance is selected in the lottery process for the generation of the advantageous maintenance zone, a value corresponding to the number of advantageous maintenance games (specifically, "10") is set in the advantageous maintenance counter of the main RAM 74, and the advantageous zone SC2 becomes an advantageous maintenance zone in which the advantageous zone SC2 is maintained. In the advantageous maintenance zone, the value of the advantageous maintenance counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is played, and when the situation occurs in which the advantageous maintenance counter is "0" in the normal game state ST1, an initialization process for the advantageous zone SC2 is executed based on a positive judgment in step S1812 of the second control process for the game zone (FIG. 45), and the advantageous zone SC2 ends.

When a bonus win occurs in the favorable maintenance interval, if the first game of the bonus state that is started by the winning is in the favorable interval SC2, it is determined that the game will transition to the ART state ST9 after the bonus state ends. In this case, if the bonus state is due to the winning of the 3rd BB win, 4th BB win, or 1st RB win, which are bonus wins with no setting difference, the game that starts the bonus state will be in the favorable interval SC2 regardless of the play interval in the game in which the bonus win occurred. Therefore, even if the bonus win occurs in the final game of the favorable maintenance interval, the game that starts the bonus state will be in the favorable interval SC2, and it is determined that the game will transition to the ART state ST9 after the bonus state ends.

On the other hand, if the bonus state is one resulting from the establishment of a first BB win, second BB win, or second RB win, which are bonus wins with a setting difference, the advantageous zone SC2 associated with the start of the bonus state is not maintained or set. If this is the case, then if the bonus win occurs in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, the start game of the bonus state will be in the normal zone SC1, and therefore a transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed even if a bonus win occurs in the advantageous maintenance zone. In contrast, if a bonus win occurs in the advantageous maintenance zone, a presentation is executed in a mode corresponding to the type of role that resulted in the bonus win and the number of games played in the advantageous maintenance zone. The processing configuration for controlling the execution of the presentation is described below.

Figure 90 is a flowchart showing the presentation control process for the advantageous maintenance section. Note that the presentation control process for the advantageous maintenance section is executed after the normal presentation control process (Figure 52) is executed.

First, it is determined whether or not an advantage maintenance command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S4601). The advantage maintenance command is transmitted from the main MPU 72 when the ART state ST9 ends and the advantage maintenance period starts. If the advantage maintenance command is received (step S4601: YES), the start setting process of the advantage maintenance presentation is executed (step S4602). In the start setting process, an advantage maintenance presentation table that enables the execution of an advantage maintenance presentation corresponding to the advantage maintenance period over the number of advantage maintenance games (specifically, "10") is read from the presentation side ROM 93 and stored in the presentation side RAM 94. The presentation execution control is performed by the presentation side MPU 92 according to the advantage maintenance presentation table, and the advantage maintenance presentation is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. Note that, although an image corresponding to the advantage maintenance presentation is displayed in the advantage maintenance presentation on the image display device 63, the remaining number of games to be continued for the advantage maintenance presentation is not displayed. Furthermore, notification of the remaining number of games for which the advantageous maintenance effect is to continue is not provided by the image display device 63, nor by the upper lamp 61 or speaker 62.

If the advantageous maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES), it is determined whether any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604). If any bonus winning data is set in the main RAM 74 (step S4604: YES), it is determined whether it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance period (step S4605).

If it is not the final game of the advantageous maintenance period (step S4605: NO), and on condition that the bonus winning announcement is not being executed (step S4606: NO), the bonus winning announcement setting process is executed (step S4607). In the bonus winning announcement setting process, data setting is performed so that an image corresponding to the bonus winning is displayed when a video corresponding to the advantageous maintenance performance is displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 91 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus winning notification image G15. As shown in Figure 91 (a), the image display device 63 displays the bonus winning notification image G15 with the words "Make the bonus happen!". By displaying the bonus winning notification image G15 in this way, it is possible to encourage the player to make the bonus win happen within the advantageous maintenance zone. The display of the bonus winning notification image G15 ends when the display of the bonus type notification image G16, which will be described later, begins, or when a bonus win is realized.

If it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance period (step S4605: YES), it is determined whether the winning data currently set in the master RAM 74 is any of the first BB winning data, the second BB winning data, and the second RB winning data, which are winning data with a set difference in the winning probability (step S4608). Note that the presentation side MPU 92 can determine whether bonus winning data is set in the master RAM 74 based on the game start command sent from the master MPU 72, and can also determine the type of bonus winning data.

If it is any of these winning data (step S4608: YES), even if a bonus win is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, the game zone in the start game of the bonus state corresponding to the achievement of the bonus win becomes the normal zone SC1, so the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. Therefore, on the condition that the normal effect is not being executed (step S4609: NO), the start setting process of the normal effect is executed (step S4610). In the start setting process of the normal effect, the normal effect table that enables the execution of the normal effect corresponding to the normal zone SC1 in the normal game state ST1 is read from the effect side ROM 93 and stored in the effect side RAM 94. The effect execution control is performed by the effect side MPU 92 according to the normal effect table, and the normal effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63.

Except for the case where a bonus win with a set difference in the winning probability is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period, if a bonus win is achieved in the advantageous maintenance period, a transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed. In this case, if the final game of the advantageous maintenance period is reached when bonus winning data with a set difference in the winning probability is set, normal presentation is started at the start of that game, making it less likely that the player will get the impression that a transition to ART state ST9 did not occur despite a bonus win being achieved in the advantageous maintenance period.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4608, and a bonus type announcement is not being made (step S4611: NO), a bonus type announcement setting process is executed (step S4612). In the bonus type announcement setting process, data is set so that an image showing a combination of symbols that will result in a bonus win corresponding to the bonus winning data currently set in the main RAM 74 is displayed when a video corresponding to an advantageous maintenance performance is being displayed on the image display device 63.

Figure 91 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the bonus type notification image G16 in a situation where the 3rd BB winning data is set in the main RAM 74. As shown in Figure 91 (b), the image display device 63 displays a bonus type notification image G16 of "red 7, red 7, white 7", which corresponds to the combination of symbols that will result in a 3rd BB win. By displaying the bonus type notification image G16 in this way, it is possible to increase the probability of a bonus win with no set difference in the winning probability in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period. The display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends when a bonus win is achieved.

When an advantageous maintenance effect is being executed (step S4603: YES) and the start of a new game has brought about the timing to update the advantageous maintenance effect (step S4613: YES), an update setting process for the advantageous maintenance effect is executed (step S4614). In this update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the currently referenced advantageous maintenance effect table in response to the start of a new game. As a result, the execution content of the advantageous maintenance effect changes depending on the number of games that the advantageous maintenance effect continues.

Next, the progress of the advantageous maintenance zone will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 92. FIG. 92(a) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance zone, FIG. 92(b) shows the execution period of the advantageous zone SC2, FIG. 92(c) shows the timing when the bonus winning data with no set difference in the winning probability is set, FIG. 92(d) shows the timing when the bonus winning data with a set difference in the winning probability is set, FIG. 92(e) shows the execution period of the bonus state, FIG. 92(f) shows the timing when the transition to the ART state ST9 is won, FIG. 92(g) shows the execution period of the advantageous maintenance effect, FIG. 92(h) shows the execution period of the bonus winning or bonus type notification effect, and FIG. 92(i) shows the execution period of the normal effect.

First, we will explain the case where a bonus with a set difference is won in the advantageous maintenance period and the bonus is won in a game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance period.

At timing t1, which is the advantageous zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the advantageous maintenance zone starts as shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantageous maintenance display starts as shown in FIG. 92(g). Then, at timing t2, which is the timing when the game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone starts, a bonus with a setting difference is won as shown in FIG. 92(d). In this case, at timing t2, a bonus win notification display starts as shown in FIG. 92(h). Specifically, the display of the bonus win notification image G15 starts as shown in FIG. 91(a).

The player who has confirmed the bonus winning notification image G15 establishes a bonus win in the game in which the bonus win occurred. As a result, at the timing t3, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance period ends and the bonus state begins as shown in FIG. 92(a) and FIG. 92(e). Also, at the timing t3, the advantageous maintenance presentation ends as shown in FIG. 92(g), and the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 ends as shown in FIG. 92(h). Then, at the timing t4, the first game in the bonus state begins. In this case, since the advantageous period SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92(b), a bonus win is established in the advantageous maintenance period and the start game of the bonus state begins in the advantageous period SC2. Therefore, at the timing t4, a transition to the ART state ST9 is established as shown in FIG. 92(f).

Next, we will explain the case where a bonus with a set difference is won in the advantageous maintenance period and the bonus is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period.

At timing t5, which is the advantageous zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the advantageous maintenance zone starts as shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantageous maintenance display starts as shown in FIG. 92(g). Then, at timing t6, which is the start of a game before the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, a bonus with a setting difference is won as shown in FIG. 92(d). In this case, at timing t6, a bonus win notification display starts as shown in FIG. 92(h). Specifically, the display of the bonus win notification image G15 starts as shown in FIG. 91(a).

Although the player has confirmed the bonus winning notification image G15, the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone is started at the timing of t7 without the player being able to win the bonus. In this case, even if the advantageous maintenance zone is maintained in the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 92(a), the advantageous maintenance effect ends at the timing of t7 as shown in FIG. 92(g) and FIG. 92(i) and the normal effect starts. Even if the advantageous maintenance effect ends and the normal effect starts in this way, the display of the bonus winning notification image G15 continues as shown in FIG. 92(h). Then, the bonus win is established in the final game. In this case, at the timing of t8, which is the end timing of the final game, the advantageous maintenance zone ends as shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantageous zone SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 92(b). Also, at the timing of t8, the bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 92(e). In the start game of the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2 is not used but the normal zone SC1. Therefore, even though a bonus win occurs in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period, it does not result in a win to transition to ART state ST9.

As described above, even if a bonus win with a setting difference occurs in a game prior to the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone and the bonus win notification image G15 is displayed, if the bonus win cannot be achieved prior to the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, the transition to the ART state ST9 will not be achieved even if the bonus win is achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone. In other words, in order to achieve a transition to the ART state ST9, it is necessary to correctly predict the type of bonus winning data for the display of the bonus win notification image G15 by the game prior to the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone. This makes it possible to increase the interest of playing in the advantageous maintenance zone.

Next, we will explain what happens when a bonus with a setting difference is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period.

In the advantageous maintenance zone as shown in FIG. 92(a) and the advantageous zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone starts at the timing of t9. In this case, a bonus with a setting difference is won at the timing of t9 as shown in FIG. 92(d). If a bonus with a setting difference is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, the bonus winning notification image G15 is not displayed as shown in FIG. 92(h). Also, at the timing of t9, the advantageous maintenance effect ends and the normal effect starts as shown in FIG. 92(g) and FIG. 92(i). Even if a bonus is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, not only the advantageous maintenance zone ends at the timing of t10, which is the end timing of the final game, as shown in FIG. 92(a), but also the advantageous zone SC2 ends as shown in FIG. 92(b). Also, at the timing of t10, the bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 92(e). In the start game of the bonus state, the advantageous zone SC2 is not the advantageous zone SC2 but the normal zone SC1. Therefore, even though a bonus win occurs in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period, it does not result in a win to transition to ART state ST9.

Next, we will explain what happens when a bonus is won without any setting difference in the final game of the advantageous maintenance period.

When the game is in the advantageous maintenance zone as shown in FIG. 92(a) and in the advantageous zone SC2 as shown in FIG. 92(b), the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone starts at timing t11. In this case, a bonus is won without a setting difference as shown in FIG. 92(c) at timing t11. When a bonus is won without a setting difference and it is the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, a bonus type notification display starts as shown in FIG. 92(h). Specifically, the display of a bonus type notification image G16 starts as shown in FIG. 91(b).

The player who has confirmed the bonus type notification image G16 establishes a bonus win in the game in which the bonus was won. As a result, at the timing t12, which is the end timing of the game, the advantageous maintenance period ends and the bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 92(a) and FIG. 92(e). Also, at the timing t12, the advantageous maintenance presentation ends as shown in FIG. 92(g), and the display of the bonus type notification image G16 ends as shown in FIG. 92(h). Then, at the timing t13, the first game in the bonus state starts. In this case, since the advantageous period SC2 is maintained as shown in FIG. 92(b), a bonus win is established in the advantageous maintenance period and the start game of the bonus state starts in the advantageous period SC2. Therefore, at the timing t13, a transition to the ART state ST9 is won as shown in FIG. 92(f).

<Regarding game history management>
Next, the management process executed by the master MPU 72 to manage the game history and notify the management results will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 93. The management process is executed in step S213 in the timer interrupt process (Fig. 11).

When one new game is played (step S4701: YES), the value of the total game counter 74a provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4702). The total game counter 74a is a counter for measuring the number of games played regardless of the game status and game section. The total game counter 74a is made up of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a maximum value of 256 cubed minus 1. The value of the total game counter 74a is not cleared to "0" unless the all clear process of step S104 or the clear process other than the set value of step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games played in a game parlor over multiple business days.

When one game is newly executed (step S4701: YES) and the game is in the favorable zone SC2 (step S4703: YES), not only is the value of the total game number counter 74a incremented by 1, but the value of the favorable game number counter 74b provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S4704). The favorable game number counter 74b is provided separately from the favorable continuation counter in the main RAM 74, and the favorable game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" even if the initialization process of the favorable zone SC2 is executed. Therefore, when the favorable zone SC2 occurs multiple times with the normal zone SC1 in between, the total number of games consumed in the multiple favorable zones SC2 can be measured by the favorable game number counter 74b. The favorable game number counter 74b is made of 3 bytes and can measure the number of games up to a value of 256 cubed minus 1. In addition, the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b is not cleared to "0" unless the all clear process of step S104 or the clear process other than the set value of step S113 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10). Therefore, it is possible to measure the cumulative number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 executed over multiple business days at the game hall.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4701, if a negative judgment is made in step S4703, or if the processing of step S4704 is executed, it is determined whether or not the gaming history management results are being displayed (step S4705). If the gaming history management results are not being displayed (step S4705: NO), it is determined whether or not an instruction to display the gaming history management results has been issued (step S4706). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the front door 12 has been opened and the reset button 56 provided on the power supply device 54 has been operated while the slot machine 10 is being supplied with operating power. If the reset button 56 has been operated while the slot machine 10 is being supplied with operating power, an instruction to display the gaming history management results has been issued.

If it is determined that an instruction to display the results of the game history management has been issued (step S4706: YES), the ratio of the value of the advantageous game number counter 74b to the value of the total game number counter 74a is calculated (step S4707). In other words, the calculation is performed so that the calculation result = "value of the advantageous game number counter 74b" / "value of the total game number counter 74a".

After that, a display start process is executed (step S4708). In the display start process, the display of the calculation result of step S4707 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 is started. In this case, the display of the combined display unit 66 is controlled so that the tens digit of the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result of step S4707 by 100 is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a of the combined display unit 66 and the ones digit is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b. The calculation result is notified as a percentage display. Specifically, if the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "35", then "3" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 66a and "5" is displayed on the right 7-segment display 66b.

However, in this case where only the two 7-segment displays 66a and 66b are used for display, the display contents on the combined display unit 66 will be the same whether the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "100" or "0". Therefore, when the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "100", not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left 7-segment display unit 66a and the right 7-segment display unit 66b, but the favorable zone display unit 67 will be turned on, and when the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is "0", not only will "0" be displayed on each of the left 7-segment display unit 66a and the right 7-segment display unit 66b, but the favorable zone display unit 67 will be turned off. Note that when the management result of the game history is displayed on the combined display unit 66 and the value obtained by multiplying the calculation result by 100 is not "100", the favorable zone display unit 67 will be turned off even if the current game zone is the favorable zone SC2.

On the other hand, if the game history management result is displayed (step S4705: YES), it is determined whether an ON signal has been received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, and settlement detection sensor 51a (step S4709). If an ON signal indicating that the start lever 41 is being pressed is received from the start detection sensor 41a, if an ON signal indicating that any of the stop buttons 42 to 44 are being pressed is received from any of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, if an ON signal indicating that a medal has been inserted is received from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, if an ON signal indicating that any of the credit insertion buttons 47 to 49 are being pressed is received from any of the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a, or if an ON signal indicating that the settlement button 51 is being pressed is received from the settlement detection sensor 51a, a positive determination is made in step S4709. In this case, a positive determination is made in step S4709 regardless of whether each ON signal occurs during the valid period.

In other words, a positive judgment is made in step S4709 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a triggers the start of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, a positive judgment is made in step S4709 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a triggers the stop of rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Also, a positive judgment is made in step S4709 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a is subject to bet setting or credit increase. Also, a positive judgment is made in step S4709 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a is subject to bet setting. Also, a positive judgment is made in step S4709 regardless of whether the reception of an ON signal from the settlement detection sensor 51a triggers the settlement of credited virtual medals.

If the positive judgment is made in step S4709, a display end process is executed (step S4710). In the display end process, the display of the calculation result in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous zone display section 67 is ended, and the display contents of the combined display section 66 and the advantageous zone display section 67 are set to the display contents immediately before the start of the display of the calculation result. For example, if the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where the combined display section 66 displays the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning result of one game, the display of the number of game media awarded is resumed. Also, if the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where the combined display section 66 displays information corresponding to the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the display of the information corresponding to the stop order is resumed. Also, if the display of the calculation result is started in a situation where nothing is displayed in the combined display section 66, the state is set to a state where nothing is displayed. Also, if the advantageous zone display section 67 is turned on by displaying the calculation result in a situation where the advantageous zone display section 67 is turned off, the display is returned to the off state. In addition, if the advantageous zone display unit 67 is turned off due to the display of the calculation results while the advantageous zone display unit 67 is turned on, the advantageous zone display unit 67 will be returned to the on state.

Next, the manner in which the management results of the game history are displayed using the combined display unit 66 will be described with reference to the time chart in FIG. 94. FIG. 94(a) shows the period during which the combined display unit 66 displays the number of game media awarded corresponding to the winning result of one game (award number display), FIG. 94(b) shows the period during which the combined display unit 66 displays the results of computing the management results of the game history (hereinafter referred to as management display), FIG. 94(c) shows the period during which the front door 12 is open, FIG. 94(d) shows the timing when a management display instruction is issued, and FIG. 94(e) shows the timing when an ON signal is received from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a to 44a, 45a, 47a to 49a, 51a, which triggers the end of the display.

At the timing of t1, when the number of bonuses is displayed in the combined display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 94(a), the front door 12 is opened as shown in FIG. 94(c), and at the timing of t2 thereafter, the reset button 56 is operated as a management display operation as shown in FIG. 94(d). As a result, at the timing of t2, the management display is started in the combined display unit 66 as shown in FIG. 94(b). Then, at the timing of t3, when the management display is continuing, the front door 12 is closed as shown in FIG. 94(c). In this case, the slot machine 10 is provided with a sensor for detecting whether the front door 12 is open or not, but the opening and closing of the front door 12 does not trigger the end of the management display in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67. Therefore, even at the timing of t3, the management display continues as shown in FIG. 94(b). In this way, opening and closing the front door 12 does not trigger the end of the management display, so if the front door 12 is opened and the reset button 56 is operated to start the management display in the combined display section 66 and the advantageous zone display section 67, it is possible to check the contents of the management display afterwards when the front door 12 is closed.

The reel index sensors that detect when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has completed one rotation are also excluded from the sensors that trigger the end of the management display. This makes it possible to prevent the management display from being ended against the will of the arcade manager due to the rotation status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the management display is started while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning.

After that, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 94(e), an ON signal is received from any of the various sensors 41a, 42a-44a, 45a, 47a-49a, 51a, which triggers the end of the display. As a result, at the timing of t4, the management display ends and the display of the number of points awarded resumes, as shown in FIG. 94(a) and FIG. 94(b).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be set as the setting value to be used. In addition, the existence of multiple types of game states ST1 to ST9 and the existence of game zones in addition to these make it possible to diversify the progress of the game. In addition, while a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur in the normal zone SC1, a transition to the ART state ST9 can occur in the advantageous zone SC2, and both the normal zone SC1 and the advantageous zone SC2 are configured to remain in the normal game state ST1, the bonus internal state ST2, the BB state ST3, and the RB state ST4, so the player will play while hoping that the advantageous zone SC2 will be set as the advantageous game state.

In this case, a transition to the ART state ST9 may occur based on the occurrence of a bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) corresponding to a bonus role (specifically, a role of the first BB winning data, a role of the second BB winning data, a role of the second RB winning data) whose winning probability varies according to the set value in the favorable zone SC2. On the other hand, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability varies according to the set value occurs in the normal zone SC1, a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. As a result, the player expects that a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability varies according to the set value will occur in the favorable zone SC2. In addition, according to this configuration, the transition probability to the ART state ST9 is affected by the occurrence probability of the bonus state, so it is possible to indirectly change the transition probability to the ART state ST9 according to the set value without directly changing the transition probability to the ART state ST9 according to the set value.

Even if a bonus role in which the winning probability varies according to a set value is won in the advantageous zone SC2, this alone will not trigger the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9. Instead, the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed based on the fact that a bonus state game corresponding to a bonus role in which the winning probability varies according to a set value has been played in the advantageous zone SC2. As a result, a player hoping to transition to the ART state ST9 will not only focus on winning a bonus role in which the winning probability varies according to a set value, but will also focus on whether or not a bonus state corresponding to that bonus role has started in the advantageous zone SC2. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A transition to the ART state ST9 can also occur when a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to the set value (specifically, a role with 3rd BB winning data, 4th BB winning data, or 1st RB winning data) occurs in the favorable zone SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the effect of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9 from becoming too significant.

When a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to a set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the transition to the bonus state triggers a transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2 in the play area, and a transition to the ART state ST9 may occur. In contrast, even if a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role whose winning probability changes according to a set value occurs in the normal section SC1, the play area remains in the normal section SC1, so a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur. This makes it possible to attract more attention from players to the former bonus state than to the latter bonus state.

When a non-bonus role in the normal section SC1, whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, is won, a lottery process for transitioning to the advantageous section SC2 is executed, and when the transition lottery process is won, the game section transitions from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the probability of transitioning to the advantageous section SC2 from changing according to the set value. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect of the set value on the probability of transitioning to the ART state ST9 from being too significant.

Even if a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, is won in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is not executed, but the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed when a game in a bonus state corresponding to the bonus role is played in the advantageous zone SC2. As a result, a player hoping to transition to the ART state ST9 will not only focus on winning the bonus role, but will also focus on whether or not the advantageous zone SC2 is in effect when a game in a bonus state corresponding to the bonus role is played. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Even if a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, is won in the normal section SC1 and a bonus state corresponding to that bonus role is initiated, there is no transition from the normal section SC1 to the advantageous section SC2. As a result, in order for a game in a bonus state corresponding to a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, to be played in the advantageous section SC2, it is necessary to win that bonus role in the advantageous section SC2 and to play a game in a bonus state corresponding to that bonus role in the advantageous section SC2. Therefore, the player will also pay attention to the continuation status of the advantageous section SC2, which can increase the interest of the game.

When the first game in the bonus state corresponding to a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, is executed in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, when the bonus role is won in the advantageous zone SC2, the bonus win is established early, making it easier to get an opportunity to execute the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9.

When a bonus state occurs that corresponds to a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, even if the normal section SC1 is in the advantageous section SC2, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed. As a result, in the normal section SC1, the player will hope to win a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to the set value, rather than a bonus role whose winning probability changes according to the set value.

Even after the ART state ST9 ends, the advantageous zone SC2 will continue by being set as an advantageous maintenance zone. If a bonus win is made in the advantageous maintenance zone and a game in the bonus state corresponding to the bonus win is executed in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition to the ART state ST9 will be confirmed. This will allow the player to hope for a bonus win in the advantageous maintenance zone, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Even if a bonus win occurs during an advantageous maintenance interval, if the game in which the bonus win occurs is the final game of the advantageous maintenance interval, if the bonus win corresponds to a bonus role whose winning probability varies according to a set value, the game in the bonus state is in the normal interval SC1, and no transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. In contrast, if a bonus role whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance interval, the advantageous maintenance effect corresponding to that advantageous maintenance interval is not executed, and a normal effect is performed, even in the final game of the advantageous maintenance interval. This makes it less likely that the player will get the impression that a transition to the ART state ST9 did not occur despite a bonus win occurring in the final game of the advantageous maintenance interval.

On the other hand, if a bonus state occurs that corresponds to a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to a set value, the game will enter the advantageous zone SC2 even if it is in the normal zone SC1. Therefore, if a bonus win corresponding to that bonus role is achieved in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. Therefore, if a bonus role whose winning probability does not change according to a set value is won in the final game of the advantageous maintenance zone, the advantageous maintenance performance is also executed in that final game. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for an event in which a bonus win is achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone and a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, and it is possible to increase the player's attention to the advantageous maintenance zone.

When the number of games played in the advantageous maintenance period reaches the number of advantageous maintenance games, the advantageous maintenance period ends and advantageous period SC2 ends. This makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player the timing for the end of the advantageous maintenance period.

The advantageous maintenance period is set based on the end of ART state ST9 in a situation where the number of games executed in the advantageous period SC2 is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, which is set as the number of games that is equal to or more than the advantageous maintenance number less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent an advantageous maintenance period from occurring even if the number of games executed in the advantageous period SC2 is close to the upper limit number of games.

In the configuration in which, when the real premonition state ST6 is reached, a performance is executed that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 over multiple games, and a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the game, when the false premonition state ST5 is reached, a performance is executed that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 over multiple games, but a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur after the end of the game. As a result, when a performance that makes the player expect a transition to the ART state ST9 over multiple games is executed, the player will expect a transition to the ART state ST9 afterwards, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In this case, in the false premonition state ST5, the play zone is set to the advantageous zone SC2. As a result, even if the false premonition state ST5 is reached, it is possible to cause an opportunity to transition to the ART state ST9, so that it is possible to increase the attention of the player not only to the real premonition state ST6 but also to the false premonition state ST5.

If a transition trigger to the ART state ST9 occurs in the false premonition state ST5, the number of games played in the false premonition state ST5 is also counted as the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 that continues thereafter. Then, when the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous zone SC2 ends. This makes it possible to obtain the benefits of the advantageous zone SC2 in the false premonition state ST5, while creating the disadvantage of the continuation of the false premonition state ST5 with regard to the upper limit number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

If the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won occurs once before the false premonition state ST5 ends, the favorable zone SC2 ends when the false premonition state ST5 ends, whereas if the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won does not occur once even if the false premonition state ST5 ends, the favorable zone SC2 is maintained even after the end of the false premonition state ST5. This ensures that the notification of the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won occurs once when the favorable zone SC2 is reached, making it possible to ensure the favorability of the favorable zone SC2 and to diversify the end timing of the favorable zone SC2 relative to the end timing of the false premonition state ST5 depending on whether or not the notification of the stop order occurs.

When a player wins a specific role in the chance state ST7, a lottery process for the transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, and when the transition is won in the lottery process, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs. As a result, the player expects the chance state ST7 to occur, and also expects to win a specific role in the chance state ST7. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, by executing a chance performance in each game in the chance state ST7, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectations for the chance state ST7. In this case, when the chance state ST7 is set in a situation in which the false premonition state ST5 is in a false premonition performance and a false premonition performance is being performed, the chance performance is not started, but the false premonition performance is continued. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the performance content of the false premonition performance up to that point from being interrupted by the occurrence of the chance performance. In addition, even if the false premonition performance is continued without the chance performance being performed in this way, the game state is the chance state ST7, so it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effect while not losing the profit of the chance state ST7.

After the end of this premonition state ST6, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, and also if a transition lottery process executed in the chance state ST7 results in a successful transition. In this case, if the chance state ST7 is set while the false premonition effect is being executed as described above, the false premonition effect may be continued, resulting in a successful transition to the ART state ST9 during the false premonition effect, causing a transition to the ART state ST9. This means that a transition to the ART state ST9 can occur even when a false premonition effect is being executed, and it is possible to make the player look forward to a transition to the ART state ST9 regardless of whether a false premonition effect or a real premonition effect is being executed.

If the false premonition effect ends in a situation where the player is in the chance state ST7, a chance effect will start. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity for the chance effect to be executed. Even if a chance effect is executed following the end of the false premonition effect in this way, the chance effect will continue for the same number of games as if the chance effect was started when the player was set to the chance state ST7. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation while the chance effect is being executed, even if the chance state ST7 ends in the middle of the execution of the chance effect.

By ending the advantageous zone SC2 when the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, it is possible to prevent the advantageous zone SC2, which is advantageous to the player, from continuing excessively. In this case, the ending performance is executed when the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches or exceeds the ending-compatible game number, which is set as a number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the advantageous zone SC2 is approaching its end. In addition, by making the player want to check the ending performance, it is possible to increase the player's desire to continue the advantageous zone SC2, and furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the ending performance is actually executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In a situation where the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST9 is equal to or greater than the number of games that will reach the upper limit number of games in advantageous zone SC2, an ending effect is executed if the number of games executed in advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to an ending. This results in the ending effect being executed in a situation where it is confirmed that the number of games executed in advantageous zone SC2 will reach the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to prevent an event from occurring where the number of games executed in advantageous zone SC2 does not reach the upper limit number of games even though an ending effect has been executed.

Regardless of whether the game state is favorable to the player, BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, or ART state ST9, the ending performance is executed based on the number of games executed in the favorable zone SC2 being equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending. This allows the ending performance to be executed in a game state favorable to the player, making it possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the ending performance is executed.

If a bonus state occurs while an ending performance is being executed, the ending performance will continue without starting the bonus performance (BB performance, RB performance). This allows the execution of the ending performance to be prioritized.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a BB state in which an ending performance is being executed, the BB performance will start if the total number of game media awarded in the BB state at that time is equal to or less than a specific reference number. This makes it possible to ensure an opportunity for the BB performance to be executed even in a situation in which the execution of the ending performance is prioritized.

When the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a BB state where an ending performance is being executed, the ending performance will continue if the total number of game media awarded in the BB state at that time exceeds a specific reference number. Also, when the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games in a RB state where an ending performance is being executed, the ending performance will continue. This makes it possible to extend the ending performance by utilizing the period during which a situation advantageous to the player continues. Also, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that a situation in which the bonus state continues after the end of the advantageous section SC2 is a situation in which the ART state ST9 continues.

When the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the advantageous zone SC2 is ending. In this case, if the ending presentation continues as the bonus state continues even after the advantageous zone SC2 ends, the game progress is not stopped at the end of the advantageous zone SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending presentation from being interrupted by the state in which the game progress is stopped when the ending presentation continues, and makes it easier for the player to recognize that the situation in which the bonus state continues after the advantageous zone SC2 ends is a situation in which the ART state ST9 is continuing.

When the bonus state begins and ends, normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This allows the player to clearly recognize that the bonus state is beginning or ending. In this case, even if the bonus state begins or ends while an ending performance is being executed, game progress is not stopped. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ending performance from being interrupted by the game progress being stopped due to the bonus state.

In any of the lottery tables for the normal mode, the first RT mode, and the second RT mode, the index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" are aggregated into the index values IV in the front range of consecutive numbers starting from index value IV = 1, and the index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" are aggregated into the index values IV in the rear range of consecutive numbers from the index value IV next to the last index value IV in the front range to the last index value IV. In this way, by aggregating the index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" into the front range and aggregating the index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" into the rear range, it becomes easier to set and modify the index values IV with the same winning probability among the set values "1" to "6" and the index values IV with different winning probabilities among the set values "1" to "6" during the design stage of the slot machine 10.

In the lottery table for normal mode, the lottery table for first RT mode, and the lottery table for second RT mode, different index values IV are set between the lottery tables even for roles for which the same winning data is set. In response to this, an offset table 111 is provided, in which roles for which the same winning data is set but different index values IV are set are consolidated into the same winning number. This winning number is then used in various processes after determining the winning role in the lottery process for roles. This makes it possible to treat roles for which the same winning data is set but different index values IV in each lottery table as the same information in various processes after the lottery process for roles is executed, making it possible to simplify the processing configuration for identifying winning roles in various processes.

The winning numbers in the offset table 111 are set as consecutive number information. This makes it possible to optimally perform processing to identify the winning role in various processes after the winning role is determined in the role selection process.

The relationship between the index value IV and the winning number in each lottery table is set as the offset table 111 during the design stage of the slot machine 10. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load required to determine the winning number based on the index value IV of each lottery table.

Of the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9, the number of games set in the display counter 126 is notified to the player, but the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 is not notified to the player. Then, according to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127, a special added effect is executed to indicate that the number of games has been granted to the player. This results in an effect that corresponds to the number of games set in the stock game number counter 127 being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The stock game number counter 127 stores the number of games that trigger multiple additions, and the stored number of games is reported collectively as an increase in the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9. This allows the player to recognize that a large number of games has been added at once, providing an element of surprise.

Even if the number of games set in the stock game counter 127 is the same, there are multiple selection modes for the number of games to be notified to the player as a special added effect. This makes it possible to diversify the selection modes for the number of games to be notified from the number of games set in the stock game counter 127.

Even if the number of games set in the stock game counter 127 is the same, there are multiple types of special add-on effects to choose from. This makes it possible to diversify the execution modes of the special add-on effects, thereby making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

The execution of multiple types of special add-on effects may be decided at the same time. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which special add-on effects are executed, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

When the special top-up effect is executed, an increase in the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST9 is announced in each of the multiple games. This makes it possible to increase the number of times that an increase in the number of remaining games to be played in ART state ST9 is announced, which can increase the interest in the game.

If the condition for directly adding the number of games is met while the special add-on effect is being executed, in addition to the notification of the increase in the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state ST9 due to the special add-on effect, a notification of the direct addition of the number of games to be played is executed. This makes it possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player regarding the notification of the increase in the number of remaining games to be played in the ART state ST9.

The master MPU 72 executes processing to increase the number of remaining continuing games in the ART state ST9, and the presentation MPU 92 executes processing to execute a presentation corresponding to the increase in the number of continuing games. This makes it possible to centralize the progress control of the ART state ST9 in the master MPU 72, while preventing the processing load on the master MPU 72 from increasing even if the presentation corresponding to the increase in the number of continuing games is complex. This makes it possible to optimally execute control related to the ART state ST9.

When the B loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of games in ART state ST9 as a predetermined additional number of games for each game. In this case, based on the number of games executed in the B loop reaching or exceeding the specific reference number of 21 games, a special freeze effect is executed in which the total number of games awarded to the B loop is notified to the player all at once. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to be notified of the award of a large number of games all at once, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Even if the main MPU 72 has been set to B loop, the effects corresponding to the setting to B loop will not be executed until the special freeze effect occurs. This gives the player the impression that the special freeze effect has occurred suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player.

When the special freeze effect is executed, the normal game progress based on the player's operation is stopped. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the special freeze effect.

When the number of games played in the B loop reaches or exceeds a specific reference number of 21 games, a special freeze effect is executed based on the end of the B loop. This makes it possible to execute a special freeze effect when a large number of games have been awarded, and also makes it possible to notify the player that the B loop has ended.

The specific reference number is set to a value greater than the quotient of 1000 games divided by the predetermined additional number of games, which is 50 games. This makes it possible to notify the player that a number of games greater than 1000 games has been added to the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9 as the number of unplayed games, even if the number of games granted in the B loop is consumed midway through the B loop.

When the A loop occurs in the main MPU 72, 50 games are added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 as a specific increased number of games in each game. In this case, the number of games awarded in the A loop is temporarily added to the stock game number counter 127 without being notified to the player, whereas when the A loop is set, the expected performance is executed over three games, which is the specific number of games to be executed, so that the player can expect how many games have been added to the stock game number counter 127 when the expected performance is being executed.

When the expected effect has been executed for a specific number of effect games, the special added effect corresponding to the value of the stock game count counter 127 at that time is executed even if the A loop has not yet ended. This allows the player to look forward to the content of the special added effect that will be executed after the expected effect is executed while it is being executed. Also, it is possible to start the special added effect earlier than in a configuration in which the special added effect is not executed until the A loop ends.

Even if the expected performance has been executed for a specific number of performance games, if the end condition of the A loop is met, the A loop will end. This makes it possible to create a situation where the A loop ends before the expected performance ends, and a situation where the A loop continues even after the expected performance is completed.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more and the remaining number of continuing games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, the execution mode of the release effect that continues the ART state ST9 differs depending on the value of the stock game number counter 127 in relation to the first release reference value and the second release reference value. This makes it possible to diversify the execution mode of the release effect depending on the value of the stock game number counter 127, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is equal to or greater than the first release reference value, and the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, at least a portion of the value of the stock game number counter 127 is notified to the player as the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9. This allows the player to feel reassured that the ART state ST9 will continue to some extent.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 exceeds the second release reference value, if the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, only a portion of the value of the stock game number counter 127 is notified to the player as the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the release effect is executed, in which the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is notified, and makes it possible to make the player expect that the ART state ST9 will continue even if the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player approaches 0.

When the value of the stock game number counter 127 is less than the first release reference value and the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, the ART state ST9 is continued without notifying the remaining number of games to be continued in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to make the player anticipate how long the ART state ST9 will continue.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are commonly used in multiple types of lottery processing. This makes it possible to reduce the number of random number circuits 101a to 101l and simplify the configuration.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are targets for obtaining random numbers in a predetermined order. This makes it possible to prevent the random number obtaining target from being biased towards one of the random number circuits 101a to 101l. In addition, because the random number is obtained from the shared random number circuit 101a to 101l that corresponds to the value of the random number pointer in the main RAM 74, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for identifying the shared random number circuit 101a to 101l from which the random number is to be obtained from from becoming complicated.

The number of lottery processes that obtain random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is greater than the number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to increase the number of lottery processes while suppressing an increase in the random number circuits 101a to 101l.

The number of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is greater than the maximum number of lottery processes that obtain random numbers from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l in one game. This makes it possible to prevent random numbers from the same first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l from being used in multiple lottery processes in one game in a configuration in which the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are used in common in multiple lottery processes.

When drawing a winning combination, random numbers are obtained from the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, rather than from the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This allows the winning combination to be drawn precisely.

The first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l all generate 8-bit random numbers. This makes it possible to use random numbers with the same number of bits regardless of which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l a random number is obtained from in a single lottery process.

Each time one game is executed, the value of the total game counter 74a of the main RAM 74 is incremented by one, and each time one game is executed in the advantageous zone SC2, the value of the advantageous game counter 74b of the main RAM 74 is incremented by one. This makes it possible to store and retain information for deriving the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2 in the slot machine 10. In addition, the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2 is calculated using the value of the total game counter 74a and the value of the advantageous game counter 74b, and the calculation result is displayed in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67. This makes it possible to grasp the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2. In addition, when an end trigger occurs in a situation where the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2 is displayed in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67, the display is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent the display in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 in a situation where it is not necessary to display the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2.

When an ON signal is received from any of the start detection sensor 41a, stop detection sensors 42a-44a, inserted medal detection sensor 45a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a-49a, and settlement detection sensor 51a, it is determined that an end trigger has occurred, and the display of the calculation results of the percentage of time spent in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and advantageous zone display unit 67 is terminated. This makes it possible to improve the operability for terminating the display.

There is only one type of operation for starting the display of the calculation result of the proportion of time spent in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67. This makes it possible to prevent the display of the calculation result of the proportion of time spent in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 from being started unintentionally.

The transmission of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, the transmission of an ON signal from the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the transmission of an ON signal from the inserted credit detection sensors 47a to 49a may occur when starting a game. In this case, based on the occurrence of an event that may occur when starting a game in this way, the display of the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent a game from being played while the calculation result of the proportion staying in the advantageous zone SC2 is displayed in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67.

Even if an ON signal is received from the start detection sensor 41a when operation of the start lever 41 is not enabled, the display of the calculation result of the percentage of time spent in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 is terminated. This makes it possible to terminate the display of the calculation result of the percentage of time spent in the advantageous zone SC2 in the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 by operating the start lever 41, without waiting for the operation of the start lever 41 to be enabled. The same applies to the stop buttons 42 to 44.

If the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will start rotating even if the start trigger based on the new operation of the start lever 41 does not occur when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of one game by the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being invalidated by the stop of the supply of operating power. Also, in this way, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is newly started when the supply of operating power is resumed, the execution of stop control by the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being executed immediately after the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started when the supply of operating power is resumed with the stop buttons 42 to 44 being operated. If stop control for reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed immediately after reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate, there is a risk that reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will not rotate normally, but by restricting the execution of stop control by operating stop buttons 42-44 as described above, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

If the supply of operating power is stopped when the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the constant speed flag 74c will not be set to "1" after the supply of operating power is resumed. If the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be executed, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will begin. This makes it possible to use the constant speed flag 74c to invalidate the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 and start a new rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the supply of operating power is resumed.

When the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" even if the clearing processes of steps S104 and S113 in the main process (FIG. 10) are not executed when the supply of operating power is started. Then, when the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" in a situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R should be executed, the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started. This makes it possible to use the constant speed flag 74c to start a new rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while invalidating the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 when the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and the supply of operating power is resumed.

If the supply of operating power is stopped while the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" in the main processing (FIG. 10) when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to ensure that the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" when the supply of operating power is resumed.

The constant lottery process (Fig. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (Fig. 17), and the additional number of games is awarded based on the fact that a direct additional win has been achieved in the constant lottery process (Fig. 63). This makes it possible to create a situation in which the additional number of games is awarded in a manner that is not dependent on the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (Fig. 17). Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the additional number of games will be awarded even if the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (Fig. 17) is not the desired result, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The random numbers used in the role selection process (Fig. 17) are obtained based on the operation of the start lever 41, and the random numbers used in the constant selection process (Fig. 63) are also obtained based on the operation of the start lever 41. This makes it possible to make the trigger for obtaining the random numbers used in the constant selection process (Fig. 63) common to the operation of the start lever 41, in the same way as the trigger for obtaining the random numbers used in the role selection process (Fig. 17), even in a configuration in which the constant selection process (Fig. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the role selection process (Fig. 17). This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without complicating the configuration related to the trigger for obtaining the random numbers.

During the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17), a random number to be updated is obtained in the first dedicated random number circuit 102a, and during the regular lottery process (Figure 63), a random number to be updated is obtained in the third dedicated random number circuit 102c. This makes it possible to make the results of the regular lottery process (Figure 63) completely independent of the results of the lottery process for winning combinations (Figure 17).

In the ART state ST9, a lottery process (Figure 63) is constantly executed for each game. This allows the player to expect the addition of additional game numbers in each game in the ART state ST9, regardless of the results of the lottery process (Figure 17).

In the direct addition process (Figure 65), the addition lottery process is executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17). This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of added games is awarded regardless of the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), and a situation in which the number of added games is awarded in a manner corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17). This allows the player to expect the number of added games to be awarded according to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), and to expect the number of added games to be awarded regardless of the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17).

The number of additional games awarded as a result of a direct addition win in the regular lottery process (Figure 63) is less than the number of additional games awarded as a result of a direct addition win in the additional lottery process executed in a manner corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17). This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17) regarding the awarding of the number of additional games, and makes it possible for the player to expect the awarding of the number of additional games even if the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17) is not the desired result.

If an additional number of games is awarded as a result of an immediate additional win in the additional lottery process executed in a manner corresponding to the results of the role lottery process (Figure 17), the additional number of games will not be awarded as a result of the immediate additional win, even if an immediate additional win is won in the regular lottery process (Figure 63). This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effect already described, while preventing an excessive number of additional games from being awarded.

When a role that has the same winning probability regardless of the multiple setting values in the role selection process (Fig. 17) is selected, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the role selection process (Fig. 17) is executed. On the other hand, the regular lottery process (Fig. 63) is executed regardless of the result of the role selection process (Fig. 17). This makes it possible to award an additional number of games while making it difficult to predict the setting value.

The random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is fewer than the number of bits in 1 byte. This makes it possible to use a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9, while still allowing the use of 1 byte of lottery value information in both cases when creating a 100% winning situation and a possible losing situation.

If the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, and the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for generating a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, unless the situation of all zeros after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, the lottery value information corresponding to 100% will not result in 100% winning. On the other hand, if the situation of all zeros after subtraction is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to prevent all zeros from being obtained as a random number. Therefore, if the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to 100% at least to a number of bits greater than the number of bits in 1 byte. On the other hand, since the random number used in the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of bits in 1 byte, as described above, it becomes possible to use 1 byte of lottery value information corresponding to 100%. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the lottery value information in advance.

The rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be started so that the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R starts after the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R ends. This allows the player to visually confirm the sequential start of the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R may vary. This makes it possible to diversify the start mode when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts sequentially.

When one game is started and no reel performance is performed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning simultaneously, and when one game is started and a reel performance is performed and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are restarted after the reel performance ends, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start spinning sequentially and the period from the end of the acceleration period on one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to the start of the acceleration period on the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed.

In addition, when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is resumed after the reel performance has ended, the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is started in sequence, and the period from the end of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to the start of the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is restarted after the reel performance has been executed.

When the left reel 32L starts spinning after a reel performance, the period from the end of the reel performance to the start of the acceleration period on the left reel 32L can vary. Also, when the center reel 32M, which is the next reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, starts spinning, the period from the end of the acceleration period on the left reel 32L to the start of the acceleration period on the center reel 32M can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, and as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the start mode when the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts sequentially.

The presence or absence and length of a waiting period before the acceleration period begins for each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are determined by lottery. This makes it possible to make the determination of the waiting period irregular.

The random number counter used to determine the presence and length of a waiting period before starting the acceleration period for the left reel 32L is the same as the random number counter used to determine the presence and length of a waiting period before starting the acceleration period for the center reel 32M. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while simplifying the configuration.

The period required for the random number counter to complete one revolution is shorter than the period required for the acceleration period on the left reel 32L to end after it has started. This makes it possible to perform independent lotteries for each waiting period in a configuration in which a common random number counter is used to determine either the waiting period for the left reel 32L or the waiting period for the center reel 32M.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, a pseudo bonus state exists as one type of bonus state. Below, the configurations different from the first embodiment will be described. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

In the pseudo bonus state, similarly to the ART state ST9, if a winning number between "1" and "3" is set in the role selection process (Figure 17), the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow a first bell win to be achieved is announced, if a role that will allow a promotion replay win that promotes the game mode to the first RT mode or the second RT mode is won, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will allow a promotion replay win to be achieved is announced, and if a role that will allow a fall replay win that drops the game mode to the normal mode or the first RT mode is won, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that will prevent a fall replay win from being achieved is announced. In other words, the pseudo bonus state basically progresses in the second RT mode, similar to the ART state ST9, and when a winning number between "1" and "3" is set in the role selection process (FIG. 17), the stopping order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is announced. Therefore, the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games in the pseudo bonus state is the same as that in the ART state ST9. However, this is not limited to this, and the expected number of game media to be awarded per unit number of games in the pseudo bonus state and the ART state ST9 may be configured to be approximately the same, although there may be a slight difference, or they may be configured to be significantly different.

The pseudo bonus state occurs under the condition that it is in the favorable zone SC2, just like the ART state ST9, and ends when the remaining number of continued games has been consumed. Also, if a transition to the ART state ST9 is selected in the pseudo bonus state, the state will transition to the ART state ST9 after the pseudo bonus state ends. Note that a transition to the pseudo bonus state will not occur in situations where a transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, such as in the premonition state ST6 or preparation state ST8, or in a situation where the state is in the ART state ST9. The processing configuration related to the pseudo bonus state will be explained below.

Figure 95 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus generation management process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the pseudo bonus generation management process is executed after the role selection process (Figure 17) has completed its role selection determination.

When the advantageous zone flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4801: YES) and the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are set in the role selection process (Figure 17) (step S4802: YES), the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state is executed. In other words, the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state is executed on the condition that the advantageous zone SC2 is reached. Also, the transition lottery process to the pseudo bonus state is executed when a predetermined role is won in the role selection process (Figure 17).

In the pseudo bonus state transition lottery process, first, the pseudo bonus transition table corresponding to the winning number set in the current role lottery process (Figure 17) is read from the main ROM 73 (step S4803). In this case, the pseudo bonus transition table is set so that winning numbers with a lower probability of winning have a higher probability of transitioning to the pseudo bonus state.

After that, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S4804). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. 16. In the lottery process for transition to the pseudo bonus state, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and at the timing when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. Then, the random number acquired in step S4804 is compared with the pseudo bonus transition table read in step S4803 to determine whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won (step S4805). If a transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won (step S4805: YES), the pseudo bonus win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4806). The pseudo bonus win flag is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether or not a transition to the pseudo bonus state has been won.

Next, the pseudo bonus management process will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 96. Note that the pseudo bonus management process is executed after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped spinning in one game.

If the pseudo bonus winning flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4901: YES), the bonus premonition counter in the main RAM 74 is set to "5" as a value corresponding to the number of games continued in the bonus premonition state (step S4902). By setting a value in the bonus premonition counter, the game state becomes the bonus premonition state. The value set in the bonus premonition counter is decremented by 1 each time a new game is played, and when the value of the bonus premonition counter becomes "0", the game transitions to the bonus preparation state. In addition, a bonus premonition start command indicating that the bonus premonition state has been entered is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S4903). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus premonition start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 so that a performance corresponding to the bonus premonition state is executed.

If the value of the bonus premonition counter in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S4904: YES), the value of the bonus premonition counter is decremented by 1 (step S4905). Then, if the value of the bonus premonition counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S4906: YES), the bonus preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4907). By setting the bonus preparation flag to "1", the gaming state becomes the bonus preparation state. In addition, a bonus preparation start command indicating that the bonus preparation state has been entered is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S4908). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the bonus preparation start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 so that a performance corresponding to the bonus preparation state is executed.

If the bonus preparation flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S4909: YES), it is determined whether or not a second RT replay win has been achieved in the current game (step S4910). If a second RT replay win has been achieved (step S4910: YES), this means that an opportunity to transition from the bonus preparation state to the pseudo bonus state has occurred, so a pseudo bonus start process is executed (step S4911). After that, a pseudo bonus start command indicating that the pseudo bonus state has been entered is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S4912). When the performance side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bonus start command, it controls the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 so that a performance corresponding to the pseudo bonus state is executed. In addition, the pseudo bonus start command is set with information on the initial continuation game number and the transition condition game number determined in the pseudo bonus start process described later. In addition, if the pseudo bonus state is reached (step S4913: YES), a pseudo bonus progress process is executed (step S4914).

Figure 97 is a flowchart showing the pseudo bonus start process in step S4911.

First, a process for determining the initial number of continuing games in the current pseudo bonus state is executed. Specifically, an initial number of continuing games table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5001). Only one type of initial number of continuing games table is prepared regardless of the set value of "1" to "6" or the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the role that triggered the current bonus precursor state. In the initial number of continuing games table, multiple types of initial number of continuing games are set as the number of continuing games at the start of the pseudo bonus state. FIG. 98(a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the initial number of continuing games table. In the initial number of continuing games table, 33 games, 41 games, 49 games, and 50 games are set as the initial number of continuing games as shown in FIG. 98(a). In addition, in the initial number of continuing games table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 50%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 30%, the selection probability of 49 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 50 games is set to 10%.

Here, in the pseudo bonus state, the first 25 games correspond to the execution period of the pre-branching performance, and in the pre-branching performance, a video display according to a predetermined story is performed on the image display device 63. Then, after the execution period of the pre-branching performance ends, the execution period of the branching performance occurs. The execution period of the branching performance is set to 8 games, and as the branching performance, the image display device 63 executes a performance indicating whether or not a transition to the ART state ST9 will occur after the pseudo bonus state ends. Specifically, the branching performance is displayed as a video of an ally character facing off against an enemy character, and if a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs, a video display of the ally character winning against the enemy character is performed, and if a transition to the ART state ST9 does not occur, a video display of the ally character losing to the enemy character is performed, and if the notification of whether or not a transition to the ART state ST9 will occur is carried over to the branching performance of the next execution, a video display of the ally character drawing with the enemy character is performed.

When 33 games are selected as the initial number of continuing games, one execution period of the branching effect occurs after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends, when 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuing games, two execution periods of the branching effect occur after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends, and when 49 or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuing games, three execution periods of the branching effect occur after the execution period of the pre-branching effect ends. The maximum number of times that the execution period of the branching effect occurs in the pseudo bonus state is three. Therefore, when 49 or 50 games are selected as the initial number of continuing games, the number of times that the execution period of the branching effect occurs does not change even if the remaining number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo bonus state. On the other hand, when 33 or 41 games are selected as the initial number of continuing games, the number of times that the execution period of the branching effect occurs can be increased up to a total of three times if the remaining number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state is added during the execution of the pseudo bonus state.

Then, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5002). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. 16. In the lottery process for the initial number of continuing games, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer.

The random number acquired in step S5002 is compared with the initial continuation game number table read out in step S5001 to select the initial continuation game number for the current pseudo bonus state, and the selected initial continuation game number is set in the continuation game number counter 131 provided in the master RAM 74 (step S5003). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the master RAM 74 is provided with a continuation game number counter 131 in addition to the ART game number counter 121. The continuation game number counter 131 is set with the remaining continuation game number in the pseudo bonus state. The master MPU 72 checks the continuation game number counter 131 to determine whether or not the pseudo bonus state is being played, and to determine the remaining continuation game number in the pseudo bonus state.

Next, a process is executed to determine the transition condition game number. The transition condition game number is the number of continuing games of the pseudo bonus state required to win the transition to ART state ST9 in the current pseudo bonus state. In other words, when the number of continuing games of the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, a transition to ART state ST9 will occur after the pseudo bonus state ends.

Specifically, the process for determining the transition condition game number is to first read out the transition condition game number table from the main ROM 73 (step S5004). Only one type of transition condition game number table is prepared, regardless of the set value of "1" to "6" or the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) of the role that triggered the current bonus precursor state. In the transition condition game number table, multiple types of transition condition game numbers are set. FIG. 98(b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the transition condition game number table. In the transition condition game number table, 33 games, 41 games, and 49 games are set as the transition condition game numbers as shown in FIG. 98(b). In addition, in the transition condition game number table, the selection probability of 33 games is set to 5%, the selection probability of 41 games is set to 10%, and the selection probability of 49 games is set to 85%.

Here, all of these transition condition game numbers match the initial continuation game number set in the initial continuation game number table as shown in FIG. 98(a). In addition, 50 games are set as the initial continuation game number in the initial continuation game number table, and the 50 games are a greater number of games than any of the transition condition game numbers set in the transition condition game number table. As already explained, when the number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, a transition to the ART state ST9 occurs after the end of the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, when 33 games are selected as the transition condition game number, a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 41 games, 49 games, or 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game number, when 41 games are selected as the transition condition game number, a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 49 games or 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game number, and when 49 games are selected as the transition condition game number, a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when 50 games are selected as the initial continuation game number.

Then, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S5005). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been described with reference to FIG. 16. In the lottery process for the transition condition game number, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already described, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer.

The random number acquired in step S5005 is compared with the transition condition game number table read in step S5004 to select the transition condition game number for the current pseudo bonus state, and the selected transition condition game number is set in the transition condition game number counter 132 provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5006). That is, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 99, in this embodiment, the transition condition game number counter 132 is provided in the main RAM 74. The remaining transition condition game number is set in the transition condition game number counter 132. Each time one game is played in the pseudo bonus state, the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 is decremented by one, and when the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 exceeds the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed.

After that, it is determined whether the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state stored in the continuation game number counter 131 exceeds the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step S5007). If a positive determination is made in step S5007, the ART win flag provided in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5008). The ART win flag is a flag that allows the master MPU 72 to determine whether the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

Next, the process at the start of the game during a pseudo bonus executed by the main MPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 100. Note that the process at the start of the game during a pseudo bonus is executed after the winning or losing role determination has been completed in the role selection process (FIG. 17).

When the winning number "4" to "8", "15", or "16" is set in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) (step S5101: YES), if the ART winning flag in the master RAM 74 is not set to "1" (step S5102: NO), an add-on lottery process for the remaining number of games to be played in the pseudo bonus state is executed. In the add-on lottery process, the first add-on table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current winning combination (FIG. 17) is first read from the master ROM 73 (step S5103). In this case, the first add-on table is set so that the winning number with a lower probability of winning has a higher probability of winning an add-on win, and the first add-on table is set so that the winning number with a lower probability of winning has a higher expected value of the number of games to be played when an add-on win occurs.

Figure 101 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first add-on table. As shown in Figure 101 (a), the first add-on table is set so that when the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "4" or "5", the probability of not winning the add-on is 90%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 8 games being selected is 10%. When the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "6" or "7", the probability of not winning the add-on is 70%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 8 games being selected is 25%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 22 games being selected is 5%. When the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "8", the probability of not winning the add-on is 10%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 8 games being selected is 10%. is set to have a 70% probability of being selected, and the probability of 52, 102, 202, and 302 additional game numbers being selected is 5% each. If the winning number set in the role selection process (FIG. 17) is "15" or "16," the probability of 8 additional game numbers being selected is 50%, the probability of 22, 32, 52, and 102 additional game numbers being selected is 5% each, and the probability of 202 and 302 additional game numbers being selected is 15% each.

As mentioned above, the number of added games is set to 8 games or 22 games or more. If an additional number of 22 games or more is selected, the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed at that point. In other words, since the minimum number of initial continuing games is 33 games and the maximum number of transition condition games is 49 games, if an additional number of 22 games or more occurs, the remaining number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state will definitely exceed the remaining transition condition game number.

In contrast, even if the number of added games of 8 games is selected, there are cases where the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed. For example, if 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo bonus state, even if the initial number of continued games is 33 and 8 games are added twice, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Also, if 49 games are selected as the number of transition condition games at the start of the pseudo bonus state, even if the initial number of continued games is 41 and 8 games are added once, the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. In such circumstances, since only 8 games are set as the number of added games that may not confirm the transition to the ART state ST9, if the transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed even if the number of added games occurs, it is only necessary to simply add the execution period of the branching effect according to the aspect that does not correspond to the transition to the ART state ST9, making it easier to adjust the effect when the number of added games occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the process at the start of the game during a pseudo bonus (Figure 100), after the first add-on table is read in step S5103, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S5104). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the lottery process for adding on the number of games to be played in the pseudo bonus state, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (Figure 13), the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer obtain the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l.

When the random number obtained in step S5104 is compared with the first add-on table read out in step S5103 and one of the add-on game numbers is selected (step S5105: YES), it is determined whether the sum of the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state stored in the continuation game number counter 131 and the currently selected add-on game number is greater than the remaining transition condition game number stored in the transition condition game number counter 132 (step S5106). If a negative determination is made in step S5106, this means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not yet been confirmed, so the value of the currently selected add-on game number is added to the continuation game number counter 131 (step S5107). In this case, this means that an addition of 8 games has occurred in a situation where there is room for the number of times the branching effect execution period occurs, so the branching effect execution period has been added once.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5106, this means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed. In this case, the ART win flag in the host RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5108). After that, the value of the number of added games selected this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the host RAM 74 (step S5109). In other words, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of added games, including the number of added games that triggered the confirmation of the transition, is added as the number of remaining continued games in the ART state ST9, not as the number of remaining continued games in the pseudo bonus state. This makes it easier for the ART state ST9 to continue for a long time.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is already set to "1" (step S5102: YES), an add-on lottery process is executed for the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9. In this add-on lottery process, the second add-on table corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 17) is first read from the main ROM 73 (step S5110). In this case, the second add-on table is set so that a winning number with a lower probability of winning has a higher probability of being an add-on win, and the second add-on table is set so that a winning number with a lower probability of winning has a higher expected value for the number of added games when an add-on win occurs.

Figure 101 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second add-on table. As shown in Figure 101 (b), the second add-on table is set so that when the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "4" or "5", the probability of not winning the add-on is 90%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 12 games being selected is 10%. When the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "6" or "7", the probability of not winning the add-on is 70%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 12 games being selected is 10%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 22 games, the number of add-on games of 32 games, the number of add-on games of 52 games, and the number of add-on games of 102 games being selected is 5%, respectively. When the winning number set in the lottery process for the role (Figure 17) is "8", the probability of not winning the add-on is 10%, and the probability of the number of add-on games of 12 games being selected is 50%. Therefore, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 22 games is 10%, the probability of selecting the additional game numbers of 32 games and 52 games is 5%, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 102 games is 10%, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 202 games and the probability of selecting the additional game number of 302 games are 5%, and when the winning number set in the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) is "15" or "16", the probability of selecting the additional game number of 22 games is 30%, the probability of selecting the additional game numbers of 32 games and 52 games is 10%, the probability of selecting the additional game number of 102 games is 20%, and the probability of selecting the additional game numbers of 202 games and 302 games is 15%.

As described above, when the second add-on table is selected, the probability of winning the add-on is the same as when the first add-on table is selected. However, the expected value of the number of added games in the event of an add-on win is set to be higher with the second add-on table than with the first add-on table. This makes it possible to increase the advantage of confirming a transition to ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state. Also, while the minimum number of added games in the first add-on table is 8 games, the minimum number of added games in the second add-on table is 12 games. This also makes it possible to increase the advantage of confirming a transition to ART state ST9 in the middle of the pseudo bonus state.

Returning to the explanation of the process at the start of the game during a pseudo bonus (Figure 100), after the second add-on table is read in step S5110, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S5111). The contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using Figure 16. In the process of adding on the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l that corresponds to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers between "0" and "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (Figure 13), the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer obtain the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l.

When the random number obtained in step S5111 is compared with the second add-on table read in step S5110 and a certain number of add-on games is selected (step S5112: YES), the value of the currently selected number of add-on games is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the main RAM 74 (step S5113).

When the processing of step S5107, step S5109, or step S5113 is executed, an add-on occurrence command indicating that an addition to the number of games has occurred is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S5114). The add-on occurrence command is set with information on the number of added games selected this time, and also with information indicating which of the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state and the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 the current number of added games has been added to. When the presentation side MPU 92 receives the add-on occurrence command, it controls the execution of the presentation in a manner corresponding to the current addition. This will be explained in detail later.

Next, the pseudo bonus progression process executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 102.

The pseudo bonus progress process is executed in step S4914 of the pseudo bonus management process (Figure 96), and is executed after all rotations of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in one game have stopped. In other words, the pseudo bonus progress process is executed when one game has been played in the pseudo bonus state. Therefore, first the value of the continued game number counter 131 in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S5201), and then the value of the transition condition game number counter 132 in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S5202).

After that, it is determined whether the value of the continued game number counter 131 is "0" (step S5203). If a positive determination is made in step S5203, it means that it is time to end the pseudo bonus state. In this case, it is determined whether the transition to the ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state by determining whether the ART win flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S5204).

If the ART win flag is set to "1" (step S5204: YES), ART start processing is executed (step S5205). In the ART start processing, information in the master RAM 74 is set so that the ART state processing in step S1707 is executed in the corresponding processing at the end of the game (FIG. 44). This sets the game state to the ART state ST9. In addition, in the ART start processing, information on 50 games, which is the start number of games in the ART state ST9, is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the master RAM 74.

Then, an ART start command indicating that the ART state ST9 is to be started is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S5206). When the production side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it reads out from the production side ROM 93 an ART start performance table that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to the start of the ART state ST9 and an ART performance table that enables the execution of a performance corresponding to the ART state ST9, and stores them in the production side RAM 94. First, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the ART start performance table, and then the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the performance according to the ART performance table, so that the ART start performance is first executed by the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63, and then the ART performance is executed. Also, when the production side MPU 92 receives the ART start command, it adds information of 50 games, which is the number of games to start the ART state ST9, to each of the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126 in the production side RAM 94. As a result, 50 games are displayed on the image display device 63 as the remaining number of continuing games in ART state ST9.

Here, in the pseudo bonus state, when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the ART game number counter 121 of the master RAM 74 is incremented in response to the establishment of the condition for adding the number of games, and the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is added. In response to this, the added number of games is added to the stock game number counter 127 of the production side RAM 94 in the production side MPU 92. Then, at the start timing of the ART state ST9, the number of games added to the stock game number counter 127 is not shifted to the ART subtraction target counter 125 and the display counter 126. Therefore, the number of games added when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is not notified to the player at the start of the ART state ST9, but is notified to the player at a timing during the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the addition of the number of games is notified during the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if the ART winning flag is not set to "1" (step S5204: NO), this means that the transition to the ART state ST9 has not been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state. In this case, a pseudo bonus end command indicating that the pseudo bonus state has ended without a transition to the ART state ST9 is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S5207). When the production side MPU 92 receives the pseudo bonus end command, it reads out from the production side ROM 93 a bonus end effect table that enables the execution of an effect corresponding to the end of the pseudo bonus state and a normal effect table that enables the execution of a normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1, and stores them in the production side RAM 94. First, the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the bonus end effect table, and then the production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the normal effect table, so that the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 first execute the bonus end effect, and then the normal effect is executed.

With reference to the time chart in Figure 103, we will explain how the handling of the number of added games changes depending on the status of the ART hit flag in the pseudo bonus state. Figure 103 (a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, Figure 103 (b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, Figure 103 (c) shows the state of the ART hit flag, Figure 103 (d) shows the timing of the occurrence of the added number, Figure 103 (e) shows the timing of the addition to the continued game number counter 131 of the main RAM 74, and Figure 103 (f) shows the timing of the addition to the ART game number counter 121 of the main RAM 74.

First, we will explain the cases where the transition to ART state ST9 is not confirmed during the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t1, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 103(a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuing games for the pseudo bonus state is determined, and so at timing t1, the initial number of continuing games is added to the continuing game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103(e). However, since the initial number of continuing games is equal to or less than the transition condition game number, the ART win flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo bonus state as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at times t2 and t3 while the pseudo bonus state is in progress, the timing for the addition occurs as shown in FIG. 103(d). However, at neither of these times, the remaining number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 103(e), the number of added games is added to the continuing game number counter 131 at both times t2 and t3. Also, as shown in FIG. 103(c), the ART win flag is not set to "1" at both times t2 and t3.

Then, at timing t4, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART win flag is not set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), there is no transition to the ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, we will explain the cases where a transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed in the middle of the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t5, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 103(a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuing games for the pseudo bonus state is determined, and so at timing t5, the initial number of continuing games is added to the continuing game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103(e). However, since the initial number of continuing games is equal to or less than the transition condition game number, the ART win flag is not set to "1" at the start of the pseudo bonus state as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at timing t6 while the pseudo bonus state is in progress, the timing for the addition occurs as shown in FIG. 103(d). The number of added games is added to the remaining number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state, so that the remaining number of continued games exceeds the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at timing t6, the ART win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), and the current number of added games is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103(f).

After that, at timing t7, the timing for the addition occurs as shown in FIG. 103(d). In this case, since the ART win flag has already been set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the number of added games this time is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103(f).

Then, at timing t8, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the state transitions to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, we will explain the cases where a transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed when the pseudo bonus state is initiated.

At timing t9, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 103(a). At the start of the pseudo bonus state, the initial number of continuing games for the pseudo bonus state is determined, and so at timing t9, the initial number of continuing games is added to the continuing game number counter 131 as shown in FIG. 103(e). In this case, the initial number of continuing games exceeds the transition condition game number. Therefore, at timing t9, the ART win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c).

After that, at timing t10 and timing t11, the additional bonus occurs as shown in FIG. 103(d). In this case, since the ART win flag has already been set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the number of additional bonus games at each of these timings is added to the ART game number counter 121 as shown in FIG. 103(f).

Then, at timing t12, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 103(a). In this case, since the ART win flag is set to "1" as shown in FIG. 103(c), the game transitions to ART state ST9 as shown in FIG. 103(b).

Next, the pseudo bonus presentation control process executed by the presentation side MPU 92 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 104. Note that the pseudo bonus presentation control process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (e.g., 4 milliseconds) in the pseudo bonus state.

If a pseudo bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5301: YES), a pre-branch performance start setting process is executed (step S5302). In the pre-branch performance start setting process, a pre-branch performance table that enables the execution of a pre-branch performance is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. The pre-branch performance table is set with information that enables the execution of a pre-branch performance that continues over 25 games. The performance time is controlled by the performance side MPU 92 according to the pre-branch performance table, and the pre-branch performance is executed over 25 games on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62 and image display device 63.

Then, the number of branch effects occurring in the current pseudo bonus state is determined from the information on the initial number of continuing games set in the pseudo bonus start command, and the determined information on the number of branch effects occurring is set in a branch effect counter provided in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S5303). After the end of the pre-branching presentation, the presentation side MPU 92 executes the branch effects until the value of the branch effect counter becomes "0".

After that, by determining whether the initial number of continuing games set in the pseudo bonus start command exceeds the transition condition game number also set in the pseudo bonus start command, it is determined whether the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo bonus state (step S5304). If a negative determination is made in step S5304, a setting process for a branching effect for ART non-winning is executed (step S5305). In this setting process, if the number of branching effects currently scheduled to be executed is one, a defeat effect table in which the result of the branching effect is a defeat for the ally character is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, after the performance side MPU 92 ends the execution control of the effects based on the pre-branching effect table, it executes the execution control of the effects based on the defeat effect table. In addition, in this setting process, if there are multiple branch effects currently scheduled to be executed, a draw effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the execution before the final execution is a draw is read from the production side ROM 93 for the number of executions and stored in the production side RAM 94, and a defeat effect table in which the result of the branch effect of the final execution is a defeat for the ally character is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. In this case, after the production side MPU 92 ends the execution control of the effect based on the pre-branching effect table, it executes the execution control of the effect based on the draw effect table for the number of times that the draw effect table is stored in the production side RAM 94, and then executes the execution control of the effect based on the defeat effect table.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5304, a setting process for a branching effect for winning the ART is executed (step S5306). When the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed at the start of the pseudo bonus state, it is when any of 41, 49, and 50 games is selected as the initial number of continuing games. If it is 41 games, the branching effect is executed twice, and if it is 49 or 50 games, the branching effect is executed three times. In other words, when the setting process for the branching effect for winning the ART is executed, the branching effect is executed two or more times. In this case, in the setting process, a draw effect table in which the result of the branching effect of the execution time before the final time is a draw is read from the performance side ROM 93 for the number of execution times and stored in the performance side RAM 94, and a victory effect table in which the result of the branching effect of the final time is a victory for the ally character is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. In this case, after the production side MPU 92 finishes controlling the execution of the performance based on the pre-branch performance table, it executes control of the execution of the performance based on the draw performance table for the number of times that the draw performance table is stored in the production side RAM 94, and then executes control of the execution of the performance based on the win performance table.

Then, the ART winning flag provided in the presentation side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5307). The ART winning flag is a flag that allows the presentation side MPU 92 to identify that the transition to the ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in the current pseudo bonus state.

In the pseudo bonus presentation control process, when a new game has been played and it is time to update the pre-branch presentation (step S5308: YES), a pre-branch presentation update setting process is executed (step S5309). In this update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the pre-branch presentation table currently being referenced in response to the start of a new game. This causes the execution content of the pre-branch presentation to change in response to the number of games that the pre-branch presentation will continue. Furthermore, in this update setting process, when it is time to end the pre-branch presentation, presentation execution control is started according to one of the types of branch presentation tables set as the next reference target in presentation side RAM 94. This starts the first branch presentation to be executed.

In the presentation control process for pseudo bonuses, if an add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 (step S5310: YES), and the ART winning flag in the presentation RAM 94 is not set to "1" (step S5311: NO), it is determined whether the currently received add-on generation command contains information indicating that the remaining number of continued games in ART state ST9 is subject to addition, thereby determining whether the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed in the current game (step S5312).

If a negative judgment is made in step S5312, an adjustment process for the branch effect for ART non-win is executed (step S5313). When the number of games is added but the transition to ART state ST9 is not confirmed, this means that the number of added games is 8 games. Therefore, in the adjustment process for the branch effect for ART non-win, an adjustment is made so that one execution of the branch effect resulting in a draw is added before the execution of the branch effect resulting in a loss. Specifically, if the stage is before the execution control of the effect using the defeat effect table, the draw effect table is stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that it becomes the execution target before the execution control of the effect using the defeat effect table is performed. Also, if the stage is the execution control of the effect using the defeat effect table, the contents of the defeat effect table are modified to the contents that ultimately result in a draw, and the defeat effect table is stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that it becomes the execution target thereafter.

If the positive judgment is made in step S5312, the adjustment process of the branch effect for ART winning is executed (step S5314). When the number of games is added and the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, the number of games added this time is added to the number of remaining games to be continued in the ART state ST9. Therefore, in the adjustment process of the branch effect for ART winning, the content of the branch effect resulting in a loss is changed to the content of the branch effect resulting in a victory. Specifically, if the stage is before the execution control of the effect based on the defeat effect table, the defeat effect table is changed to the victory effect table. Also, if the execution control of the effect based on the defeat effect table is being performed, the content of the defeat effect table is corrected to the content that will ultimately result in a victory. After that, the ART winning flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5315), and a value corresponding to the number of added games set in the currently received addition occurrence command is added to the stock game number counter 127 in the performance side RAM 94 (step S5316).

If an add-on command is received when the ART winning flag is set to "1", a positive judgment is made in step S5311. In this case, a value corresponding to the number of add-on games set in the currently received add-on command is added to the stock game number counter 127 in the presentation side RAM 94 (step S5316).

In the pseudo bonus presentation control process, when a new game has been played and it is time to update the branch presentation (step S5317: YES), a branch presentation update setting process is executed (step S5318). In this update setting process, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the currently referenced branch presentation table (draw presentation table, defeat presentation table, or victory presentation table) in response to the start of a new game. This causes the execution content of the branch presentation to change in response to the number of games that the branch presentation continues. In addition, in this update setting process, when it is time to end one execution of the branch presentation and there are still executions of the branch presentation to be executed, presentation execution control is started according to one of the types of branch presentation tables that are set as the next reference target in the presentation side RAM 94.

With reference to the time chart in Figure 105, we will explain how the pre-branching performance and branching performance are executed in the pseudo bonus state. Figure 105(a) shows the execution period of the pseudo bonus state, Figure 105(b) shows the execution period of the ART state ST9, Figure 105(c) shows the execution period of the pre-branching performance, Figure 105(d) shows the execution period of the branching performance, Figure 105(e) shows the timing when the performance side MPU 92 receives an add-on generation command, Figure 105(f) shows the timing of adding one execution of the branching performance, and Figure 105(g) shows the timing of modifying the content of the branching performance.

First, we will explain the cases where the transition to ART state ST9 is not confirmed during the pseudo bonus state.

At timing t1, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 105(a). Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, the planned number of times the branching effect will be executed in this pseudo bonus state at this point is 1. Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, while the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at this start timing. Also, at timing t1, the pre-branching effect starts as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t2 when the pre-branching performance is being executed, an add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of add-on games is generated, the number of remaining continuation games in the pseudo bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t2, as shown in FIG. 105(f), the generation of the current number of add-on games triggers one additional execution of the branching performance, bringing the number of scheduled executions of the branching performance to two.

After that, at timing t3, the pre-branching performance ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of a branching performance resulting in a draw is executed from timing t3 to timing t4, and one execution of a branching performance resulting in a loss is executed from timing t5 to timing t6. At timing t6 when the branching performance resulting in a loss ends, as shown in FIG. 105(a), the pseudo bonus state ends. In this case, because the transition to ART state ST9 has not been confirmed, no transition to ART state ST9 occurs as shown in FIG. 105(b).

Next, we will explain the case where the transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed while the pre-branch performance is being executed.

At timing t7, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 105(a). Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, the planned number of times the branching effect will be executed in this pseudo bonus state at this point is 1. Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, while the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at this start timing. Also, at timing t7, the pre-branching effect starts as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t8 when the pre-branching performance is being executed, an add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 22 games. Therefore, the occurrence of the add-on game number causes the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state to exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t8, the content of the branching performance corresponding to the losing result scheduled to be executed is modified to a winning result as shown in FIG. 105(g).

After that, at timing t9, the pre-branching performance ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of the branching performance resulting in a win is executed from timing t9 to timing t10. At timing t10 when the branching performance resulting in a win ends, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105(a). In this case, because the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed, a transition to ART state ST9 occurs as shown in FIG. 105(b).

Next, we will explain the case where a transition to ART state ST9 is confirmed while a branching effect that results in a loss is being executed.

At timing t11, the pseudo bonus state starts as shown in FIG. 105(a). Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, the planned number of times the branching effect will be executed in this pseudo bonus state at this point is 1. Also, because 33 games have been selected as the initial number of continuing games, while the number of transition condition games is set to 41 games, transition to the ART state ST9 is not confirmed at this start timing. Also, at timing t11, the pre-branching effect starts as shown in FIG. 105(c).

After that, at the timing of t12 when the pre-branching performance is being executed, an add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72 as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, even if the number of add-on games occurs, the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state will not exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at the timing of t12, as shown in FIG. 105(f), the occurrence of the current number of add-on games triggers one additional execution of the branching performance, bringing the planned number of executions of the branching performance to two.

Then, at time t13, the pre-branching presentation ends as shown in FIG. 105(c). Then, as shown in FIG. 105(d), one execution of a branching presentation resulting in a draw is performed from time t13 to time t14, and then, at time t15, one execution of a branching presentation resulting in a loss begins.

At timing t16, when the branching effect resulting in the loss is being executed, an add-on generation command is received from the main MPU 72, as shown in FIG. 105(e). In this case, the number of add-on games set in the add-on generation command is 8 games. Therefore, the occurrence of the number of add-on games causes the remaining number of continuation games in the pseudo bonus state to exceed the remaining number of transition condition games. Therefore, at timing t16, as shown in FIG. 105(g), the content of the branching effect corresponding to the currently executed loss result is modified to a win result.

After that, at timing t17, the branching presentation corresponding to the winning outcome ends as shown in FIG. 105(d). At timing t17, the pseudo bonus state ends as shown in FIG. 105(a). In this case, since the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed, a transition to ART state ST9 occurs as shown in FIG. 105(b).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

In a configuration in which a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the total number of games awarded to a player in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, the transition condition game number is determined by lottery. This means that when the pseudo bonus state is reached, it is expected that a smaller number of transition condition games will be selected, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

When the pseudo bonus state is initiated, the initial number of continuing games is determined by lottery. If the initial number of continuing games determined by lottery exceeds the transition condition game number, the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed. This makes it possible to diversify the patterns in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state.

An additional number of games may be awarded during the pseudo bonus state. As a result, even if the total number of games awarded to the player does not exceed the transition condition game number when the pseudo bonus state begins, it is possible that the additional number of games will be awarded during the pseudo bonus state, causing the total number of games to exceed the transition condition game number. This makes it possible to increase attention to play in the pseudo bonus state.

If an additional number of games is awarded during the pseudo bonus state but does not exceed the transition condition game number, the additional number of games will be consumed in the pseudo bonus state. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state increases.

If an additional number of games is awarded during the pseudo bonus state and exceeds the transition condition game number, the additional number of games is consumed in the ART state ST9 that occurs after the pseudo bonus state ends. This makes it easier to increase the number of continuing games in the ART state ST9.

If an additional number of games is awarded in a situation where a transition to ART state ST9 has already been confirmed in the pseudo bonus state, the additional number of games is consumed in ART state ST9. This makes it possible to prevent an occurrence of an event in which the number of continued games in the pseudo bonus state increases even though a transition to ART state ST9 has already been confirmed, causing play in the pseudo bonus state to drag on.

Until the total number of games awarded to the player exceeds the transition condition game number, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the pseudo bonus state, and after the total number of games awarded to the player exceeds the transition condition game number, the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to execute the lottery process for adding the number of games in a manner suitable for each situation. Also, the earlier the timing of exceeding the transition condition game number, the longer the period during which the lottery process for adding the number of games is executed in a manner corresponding to the ART state ST9 can be secured.

Even if the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number at the stage when it is determined, the initial number of continuing games will be consumed in the pseudo bonus state. This makes it possible to consume a certain number of games in the pseudo bonus state even in a situation where it is certain that the ART state ST9 will occur after the pseudo bonus state ends.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games awarded to a player in the pseudo bonus state exceeds the transition condition game number, a configuration in which a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed when the number of games awarded to a player in the pseudo bonus state becomes equal to or greater than the transition condition game number may be used.

In addition, instead of the initial number of continuing games in the pseudo bonus state being determined by lottery, the initial number of continuing games may be a fixed number of games. In this case, the fixed number of games may or may not exceed the transition condition number of games depending on the lottery result for the transition condition number of games. Also, the fixed number of games may be configured to never exceed the transition condition number of games. In this case, the number of games awarded to the player will not exceed the transition condition number of games unless an additional number of games is awarded in the pseudo bonus state.

In addition, when an additional number of games is awarded in the pseudo bonus state, if the number of games awarded to the player exceeds the transition condition number of games as a result of the awarding of the additional number of games, the additional number of games may be consumed in the pseudo bonus state instead of being consumed in the ART state ST9. This makes it possible to continue the pseudo bonus state for a long time.

In addition, the number of added games awarded when the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state is not notified to the player by being added to the stock game number counter 127, but it may be notified at least by the start timing of the ART state ST9. For example, it may be configured such that the confirmation of the transition to the ART state ST9 is notified in a game in which the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state, and a notification is executed to indicate that the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has increased in the game in which the added number of games is awarded in the pseudo bonus state each time. In addition, although it is not notified in the game in which the added number of games is awarded, when the pseudo bonus state ends and the ART state ST9 starts, the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 may be notified with the added number of games in the pseudo bonus state added to the initial number of continued games in the ART state ST9.

In addition, instead of a configuration in which the player is more advantageous in terms of the awarding of the additional number of games after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed in the pseudo bonus state than before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed, a configuration in which the degree of advantage in terms of the awarding of the additional number of games is the same or approximately the same in either case may be used, or a configuration in which the player is more advantageous in terms of the awarding of the additional number of games before the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed than after the transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed.

Third Embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration of the add-on table executed in the game number add-on lottery process is different from that of the second embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the second embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the second embodiment is basically omitted.

Figures 106(a) to 106(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the add-on tables 141 to 144 in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the first add-on table 141 shown in Figure 106(a), the second add-on table 142 shown in Figure 106(b), the third add-on table 143 shown in Figure 106(c), and the fourth add-on table 144 shown in Figure 106(d) are available to the main MPU 72 as the add-on tables 141 to 144. Note that, as will be described in detail later, the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 are not stored in advance in the main ROM 73 as they are, but the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 that enable the creation of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 are stored in advance in the main ROM 73.

The first add-on table 141 is referenced when the add-on lottery process is executed in a pseudo bonus state when the transition to ART state ST9 has not been confirmed. The second add-on table 142 is referenced when the add-on lottery process is executed in a pseudo bonus state when the transition to ART state ST9 has been confirmed. The third add-on table 143 is referenced when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on in a situation where loops A and B are not being executed in ART state ST9. The fourth add-on table 144 is referenced when the add-on lottery process is executed as a direct add-on in a situation where loops A and B are being executed in ART state ST9.

As shown in Figures 106(a) to 106(d), the first add-on table 141, the second add-on table 142, the third add-on table 143, and the fourth add-on table 144 each have a data area in which the numerical information of the add-on index is set, and a data area in which the number of winning random numbers is set corresponding to the numerical information of the add-on index for each group of winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16". Specifically, for these data areas, the values "0" to "8" are set in consecutive order as the numerical information of the add-on index. In this case, one byte of data is assigned to each of the data areas in which the numerical information of the add-on index is set. In other words, nine data areas of "0" to "8" are set as the numerical information of the add-on index in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, and each of these nine data areas is one byte of data.

The numerical information of the add-on index is numerical information for the master MPU 72 to specify the actual number of add-on games. An index correspondence table 145 is pre-stored in the master ROM 73 as data for specifying the actual number of add-on games for the numerical information of the add-on index. FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the index correspondence table 145. The numerical information of the add-on index "0" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 0 games, that is, the result of the add-on lottery process being a miss. The numerical information of the add-on index "1" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 8 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "2" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 12 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "3" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 22 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "4" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 32 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "5" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 52 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "6" corresponds to the number of add-on games being 102 games. The numerical information of the add-on index "7" corresponds to the number of added games being 202. The numerical information of the add-on index "8" corresponds to the number of added games being 302.

As described above, the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 are configured to set the numerical information of the add-on index instead of setting the numerical information of the number of add-on games as is, and the index correspondence table 145 is used to derive the numerical information of the number of add-on games from the numerical information of the add-on index, thereby making it possible to reduce the data capacity of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. In other words, the numerical information of the number of add-on games is a maximum of 302 games, and 9 bits are required to express the numerical information in binary, which requires 2 bytes in byte units. If the data capacity of the data area in which the numerical information of each number of add-on games is set is to be constant in order to standardize the processing in the addition processing of the number of add-on games, it is necessary to match the numerical information of the maximum number of add-on games, so the data capacity of the data area in which the numerical information of each number of add-on games is set will be 2 bytes each. In this case, if the numerical information of each number of add-on games is set as is in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, 2 bytes x 9 x 4, or 72 bytes, will be required. In contrast, when the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 are set with numerical information of the add-on index, which has a data capacity of 1 byte, and an index correspondence table 145 is used to derive numerical information of the actual number of added games from the numerical information of the add-on index, a data capacity of 1 byte x 9 x 4 (36 bytes) is required to set the numerical information of the add-on index in the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, and 1 byte x 9 + 2 bytes x 9 (27 bytes) is required in the index correspondence table 145, for a total of 63 bytes. This 63 bytes is a smaller data capacity than the 72 bytes required when the numerical information of each number of added games is set directly in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 145.

As shown in Figures 106(a) to 106(d) in detail, the data areas in which the numbers of winning random numbers in the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 are set, the winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", and "16" are classified into a first group including the winning numbers "4" and "5", a second group including the winning numbers "6" and "7", a third group including the winning number "8", and a fourth group including the winning numbers "15" and "16". In this embodiment, the top-up lottery process utilizes dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d for 16-bit random numbers. In each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each add-on index to be a winning number in the first group, the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each add-on index to be a winning number in the second group, the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each add-on index to be a winning number in the third group, and the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of each add-on index to be a winning number in the fourth group are set.

Here, the types of numerical information of the add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more are set are different in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 106(a), in the first add-on table 141, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0", "1", and "6" to "8" is set to the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups, while the numerical information of the add-on indexes "2" to "5" is set to the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth groups. Also, as shown in FIG. 106(b), in the second add-on table 142, the numerical information of the add-on indexes other than "2" is set to the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups, while the numerical information of the add-on index "2" is set to the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth groups. Also, as shown in FIG. 106(c), in the third add-on table 143, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" and "2" to "4" is set to the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups, while the numerical information of the add-on indexes "1" and "5" to "8" is set to the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth groups to be 0. Also, as shown in FIG. 106(d), in the fourth add-on table 144, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "6" to "8" is set to the number of winning random numbers that are 1 or more in any of the first to fourth groups, while the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "5" is set to the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth groups to be 0.

As described above, even if there is numerical information of the add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in each of the first to fourth groups in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, the numerical information of "0" to "8" is set in common as the numerical information of the add-on index in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, so that the index correspondence table 145 can be used in common in the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. In other words, if non-common numerical information of the add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, it becomes necessary to prepare an index correspondence table 145 corresponding to each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, but as described above, since common numerical information of the add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, it becomes possible to use one type of index correspondence table 145 in common. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145, and because the common index correspondence table 145 can be read and used regardless of which of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 is used, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145.

During the top-up lottery process, the table to be referenced from the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 is expanded in the main RAM 74, but the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 are not stored directly in the main ROM 73, but are stored as the first to fourth compressed data 146-149. As already explained, each of the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 has numerical information of the top-up index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in each of the first to fourth groups. Therefore, in the first to fourth compressed data 146-149, the numerical information of the top-up index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 does not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers.

The first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 will be described in detail below. Figures 108(a) to 108(d) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

The first compressed data 146 is data for creating the first add-on table 141, the second compressed data 147 is data for creating the second add-on table 142, the third compressed data 148 is data for creating the third add-on table 143, and the fourth compressed data 149 is data for creating the fourth add-on table 144. As shown in Figures 108(a) to 108(d), header data and actual data are set in the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149.

The header data contains information indicating which numerical information of the add-on index the actual data set in the corresponding compressed data 146-149 corresponds to. In addition, the actual data contains information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups for the numerical information of the add-on index in which the number of one or more winning random numbers is set in any of the first to fourth groups. In this case, information on the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of multiple add-on indexes is set as the actual data, but each piece of information is arranged in ascending order when viewed in terms of the numerical information of the add-on index.

As shown in FIG. 108(a), the first compressed data 146 has 2-byte header data set as the first data, and the header data has "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" set as information that allows the numerical information of the add-on index in which the actual data exists in the first compressed data 146 to be specified. Five unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data has information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "0" in the first add-on table 141 set. The second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data has information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "1" in the first add-on table 141 set. The third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data has information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "6" in the first add-on table 141 set. In addition, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "7" in the first add-on table 141. In addition, the fifth unit actual data set following the fourth unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "8" in the first add-on table 141.

When the first add-on lottery process is executed using the first add-on table 141, the first compressed data 146 read from the main ROM 73 is decoded to expand the first add-on table 141 in the main RAM 74. In this case, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "8" is first written in ascending order to the main RAM 74. Then, the numerical information of the add-on index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in the main RAM 74 in order from the smallest value of the numerical information of the add-on index, corresponding to the numerical information of the add-on index already written in the main RAM 74. As a result, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0", "1", "6", "7", and "8" is set to the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups. Then, for the numerical information of the add-on indexes written in the main RAM 74 that is not set in the header data, information is set to correspond to the number of winning random numbers being 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. This causes the first overlay table 141 to be expanded in the main RAM 74 using the first compressed data 146.

As shown in FIG. 108(b), the second compressed data 147 has 2-byte header data set as the first data, and the header data has "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" set as information that enables identification of the numerical information of the add-on index for which real data exists in the second compressed data 147. Eight unit real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data has information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "0" in the second add-on table 142. The second unit real data set following the first unit real data has information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "2" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the third unit real data set following the second unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "3" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the fourth unit real data set following the third unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "4" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the fifth unit real data set following the fourth unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "5" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the sixth unit real data set following the fifth unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "6" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the seventh unit actual data set following the sixth unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "7" in the second add-on table 142. In addition, the eighth unit actual data set following the seventh unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "8" in the second add-on table 142.

When the second add-on lottery process is executed using the second add-on table 142, the second compressed data 147 read from the main ROM 73 is decoded to expand the second add-on table 142 in the main RAM 74. In this case, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "8" is first written in ascending order to the main RAM 74. After that, the numerical information of the add-on index set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on index already written in the main RAM 74, starting from the smallest value of the numerical information of the add-on index. As a result, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0", "2", "3", "4", "5", "6", "7", and "8" has the information of the number of winning random numbers set for each of the first to fourth groups. After that, for the numerical information of the add-on index written in the main RAM 74 that is not set in the header data, information is set that corresponds to the number of winning random numbers being 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. This results in the second add-on table 142 being expanded in the main RAM 74 using the second compressed data 147.

As for the third compressed data 148, in detail, as shown in FIG. 108(c), 2-byte header data is set as the leading data, and the header data is set with "0", "2", "3", and "4" as information that enables identification of the numerical information of the add-on index in which the real data exists in the third compressed data 148. In addition, four unit real data are set as real data, and the first unit real data set following the header data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "0" in the third add-on table 143. In addition, the second unit real data set following the first unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "2" in the third add-on table 143. In addition, the third unit real data set following the second unit real data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "3" in the third add-on table 143. In addition, the fourth unit actual data set following the third unit actual data contains information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "4" in the third add-on table 143.

When the third add-on lottery process is executed using the third add-on table 143, the third compressed data 148 read from the main ROM 73 is decoded to expand the third add-on table 143 in the main RAM 74. In this case, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "8" is first written in ascending order to the main RAM 74. Then, the numerical information of the add-on indexes set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on indexes already written in the main RAM 74, starting from the smallest value of the numerical information of the add-on indexes. As a result, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0", "2", "3", and "4" is set to the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups. Then, for the numerical information of the add-on indexes written in the main RAM 74 that is not set in the header data, information is set to correspond to the number of winning random numbers being 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. This causes the third overlay table 143 to be expanded in the main RAM 74 using the third compressed data 148.

As for the fourth compressed data 149, in detail, as shown in FIG. 108(d), 2-byte header data is set as the first data, and the header data is set with "6", "7", and "8" as information that enables identification of the numerical information of the add-on index for which the actual data exists in the fourth compressed data 149. In addition, three unit actual data are set as the actual data, and the first unit actual data set following the header data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "6" in the fourth add-on table 144. In addition, the second unit actual data set following the first unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "7" in the fourth add-on table 144. In addition, the third unit actual data set following the second unit actual data is set with information on the number of winning random numbers set in each of the first to fourth groups in the numerical information of the add-on index of "8" in the fourth add-on table 144.

When the fourth add-on lottery process is executed using the fourth add-on table 144, the fourth compressed data 149 read from the main ROM 73 is decoded to expand the fourth add-on table 144 in the main RAM 74. In this case, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "8" is first written in ascending order to the main RAM 74. Then, the numerical information of the add-on indexes set in the header data is read. Then, each unit of real data arranged in the real data is written in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on indexes already written in the main RAM 74, starting from the smallest value of the numerical information of the add-on indexes. As a result, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "6", "7", and "8" is set to the number of winning random numbers for each of the first to fourth groups. Then, for the numerical information of the add-on indexes written in the main RAM 74 that is not set in the header data, information is set that corresponds to the number of winning random numbers being 0 for each of the first to fourth groups. This causes the fourth add-on table 144 to be expanded in the main RAM 74 using the fourth compressed data 149.

In a configuration in which the random numbers used in the top-up lottery process are 16 bits, from the viewpoint of simplifying the process when determining the number of winning random numbers corresponding to the numerical information of each top-up index in the top-up lottery process, the data capacity of the data area in which the number of winning random numbers is set in the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 is set to 2 bytes. The first to fourth groups are set in the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144, and data representing the number of winning random numbers is set in correspondence with each of the numerical information of the top-up indexes "0" to "8" in each of the first to fourth groups, so the data capacity for determining the information on the number of winning random numbers in any of the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 is 2 bytes x 9 x 4, or 72 bytes. In addition, the first to fourth top-up tables 141 to 144 have numerical information of the top-up indexes "0" to "8" set, and each of these numerical information has a data capacity of 1 byte. Therefore, the data capacity of each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 is 72 bytes + 1 byte x 9, which is 81 bytes. On the other hand, the data capacity of the first compressed data 146 is 42 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 x 5 actual data, and is smaller than the data capacity of the first add-on table 141. Also, the data capacity of the second compressed data 147 is 66 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 x 8 actual data, and is smaller than the data capacity of the second add-on table 142. Also, the data capacity of the third compressed data 148 is 34 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 x 4 actual data, and is smaller than the data capacity of the third add-on table 143. Also, the data capacity of the fourth compressed data 149 is 26 bytes, which is the sum of 2 bytes of header data and 2 bytes x 4 x 3 actual data, and is smaller than the data capacity of the fourth add-on table 144. This makes it possible to use the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 while minimizing the amount of data required in the main ROM 73.

Next, the add-on lottery process executed by the main MPU 72 using the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 109. Note that the add-on lottery process is executed after the role lottery process (FIG. 17) is executed when a new game is started, but before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

First, among the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, the compressed data 146 to 149 corresponding to the current game status is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5401). After that, the numerical information of the add-on indexes "0" to "8" is written in ascending order to the main RAM 74 (step S5402).

Then, the numerical information of the add-on index set in the header data of the compressed data 146-149 read in step S5401 is read out, and each unit of real data arranged in the real data of the compressed data 146-149 read in step S5401 is written in order from the smallest value of the numerical information of the add-on index to correspond to the numerical information of the add-on index already written in the main RAM 74 (step S5403). Then, for the numerical information of the add-on index written in the main RAM 74 that is not set in the header data, information is set that corresponds to the number of winning random numbers being 0 for each of the first to fourth groups (step S5404).

Then, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S5405). In the random number acquisition process, the updated 16-bit random number is acquired in the dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d corresponding to the additional lottery process.

After that, the process of acquiring the add-on index is executed (step S5406). Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the process of acquiring the add-on index. Among the first to fourth groups in the add-on tables 141 to 144 expanded in the main RAM 74 in steps S5401 to S5404, the group corresponding to the winning number set in the lottery process for the current role (Figure 17) is identified (step S5501). Then, the repeat counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "9" corresponding to the maximum value of the numerical information of the add-on index (step S5502). In addition, the value of the 16-bit random number acquired in step S5405 is set in the judgment value counter provided in the main RAM 74 (step S5503).

After that, in the group determined in step S5501 from among the add-on tables 141-144 expanded in the main RAM 74 in steps S5401-S5404, the number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on index corresponding to the value of the repeat counter in the main RAM 74 is read (step S5504). In this case, for example, if the value of the repeat counter is "9", the number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on index of "8" is read, if the value of the repeat counter is "5", the number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on index of "4" is read, and if the value of the repeat counter is "1", the number of winning random numbers set in correspondence with the numerical information of the add-on index of "0" is read. Then, the determined number of winning random numbers is added to the judgment value counter in the main RAM 74 (step S5505).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the judgment value counter after the increment exceeds "65535", which is the maximum value of a 16-bit random number (step S5506). If a negative determination is made in step S5506, this means that the numerical information of the add-on index corresponding to the current repeat counter value has not resulted in a win. In this case, the repeat counter value in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S5507), and, provided that the value of the repeat counter after the decrement is not "0" (step S5508: NO), the processes of steps S5504 to S5506 are executed for the value of the repeat counter after the decrement.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5506, this means that the numerical information of the add-on index corresponding to the current value of the repeat counter has been won. Therefore, the numerical information of the add-on index corresponding to the current value of the repeat counter is obtained (step S5509). For example, if the value of the repeat counter is "9", the numerical information of the add-on index is obtained as "8", if the value of the repeat counter is "5", the numerical information of the add-on index is obtained as "4", and if the value of the repeat counter is "1", the numerical information of the add-on index is obtained as "0".

If a positive judgment is made in step S5508, a positive judgment would normally be made in step S5506 when any of the numerical information for the add-on index "0" to "8" is selected, but a positive judgment is not made in step S5506 for any of the numerical information for the add-on index "0" to "8", and processing is executed to issue an abnormality notification (step S5510). This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall if electrical noise or a malfunction in the setting value of the add-on table occurs.

Returning to the explanation of the add-on lottery process (FIG. 109), after the add-on index acquisition process is executed in step S5406, the index correspondence table 145 is read from the main ROM 73 (step S5407). After that, information on the number of add-on games corresponding to the information on the add-on index acquired in step S5406 is read from the index correspondence table 145 (step S5408). The read information on the number of add-on games is then added to the counter currently being added (step S5409).

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

Even if there is numerical information of the add-on index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in each of the first to fourth groups in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, numerical information of "0" to "8" is set as the numerical information of the add-on index in all of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. This makes it possible to commonly use the index correspondence table 145 in the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144. In other words, if non-common numerical information of the add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, it becomes necessary to prepare an index correspondence table 145 corresponding to each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, but as described above, since common numerical information of the add-on index is set in each of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144, it becomes possible to commonly use one type of index correspondence table 145. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required for the index correspondence table 145, and because the common index correspondence table 145 can be read and used regardless of which of the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 is used, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for reading the index correspondence table 145.

During the top-up lottery process, the table to be referenced from the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 is expanded in the main RAM 74, but the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 are not stored as is in the main ROM 73, but are stored as the first to fourth compressed data 146-149. As already explained, each of the first to fourth top-up tables 141-144 has numerical information of the top-up index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0 in each of the first to fourth groups. In contrast, the first to fourth compressed data 146-149 does not have data indicating the number of winning random numbers for the numerical information of the top-up index in which the number of winning random numbers is set to 0. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the main ROM 73.

Even if there is a lottery table in which the number of winning random numbers is not set to a specific index value as described above, the configuration of standardizing the index value between multiple lottery tables may be applied to a group of tables for other lotteries rather than a group of tables for additional lottery processing.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 being stored in the main ROM 73 as the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149, and the first to fourth add-on tables 141 to 144 may be stored directly in the main ROM 73.

In addition, the data configuration of the first to fourth compressed data 146 to 149 is not limited to that described above, and the specific data configuration is arbitrary as long as the data can be compressed.

Fourth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the random number acquisition process in the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configurations different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configurations as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 111 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process in this embodiment.

Steps S5601 to S5608 are the same as steps S501 to S508 of the random number acquisition process (FIG. 16) in the first embodiment described above. As a result, when the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d are the targets for acquiring random numbers, updated random numbers are acquired in the corresponding dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d.

If the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers (step S5607: NO), first, the value of the random number pointer provided in the main RAM 74 is incremented by 1 (step S5609). The random number pointer is a counter that allows the main MPU 72 to specify which of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is to be used for random numbers, and can take numerical information of "0" to "11". If the random number pointer is "0", the first shared random number circuit 101a is to be used for random numbers, if the random number pointer is "1", the second shared random number circuit 101b is to be used for random numbers, if the random number pointer is "2", the third shared random number circuit 101c is to be used for random numbers, and so on. In other words, if the random number pointer is "m", the m+1th shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are to be used for random numbers (m is an integer equal to or greater than 0).

If the value of the random number pointer after adding 1 exceeds the maximum value of "11" (step S5610: YES), the random number pointer is cleared to "0" (step S5611). As a result, the value of the random number pointer is incremented by 1 each time it becomes the subject of use in the lottery process in the numerical range of "0" to "11", and if it exceeds the maximum value of the numerical range, it is looped back to the minimum value. Therefore, when the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are the subject of use for random numbers, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l to be used are changed in sequence according to a predetermined order each time they become the subject of use in the lottery process, and after the last shared random number circuits 101a to 101l become the subject of use, the first shared random number circuits 101a to 101l become the subject of use again.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5610, or if the processing of step S5611 is executed, the random number of the shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the value of the random number pointer among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is obtained as numerical information of the random number from the latch register into which the random number was written when the start lever 41 was operated to start the current game (step S5612).

After that, it is determined whether the random number to be obtained this time is a 16-bit random number (step S5613). In other words, in this embodiment, not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers may be obtained using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. If a negative determination is made in step S5613, this means that the random number to be obtained this time is an 8-bit random number, and the random number acquisition process is terminated.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5613, it is judged whether or not a 16-bit random number has already been acquired (step S5614). If a negative judgment is made in step S5614, the processes of steps S5609 to S5612 are executed again to acquire an additional 8-bit random number from the next shared random number circuit 101a to 101l in the acquisition order for the shared random number circuit 101a to 101l from which the already acquired 8-bit random number was acquired. This results in a total of 16-bit random numbers being acquired, including the 8-bit random number already acquired and the newly acquired 8-bit random number.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, it is possible to obtain not only 8-bit random numbers but also 16-bit random numbers by using the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to diversify the types of lottery processing that can be used by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l.

When acquiring an 8-bit random number, the 8-bit random number is acquired from one of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and when acquiring a 16-bit random number, the 8-bit random number is acquired from each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. This makes it possible to acquire a 16-bit random number while using a processing configuration for acquiring 8-bit random numbers. Also, since the update period for 8-bit random numbers is shorter than that for 16-bit random numbers, by acquiring two 8-bit random numbers when acquiring a 16-bit random number, it becomes possible to use 16-bit random numbers while shortening the update period.

Fifth embodiment
In this embodiment, the configuration for supplying clock signals to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration that differs from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 112 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the random number circuit group 100 in this embodiment.

In the random number circuit group 100, the configuration of the first to fourth dedicated random number circuits 102a to 102d is the same as that of the first embodiment. Meanwhile, in the first embodiment, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l are provided with a shared clock circuit 104 that is common to the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l, and the shared clock circuit 104 outputs a clock signal to all of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 94, the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are provided in one-to-one correspondence with the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l. The output periods of the clock signals of these first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l are different from each other and are set so as not to be multiples of each other. This makes it possible to diversify the combination patterns of random numbers from each of the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l at any given time.

In addition, the output period of the clock signals from the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l is sufficiently short compared to the time required for a player to operate the start lever 41. For example, while it takes a player one second to operate the start lever 41, the output period of the clock signals from the first to twelfth clock circuits 151a to 151l is in the range of 3 microseconds to 30 microseconds. As a result, the deviation in the update period of the random numbers in the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l is sufficiently small in relation to the time required for a player to operate the start lever 41.

Sixth Embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the normal performance control process in the performance side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 113 is a flowchart showing the normal performance control process in this embodiment.

In step S5701, the same processing as steps S2201 to S2210 of the normal performance control processing (FIG. 52) in the first embodiment is executed. After that, it is determined whether or not the chance performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5702). The chance performance flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to identify that a performance corresponding to the chance state ST7 is being executed. If the value of the chance performance flag is "0" (step S5702: NO), it is determined whether or not a chance start command has been received from the main side MPU 72 (step S5703). If a chance start command has been received (step S5703: YES), it is determined whether or not the false premonition performance flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5704).

If the false premonition effect flag is set to "1" (step S5704: YES), it is determined whether the currently executed false premonition effect is to be stopped (step S5705). There are two types of false premonition effects: one in which an effect with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, and one in which an effect with a low expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed. Note that since the false premonition state ST5 is a game state that does not lead to a transition to the ART state ST9 in the first place, no matter what type of false premonition effect is being executed, a transition to the ART state ST9 will not occur after the end of the false premonition effect.

If the currently executed false premonition effect is of a type that executes an effect with a low expectancy of transitioning to the ART state ST9, a positive determination is made in step S5705, and the false premonition effect flag is cleared to "0" (step S5706). As a result, the false premonition effect that is being executed is stopped midway due to the transition to the chance state ST7.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5704, or if the processing of step S5706 is executed, a chance effect start setting process is executed (step S5707). In the chance effect start setting process, a chance effect table that enables the execution of a chance effect corresponding to the chance state ST7 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the chance effect table, and the chance effect is executed by the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63. Then, the player can recognize that the chance state ST7 is being entered by checking the effect. After that, the chance effect flag in the production side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5708).

On the other hand, if the currently executed false premonition performance is a type in which a performance with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, a negative judgment is made in step S5705. In this case, the chance waiting flag in the performance side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5709). The chance waiting flag is a flag for the performance side MPU 92 to specify that the start of the chance performance is being waited for due to the execution of the false premonition performance corresponding to the false premonition state ST5. Here, in the case where the main side MPU 72 wins the transition to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false premonition state ST5, it ends the false premonition state ST5 in the middle and transitions to the chance state ST7. In contrast, even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the middle of the false premonition performance, if the false premonition performance in the middle of its execution is a type in which a performance with a high expectation of transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, the performance side MPU 92 does not end the false premonition performance in the middle, and continues the false premonition performance even if the main side MPU 72 is executing control corresponding to the chance state ST7. This allows the game state to prioritize transition to chance state ST7 over the continuation of false premonition state ST5, thereby ensuring the player's benefit from the occurrence of chance state ST7, while continuing the false premonition presentation that is currently in the middle of execution and has a high expectation of transitioning to ART state ST9, making it possible to avoid creating a sense of incongruity in the content of the presentation.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5703, or if the processing of step S5709 is executed, a performance control process for a false premonition state is executed (step S5710). The processing content of the performance control process for a false premonition state is the same as that in the first embodiment described above. Also, if a positive judgment is made in step S5702, the processing content of steps S5711 to S5716 is executed. The processing content of these steps S5711 to S5716 are the same as steps S2217 to S2222 of the normal performance control process (Figure 52) in the first embodiment described above.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, if the currently executed false premonition effect is of the type that executes an effect with a high expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST9, the execution of the false premonition effect is continued even if a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the main MPU 72. This makes it possible to ensure the player's benefit from the occurrence of the chance state ST7 by prioritizing the transition to the chance state ST7 over the continuation of the false premonition state ST5 in terms of the game state, while preventing the content of the effect from feeling unnatural by continuing the false premonition effect that is in the middle of being executed and has a high expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST9.

On the other hand, if the currently executed false premonition effect is of a type that executes an effect with a low expectation of transitioning to the ART state ST9, when a transition to the chance state ST7 occurs in the master MPU 72, the false premonition effect is stopped midway and a chance effect is started. This makes it possible to prioritize the start of a chance effect that is likely to attract the player's attention over the currently executed false premonition effect in conjunction with the transition to the chance state ST7 in the master MPU 72 when a false premonition effect with a low expectation is being executed.

Seventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the performance control process for the false premonition state in the performance side MPU 92 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 114 is a flowchart showing the effect control process for the false premonition state in this embodiment. Note that the effect control process for the false premonition state is executed not only in a situation where a false premonition effect is being executed, but also in a situation where a real premonition effect, a chance effect, an effect for a bonus state, an effect for the preparation state ST8, and an effect for the ART state ST9 are not being executed.

Steps S5801 to S5804 are the same as steps S2301 to S2304 of the effect control process for the false premonition state in the first embodiment (Figure 53). If the false premonition effect flag in the effect side RAM 94 is set to "1" (step S5801: YES), it is determined whether the information to be referenced in the false premonition effect table stored in the effect side RAM 94 corresponds to the end timing of the false premonition effect, thereby determining whether it is the end timing of the false premonition effect (step S5805).

If a positive judgment is made in step S5805, it is judged whether or not a false premonition start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5806). If a false premonition start command has not been received (step S5806: NO), the end setting process of the false premonition effect is executed (step S5807). In the end setting process of the false premonition effect, a normal return effect table corresponding to the end of the false premonition state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1 and a normal effect table corresponding to the normal game state ST1 are read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94. According to these effect tables, the performance side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effects, so that the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 execute a normal return effect corresponding to the end of the false premonition state ST5 and the return to the normal game state ST1, and then executes a normal effect corresponding to the normal game state ST1. Then, the player can confirm that the premonition effect has ended and the game has returned to the normal game state ST1 by checking the effect.

If a false premonition start command has been received (step S5806: YES), a false premonition effect adjustment process is executed (step S5808). In the false premonition effect adjustment process, a false premonition effect table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that a false premonition effect with continuity of effect is executed for the content of the false premonition effect at that time. In this case, the false premonition effect table corresponds to the information on the number of games to be continued in the false premonition state ST5 set in the currently received false premonition start command. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false premonition effect table, and a false premonition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 with content that has continuity with the content of the false premonition effect that has been executed up to that point. In addition, if a false premonition effect is started in the middle of a false premonition effect, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will execute premonition effects for the total number of games of the false premonition effect that has been executed up until that point and the number of games of the false premonition effect that will be executed from now on.

If it is not the time to end the false premonition effect (step S5805: NO), it is determined whether or not a false premonition effect start command has been received from the main MPU 72 (step S5809). If the false premonition effect start command has not been received (step S5809: NO), a false premonition effect update setting process is executed (step S5810). In this update setting process, if the timing for updating the false premonition effect has come due to the execution of a new game, a process is executed to change the range to be referenced in the currently referenced false premonition effect table in accordance with the start of a new game. This causes the execution content of the false premonition effect to change depending on the number of games that the false premonition effect will continue.

If a false premonition effect command has been received (step S5809: YES), a false premonition effect adjustment process is executed (step S5811). In the false premonition effect adjustment process, a false premonition effect table is read from the performance side ROM 93 and stored in the performance side RAM 94 so that a false premonition effect with continuity of effect is executed for the content of the false premonition effect at that time. In this case, the false premonition effect table corresponds to the information on the number of games to be continued in the false premonition state ST5 set in the currently received false premonition start command. The performance execution control is performed by the performance side MPU 92 according to the false premonition effect table, and a false premonition effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 with content that has continuity with the content of the false premonition effect that has been executed up to that point. In addition, if a false premonition effect is started in the middle of a false premonition effect, the upper lamp 61, speaker 62, and image display device 63 will execute premonition effects for the total number of games of the false premonition effect that have been executed up until that point and the number of games of the false premonition effect that will be executed from now on.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5802, if the processing of step S5804 is executed, if the processing of step S5807 is executed, if the processing of step S5808 is executed, if the processing of step S5810 is executed, or if the processing of step S5811 is executed, it is judged whether or not a preparation start command has been received from the master MPU 72 (step S5812). Even if the performance side MPU 92 is executing control to execute a false premonition performance, a situation may occur in which the game state in the master MPU 72 is in the chance state ST7. Then, in such a situation, if the master MPU 72 wins the transition lottery process to transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7, the master MPU 72 will send a preparation start command to the performance side MPU 92 even if the false premonition performance is being executed.

If a preparation start command has been received (step S5812: YES), a preparation effect start setting process is executed (step S5813). In the preparation effect start setting process, a preparation effect table that enables the execution of a preparation effect corresponding to the preparation state ST8 is read from the production side ROM 93 and stored in the production side RAM 94. The production side MPU 92 controls the execution of the effect according to the preparation effect table, and the preparation effect is executed on the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63. The player can then confirm that the preparation state ST8 is reached. Note that if the preparation effect start setting process is executed when a false premonition effect is being executed, an effect corresponding to the winning of the transition to the ART state ST9 is executed in a manner that interrupts the series of stories of the false premonition effect. After that, various flags related to the false premonition effect are cleared to "0" (step S5814).

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, even if the main MPU 72 transitions to the chance state ST7 while the false premonition effect is being executed, the false premonition effect being executed continues, and even if the false premonition effect ends while the chance state ST7 is continuing in the main MPU 72, the chance effect does not start. This means that the chance effect will not start suddenly in the middle of the false premonition effect, or at the same time as the false premonition effect ends, making it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the sudden start of the chance effect.

Eighth embodiment
In this embodiment, the manner in which the bonus winning notification is made when a bonus is won during the execution of the ending performance is different from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that is different from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment is basically omitted.

Figure 115 is a flowchart showing the process for announcing a bonus during an ending, which is executed by the production side MPU 92. Note that the process for announcing a bonus during an ending is executed while the ending production is being executed.

It is determined whether any bonus winning data has been set in the main RAM 74 (step S5901). Note that the main MPU 72 transmits a game start command containing information that allows the type of bonus winning data to be identified at the start of a game in which bonus winning data has been set, and also transmits a corresponding command when a bonus win is achieved. Based on these commands, the presentation MPU 92 can therefore identify whether bonus winning data has been set in the main RAM 74.

If a positive judgment is made in step S5901, it is judged whether or not it is the start timing of the game for which the bonus winning data has been set (step S5902). If a positive judgment is made in step S5902, the number of non-notification compatible games corresponding to the type of bonus winning data currently set is read from the presentation side ROM 93 (step S5903). Multiple types of non-notification compatible game numbers are set according to the type of bonus winning data. Specifically, if any BB winning data is set, 10 games are selected as the number of non-notification compatible games, and if any RB winning data is set, 20 games are selected as the number of non-notification compatible games.

If a negative judgment is made in step S5902, or if the processing of step S5903 is executed, it is judged whether the remaining number of games for the ending performance that was set at the start of the ending performance is less than the non-notification compatible number of games (step S5904). If a positive judgment is made in step S5904, the notification performance setting processing is executed (step S5905). In the notification performance setting processing, data is set so that an image corresponding to a bonus win is displayed in a reduced size when a video corresponding to the ending performance is displayed on the image display device 63.

According to the present embodiment described above in detail, if a bonus is won during the ending performance, a bonus winning notification will be made when the number of remaining continuing games in the ending performance reaches a predetermined number of games. This makes it possible to make the bonus winning notification at a favorable timing in relation to the ending performance.

The number of non-announcement compatible games may differ depending on whether or not there is a setting difference in the winning probability.

Ninth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 116 is a flowchart showing the power failure processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the power failure processing is executed in step S203 when it is determined in the timer interrupt processing (Figure 11) that the power failure flag is set to "1", as in the first embodiment.

In the power failure processing, it is first determined whether the command transmission has been completed (step S6001). If the transmission has not been completed (step S6001: NO), this processing is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing, and the command transmission is terminated. If the command transmission has been completed (step S6001: YES), a clear process for reel control is executed (step S6002), and a return address adjustment process is executed (step S6003). The clear process for reel control is the same as step S116 in the main processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjustment process is the same as step S117 in the main processing (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

Specifically, in the reel control clear process (step S6002), the constant speed flag 74c, the spinning flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel performance winning flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6003), if the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped while at least one reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating and the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is resumed, the return to the address before the power cutoff (step S119) is performed, and normal processing can be started from the start address of the reel control process (FIG. 27). Furthermore, because the constant speed flag 74c, the spinning flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel performance winning flag of the main RAM 74 are all cleared to "0," it is possible to start accelerating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R according to the normal acceleration table, even if the supply of operating power to the main MPU 72 is stopped after the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have started to spin. Note that in this embodiment, the reel control clearing process and the return address adjustment process are not executed in the main process (FIG. 10).

Then, the value of the stack pointer of the main MPU 72 is saved in the main RAM 74 (step S6004), and the output state of the output port of the main MPU 72 is cleared to turn off all actuators (not shown) (step S6005). Then, after executing a checksum calculation process (step S6006), the calculated checksum is stored in the main RAM 74 (step S6007). The contents of the checksum calculation process are the same as step S304 in the power failure processing (FIG. 12) in the first embodiment described above, and more specifically, the same as step S109 in the main processing (FIG. 10). Then, access to the main RAM 74 is prohibited (step S6008). After the above processing is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for a complete power outage and the processing being unable to be performed.

The above configuration makes it possible to properly resume the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is resumed, without the need to execute the reel control clear process and return address adjustment process in the main process (Figure 10).

In addition, because the reel control clearing process and return address adjustment process are executed before the checksum is calculated in the power outage process (Fig. 116), it is possible to calculate and store the checksum of the main RAM 74 in the state after these processes are executed. Then, in the main process (Fig. 10) when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is determined whether the checksum is normal or not, as in the first embodiment above, and if the checksum is abnormal, the abnormality process (steps S120 to S122) is executed. This makes it possible to determine whether the information in the main RAM 74 in the state after the reel control clearing process and return address adjustment process are executed is normal or not when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Tenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration for appropriately restarting the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R when the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R differs from that of the first embodiment. The following describes the configuration that differs from the first embodiment. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 117 is a flowchart showing the stop operation determination process executed by the main MPU 72. Note that the stop operation determination process is executed in step S207 in the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

First, it is determined whether the constant speed flag 74c in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6101). As in the first embodiment, the constant speed flag 74c is a flag that allows the main MPU 72 to determine whether constant speed rotation has started for all reels 32L, 32M, 32R and operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 has been enabled. If the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" (step S6101: NO), operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is disabled, and the stop operation determination process is terminated.

If the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" (step S6101: YES), the judgment target counter provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "3" (step S6102). The judgment target counter is a counter that the main MPU 72 uses to determine which of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R the processing of steps S6103 to S6109 will be performed on. If the judgment target counter value is "3", the left reel 32L will be the control target, if the judgment target counter value is "2", the center reel 32M will be the control target, and if the judgment target counter value is "1", the right reel 32R will be the control target.

Then, a shift process of history data is executed for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to the current value of the counter to be judged (step S6103). In this embodiment, if it is confirmed consecutively over two processing rounds of the stop operation judgment process that a detection signal corresponding to the one stop button 42-44 not being operated is received from the stop detection sensor 42a-44a corresponding to that one stop button 42-44, and then it is confirmed in one processing round of the stop operation judgment process that a detection signal corresponding to the one stop button 42-44 being operated is received, then that one stop button 42-44 is identified as having been operated to stop.

Figure 118 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each history area 181-183 provided in the main RAM 74 to identify the above-mentioned stop operation. As shown in Figure 118, the main RAM 74 is provided with a left history area 181, a center history area 182, and a right history area 183. The left history area 181 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 42a corresponding to the left stop button 42, the center history area 182 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 43a corresponding to the center stop button 43, and the right history area 183 stores information corresponding to the detection signal of the stop detection sensor 44a corresponding to the right stop button 44. Each of these history areas 181-183 is provided with a current area 181a, 182a, 183a, a previous area 181b, 182b, 183b, and a time before last area 181c, 182c, 183c.

Current areas 181a, 182a, 183a store information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation judgment process (Figure 117) in the current processing round, previous areas 181b, 182b, 183b store information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation judgment process (Figure 117) in the previous processing round, and previous-to-previous areas 181c, 182c, 183c store information corresponding to the detection signals of the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a confirmed in the stop operation judgment process (Figure 117) in the previous-to-previous processing round. If it is confirmed that a detection signal corresponding to the corresponding stop button 42-44 not being operated is received from the stop detection sensor 42a-44a, a "0" is set in the corresponding area 181a-183c, and if it is confirmed that a detection signal corresponding to the corresponding stop button 42-44 being operated is received from the stop detection sensor 42a-44a, a "1" is set in the corresponding area 181a-183c. If the corresponding stop button 42-44 is not being operated, the stop detection sensor 42a-44a continues to output a LOW level signal, and if the corresponding stop button 42-44 is being operated, it continues to output a HI level signal. However, the relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed.

Returning to the explanation of the stop operation determination process (FIG. 117), in the history data shift process (step S6103), a process is executed to shift data for the history areas 181 to 183 corresponding to the current value of the determination target counter to the area one area after the previous one in the storage order of the history data. In other words, if the value of the determination target counter is "3", the data for the left history area 181 is shifted so that the previous area 181b is changed to the area before the previous area 181c and the current area 181a is changed to the previous area 181b. Also, if the value of the determination target counter is "2", the data for the center history area 182 is shifted so that the previous area 182b is changed to the area before the previous area 182c and the current area 182a is changed to the previous area 182b. Also, if the value of the determination target counter is "1", the data for the right history area 183 is shifted so that the previous area 183b is changed to the area before the previous area 183c and the current area 183a is changed to the previous area 183b.

Then, it is determined whether the stop button 42-44 corresponding to the current counter to be judged has been operated (step S6104). Specifically, it is determined whether a detection signal corresponding to the operation of the corresponding stop button 42-44 has been received from the stop detection sensor 42a-44a corresponding to the current counter to be judged. If the determination is positive in step S6104, "1" is set to the current area 181a, 182a, 183a of the history area 181-183 corresponding to the current counter to be judged (step S6105). If the determination is negative in step S6104, "0" is cleared to the current area 181a, 182a, 183a of the history area 181-183 corresponding to the current counter to be judged (step S6106).

When the processing of step S6105 or step S6106 is executed, it is determined whether the area before last 181c, 182c, 183c and the previous area 181b, 182b, 183b of the history area 181 to 183 corresponding to the current counter to be judged are "0" and whether the current area 181a, 182a, 183a is "1" (step S6107). If a positive determination is made in step S6107, a stop operation flag corresponding to the current counter to be judged, which is provided in the main RAM 74, is set to "1" (step S6108). The stop operation flag is provided in one-to-one correspondence with each stop button 42 to 44. If the stop operation flag is set to "1", a positive determination is made in step S803 of the reel control process (Figure 27). Then, if a positive determination is made in step S803 and stop control has not yet been initiated for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to that stop operation flag, a positive determination is made in step S804 and stop control is executed for those reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Note that the state in which the stop operation flag is set to "1" is cleared to "0" and released regardless of whether a positive or negative judgment is made in step S804 of the reel control process (Fig. 27). In addition, the stop operation judgment process (Fig. 117) executes the processing from step S6102 onwards while the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1", and the state in which the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" is cleared to "0" and released when the stopping of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed. Therefore, even after the stop operation flag is set to "1" and stop control is started for the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponding to that stop operation flag, the processing from step S6102 onwards in the stop operation judgment process (Fig. 117) is executed for the stop buttons 42 to 44 corresponding to that stop operation flag. In this case, if the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is not continued, all areas 181a to 183c of each history area 181 to 183 will be set to "0" by the time all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6107 or if the processing of step S6108 is executed, the value of the judgment target counter in the main RAM 74 is decremented by 1 (step S6109). Then, if the value of the judgment target counter after decrementing by 1 is 1 or greater (step S6110: NO), the processing returns to step S6103, and if the value of the judgment target counter after decrementing by 1 is "0" (step S6110: YES), this stop operation judgment processing is terminated.

Next, the rotation monitoring process executed by the main MPU 72 will be described. The rotation monitoring process is executed in step S207 of the timer interrupt process (Figure 11).

First, it is determined whether the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is normal (step S6201). Specifically, the main MPU 72 manages the rotational position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the number of steps of the corresponding stepping motor 162, and determines whether the number of steps that the main MPU 72 has grasped exceeds the number of steps corresponding to one revolution of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and has reached the abnormal range, but an ON signal has not been received from the reel index sensor 164 of the reel 32L, 32M, or 32R.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6201, this means that reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped or are rotating unstably even though drive control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is being performed. In this case, a clear process for reel control is executed (step S6202), and a return address adjustment process is executed (step S6203). The clear process for reel control is the same as step S116 in the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment, and the return address adjustment process is the same as step S117 in the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

Specifically, in the reel control clearing process (step S6202), the constant speed flag 74c, the spinning flag 74d, the start setting flag, and the reel performance winning flag in the main RAM 74 are cleared to "0". In the return address adjustment process (step S6203), if the return address for the normal process (FIG. 13) is the reel control process (FIG. 27), the return address is corrected to the start address in the reel control process (FIG. 27). By executing these processes, if the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped despite the drive control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R being performed, it becomes possible to re-accelerate all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Although a detailed explanation is omitted, the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is executed so that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R come to a complete stop before the re-acceleration is performed.

Next, the main processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 120.

Steps S6301 to S6315 and steps S6317 to S6321 execute the same processes as steps S101 to S115 and steps S118 to S122 of the main process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment described above. After the power outage flag in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" in step S6315, the reel control clear process and return address adjustment process are not executed, but rather "1" is set to the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a of each of the history areas 181 to 183 (step S6316).

By setting "1" in the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a when the supply of operating power is started in this way, even if the supply of operating power is started while the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is continued, in the first stop operation judgment process (FIG. 117), when step S6103 is executed for the history area 181 to 183 corresponding to that stop button 42 to 44, "1" is set in the previous area 181b, 182b, and 183b of that history area 181 to 183. Therefore, a positive judgment is not made in step S6107 in the stop operation judgment process (FIG. 117) for that processing round, and the stop operation flag is not set to "1". Furthermore, since a positive judgment is not made in step S6107 while the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that was performed before the supply of operating power was started is continued, the stop operation flag is not set to "1" for the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44. This makes it possible to prevent stop control from being initiated on reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that have just started spinning, even if the supply of operating power is stopped while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning and the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1," and the stop buttons 42-44 are operated when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed.

In addition, if the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is abnormal, the constant speed flag 74c is cleared to "0" and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are accelerated again, so that it is possible to disable the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 by clearing the constant speed flag 74c to "0" in a situation where the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 that was performed when the supply of operating power was resumed is not accepted. Then, when the acceleration of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is completed, the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" again, and the operation of the stop buttons 42 to 44 is enabled. This makes it possible to prevent the stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being started in a situation where the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is abnormal when the supply of operating power is subsequently resumed, even if the supply of operating power is stopped during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In addition, by simply executing the simple process of setting "1" to the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a of each history area 181 to 183 in the main process (Figure 120), it is possible to prevent the stopping control of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R from being started in a situation where the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not normal.

The process of setting "1" to areas 181a, 182a, and 183a is not limited to being executed in the main process (FIG. 120), but may be executed in the power outage process when the supply of operating power is stopped.

In addition, the main processing (Figure 120) or power outage processing is not limited to a configuration in which "1" is set only to the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a, but may be a configuration in which "1" is set only to the previous areas 181b, 182b, and 183b, a configuration in which "1" is set to the current areas 181a, 182a, and 183a and the previous areas 181b, 182b, and 183b, or a configuration in which "1" is set to all of the history areas 181 to 183.

Eleventh embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the direct topping process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 121 is a flowchart showing the direct topping process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S6401, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17). If a positive determination is made in step S6401, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6402 to S6409 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S6401, the processes in steps S6402 to S6409 are not executed. The winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the set values "1" to "6".

In other words, if the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role shown in steps S6402 to S6409 (FIG. 17) is executed, and if the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) results in a loss or if the index value IV with the different winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role shown in steps S6402 to S6409 (FIG. 17) is executed on the condition that the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), and it is possible to make it impossible to predict the set value because the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is awarded.

In the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), first, the direct add-on table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6402). The contents of the direct add-on table are the same as the direct add-on table (Figure 64 (b)) read in step S3102 of the direct add-on process (Figure 65) in the first embodiment described above.

After executing the process of step S6402, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S6403). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer.

Then, the random number acquired in step S6403 is compared with the direct addition table read out in step S6402 to determine whether a direct addition has been won (step S6404). If it corresponds to any of the numbers of added games (step S6404: YES), the add-on setting process is executed (step S6405). In the add-on setting process, the value of the number of added games corresponding to the currently selected lottery result is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the master RAM 74.

After that, it is determined whether the provisional setting flag 123 in the master RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6406). In other words, it is determined whether a direct addition win has been obtained in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the lottery process (FIG. 17) for the role in the current game is executed. If the provisional setting flag 123 is set to "1" (step S6406: YES), an addition addition process is executed (step S6407). Specifically, the value of "10", which is the fixed number of added games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), is added to the ART game number counter 121 after the addition of the number of added games is executed in step S6405. Then, the provisional setting flag 123 is cleared to "0" (step S6408).

After that, a direct add command indicating that the number of continued games in ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the presentation side MPU92 (step S6409). The direct add command contains information about the number of added games that has occurred this time, as well as information about the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct add command, the presentation side MPU92 executes a presentation indicating that the number of added games selected this time has been added.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6401, or if a negative judgment is made in step S6404, it is judged whether or not "1" is set in the provisional setting flag 123 of the main RAM 74 (step S6410). In other words, it is judged whether or not a direct addition win has been made in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63). If a positive judgment is made in step S6410, the addition setting process is executed (step S6411). Specifically, the value of "10", which is the fixed number of added games selected in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63), is added to the ART game number counter 121 provided in the main RAM 74. After that, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the production side MPU 92 (step S6412). The direct addition command is set with information on the number of added games that has occurred this time, and also with information on the number of continued games in the advantageous section SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct add command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the currently selected number of added games has been awarded. After that, the provisional setting flag 123 in the main side RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6413).

According to the above configuration, in a situation where a direct-addition win has been obtained in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) executed before the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) is executed, if a direct-addition win has been obtained in the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), not only the number of add-on games selected in the add-on lottery process but also the number of add-on games selected in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) will be awarded. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity for a large number of add-on games to be awarded.

Twelfth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the direct topping process executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 122 is a flowchart showing the direct topping process in this embodiment, which is executed by the main MPU 72.

In step S6501, it is determined whether or not any of the winning numbers "4", "6", "8", or "15" has been set in the lottery process for the current role (FIG. 17). If a positive determination is made in step S6501, an additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) shown in steps S6502 to S6509 is executed, and if a negative determination is made in step S6501, the processes in steps S6502 to S6509 are not executed. The winning numbers "4", "6", "8", and "15" are associated with index values IV that have the same probability of winning among the setting values "1" to "6".

In other words, if the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role shown in steps S6502 to S6509 (FIG. 17) is executed, and if the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) results in a loss or if the index value IV with the different winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected, the additional lottery process is not executed. In this way, the additional lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role shown in steps S6502 to S6509 (FIG. 17) is executed on the condition that the index value IV with the same winning probability among the set values of "1" to "6" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), and it is possible to make it impossible to predict the set value because the number of additional games selected in the additional lottery process is awarded.

In the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), first, the direct add-on table is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6502). The contents of the direct add-on table are the same as the direct add-on table (Figure 64 (b)) read in step S3102 of the direct add-on process (Figure 65) in the first embodiment described above.

After executing the process of step S6502, the random number acquisition process is executed (step S6503). The process contents of the random number acquisition process have already been explained using FIG. 16. In the direct addition process, the random number written in the corresponding latch register among the first to twelfth latch registers 103a to 103l is acquired from the random number circuit among the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer. In detail, as already explained, the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l generate random numbers of "0" to "255", and when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal process (FIG. 13), the random number written in the corresponding first to twelfth latch register 103a to 103l is acquired by the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l corresponding to the current random number pointer.

After that, the random number acquired in step S6503 is compared with the direct-addition table read in step S6502 to determine whether or not a direct-addition win has been made (step S6504). If it corresponds to any of the numbers of games to be added (step S6504: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the provisional setting counter provided in the main RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505). In this embodiment, the number of games to be added when a direct-addition win is made in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63) is not fixed to 10 games, but is any of 10 games, 15 games, 20 games, 25 games, and 30 games. In this case, 10 games and 15 games are the number of games that is less than the minimum number of games to be added set in the direct-addition table (FIG. 64(b)), but 20 games, 25 games, and 30 games are the number of games that is greater than the minimum number of games to be added set in the direct-addition table (FIG. 64(b)). In the regular lottery process (Figure 63), when a direct addition is won, the value of the number of added games to be awarded is set in the provisional setting counter in the main RAM 74.

If the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6505: YES), the value of the number of added games selected from the direct add-on table (FIG. 64(b)) is compared with the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 (step S6506). If a negative judgment is made in step S6505 or if the processing of step S6506 is executed, an add-on setting process is executed (step S6507). In the add-on setting process, if the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is "0" or the value of the number of added games selected from the direct add-on table (FIG. 64(b)) is equal to or greater than the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74, the value of the number of added games selected from the direct add-on table (FIG. 64(b)) is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the master RAM 74. On the other hand, if the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is greater than the value of the number of added games selected from the direct addition table (Figure 64 (b)), the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the master RAM 74.

Then, the value of the provisional setting counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6508). In addition, a direct add command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the presentation side MPU 92 (step S6509). The direct add command contains information about the number of added games that has occurred this time, as well as information about the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct add command, the presentation side MPU 92 executes a presentation indicating that the number of added games selected this time has been added.

If a negative judgment is made in step S6501 or if a negative judgment is made in step S6504, it is judged whether the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is 1 or more (step S6510). In other words, it is judged whether or not a direct addition has been won in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63). If a positive judgment is made in step S6510, the addition setting process is executed (step S6511). Specifically, the value of the provisional setting counter in the master RAM 74 is added to the ART game number counter 121 in the master RAM 74. Then, a direct addition command indicating that the number of continued games in the ART state ST9 has been added is sent to the performance side MPU 92 (step S6512). The direct addition command contains information on the number of added games that has occurred this time, and also contains information on the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 stored in the advantageous continuation counter. By receiving the direct addition command, the performance side MPU 92 executes a performance indicating that the number of added games selected this time has been granted. After that, the value of the temporary setting counter in the main RAM 74 is cleared to "0" (step S6513).

According to the above configuration, multiple types of the number of additional games to be awarded in the event of a direct addition win in the constant lottery process (Figure 63) are set, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of additional games is awarded. In this case, if a direct addition win occurs in the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17) in a situation in which a direct addition win occurs in the constant lottery process (Figure 63), the player is awarded the larger number of games out of the number of additional games to be awarded in the constant lottery process (Figure 63) and the number of additional games to be awarded in the add-on lottery process corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17). This makes it possible to award the number of additional games in a way that is advantageous to the player, while preventing the number of additional games awarded to the player from becoming excessively large.

Thirteenth embodiment
In this embodiment, the processing configuration of the chance state processing executed by the main MPU 72 is different from that of the first embodiment. The configuration different from the first embodiment will be described below. Note that the description of the same configuration as the first embodiment will basically be omitted.

Figure 123 is a flowchart showing the chance state processing in this embodiment executed by the main MPU 72.

First, it is determined whether the high probability flag in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" to determine whether the current chance state ST7 is in the high probability mode or the low probability mode (step S6601). If the high probability flag is not set to "1" (step S6601: NO), the lottery table 112 for low probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6602). On the other hand, if the high probability flag is set to "1" (step S6601: YES), the lottery table 113 for high probability is read from the main ROM 73 (step S6603). The contents of the low probability lottery table 112 are the same as the low probability lottery table 112 (FIG. 50(a)) read in step S2102 of the chance state processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment described above, and the contents of the high probability lottery table 113 are the same as the high probability lottery table 113 (FIG. 50(b)) read in step S2103 of the chance state processing (FIG. 49) in the first embodiment described above.

When the processing of step S6602 or step S6603 is executed, a random number acquisition process is executed (step S6604). The processing content of the random number acquisition process is the same as that of the first embodiment. In the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9, the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p is acquired from the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d. In detail, the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d generates random numbers from "0" to "127" because the 7-bit random number is updated in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the random number written to the 16th latch register 103p by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is acquired at the timing when the operation of the start lever 41 is confirmed and a positive judgment is made in step S404 of the normal processing (FIG. 13). The acquired random number is stored in the acquired random number counter 74e provided in the main RAM 74.

After that, a fixed value is added to the acquired random number counter 74e in which the random number acquired from the 16th latch register 103p is stored (step S6605). Specifically, the fixed value information has a data capacity of 8 bits, and is set to "128" in decimal and "10000000" in binary. This fixed value information is added to the acquired random number counter 74e. As already explained, the random number updated by the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d and written to the 16th latch register 103p is 7 bits, so it becomes a random number between "0" and "127". In this case, by uniformly adding the fixed value of "128" in step S6605, the possible random number values in the acquired random number counter 74e after the processing of step S6605 become "128" to "255".

After that, lottery value information corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role in the current game (FIG. 17) is obtained from the lottery tables 112, 113 read in step S6602 or step S6603 (step S6606). For example, if the winning number "15" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) in the low probability mode, the lottery value information is "80" in decimal and "01010000" in binary. Also, if the winning number "15" is selected in the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) in the high probability mode, the lottery value information is "255" in decimal and "11111111" in binary.

Then, an addition process is performed (step S6607). In the addition process, an arithmetic process is performed to obtain the result of adding the lottery value information obtained from the lottery table 112 for low probability or the lottery table 113 for high probability in step S6606 to the acquired random number counter 74e after adding the fixed value in step S6605. In this case, if further addition is performed during the addition process from the all "1" state of the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e to the all "0" state of the acquired random number counter 74e, that is, if the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 provided in the main MPU 72 is set to "1", and if the update from the maximum value to the minimum value is not performed, the carry flag 114 is maintained in the state set to "0". Then, if the carry flag 114 is set to "1", it is determined that the addition result exceeds all "1" and a carry has occurred.

If the result of the addition process exceeds all "1" and a carry occurs (step S6608: YES), it is determined that a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9, and the ART win flag provided in the main RAM 74 is set to "1" (step S6609). The ART win flag is a flag that the main MPU 72 uses to identify that a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9 at the start of the current game, and if the ART win flag is set to "1", processing is executed to transition to the preparation state ST8 at the end of the game. In other words, in the game following the game in which a win has occurred to transition to the ART state ST9, the game state will transition to the preparation state ST8, which is the stage preceding the ART state ST9.

The handling of numerical information when the lottery process for transition to ART state ST9 is executed will be explained with reference to the explanatory diagram in FIG. 124. First, the case where the result of the addition process does not exceed all "1" will be explained with reference to FIG. 124(a1) to FIG. 124(a5).

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124 (a1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquired random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124 (a2). After that, the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information in the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124 (a3).

After that, since the current mode is the low probability mode and the winning number "4" has been selected in the role selection process (FIG. 17), the information "00010100" is obtained as the selection value information from the low probability selection table 112 as shown in FIG. 124 (a4). The selection value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124(a4) is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, which is in the state shown in FIG. 124(a3), so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11110100" as shown in FIG. 124(a5). In this case, since no event occurs in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further added from the all "1" state to the all 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e becoming all zero, that is, no event occurs in which the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, the carry flag 114 remains set to "0". Therefore, there is no winning of the transition to the ART state ST9.

Next, we will explain the case where the result of the addition process exceeds all "1" with reference to Figures 124 (b1) to 124 (b5).

In the random number acquisition process (step S6604), a 7-bit random number is acquired as shown in FIG. 124 (b1). Then, the 7-bit random number is stored in the 1-byte acquired random number counter 74e as shown in FIG. 124 (b2). After that, the fixed value "10000000" is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, so that the information in the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11100000" as shown in FIG. 124 (a3).

After that, since the current mode is the high probability mode and the winning number "15" has been selected in the role selection process (FIG. 17), the information "11111111" is obtained as the selection value information from the high probability selection table 113, as shown in FIG. 124 (b4). The selection value information is stored in the register of the main MPU 72.

After that, the lottery value information shown in FIG. 124(b4) is added to the acquired random number counter 74e, which is in the state shown in FIG. 124(b3), so that the information of the acquired random number counter 74e becomes "11011111" as shown in FIG. 124(b5). In this case, an event has occurred in which the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e are further added from an all "1" state, causing the 8 bits of the acquired random number counter 74e to become all zero, i.e., the numerical information of the acquired random number counter 74e is updated from the maximum value to the minimum value, and therefore the carry flag 114 is set to "1". Therefore, a transition to the ART state ST9 is won.

As described above, the random number used in the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is fewer than the number of bits in 1 byte. In addition, a fixed value of "128" is uniformly added to the obtained random number. This makes it possible to use a common program as the lottery process for transitioning to ART state ST9, while still using 1 byte of lottery value information in both cases when creating a 100% winning situation and a possible losing situation.

If the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, and the lottery value information corresponding to 100% for generating a situation of 100% winning is 1 byte, unless the situation of all "1" after addition is also treated as a winning result, the lottery value information corresponding to 100% will not result in 100% winning. On the other hand, if the situation of all "1" after addition is also treated as a winning result, it becomes necessary to prevent all "1" from being obtained as a random number. Therefore, if the random number used is 8 bits, the same as the number of bits in 1 byte, it becomes necessary to set the lottery value information corresponding to 100% at least to a number of bits greater than the number of bits in 1 byte. On the other hand, since the random number used in the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is 7 bits, which is less than the number of bits in 1 byte, as described above, it becomes possible to use 1 byte of lottery value information corresponding to 100%. Therefore, it becomes possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the lottery value information in advance.

In addition, a fixed value of "128" is uniformly added to the acquired random number, and the lottery value information is added to the random number after the fixed value is added. Therefore, even when the lottery is drawn using an addition method using a 7-bit random number, it is possible to determine whether or not a win has been won by determining whether or not a carry has occurred in the 8-bit acquired random number counter 74e.

<Other embodiments>
The present invention is not limited to the contents of the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and improvements are possible within the scope of the present invention. For example, the following modifications may be made. The configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually to the configurations of the above-described embodiments, or may be applied in combination. The configurations of the above-described embodiments may be applied in combination with each other, and the configurations of the following alternative forms may be applied individually or in combination with each other to the configuration obtained by combining the configurations of the above-described embodiments with each other.

(1) In the case where a role in which the winning probability varies depending on a set value is won in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process to the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process to the real premonition state ST6, and the transition lottery process to the chance state ST7 are executed. However, it is also possible to configure the transition lottery process not to be executed even if a role in which the winning probability varies depending on a set value is won. In this case, the transition lottery process is executed only when a role in which the winning probability does not vary depending on a set value is won in the advantageous zone SC2, so it is possible to reduce the influence of the set value on the transition probability to the ART state ST9. Alternatively, it is also possible to configure the transition lottery process to be executed when a role in which the winning probability varies depending on a set value is won and a prize corresponding to that role is won.

(2) In a game that is won in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 may be executed. However, in a game that is won in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, these transition lottery processes may not be executed. This makes it possible to have the transition to the advantageous zone SC2 and the transition to each of the game states ST5 to ST7 occur as a result of different games.

The transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2 is configured to be executed when a role whose winning probability does not change according to a set value is won, but is not limited to this, and may be configured to be executed when a role whose winning probability does not change according to a set value is won and a winning event corresponding to the winning role is achieved, or may be configured to be executed when a role whose winning probability changes according to a set value is won, or may be configured to be executed when a role whose winning probability changes according to a set value is won and a winning event corresponding to the winning role is achieved.

(3) If a win is made in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, the advantageous zone SC2 may be configured to start from the game following the game in which the win was made. In this case, if the transition lottery process for the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 can be executed on the condition that the game is in the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 will not be executed in the game in which the win was made in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, because the game is not in the advantageous zone SC2 even if a win is made in the transition lottery process for the advantageous zone SC2, the transition lottery process for the false premonition state ST5, the transition lottery process for the real premonition state ST6, and the transition lottery process for the chance state ST7 will not be executed.

(4) When a transition to the favorable zone SC2 occurs in the normal gaming state ST1, an end lottery process may be executed each time the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won in the favorable zone SC2 is announced, and a transition to the normal zone SC1 occurs when an end lottery process results in an end win. In this case, it is possible to make it possible to announce the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won multiple times even in the favorable zone SC2 to which a transition has been made in the normal gaming state ST1.

(5) The number of times that the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that enables the first bell winning required to trigger the end of advantageous zone SC2 is not limited to once, but may be multiple times, such as two, three, four or more times.

(6) Instead of a configuration in which the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be announced as the trigger for the end of the favorable zone SC2, if there is a specific win that awards more game media than the first bell win and is won when the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined sequence, the favorable zone SC2 may not end until the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the specific win to be won is announced a predetermined number of times (e.g., once or twice). In other words, in this configuration, the favorable zone SC2 does not end until the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the win that awards the largest number of game media among the wins that are won when the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is a predetermined sequence is announced a predetermined number of times. In this case, even if the player is in the advantageous zone SC2 entered in the normal game state ST1, until the notification of the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the specific winning has occurred a predetermined number of times, if the player wins a role that results in the first bell winning according to the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell winning may be configured to be notified.

(7) The number of times the stop sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is notified that enables the first bell winning required to trigger the end of advantageous zone SC2 may be different between multiple gaming states such as normal gaming state ST1, false premonition state ST5, and chance state ST7. For example, by setting the number of necessary notifications to be greater in false premonition state ST5 than in normal gaming state ST1, it is possible to make false premonition state ST5 a more advantageous gaming state than normal gaming state ST1.

(8) When the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell to be won is announced in the normal game state ST1 and in the advantageous zone SC2, the announcement may be made on the dual-purpose display unit 66, but not on the image display device 63. In this case, it is possible to announce the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows for the first bell to be won, which triggers the end of the advantageous zone SC2, in an unobtrusive manner.

(9) In a configuration in which the advantageous zone display unit 67 is in an illuminated state (i.e., a display state) in the advantageous zone SC2, if a specified abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous zone display unit 67 may be in an unlit state (i.e., a non-display state). In this case, a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state may be performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. In this configuration in which the dual-purpose display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67 are integrated in the common display area 68, if a specified abnormal state occurs in the slot machine 10, the advantageous zone display unit 67 is turned off and a display corresponding to the type of abnormal state is performed in the dual-purpose display unit 66. This prevents the display mode of the common display area 68 from changing depending on whether the zone is in the advantageous zone SC2 or not, even if the same abnormal state occurs, making it easier to identify the type of abnormal state.

(10) When the number of games played in the B loop reaches 21 or more, a special freeze effect may be announced for an additional 1,000 games, even if the number of games played in the B loop is 22 or more. In this case, it is possible to prevent the number of additional games announced at one time from becoming excessively large.

(11) If the number of remaining continuing games in ART state ST9 measured by the main MPU 72 when the B loop is started is less than 20 games, the special freeze effect may not be generated. In this case, if the B loop occurs when the number of remaining continuing games in ART state ST9 is 20 or more games and 20 games have been played in the B loop, the total number of added games is notified regardless of whether the B loop is continuing or not, making it possible to notify of the addition of 1,000 games without assuming that the number of games granted in the B loop will be consumed midway.

(12) 20 games may be added when the B loop is started. In this case, by configuring the system to notify the total number of added games when 20 games have been played in the B loop, regardless of whether the B loop is continuing or not, it is possible to notify the addition of 1,000 games without assuming that the number of games added in the B loop will be consumed midway.

(13) The freeze period at the end of the ending may be longer when the ending performance ends and the BB performance starts than when the BB performance does not start after the ending performance ends. In this case, when the ending performance ends and the BB performance starts, it is possible to use the longer period to execute the BB start performance after executing the ending performance end performance.

(14) A bonus role whose winning probability varies according to a set value and a bonus role whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value may be configured to have a different bonus winning notification (first notification, second notification) when a bonus role is won during an ending performance. For example, a bonus winning notification may be made when a bonus role whose winning probability varies according to a set value is won during an ending performance, and a bonus winning notification may not be made when a bonus role whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value is won during an ending performance. When a bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) corresponding to the latter bonus role is reached, even if the game zone is the normal zone SC1, a transition to the favorable zone SC2 occurs. Therefore, by generating a bonus state corresponding to the bonus role after the ending performance ends and the favorable zone SC2 ends, it is possible to immediately return to the favorable zone SC2 even if the favorable zone SC2 is forcibly ended.

(15) The ending performance may be executed on the condition that the total number of game media awarded in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. This makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from being executed even if the player has not been awarded enough game media to be satisfied.

(16) When an ending performance is executed, a video performance is performed in increments of 5 games, and at the end, an ending screen may be displayed indicating the number of game media acquired in the current ART state ST9 and the number of games executed in the current ART state ST9.

(17) In a situation where an ending performance is being performed and the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 is 1490 or more, if a bonus role is won, a bonus winning notification (first notification, second notification) may not be made. In this case, by configuring the bonus internal state ST2 to have a higher probability of winning a replay than the normal game state ST1 and by configuring the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won to be notified, it is possible to make the player recognize that an ending performance is being performed in the ART state ST9 even in a situation where an ending performance is being performed in the bonus internal state ST2.

(18) The ending performance may be configured to play an end credits, and the playback speed may be changed to synchronize the end timing of the ending performance with the end timing of the end credits.

(19) If the ending performance is extended by entering a bonus state during the ending performance, an additional image such as a character introduction may be displayed in the extended game. Also, an image suggesting a set value may be displayed in the extended game. In this case, if a bonus role is won during the ending performance, it is expected that the player will not win the bonus, thereby extending the ending performance and displaying an image suggesting the set value. Therefore, if a bonus role is not won for, for example, five or more games after the bonus role is won, the image suggesting the set value may not be displayed even if the ending performance is extended.

(20) If the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state becomes equal to or greater than the number of games corresponding to the ending, the bonus presentation may be ended and the ending presentation may be started, or the ending presentation may be started after the bonus state ends, or the ending presentation may be started when a transition from the preparation state ST8 to the ART state ST9 occurs after the bonus state ends.

In a configuration in which the ending performance starts after the bonus state ends, the start of the ending performance will be delayed relative to the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2. In this case, while the ending performance basically involves video performance in increments of 5 games, it is possible to have the video performance be performed in increments of 3 games, so that all of the performance contents can be displayed before the ending performance ends. Also, if it is not possible to display all of the performance contents by the final game of the ending performance, it is possible to display all of the performance contents by utilizing the freeze period that occurs when the ending performance ends.

In addition, multiple types of ending effects may be prepared, such as effects for 30 games, 40 games, and 50 games, and an effect may be selected according to the start timing of the ending effect for the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2.

(21) The number of games played in the bonus state may be excluded from the measurement of the number of continuing games in the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to prevent the number of games played in the advantageous section SC2 during the bonus state from reaching the upper limit number of games, and also makes it possible to prevent the ending performance from starting during the bonus state.

(22) If a bonus role is won in a game other than the final game of the advantageous maintenance period, the type of bonus may be announced immediately regardless of the type of bonus role. This can increase the opportunities for a bonus win in a game prior to the final game in the advantageous maintenance period.

(23) Instead of a configuration in which a bonus win is achieved in the advantageous maintenance zone and a transition to the ART state ST9 is confirmed if the bonus state is in the advantageous zone SC2 in the starting game of the bonus state, a configuration in which a transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed and the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 is higher than in other cases may be used. Even in this case, it is possible to award a benefit for a bonus win in the advantageous maintenance zone.

(24) The number of continuing games in the advantageous maintenance zone is not limited to a fixed number, and may be determined by lottery. However, even if it is determined by lottery, the number of games selected must be within a range in which the number of games played in the advantageous zone SC2 does not exceed the upper limit number of games.

(25) Instead of a configuration in which the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed when the game is in the favorable zone SC2 in the start game of the bonus state, a configuration in which the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed when the game is in the favorable zone SC2 in the middle of the bonus state may be used, or a configuration in which the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed when the game is in the favorable zone SC2 in the final game of the bonus state may be used. In this case, if the bonus state is started in a situation in which the bonus state is in the favorable zone SC2, the end trigger of the favorable zone SC2 may be determined by lottery. For example, in a configuration in which the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 is executed when the final game of the bonus state is in the favorable zone SC2, the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 triggered by the bonus state will not be executed unless the content of the end of the final game of the bonus state is selected as the end trigger of the favorable zone SC2.

In addition, in the above configuration, the timing at which the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed may differ depending on the bonus role that triggered the occurrence of the bonus state. For example, if the bonus state corresponds to a specific bonus role, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed in the starting game, and if the bonus state corresponds to a specific bonus role, the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed in the final game, making it possible to vary the probability that the transition lottery process for the ART state ST9 is executed depending on the type of bonus role.

(26) When a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, is won in the advantageous zone SC2, a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 may be executed in the game in which the bonus role was won. In this case, by notifying the player that the bonus role is in the advantageous zone SC2, it is possible to increase the attention paid to winning the bonus role. In addition, when a bonus role, the winning probability of which varies according to a set value, is won in the advantageous zone SC2, a lottery process for transitioning to the ART state ST9 may be executed in the game in which the bonus role was won.

(27) The configuration of the offset table 111 for associating each index value IV of the lottery table for the normal mode, the lottery table for the first RT mode, and the lottery table for the second RT mode with the winning number is not limited to the configuration in the first embodiment. For example, instead of being set in the order of small role group → bonus role group → replay role group, it may be set in the order of bonus role group → replay role group → small role group.

(28) The offset table 111 may not be set in common to the normal mode lottery table, the first RT mode lottery table, and the second RT mode lottery table, but may be set individually to correspond to each lottery table. For example, in the normal mode lottery table, a group of roles whose winning probability varies according to a set value and a group of roles whose winning probability does not vary according to a set value are separated and aggregated, whereas an offset table may be provided to separate and aggregate a group of small roles, a group of bonus roles, and a group of replay roles. For the same purpose, an offset table may be provided for the first RT mode lottery table, and an offset table may be provided for the second RT mode lottery table. In this case, the winning numbers of each offset table may be set so as not to overlap between the offset tables. Even in this configuration, the index value IV can be set in each lottery table in a manner that makes it easy to design, and the winning numbers can be set in each offset table in a manner that makes it easy to handle the information on the winning roles in the subsequent processing.

(29) The configuration may be such that, if a winning combination that triggers the false premonition state ST5 is won during the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition state ST5 may be extended. Furthermore, if the false premonition state ST5 is extended, the advantageous section SC2 may also be extended by that amount. In this way, since the advantageous section SC2 is extended by extending the false premonition state ST5, it is advantageous for the player to have the false premonition state ST5 extended.

(30) Even if the player is in the middle of the false premonition state ST5, if a notification of the stopping sequence of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell to be won is executed, the advantageous section SC2 may end and transition to the normal section SC1 may occur. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the player is in the normal section SC1 even in the false premonition state ST5.

(31) If a predetermined combination is won during the false premonition state ST5, a lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9 is executed, whereas if a predetermined combination is won during the main premonition state ST6, a lottery process for adding the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 is executed. In this case, not only is it advantageous for the player to have a longer number of continued games in the false premonition state ST5, but it is also advantageous for the player to have a longer number of continued games in the main premonition state ST6. Therefore, if a transition to the main premonition state ST6 is won during the false premonition state ST5, the remaining number of continued games in the false premonition state ST5 at that time may be added to the number of continued games in the main premonition state ST6. This makes it possible to provide an opportunity to extend the number of continued games in the main premonition state ST6.

(32) The number of games in which the false premonition state ST5 continues is not limited to being determined by lottery, but may be fixed to a predetermined number of games (e.g., 10 games).

(33) If a bonus win occurs in the false premonition state ST5 and in the advantageous zone SC2, a transition to the ART state ST9 may be confirmed. In this case, the player will hope that a bonus win will occur in a situation where the false premonition effect is being executed.

(34) If the player transitions to the chance state ST7 midway through the false premonition state ST5, the false premonition effects may be continued while effects or notifications indicating that the player is in the chance state ST7 are executed. In this case, it is possible to make the player look forward to the chance state ST7 while enjoying the series of false premonition effects.

(35) If the false premonition state ST5 transitions to the chance state ST7, the false premonition effect may be ended at that point and the chance effect may be started.

(36) The probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 may be different between a transition to the chance state ST7 in a situation that is not the false premonition state ST5 and a transition to the chance state ST7 in the middle of the false premonition state ST5. For example, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 may be higher when the chance state ST7 is entered in a situation that is not the false premonition state ST5 than when the chance state ST7 is entered in the middle of the false premonition state ST5. Also, the probability of winning the transition to the ART state ST9 in the chance state ST7 may be higher when the chance state ST7 is entered in the middle of the false premonition state ST5 than when the chance state ST7 is entered in a situation that is not the false premonition state ST5.

(37) In a situation where the number of games set in the stock game counter 127 is not transferred to the display counter 126, a notification corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game counter 127 may be executed. For example, a display area in which a color corresponding to the number of games set in the stock game counter 127 is displayed may be set in the image display device 63, and the display area may be configured to display red if the value of the stock game counter 127 is 500 or more, green if it is less than 500 and 300 or more, yellow if it is less than 300 and 200 or more, blue if it is less than 200 and 100 or more, and white if it is less than 100. This allows the player to predict the number of games set in the stock game counter 127.

(38) Although multiple special add-on effects can be selected at one time, the number of special add-on effects selected at one time may be one. In this case, the frequency of execution of the process for selecting special add-on effects increases, but an area for storing the selected special add-on effects is not required.

(39) Although the special add-on effect is executed only when the A loop occurs, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the special add-on effect may be executed as a type of release effect when the value of the display counter 126 becomes "0" when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is 1 or more. In this case, the special add-on effect is executed when the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9 notified to the player becomes 0, which gives the player a sense of surprise.

(40) Although the expected performance is started when the A loop is set by the main MPU 72, the expected performance may not be executed. In this case, the special added performance corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may be executed when a predetermined number of games have elapsed since the A loop was set. This allows the special added performance to occur suddenly, providing a sense of surprise to the player.

(41) When the main MPU 72 sets the A loop, the special add-on effect corresponding to the value of the stock game number counter 127 may not be executed until the A loop ends. This makes it possible to execute the special add-on effect when the value of the stock game number counter 127 is large.

(42) The master MPU 72 executes a lottery process to determine whether or not to award an additional number of games, and if a lottery is won, a fixed number of games (e.g., 30 games) is always added to the remaining number of continued games in the ART state ST9, and the performance MPU 92 may determine the timing at which to announce that number of games. In this case, the master MPU 72 has only one processing pattern for the additional lottery process, which reduces the processing load on the master MPU 72.

(43) When the value of the display counter 126 becomes "0" while the value of the stock game number counter 127 is "0", the ART state ST9 may be ended when a lottery process for ending the ART state ST9 is executed in each game and an ending win is obtained. Alternatively, the ART state ST9 may be continued until a fall to the first RT mode occurs and the ART state ST9 ends when a fall to the first RT mode occurs, or the ART state ST9 may be continued until a fall to the normal mode occurs and the ART state ST9 ends when a fall to the normal mode occurs. In this case, the same effect as the first release effect may be executed, or an effect different from the first release effect may be executed.

(44) When the number of games played without the bonus state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) and the ART state ST9 occurring reaches the release game number, the ART state ST9 may be granted, or a pseudo bonus state as in the second embodiment above may be granted.

(45) In the bonus internal state ST2, the symbols corresponding to the bonus role may be prioritized over the symbols corresponding to the role that generates the award of gaming media during the stop control. In this case, when a winning number from "1" to "3" is set in the bonus internal state ST2, the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be achieved may be notified, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning bonus role may be notified. When this notification is executed, it is possible to achieve the first bell win instead of the bonus win by performing the stop operation in the stop order of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R that allows the first bell win to be achieved at a stop operation timing that does not allow the bonus win to be achieved.

(46) The game zone is not limited to a configuration in which a normal zone SC1 in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not notified and an advantageous zone SC2 in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified is set, and a configuration in which multiple zones in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified but the type of winning data for which the stopping order is notified is different may be set, or a configuration in which multiple zones in which the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be notified but the frequency with which the stopping order is notified is different may be set. Even in this case, by providing a difference in the degree of advantage for notifying the stopping order in multiple zones, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the transition of the game zone.

(47) The notification for allowing the player to recognize which game zone it is may be configured to be executed by something other than the advantageous zone display unit 67. For example, at least one of the upper lamp 61, the speaker 62, and the image display device 63 may be configured to execute a presentation that allows the player to recognize which game zone it is. In addition to or instead of these configurations, the information indicating which game zone it is may be externally output to the hall computer of the gaming hall.

(48) When calculating the ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 to the total number of games, the number of games played in the BB state ST3 or RB state ST4 may be configured not to be added to the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2.

(49) The ratio of the total number of games in the advantageous zone SC2 to the total number of games may be calculated for each set value. In this case, even if the set value is changed, the calculation must be continued without initializing the information on the ratio for each set value. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp the ratio for each set value.

(50) The total number of games played and the number of advantageous games, which is the total number of games played in the advantageous section SC2, are stored as history information, and the ratio of the number of advantageous games to the total number of games is calculated. However, this is not limited to this, and the number of wins of the predetermined role that is the subject of the lottery in the role lottery process and the total number of games may be stored as history information, and the winning probability of the predetermined role may be calculated. In this case, the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role are present as the target predetermined roles, and the number of wins for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each of the first predetermined role and the second predetermined role may be calculated. Also, the number of wins for each of all roles may be stored as history information individually, and the winning probability for each role may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the game hall of the winning probability of the role to be managed.

The total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may be calculated. This makes it possible to notify the manager of the gaming hall of the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games. The combination of the total number of gaming media awarded and the total number of games may also be stored as historical information separately for each gaming state and advantageous zone SC2, and the number of gaming media awarded per unit number of games may also be calculated separately for each gaming state and advantageous zone SC2.

In addition, the number of transitions to the bonus state and the total number of games played in a game state other than the bonus state may be stored as historical information, and the probability of transitioning to the bonus state may be calculated.

(51) In addition to or instead of a configuration in which the advantageous zone SC2 ends when the number of games executed in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 may occur when the result of the end lottery process executed in the advantageous zone SC2 is a final winning result. The trigger for executing this end lottery process is arbitrary, but for example, the end lottery process may be executed in each game, or the end lottery process may be executed when a predetermined lottery trigger role is won or a predetermined lottery trigger winning is established. Also, on the condition that the number of continued games in the advantageous zone SC2 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of games, the end lottery process may be executed each time a lottery trigger occurs, and the advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 if the result of the end lottery process is a final winning result.

In addition, instead of the above configuration, the advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 when either of the following conditions is met: when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the total number of gaming media granted while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing reaches the upper limit number of media. The advantageous zone SC2 may end and transition to the normal zone SC1 when either of the following conditions is met: when the number of games continuously executed in the advantageous zone SC2 reaches the upper limit number of games, or when the net increase in the number of gaming media while the advantageous zone SC2 is continuing reaches the upper limit number of media.

(52) In the advantageous section SC2, the stopping order of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is not limited to being notified so that the advantageous section SC2 is more advantageous than the normal section SC1. For example, the advantageous section SC2 may be configured so that a greater number of game media are awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, and the advantageous section SC2 may be configured so that a smaller number of game media are required to start one game, making the advantageous section SC2 more advantageous than the normal section SC1.

(53) Notification of the calculation result using the game history is not limited to the configuration in which it is performed by the combined display unit 66 and the advantageous zone display unit 67, and may be performed, for example, by using the credit display unit 65, or may be performed by using the credit display unit 65 and the combined display unit 66. Furthermore, when there are multiple types of calculation results to be notified, the events to be notified of each type may be displayed in a sequential switching manner. When the events to be notified are displayed in a sequential switching manner, for example, the type of event to be notified may be displayed in the credit display unit 65, and the calculation result for the event to be notified or information corresponding to the content of the calculation result may be displayed in the combined display unit 66. This makes it possible to notify of multiple types of events to be notified using a small number of display units, even when there are multiple types of events to be notified.

(54) The normal section SC1 may also be configured to have an upper limit on the number of continuing games. In this case, when the number of games played continuously in the normal section SC1 reaches the upper limit, it will be set to the advantageous section SC2. This makes it possible to compensate for the normal section SC1 continuing until it reaches the upper limit. In addition, by making the upper limit in the normal section SC1 the same for each of the setting values "Setting 1" to "Setting 6," it is possible to prevent any advantage or disadvantage arising from the setting value with respect to the upper limit.

(55) In the first embodiment, instead of the configuration in which the return address adjustment process (step S117) is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), the return address adjustment process (step S117) may not be executed. In this case, the reel control clear process (step S116) in the main process (FIG. 10) clears the constant speed flag 74c to "0", but does not clear the spinning flag 74d to "0". In addition, before the process of step S119 is executed in the main process (FIG. 10), it is determined whether the constant speed flag 74c is not set to "1" when the spinning flag 74d is set to "1", and if the constant speed flag 74c is set to "1" when the spinning flag 74d is set to "1", the reel control process (FIG. 27) is returned to its start address in step S119. Even with this configuration, if the supply of operating power is stopped while reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning, when the supply of operating power is resumed it is possible to start spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R while invalidating the operation of stop buttons 42-44.

(56) The number of games selected in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63) is not limited to a configuration in which the number of games is fixed to one type, and multiple types of game numbers may exist, and when a direct addition win is made in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63), one of the multiple types of game numbers may be selected as the number of additional games to be awarded. In this case, the multiple types of game numbers may all be less than the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17), or some of the multiple types of game numbers may be greater than the minimum number of games that can be selected in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17). However, even in the latter case, by configuring the expected value of the number of added games selected when a direct addition win occurs in the constant lottery process (Figure 63) to be lower than the expected value of the number of added games selected when a direct addition win occurs in the constant lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17), it is possible to increase the advantage of the constant lottery process (Figure 63) in the add-on lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17).

(57) The constant lottery process (FIG. 63) is not limited to a configuration in which it is executed before the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) is executed, and may be configured to be executed after the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) is executed. Even in this case, by making the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) execute regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17), it is possible to make the player expect that the additional number of games will be awarded even if the result of the lottery process for the winning combination (FIG. 17) is not the desired result.

(58) When an additional number of games is awarded as a result of a direct additional win in the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63), the additional number of games may be awarded to the player in a game subsequent to the game in which the continuous lottery process (FIG. 63) was executed. In this case, even if the result of the lottery process (FIG. 17) for a role in a specific game is not the desired result, the player can expect to be awarded the additional number of games in the subsequent game.

(59) The timing of the notification that the additional game number has been awarded may be different between the case where the additional game number is awarded as a result of a direct additional win in the regular lottery process (Figure 63) and the case where the additional game number is awarded as a result of a direct additional win in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the role lottery process (Figure 17). For example, when an additional game number is awarded in response to a direct additional win in the additional lottery process (steps S3102 to S3104) corresponding to the result of the lottery process for winning a winning combination (FIG. 17), a notification is made that the additional game number has been awarded before the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate or before all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating, such as when some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. When an additional game number is awarded in response to a direct additional win in the regular lottery process (FIG. 63), a notification is made that the additional game number has been awarded after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop rotating. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the additional game number will be awarded both during the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R and after all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped rotating.

(60) The constant lottery process (FIG. 63) may be configured to be executed in each game even in a game state other than the ART state ST9. For example, in the ART state ST9, the lottery process for determining whether or not to award an additional number of games may be executed in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) as in the first embodiment, and in a game state other than the ART state ST9, the mode lottery process for determining whether or not to transition the lottery mode to the ART state ST9 from a low probability mode to a high probability mode may be executed in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63).

(61) Instead of the configuration in which the lottery process for whether or not to grant an additional number of games is executed in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63), a mode lottery process for whether or not to shift the lottery mode for the transition lottery process to the ART state ST9 from a low probability mode to a high probability mode may be executed. In this case, the mode lottery process is executed in the constant lottery process (FIG. 63) and also in the lottery process corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17), so that the player will pay attention to the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) regarding the transition of the lottery mode, and it is possible to make the player expect a transition to the high probability mode even if the result of the lottery process for the role (FIG. 17) is not the desired result. In addition, instead of the above-mentioned mode lottery process, the above-mentioned configuration may be used as a fall lottery process for determining whether or not to cause a fall to the low probability mode in the high probability mode.

(62) The number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d is not limited to 7 bits, and may be any number of bits less than the number of bits of the acquired random number counter 74e. For example, if the acquired random number counter 74e is 1 byte as in the first embodiment above, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d may be 6 bits, 5 bits, or 4 bits or less. Also, if the acquired random number counter 74e is 2 bytes, the number of bits of the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d may be any number of bits less than 15 bits.

(63) The lottery process executed using the acquired random number counter 74e and the fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d, which has a number of bits less than the number of bits of the acquired random number counter 74e, is not limited to the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9. For example, it may be configured to be used in the promotion lottery process or fall lottery process of the lottery mode related to the lottery process for transition to the ART state ST9, or it may be configured to be used in the lottery process for granting the number of additional games in the ART state ST9.

(64) After the reel performance is executed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not limited to being rotated one by one in a predetermined order, and some of the three or more reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be rotated simultaneously. In addition, the order in which the rotation starts is not limited to being a fixed order, and may be changed according to a predetermined rule, or may be determined randomly by lottery.

(65) Although the configuration is such that the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started again after a reel performance is executed, the configuration may be such that the rotation of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started sequentially even if a reel performance is not executed.

(66) Although it is possible that no waiting period occurs between the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the start of the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R, the configuration is not limited to this, and it is also possible to configure so that a waiting period occurs without fail. In this case, the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery in the waiting period lottery process (steps S1204 to S1206).

(67) If a waiting period occurs between the completion of the acceleration period of one reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the start of the acceleration period of the next reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a fixed waiting period may always occur. In this case, in the waiting period lottery process (steps S1204 to S1206), whether or not to generate the fixed waiting period is determined by lottery.

(68) The number of active lines is not limited to the main line ML, and may be two, three, four or more active lines. In this case, the number of active lines may be increased as the number of gaming media bets increases, or the maximum number of active lines may be set regardless of the number of gaming media bets.

(69) The type of information transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92 is not limited to those in the above embodiments. For example, when a winning event corresponding to the award of game media is achieved, information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, the information on the number of game media awarded as a result of the winning event may be displayed on the image display device 63 or the like. In addition, when some of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped or have stopped spinning even when all of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are not stopped, corresponding information may be transmitted from the master MPU 72 to the presentation MPU 92. In this case, a presentation corresponding to the spinning status of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may be performed on the image display device 63 or the like.

(70) In each of the above embodiments, a bonus of paying out medals is awarded when a small winning combination is achieved, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration and may be configured in any way as long as the bonus is awarded to the player. For example, a prize other than medals may be awarded when a small winning combination is achieved. In addition, in a slot machine that does not have a function for inserting actual medals or paying out medals, and instead manages medals owned by the player by credit, an increase in the number of credited medals corresponds to the awarding of a bonus.

(71) The present invention may be applied to so-called B-type slot machines, and may also be applied to any type of slot machine, such as C-type, a combination of A-type and C-type, a combination of B-type and C-type, or a type equipped with an RT game, CT game, or AT game.

(72) The symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are not limited to pictures, numbers, letters, etc., but may also be geometric lines, figures, etc. In addition, symbols may be formed using light, color, etc., or using three-dimensional shapes, etc., or may be a combination of these. In other words, the symbols may function as identifiable information.

(73) In each of the above embodiments, a specific example of a slot machine 10 is shown, but the present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine in which games are played using game balls as a gaming medium, or to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes the features of the inventions extracted from the above-described embodiments, while indicating, as necessary, their effects, etc. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses.

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A setting means (a function for executing a winning probability setting process in the master MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A state transition means (a function of executing corresponding processing at the time of the end of the game in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state between a plurality of game states (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different advantageous degrees;
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1);
A second zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the master MPU 72) for setting the gaming zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2);
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or the second section is configured such that a specific benefit is more likely to be given to the player than the first section;
The first section and the second section are both configured to be stayed in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also configured to be stayed in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states,
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a specific awarding means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main MPU 72) that awards the specific benefit to the player based on the occurrence in the second section of a predetermined event (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) whose occurrence probability can vary depending on the set value, or a predetermined corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the predetermined event (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of first BB winning or second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of second RB winning).

According to feature A1, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the one to be used. Furthermore, since there are multiple types of game states and multiple types of game zones in addition to these, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. Furthermore, since the second zone is configured to be more likely to grant a specific benefit than the first zone, and both the first zone and the second zone are configured to allow the player to remain in a specified game state and other game states, the player will play while hoping that the advantageous game state will lead to the second zone.

In this case, a special bonus is awarded to the player based on the occurrence in the second section of a specified event whose occurrence probability can vary according to the set value, or a specified corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specified event. This leads the player to expect the specified event or the specified corresponding situation to occur in the second section. Furthermore, with this configuration, the probability of awarding the special bonus is affected by the probability of the specified event occurring, so it is possible to indirectly change the probability of awarding the special bonus according to the set value, even if the probability of awarding the special bonus is not changed directly according to the set value.

Feature A2. Equipped with a lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a role in the main MPU 72),
The gaming machine described in feature A1, characterized in that the specified event is a specified lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process.

According to feature A2, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit in the second section will expect a predetermined result in the lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result in the lottery process. In addition, by varying the probability of achieving a predetermined result in the lottery process according to a set value, it becomes possible to indirectly vary the probability of awarding a specific benefit in the second section according to the set value.

Feature A3: A game execution means (a function for executing a reel control process in the master MPU 72) for executing one game in response to the execution of the lottery process;
A means for making the predetermined corresponding situation occur in a game subsequent to the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result based on the result of the lottery process becoming the predetermined lottery result (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the specific awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player based on the predetermined corresponding situation in the second section.

According to feature A3, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section becomes a predetermined lottery result, the specific benefit is not awarded, but is awarded based on the occurrence in the second section of a predetermined corresponding situation that occurs in a game after the game that produced the predetermined lottery result, triggered by the predetermined lottery result. As a result, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit will not only focus on the predetermined lottery result, but will also focus on whether or not the second section occurs when a predetermined corresponding situation occurs in a game after the game that produced the predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A4. The gaming machine described in Feature A3, wherein the second interval setting means does not set the second interval even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs as a result of the predetermined lottery result being achieved in the first interval.

According to feature A4, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is awarded based on a predetermined corresponding situation in the second section, in order for the predetermined corresponding situation to be achieved in the second section, the second section must be maintained even if a predetermined lottery result is achieved in the second section and the predetermined corresponding situation is achieved in a subsequent game. This makes the player pay attention to the continuation status of the second section as well, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A4, characterized in that the specific awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player based on the occurrence of a specific event (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the set value, or a specific corresponding situation (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of 3rd BB winning or 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of 1st RB winning) that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event in the second section.

According to feature A5, a special bonus can be awarded to a player even if a special event, the occurrence probability of which does not vary according to a set value, or a special corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the special event, occurs in the second section. This makes it possible to prevent the effect of the set value on the probability of awarding a special bonus in the second section from being too significant.

Feature A6. Equipped with a lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a role in the main MPU 72),
The predetermined event is a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process,
The gaming machine described in feature A5, wherein the specific event is a specific lottery result (setting of 3rd BB winning data, setting of 4th BB winning data, setting of 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process.

According to feature A6, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit in the second section will expect a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result in the lottery process. This makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the lottery result of the lottery process. In addition, by varying the probability of a predetermined lottery result in the lottery process according to a set value, it becomes possible to indirectly vary the probability of a specific benefit being awarded in the second section according to the set value, whereas by not varying the probability of a specific lottery result in the lottery process according to a set value, it becomes possible to prevent the influence of the set value on the probability of a specific benefit being awarded in the second section from becoming too significant.

Feature A7: A game execution means (a function for executing a reel control process in the master MPU 72) for executing one game in response to the execution of the lottery process;
A means for making the predetermined corresponding situation occur in a game subsequent to the game resulting in the predetermined lottery result based on the result of the lottery process becoming the predetermined lottery result (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72);
A means for making the specific corresponding situation occur in a game subsequent to the game resulting in the specific lottery result based on the result of the lottery process being the specific lottery result (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature A6, wherein the specific awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player based on the specific corresponding situation being triggered by the specific lottery result being achieved in the second section, and awards the specific benefit to the player based on the specific corresponding situation being triggered by the specific lottery result being achieved in the second section.

According to feature A7, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section is a predetermined lottery result or a specific lottery result, the specific benefit is not awarded, but the specific benefit is awarded based on the occurrence in the second section of a predetermined corresponding situation that occurs as a result of the predetermined lottery result or a specific corresponding situation that occurs as a result of the specific lottery result in a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result. As a result, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit will not only pay attention to the predetermined lottery result or the specific lottery result, but will also pay attention to whether or not the second section occurs when a predetermined corresponding situation or a specific corresponding situation occurs in a game after the game that resulted in the predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature A8. The gaming machine described in Feature A7, characterized in that the second interval setting means does not set the first interval to the second interval even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs in the first interval, but sets the first interval to the second interval if the specific corresponding situation occurs in the first interval.

According to feature A8, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is awarded based on a predetermined corresponding situation in the second section, in order for the predetermined corresponding situation to be achieved in the second section, the second section must be maintained even if a predetermined lottery result is achieved in the second section and the predetermined corresponding situation is achieved in a subsequent game. This causes the player to pay attention to the continuation status of the second section as well, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

On the other hand, even if a specific lottery result is obtained in the first section, this triggers the setting of the second section. Therefore, whether the play section is the first section or the second section, if a specific lottery result is obtained, the second section will be in a specific corresponding situation, and a specific benefit will be granted to the player based on this situation. Therefore, the player will be hoping for a specific lottery result.

Feature A9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, characterized in that the second interval setting means sets the gaming interval to the second interval based on the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger whose occurrence probability does not change according to the set value.

According to feature A9, the transition probability of the second section does not change according to the set value. This makes it possible to prevent the effect of the set value on the probability of receiving a specific benefit from becoming too significant.

Feature A10. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A9, characterized in that the predetermined response situation is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to feature A10, the probability of transitioning to a special game state varies according to a set value, and the probability of granting a specific benefit also varies according to a set value in relation to the variation of the transition probability according to the set value. As a result, when the set value is high for the probability of transitioning to a special game state that is advantageous to the player, the probability of granting a specific benefit is also high, making it possible to increase the player's expectations that a high set value will be selected.

Feature A11. A setting means (a function for executing a winning probability setting process in the master MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
A state transition means (a function of executing corresponding processing at the time of the end of the game in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state between a plurality of game states (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) having different advantageous degrees;
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1);
A second zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the master MPU 72) for setting the gaming zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2);
Equipped with
In the second section, a specific benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or the second section is configured such that a specific benefit is more likely to be given to the player than the first section;
The first section and the second section are both configured to be stayed in a predetermined gaming state among the plurality of types of gaming states, and are also configured to be stayed in other gaming states among the plurality of types of gaming states,
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a specific awarding means (a function of executing the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in the main MPU 72) that awards the specific benefit to the player based on the occurrence in the second section of a specific event (setting of the 3rd BB winning data, setting of the 4th BB winning data, setting of the 1st RB winning data) whose occurrence probability does not vary depending on the set value, or a specific corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the specific event (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB winning).

According to feature A11, the setting value to be used is set from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's degree of advantage, so the player will hope that the more advantageous setting value will be the one to be used. Furthermore, since there are multiple types of game states and multiple types of game zones in addition to these, it is possible to diversify the progress of the game. Furthermore, since the second zone is more likely to be awarded a specific benefit than the first zone, and both the first zone and the second zone can be stayed in a specified game state and other game states, the player will play while hoping that the advantageous game state will lead to the second zone.

In this case, a special bonus is awarded to the player based on the occurrence in the second section of a special event whose occurrence probability does not vary according to the set value, or a special corresponding situation that occurs based on the occurrence of the special event. This leads the player to expect the special event or special corresponding situation to occur in the second section. Furthermore, this configuration makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing the effect of the set value on the probability of awarding the special bonus.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features A1 to A11. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the master MPU 72) for setting the game zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first zone (normal zone SC1);
A section terminating means (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the second section based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games;
A pre-end effect execution means (a function for executing the process of step S4205 in the main MPU 72, and a function for executing the process of step S4303 in the effect-side MPU 92) for executing a pre-end effect (ending effect) based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the pre-end game number set as a number of games less than the upper limit game number;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature B1, the second section is ended when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, thereby making it possible to prevent the second section, which is advantageous to the player, from continuing excessively. In this case, the pre-end performance is executed when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the pre-end number of games, which is set as a number of games less than the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the second section is approaching the end. In addition, by making the player want to check the pre-end performance, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to continue the second section, and furthermore, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction when the pre-end performance is actually executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine described in Feature B1 is configured such that the number of games played in the second section can reach the upper limit number of games when an increase trigger occurs and the number of continued games in the second section is increased.

According to feature B2, a pre-end effect is executed as a bonus for the fact that the number of games executed in the second section is in a situation where the upper limit number of games can be reached. This makes it possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player when the pre-end effect is executed.

Feature B3. The gaming machine described in Feature B2, characterized in that the pre-end performance execution means executes the pre-end performance when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the pre-end number of games in a situation where the remaining number of continued games in the second section is the number of games that allows the number of games executed in the second section to reach the upper limit number of games.

According to feature B3, the pre-end effect is executed when it is confirmed that the number of games executed in the second section will reach the upper limit number of games, so it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the number of games executed in the second section does not reach the upper limit number of games even though the pre-end effect has been executed.

Feature B4: There are a plurality of types of game states that can be stayed in the second section,
The gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B3, characterized in that the pre-end performance execution means executes the pre-end performance based on the number of games executed in the second section reaching the pre-end game number when the game is in a predetermined gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4, preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player.

According to feature B4, the pre-end performance is executed in the second section when the player is in a predetermined game state that is advantageous to the player, so that the player can be given a sense of satisfaction when the pre-end performance is executed.

Feature B5. A state generating means (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72) for generating a special game state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) advantageous to the player;
A special effect execution means (a function for executing the processes of step S3520 and step S4405 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing a special effect (BB effect) in the special game state;
When the special game state occurs while the pre-end performance is being performed, a performance continuation means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4409 and S4413 in the performance side MPU 92) for continuing the pre-end performance without starting the special performance;
A gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature B5, if a special game state occurs while a pre-end performance is being executed, the continuation of the pre-end performance is prioritized over the start of the special performance, thereby making it possible to guarantee the execution of the pre-end performance.

Feature B6. The gaming machine described in Feature B5, characterized in that the presentation continuation means includes a means for starting the special presentation when the pre-end presentation ends while the special game state has not ended (a function for making a positive determination in step S4404 in the presentation side MPU 92).

Feature B6 makes it possible to guarantee an opportunity for a special performance to be executed even in a configuration in which the continuation of the pre-end performance is prioritized.

Feature B7. The gaming machine described in Feature B5 or B6, characterized in that the presentation continuation means includes a means for continuing the pre-end presentation (a function for executing the process of step S4409 in the presentation side MPU 92) when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games while the special game state has not ended.

According to feature B7, even if the second section advantageous to the player ends, if the special game state advantageous to the player continues, the pre-end performance continues, making it possible to extend the pre-end performance by utilizing the period during which the advantageous situation for the player continues. In addition, it becomes possible to make the player recognize that the situation in which the special game state continues after the second section ends as the situation in which the second section continues.

Feature B8: A progress stop means (a function for executing the processes of steps S4506 and S4509 in the master MPU 72) is provided for setting a progress stop state in which the progress of normal game based on the player's operation is stopped when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit game number;
The gaming machine described in feature B7 is characterized in that the progress stop means does not set the progress stop state when the special game state has not ended and the number of games played in the second section has reached the maximum number of games, causing the pre-end presentation to continue.

According to feature B8, when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, a progress halt state occurs, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the second section is ending. In this case, if the pre-end performance continues as the special game state continues after the end of the second section, the progress halt state does not occur at the end of the second section. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the pre-end performance from being interrupted by the progress halt state when the pre-end performance continues. It also makes it easier for the player to recognize that a situation in which the special game state continues after the end of the second section is a situation in which the second section is continuing.

Feature B9. The performance continuation means is
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be required until the special game state ends is a relatively long number of games, a means for starting the special effect after the end of the pre-end effect (a function for making an affirmative determination in step S4404 in the effect side MPU 92);
When the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games in a situation where the number of games expected to be required until the special game state ends is a relatively short number of games, a means for continuing the pre-end presentation (a function for executing the process of step S4409 in the presentation side MPU 92);
A gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B8, comprising:

Feature B9 makes it possible to create a situation in which a special effect starts after the pre-end effect ends and a situation in which the pre-end effect continues, depending on the number of games expected to be played until the special game state ends.

Feature B10: When the special game state is started or ended, a progress stop means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2414 and S2709 in the main MPU 72) is provided for setting a progress stop state in which the progress of the normal game based on the player's operation is stopped;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B9, wherein the progress stop means does not set the progress stop state when the special game state is started or ended while the pre-end performance is being executed.

According to feature B10, when the special game state is started or ended, a progress stop state is set, which allows the player to clearly recognize that the special game state is starting or ending. In this case, when the special game state is started or ended while the pre-end performance is being executed, the progress stop state is not set, which makes it possible to prevent the flow of the pre-end performance from being interrupted by the progress stop state caused by the special game state.

Feature B11. Equipped with a state transition means (a function for executing corresponding processing at the time of game end in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state between a plurality of game states (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) with different advantageous degrees,
In the second section, a specific benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or the second section is configured such that a specific benefit is more likely to be given to the player than the first section;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B10, characterized in that the first section and the second section are both configured to allow the player to remain in a specified gaming state among the multiple types of gaming states, and are also configured to allow the player to remain in other gaming states among the multiple types of gaming states.

According to feature B11, the existence of multiple types of game states and multiple types of game zones in addition to those makes it possible to diversify the game progress. In addition, the second zone is configured to be more likely to award a specific benefit than the first zone, and both the first zone and the second zone are configured to allow the player to remain in a specified game state and other game states, so the player plays the game in the hope of entering an advantageous game state and entering the second zone.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features B1 to B11. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group A and feature group B can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. An acquisition means for acquiring lottery information when an acquisition opportunity occurs (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the master MPU 72);
A winning determination means (a function for executing the processes of steps S503 to S513 in the master MPU 72) for performing a winning determination using a lottery information group (a lottery table for normal mode, a lottery table for first RT mode, and a lottery table for second RT mode) corresponding to a game status and the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means;
A winning control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S410 and S411 in the main MPU 72) for executing winning control when a winning corresponding to the result of the winning determination is established;
Equipped with
The lottery information group corresponding to one game status is
A plurality of identification information (index values IV);
lottery corresponding information (point value PV) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and enables the winning determination means to determine whether the lottery information acquired by the acquisition means corresponds to the corresponding identification information;
It has
The winning determination means is
A first grasping means (a function of executing the processes of steps S604, S607, S612, and S702 in the main MPU 72) for grasping the identification information corresponding to the lottery information in a predetermined lottery information group by utilizing the lottery corresponding information;
A second grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S704 in the main MPU 72) for grasping winning information (winning number) which is information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means and is information to be referred to in subsequent control;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature C1, by using the lottery information group, the identification information corresponding to the lottery information is ascertained, and then the winning information corresponding to the identification information is ascertained, and the ascertained winning information is used to execute control after the winning determination. This makes it possible to arrange the identification information in an appropriate manner when ascertaining the identification information in the lottery information group, and to use winning information that is easy to use in the control after the winning determination. This makes it possible to perform the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the winning information is set as consecutive number information.

According to feature C2, the winning information is set as consecutive number information, so that it is possible to appropriately carry out processing to grasp the results of the winning determination in the control after the winning determination.

Feature C3. The predetermined winning information among the winning information corresponds to a plurality of winning target information (winning data);
A gaming machine described in feature C1 or C2, characterized in that in a situation in which the specified winning information is grasped by the second grasping means, any one of the winnings corresponding to each of the multiple winning target information may be achieved.

According to feature C3, winning information that is different from the winning target information itself is used in the control after the winning determination, so it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for performing that control.

Feature C4. Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing a winning probability setting process in the master MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among multiple setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
The gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C3, characterized in that the predetermined group of lottery information is set to a first aggregation range (index value IV = 17 to 22 for the lottery table for the normal mode, index value IV = 23 to 28 for the lottery table for the first RT mode, and index value IV = 18 to 23 for the lottery table for the second RT mode) in which the identification information whose winning probability varies depending on the setting value is aggregated, and a second aggregation range (index value IV = 1 to 16 for the lottery table for the normal mode, index value IV = 1 to 22 for the lottery table for the first RT mode, and index value IV = 1 to 17 for the lottery table for the second RT mode) in which the identification information whose winning probability does not vary depending on the setting value is aggregated.

According to feature C4, the identification information of the predetermined lottery information group is differentiated into a first aggregation range and a second aggregation range depending on whether the winning probability varies according to the set value, which makes it easier to check the predetermined lottery information group at the design stage of the gaming machine or the use stage of the gaming machine. Furthermore, even if the identification information is differentiated between the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range in this way, the winning information corresponding to the identification information is grasped at the time of winning determination, so that in the control after the winning determination, the winning information that is in a preferred mode in the control can be used.

Feature C5. The type of the winning is at least one type in which the winning control is to award a game medium and another type in which the winning control is to allow a game to be replayed;
A gaming machine according to feature C4, characterized in that the identification information enabling a predetermined type of winning exists in both the first aggregation range and the second aggregation range.

According to feature C5, even if the identification information that enables a predetermined type of winning is set in a dispersed manner between a first aggregation range and a second aggregation range in a predetermined lottery information group, it is possible to aggregate the information that enables a predetermined type of winning in the winning information.

Feature C6. The information storage means (main ROM 73) stores in advance a correspondence relationship information group (offset table 111) that defines the correspondence relationship between the identification information and the winning information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C5, characterized in that the second grasping means grasps the winning information corresponding to the identification information grasped by the first grasping means by utilizing the correspondence information group.

According to feature C6, the correspondence between the identification information and the winning information is preset in the correspondence information group, which makes it possible to reduce the processing load for determining the winning information from the identification information.

Feature C7: The first identification information (e.g., index value IV=17 of the lottery table for the normal mode) set in the lottery information group (lottery table for the normal mode) to be used in the first game situation and the second identification information (e.g., index value IV=23 of the lottery table for the first RT mode) set in the lottery information group to be used in the second game situation (lottery table for the first RT mode) are identification information that have different contents but can be achieved with the same winning combination,
A gaming machine described in any one of features C1 to C6, characterized in that the second grasping means grasps the same winning information (for example, the winning number "5") regardless of whether the first identification information is grasped by the first grasping means or the second identification information is grasped by the first grasping means.

According to feature C7, it is possible to set the identification information in a preferred manner for each of the lottery information groups corresponding to the first game situation and the lottery information groups corresponding to the second game situation. Even if the identification information is set in a preferred manner in each lottery information group in this way, different identification information for which the same winning can be achieved in those lottery information groups is recognized as the same winning information, so that in the control after the winning determination, it is possible to use the winning information that is in a preferred manner in that control.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features C1 to C7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in Group C above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

In gaming machines such as those exemplified above, the lottery needs to be conducted efficiently, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a role in the main MPU 72);
A game execution means (a function of executing a reel control process in the master MPU 72) for executing one game in response to the execution of the lottery process;
A first section setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1807, S1814, and S1821 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game section to the first section (normal section SC1);
A second zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the master MPU 72) for setting the gaming zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2);
A predetermined response means (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72) for making a predetermined response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of a first BB winning or a second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of a second RB winning) in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result is achieved based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery result (setting of first BB winning data, setting of second BB winning data, setting of second RB winning data) in the lottery process;
A specific awarding means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2516 to S2520 in the master MPU 72) that awards a specific benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) to a player based on the fact that the specific corresponding situation is triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature D1, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second section becomes a predetermined lottery result, the specific benefit is not awarded, but is awarded based on the occurrence in the second section of a predetermined corresponding situation that occurs in a game after the game that produced the predetermined lottery result, triggered by the predetermined lottery result. As a result, a player who expects to be awarded a specific benefit will not only pay attention to the predetermined lottery result, but will also pay attention to whether or not the second section occurs when a predetermined corresponding situation occurs in a game after the game that produced the predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that the second interval setting means does not set the second interval even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs as a result of the predetermined lottery result being achieved in the first interval.

According to feature D2, in a configuration in which a specific benefit is awarded based on a predetermined corresponding situation in the second section, in order for the predetermined corresponding situation to be achieved in the second section, the second section must be maintained even if a predetermined lottery result is achieved in the second section and the predetermined corresponding situation is achieved in a subsequent game. This makes the player pay attention to the continuation status of the second section as well, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature D3. Based on the specific lottery result (setting of the 3rd BB winning data, setting of the 4th BB winning data, setting of the 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, a specific response means (function to execute a bonus process in the master MPU 72) is provided to make a specific response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB winning) in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery result was obtained;
The specific awarding means awards the specific benefit based on the specific corresponding situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
The gaming machine described in feature D2, wherein the second interval setting means sets the second interval in the specific response situation triggered by the specific lottery result.

According to feature D3, when a specific corresponding situation occurs based on a specific lottery result, the specific corresponding situation is in the second section, and a specific benefit is given to the player based on the specific corresponding situation in the second section. This allows the player to not only hope for a predetermined lottery result, but also to hope for a specific lottery result rather than a predetermined lottery result. This makes it possible to have a gradual expectation, which can increase the interest of the game.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the specific awarding means awards the specific benefit to the player based on the fact that the first game in the specific corresponding situation triggered by the specific lottery result is started in the second section.

According to feature D4, a specific benefit is given to a player on the basis that the first game in a specific corresponding situation starts in the second section, so that if a specific lottery result occurs in a situation in the second section, the player will expect that the specific corresponding situation will occur early.

Feature D5. A symbol display means (reel unit 31) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
Equipped with
the game execution means controls the picture display means so that, when the start operation means is operated to establish a predetermined start condition, the display of the varying pictures is started as the start of one game, and when the stop operation means is operated, the display of the varying pictures is stopped,
The predetermined response means, when a predetermined stop result corresponding to the predetermined lottery result is displayed after the variation display of the picture in the case where the predetermined lottery result is achieved in the lottery process, starts the predetermined response situation from a game next to the game in which the predetermined stop result is displayed;
the predetermined stop result is a stop result that is not displayed depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that if the specified lottery result is achieved in the lottery process but the specified stop result is not displayed, the fact that the specified lottery result has been achieved is carried over to the next game of the game.

According to feature D5, even if the predetermined lottery result is reached, the predetermined response situation will not start unless the stop operation is performed in an operation mode that allows the display of the predetermined stop result. In this case, even if the predetermined lottery result is reached in the second section, the specific benefit will not be awarded, and the specific benefit will be awarded based on the fact that the second section is in the predetermined response situation that starts in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result was reached. Therefore, a player who can display the predetermined stop result early when the predetermined lottery result is reached is more likely to experience an event that is a predetermined response situation in the second section, and therefore more likely to be awarded the specific benefit. On the other hand, if the predetermined lottery result is reached but the predetermined stop result is not displayed, the fact that the predetermined lottery result has been reached is carried over to the game following the game, so that it is possible to prevent a player who cannot display the predetermined stop result early when the predetermined lottery result is reached from suffering excessive disadvantages.

Feature D6. A second section performance control means (a function for executing a performance control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a second section corresponding performance (advantage maintenance performance) in the second section is provided;
The gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D5, characterized in that the second section presentation control means prevents the second section corresponding presentation from being executed in the final game of the second section if the specified lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section.

According to feature D6, even if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section, triggering a predetermined corresponding situation, the second section will end in the predetermined corresponding situation, and so a specific bonus will not be awarded. In contrast, if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section, the second section corresponding performance will not be executed in that final game. This makes it less likely that the player will get the impression that a specific bonus was not awarded, even though a predetermined lottery result occurred and triggering a predetermined corresponding situation occurred in a situation where the second section corresponding performance corresponding to the second section is being executed.

Feature D7: Based on the specific lottery result (setting of the 3rd BB winning data, setting of the 4th BB winning data, setting of the 1st RB winning data) in the lottery process, a specific response means (function to execute a bonus process in the master MPU 72) is provided to make a specific response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of the 3rd BB winning or the 4th BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of the 1st RB winning) in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific lottery result was obtained;
The specific awarding means awards the specific benefit based on the specific corresponding situation triggered by the specific lottery result in the second section,
the second interval setting means is configured not to set the second interval even if the predetermined corresponding situation occurs as a result of the predetermined lottery result being achieved in the first interval, and is configured to set the second interval in the specific corresponding situation as a result of the specific lottery result being achieved,
The gaming machine described in feature D6 is characterized in that the second section presentation control means executes the second section corresponding presentation in the final game of the second section even if the specific lottery result is obtained in the lottery process in the final game of the second section.

According to feature D7, when a specific corresponding situation occurs based on a specific lottery result, the specific corresponding situation is the second section, and a specific benefit is given to the player based on the specific corresponding situation in the second section. This allows the player to not only hope for a specific lottery result, but also to hope for a specific lottery result rather than a specific lottery result. Therefore, the expectations become gradual, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In this case, even if a specific lottery result occurs in the final game of the second section, the second section compatible performance is executed in that final game. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for a specific corresponding situation to occur when the second section compatible performance is being executed, and to grant a specific benefit, and to increase the player's attention to the second section compatible performance.

Feature D8. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D7, characterized in that the predetermined response situation is a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to feature D8, a special benefit is awarded based on the special gaming state being in the second section, and if a special gaming state advantageous to the player occurs, a further special benefit can be awarded. This makes it possible to increase the player's anticipation of being in a special gaming state in the second section.

Feature D9. Equipped with a state transition means (a function for executing corresponding processing at the end of a game in the main MPU 72) for transitioning a game state between a plurality of game states (normal game state ST1, bonus internal state ST2, BB state ST3, RB state ST4) with different advantageous degrees,
In the second section, a specific benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) that does not occur in the first section may be given to the player, or the second section is configured such that a specific benefit is more likely to be given to the player than the first section;
A gaming machine described in any one of features D1 to D8, characterized in that the first section and the second section are both configured to allow the player to remain in a specified gaming state among the multiple types of gaming states, and are also configured to allow the player to remain in other gaming states among the multiple types of gaming states.

According to feature D9, there are multiple types of game states and multiple types of game zones, which makes it possible to diversify the game progress. In addition, the second zone is configured to be more likely to award a specific benefit than the first zone, and both the first zone and the second zone can be stayed in a specified game state and other game states, so the player plays the game in the hope of entering an advantageous game state and entering the second zone.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features D1 to D9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the master MPU 72) for setting the game zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first zone (normal zone SC1);
A first state setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2014 in the master MPU 72) for setting the first expected state (the present premonition state ST6) to a first expected state (the present premonition state ST6) in which the state continues over a plurality of games and a special benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9) is awarded after the end of the state;
A second state setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2024 in the master MPU 72) for setting the second expected state (false premonition state ST5) in which the bonus is not awarded after the completion of a plurality of games;
An expectation effect control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2204, S2205, S2210, and S2223 in the effect side MPU 92) for performing an expectation effect that allows a player to expect that the special benefit will be awarded in each game in the first expectation state and the second expectation state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the interval setting means is equipped with a means for setting the second interval in the second expected state (a function for executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature E1, the second section is more advantageous than the first section, so the player will play while hoping that the play section will become the second section. Also, by entering the first expected state or the second expected state, an expectation effect is executed that allows the player to expect the award of a bonus in each game, and the player who has confirmed the expectation effect will expect the award of a bonus, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, by the existence of not only the first expected state in which a bonus is awarded after the end of the game but also the second expected state in which no bonus is awarded after the end of the game, the expectation effect is executed across multiple games even in situations in which no bonus is actually awarded, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In this case, in the second expectation state, the play interval is set to the second interval. As a result, even in the second expectation state in which no bonus is awarded upon completion, the play interval becomes the second interval, which is more advantageous to the player than the first interval. Therefore, even in the second expectation state in which no bonus is awarded upon completion, it is possible to make the play interval substantially advantageous to the player, and it is possible to increase the player's attention not only to the first expectation state but also to the second expectation state.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the section setting means includes a means for making the second section occur in the first expected state (a function for executing the processing of steps S1302 and S1307 in the main MPU 72).

According to feature E2, the second section is set regardless of whether the player is in the first expected state or the second expected state, so that if a situation arises in which the expected performance is performed over multiple games, the second section will be more advantageous than the first section. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that a situation will arise in which the expected performance is performed over multiple games.

Feature E3: The first state setting means includes a first starting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2014, S2016, and S2017 in the master MPU 72) for starting the first expected state based on the occurrence of a first predetermined opportunity in a game state other than the first expected state;
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or E2, wherein the first starting means starts the first expected state based on the occurrence of the first specified trigger in the second expected state.

According to feature E3, the first expectation state is initiated based on the occurrence of the first predetermined trigger in the second expectation state, so the player will expect the first predetermined trigger to occur in the second expectation state. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in playing in the second expectation state.

Feature E4. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1309 to S1319 in the main MPU 72) for granting the player the benefit or another benefit based on the occurrence of an advantage-granting opportunity in the second section, and for not granting the benefit even if the advantage-granting opportunity occurs in the first section.

According to feature E4, a bonus or another bonus is awarded to the player based on the occurrence of an advantage-granting opportunity in the second section, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the second section. In this case, since the configuration of feature E1 is provided and the second section is set in the second expectation state, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second expectation state and make the player look forward to the occurrence of an advantage-granting opportunity in the second expectation state.

Feature E5. An advantageous transition means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2001 to S2022 in the main MPU 72) for transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state (preparation state ST8, ART state ST9) in which the second section is maintained and advantageous to the player based on the occurrence of an advantageous granting opportunity in the second section;
A section end means (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the master MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that the interval ending means ends the second interval when a transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second expectation state and the sum of the number of games played in the second expectation state and the number of games played in the advantageous gaming state becomes the maximum number of games.

According to feature E5, the second section is ended when the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, making it possible to prevent the advantageous second section from continuing excessively. In this case, if a transition to the advantageous play state occurs in the second expectation state, the second section is ended when the sum of the number of games played in the second expectation state and the number of games played in the advantageous play state reaches the upper limit number of games. This makes it possible to obtain the benefits of the second section in the second expectation state, while creating the disadvantage of the continuation of the second expectation state in terms of the upper limit number of games in the second section.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1812 to S1815 in the main MPU 72) for ending the second section when the advantageous event occurs a predetermined number of times before the second expected state ends, and continuing the second section even if the second expected state ends until the advantageous event occurs the predetermined number of times.

According to feature E6, if an advantageous event has occurred a predetermined number of times before the end of the second expected state, the second section ends when the second expected state ends, whereas if the advantageous event has not occurred a predetermined number of times even after the second expected state ends, the second section continues. This ensures that an advantageous event will occur a predetermined number of times when the second section is reached, making it possible to ensure the advantageous degree of the second section and diversifying the end timing of the second section relative to the end timing of the second expected state depending on the occurrence mode of the advantageous event.

Feature E7: A symbol display means (reel unit 31) that variably displays symbols;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the picture on the picture display means;
A lottery means for executing a lottery process based on the operation of the start operation means (a function for executing the processes of steps S501 to S508 in the master MPU 72);
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the picture in the picture display means;
A pattern display control means (a function for executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the pattern display means so that the display of the patterns is started based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition by operating the start operation means, and the display of the patterns is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
A response execution means (a function for executing the process of step S410 in the master MPU 72) for executing control corresponding to the winning result when a stop result corresponding to the winning result in the lottery process is displayed after the variation display of the image;
Equipped with
The corresponding execution means, when a winning result (winning number = 1 to 3) is obtained in the lottery process and a winning stop result corresponding to the winning result is displayed after the changing display of the picture, grants a predetermined number of game media to the player as a winning of the winning corresponding to the award;
The grant-compatible stop result is a result that is displayed when the stop operation means is operated in a grant-compatible mode in the case where the grant-compatible win result is obtained in the lottery process,
This gaming machine is a gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E6, characterized in that it is equipped with a means for notifying the award corresponding mode (a function for executing notification control processing in the main side MPU 72, and a function for executing notification processing in the presentation side MPU 92) when the award winning result is obtained in the lottery processing in the second section.

According to feature E7, in the second section, when a winning result is achieved, the corresponding award mode is notified, and gaming media corresponding to the achievement of the corresponding award winning is awarded. This makes it possible to make the second section an advantageous section.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features E1 to E7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A zone setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1307 and S2504 in the main MPU 72) for setting the game zone to a second zone (advantageous zone SC2) that is more advantageous to the player than the first zone (normal zone SC1);
An advantage setting means (a function for executing the processing of steps S2008, S2021, and S2808 in the master MPU 72) for making the player stay in an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) advantageous to the player in the second section;
A section end means (a function for executing the process of step S1807 in the master MPU 72) for ending the second section based on the fact that the number of games executed in the second section has reached the upper limit number of games;
Equipped with
The advantageous setting means terminates the advantageous game state when the second period ends based on the number of games executed in the second period reaching the upper limit number of games,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the interval setting means is equipped with an interval continuation means (a function of executing the processing of step S3408 in the main MPU 72) that sets the second interval to continue in a second interval continuation status (advantageous maintenance interval) based on the advantageous game state ending before the number of games played in the second interval reaches the maximum number of games.

According to feature F1, the second section is ended when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, thereby making it possible to prevent the second section, which is advantageous to the player, from continuing excessively. In addition, when the second section ends when the number of games executed in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the advantageous gaming state also ends, making it possible to make the advantageous gaming state a gaming state in which the player can remain in the second section.

In this case, if the advantageous game state ends before the number of games played in the second section reaches the upper limit number of games, the second section may continue. This makes it possible for the player to expect that the second section will continue even after the advantageous game state ends, which makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, wherein the section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation status reaches the number of games to end the continuation.

Feature F2 makes it possible to make the trigger for the end of the second section continuation status clear to the player.

Feature F3. The gaming machine described in feature F1 or F2, characterized in that the section continuation means causes the second section continuation state to be entered based on the end of the advantageous gaming state in a situation where the number of games executed in the second section is equal to or less than the number of games that can be continued, which is set as a number of games that is less than the upper limit number of games.

Feature F3 makes it possible to prevent the second interval continuation state from occurring even if the number of games played in the second interval is close to the upper limit number of games.

Feature F4: The section continuation means ends the second section when the number of games executed in the second section continuation status becomes the number of continuation ending games;
A gaming machine described in feature F3, characterized in that the difference between the maximum number of games and the number of games that can be continued is greater than or equal to the number of games to end the continuation.

Feature F4 makes it possible to clearly indicate to the player the timing for the end of the second interval continuation status, and also makes it possible to prevent the number of games played in the second interval from reaching the upper limit number of games in the middle of the second interval continuation status.

Feature F5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, wherein the advantageous setting means transitions to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of an advantageous transition opportunity in the second section continuation status.

According to feature F5, a transition to a favorable gaming state occurs again when a favorable transition opportunity occurs during the second section continuation status, so it is possible to increase the player's attention to the second section continuation status.

Feature F6. The gaming machine described in Feature F5, characterized in that when the advantageous gaming state ends and the second-section continuation state is entered, and a re-transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs in the second-section continuation state, the section ending means ends the second section when the sum of the number of games played in the second section until the re-transition occurs and the number of games played in the advantageous gaming state due to the re-transition becomes the upper limit number of games.

Feature F6 makes it possible to prevent the second section from continuing excessively even if the configuration is such that a transition to a favorable gaming state occurs again based on the occurrence of a favorable transition trigger during the second section continuation status.

Feature F7. A gaming machine according to feature F5 or F6, characterized in that the occurrence of the advantageous transition opportunity is the occurrence of a transition to a special gaming state (BB state ST3, RB state ST4) that is advantageous to the player.

According to feature F7, if a transition to a special game state that is advantageous to the player occurs during the second section continuation status, another transition to an advantageous game state will also occur. This makes it possible to make the player look forward to the occurrence of a special game state during the second section continuation status.

Feature F8. A lottery means for executing a lottery process (a function for executing a lottery process for a role in the main MPU 72);
A predetermined response means (a function for executing a bonus process in the master MPU 72) for making a predetermined response state (BB state ST3 based on the establishment of a first BB winning or a second BB winning, RB state ST4 based on the establishment of a second RB winning) in a game subsequent to the game in which the predetermined lottery result is achieved based on the establishment of a predetermined lottery result (setting of the first BB winning data, setting of the second BB winning data, setting of the second RB winning data) in the lottery process;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in any one of features F5 to F7, characterized in that the advantageous setting means transitions to the advantageous gaming state based on the occurrence of the specified corresponding situation in a situation in which the second interval is continuing due to the second interval continuation status.

According to feature F8, even if the lottery result of the lottery process in the second interval continuation status becomes a predetermined lottery result, a re-transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur, and a re-transition to the advantageous gaming state occurs based on the occurrence of a predetermined corresponding situation triggered by the predetermined lottery result in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result occurred, in the second interval due to the second interval continuation status. As a result, a player who expects a re-transition to the advantageous gaming state will not only focus on the predetermined lottery result, but will also focus on whether or not it is the second interval due to the second interval continuation status when a predetermined corresponding situation occurs in a game after the game in which the predetermined lottery result occurred. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature F9. The gaming machine described in Feature F8, wherein the advantageous setting means transitions to the advantageous gaming state based on the start of the first game of the predetermined corresponding situation in a situation in which the second section is continuing due to the second section continuation status.

According to feature F9, a re-transition to a favorable gaming state occurs based on the fact that the first game in the specified corresponding situation is started in the second section due to the second section continuation status, so if the specified lottery result is obtained in the second section continuation status, the player will expect the specified corresponding situation to occur early.

Feature F10. A second section presentation control means (a function for executing a presentation control process for an advantageous maintenance section in the presentation side MPU 92) that executes a second section corresponding presentation (advantage maintenance presentation) in the second section continuation situation is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature F8 or F9, wherein the second section presentation control means prevents the second section corresponding presentation from being executed in the final game of the second section continuation status if the specified lottery result occurs in the final game.

According to feature F10, even if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second interval continuation status, which triggers a predetermined corresponding situation, the second interval has ended in the predetermined corresponding situation, so a second transition to the advantageous gaming state does not occur. In contrast, if a predetermined lottery result occurs in the final game of the second interval continuation status, the second interval corresponding performance is not executed in that final game. This makes it less likely that the player will get the impression that a second transition to the advantageous gaming state did not occur, even though a predetermined lottery result occurs in a situation in which the second interval corresponding performance corresponding to the second interval continuation status is being executed, and a trigger for a predetermined corresponding situation occurs.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features F1 to F10. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1: A prize expectation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2002 in the master MPU 72) for setting a prize expectation state (chance state ST7) that continues over a plurality of games;
When a benefit-corresponding opportunity occurs in the benefit expectation state, a benefit-corresponding lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to grant a benefit (a transition to the ART state ST9). (A function for executing a chance state process in the master MPU 72)
A corresponding granting means (a function for executing the process of step S2008 in the master MPU 72) for granting the benefit based on the fact that the benefit-related lottery process has been selected;
A bonus expectation effect control means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2214 and S2222 in the performance side MPU 92 in the first embodiment) for performing a bonus expectation effect (chance effect) in each game in the bonus expectation state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the award expectation presentation control means is equipped with a presentation priority means (a function of making a positive judgment in step S2213 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the first embodiment, and a function of making a negative judgment in step S5705 in the presentation side MPU 92 in the sixth embodiment) that prioritizes the execution of a specific presentation over the execution of the award expectation presentation when the award expectation state is set by the award expectation setting means in a situation where a specific presentation (false premonition presentation) is being executed.

According to feature G1, when a grant-compatible trigger occurs in the grant expectation state, a grant-compatible lottery process is executed, and a bonus is awarded based on the grant-compatible winning result in the grant-compatible lottery process. This causes the player to expect that the grant expectation state will be set, and in the grant expectation state, the player will expect that a grant-compatible trigger will occur. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the game. In addition, by performing a grant expectation presentation in each game in the grant expectation state, it is possible to appropriately increase the player's expectations for the grant expectation state.

In this case, if the award expectation state is set while a specific effect is being executed, the execution of the specific effect that is currently being executed takes priority over the execution of the award expectation state. This makes it possible to continue the specific effect as is in cases where starting the award expectation effect when the award expectation state is set would cause the player to feel uncomfortable in relation to the content of the specific effect up to that point. Furthermore, even if the specific effect continues without being executed in this way, since the game state is in the award expectation state, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without losing the benefit of being set to the award expectation state.

Feature G2: A predetermined expectation setting means (a function for executing the process of step S2024 in the master MPU 72) for setting a predetermined expectation state (false premonition state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games;
A special effect control means (a function of executing the processes of steps S2204, S2205, S2210 and S2223 in the effect side MPU 92) for performing the special effect that allows a player to expect that the special effect or another special effect will be given in each game in the predetermined expectation state;
A gaming machine according to feature G1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature G2, a specific effect is executed that allows the player to expect the award of a bonus in each game by entering a predetermined expected state, and players who have confirmed the specific effect will expect the award of a bonus, thereby increasing the interest of the game. In this case, if the configuration of feature G1 is provided and the award expectation state is set while a specific effect is being executed, the execution of the specific effect currently being executed takes priority over the execution of the award expectation effect. This makes it possible to continue the specific effect as is in cases where starting the award expectation effect when the award expectation state is set would cause the player to feel uncomfortable in relation to the content of the specific effect up to that point.

Feature G3: The predetermined expected state includes a first predetermined expected state (true premonition state ST6) that continues over a plurality of games and that the bonus or another bonus is awarded after the end of the first predetermined expected state, and a second predetermined expected state (false premonition state ST5) that continues over a plurality of games and that the bonus or another bonus is not awarded after the end of the second predetermined expected state.
The gaming machine described in feature G2 is characterized in that when the specific effect corresponding to the second specified expected state is executed and the award expectation state is set by the award expectation setting means, the execution of the specific effect is prioritized over the execution of the award expectation effect.

According to feature G3, even when a specific effect corresponding to a second predetermined expected state in which no bonus is awarded after completion is being executed, the execution of the specific effect being executed takes priority over the execution of the bonus-expecting effect in terms of the setting of the bonus-expecting state. This makes it possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the execution of the effect, even when the specific effect corresponds to the second predetermined expected state.

Feature G4. The gaming machine described in Feature G3, characterized in that the benefit provided by the corresponding providing means is the same as the benefit provided after the end of the first predetermined expected state.

If the specific effect is configured to continue to be executed even if the award expectation state occurs during the second predetermined expectation state, it is expected that the award corresponding lottery process will result in an award corresponding win while the specific effect is being executed. In contrast, according to feature G4, the bonus awarded in this case is the same as the bonus awarded after the first predetermined expectation state ends, making it possible to make the player believe that the specific effect being executed is a specific effect corresponding to the first predetermined expectation state.

Feature G5. A gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G4, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S2314 in the presentation side MPU 92) for executing a corresponding presentation based on the fact that the presentation corresponding lottery process has been selected in a situation where the presentation priority means has prioritized the execution of the specific presentation.

According to feature G5, if a special effect is given priority and a special effect lottery process results in a special bonus win, the special bonus effect is executed, making it possible to clearly inform the player that a special bonus will be awarded even in a situation where the special bonus effect is given priority.

Feature G6: The specific effects include a first specific effect (a false premonition effect that is not subject to cancellation in the sixth embodiment) and a second specific effect (a false premonition effect that is subject to cancellation in the sixth embodiment);
The performance priority means, when the award expectation setting means sets the award expectation state in a situation where the first specific performance is being executed, prioritizes the execution of the first specific performance over the execution of the award expectation performance,
The gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G5, characterized in that the award expectation presentation control means is equipped with a means for terminating the second specific presentation and starting the award expectation presentation when the award expectation state is set by the award expectation setting means while the second specific presentation is being executed (a function for making a positive judgment in step S5705 in the presentation side MPU 92).

According to feature G6, depending on the type of specific effect, the continuation of the specific effect may be prioritized, or the start of a new effect with a winning expectation may be prioritized. This makes it possible to execute the effect in a preferred manner in each situation.

Feature G7. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G6, characterized in that the award expectation performance control means includes end-of-performance start means (a function for executing the process of step S2307 in the performance side MPU 92) for starting the award expectation performance when the specific performance ends in a situation in which the award expectation state is present and the execution of the specific performance has priority over the execution of the award expectation performance.

According to feature G7, the award expectation performance starts after the specific performance ends, making it possible to provide an opportunity for the award expectation performance to be executed.

Feature G8. When the number of games played in the award expectation state without the award corresponding winning in the award corresponding lottery process reaches the end reference number of games, the means for ending the award expectation state (a function for executing the processes of steps S2010 to S2012 in the master MPU 72) is provided;
The gaming machine described in feature G7 is characterized in that, when the specific presentation ends in a situation in which the award expectation state is present and execution of the specific presentation is given priority over execution of the award expectation presentation, the post-end starting means can continue the award expectation presentation until the end reference number of games has been executed.

According to feature G8, even if the award expectation effect starts after the specific effect ends, the award expectation effect can be continued until the end reference number of games is played, so that it is possible to execute the award expectation effect in the same manner as when the award expectation state is reached when the specific effect is not being executed.

Feature G9. The gaming machine according to any one of Features G1 to G6, characterized in that the award expectation performance control means does not start the award expectation performance even if the specific performance ends in a situation in which the award expectation state is present and execution of the specific performance takes priority over execution of the award expectation performance.

Feature G9 makes it possible to prevent a specific effect from being followed by a bonus expectation effect.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features G1 to G9. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A special setting means for setting a special game state (pseudo bonus state) (a function for executing a pseudo bonus start process in the master MPU 72);
A bonus granting means (a function for executing the processing of step S5205 in the main MPU 72) for granting a bonus (transition to ART state ST9) to a player based on the establishment of one of the game number conditions that the total number of games (the value of the continuing game number counter 131) granted to the player at least at the start of the special game state and during the execution of the special game state exceeds the award reference number of games (the value of the transition condition game number counter 132) and is equal to or greater than the award reference number of games;
A reference lottery means for determining the reference number of games to be awarded by lottery (a function for executing the processes of steps S5004 and S5005 in the master MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature H1, in a configuration in which a bonus is awarded to a player when the total number of games awarded to the player in a special gaming state exceeds or is equal to or exceeds the standard number of games to award a bonus, the standard number of games to award is determined by lottery. As a result, when a special gaming state is entered, the player will expect that a smaller number of games will be selected as the standard number of games to award, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

Feature H2. A gaming machine according to Feature H1, characterized in that it is equipped with a game number awarding means (a function for executing the processing of steps S5103 to S5113 in the master MPU 72) that awards a number of games to a player when a special awarding condition is met during execution of the special game state.

According to feature H2, even if the game number condition is not met at the stage when the standard number of games to be awarded is determined by lottery, the game number condition can be met by awarding the number of games to the player even during the execution of the special game state. This makes it possible to increase attention to the game in the special game state.

Feature H3. A gaming machine according to Feature H2, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S5107 in the main MPU 72) for causing the number of games awarded to the player to be consumed in the special gaming state if the game number condition is not met after the number of games has been awarded by the game number awarding means.

According to feature H3, when the game count condition is not met, it is possible to increase the number of continuing games in the special game state when the special grant condition is met.

Feature H4. A gaming machine according to feature H2 or H3, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the process of step S5109 in the main MPU 72) for causing the number of games currently awarded by the game number awarding means to be consumed in an advantageous gaming state (ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player and occurs after the special gaming state ends, if the game number condition is met after the number of games has been awarded by the game number awarding means.

According to feature H4, when the game count condition is met, the number of games that triggered the meeting of the game count condition is consumed in the advantageous game state after the special game state ends, making it easier to increase the number of games that continue in the advantageous game state.

Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features H2 to H4, wherein the game number awarding means determines the number of games when the number of games is awarded to the player after the game number condition is met differently from the number of games when the number of games is awarded to the player before the game number condition is met.

According to feature H5, the manner in which the number of games is determined when a number of games is awarded in response to the fulfillment of a special award condition changes depending on whether or not the number of games condition is fulfilled, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games is determined in relation to whether or not the number of games condition is fulfilled.

Feature H6. The bonus granting means is configured to grant the bonus by transitioning the game state to an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends,
The game number awarding means is
When the number of games is to be awarded to the player before the game number condition is satisfied, a means for determining the number of games to be awarded in a determination manner corresponding to the special game state (a function for executing the processing of steps S5103 to S5105 in the master MPU 72);
When the number of games is to be awarded to the player after the game number condition is satisfied, a means for determining the number of games to be awarded in a determination manner corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps S5110 to S5112 in the master MPU 72);
A gaming machine according to any one of features H2 to H5, comprising:

According to feature H6, before the game number condition is met, it is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a manner suitable for a special gaming state, and after the game number condition is met, it is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a manner suitable for an advantageous gaming state.

Feature H7. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H6, characterized in that the bonus granting means transitions the game state to an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends as a grant of the bonus.

According to feature H7, if the game count condition is met, the game state transitions to an advantageous game state after the special game state ends, which makes it possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the game count condition is met.

Feature H8. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H7, characterized in that it is provided with a means for determining the initial number of continuing games of the special gaming state by lottery when the special gaming state is started (a function for executing the processing of steps S5001 to S5003 in the master MPU 72).

According to feature H8, not only the base number of games for awarding but also the initial number of continuing games for the special game state is determined by lottery, making it possible to diversify the patterns of each number of games when the game number condition is met.

Feature H9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features H1 to H8, characterized in that it is provided with a means (a function for executing the processing of step S5003 in the master MPU 72) for allowing the initial number of continuing games set when the special gaming state is started to be consumed in the special gaming state even if the game number condition is met by the initial number of continuing games set when the special gaming state is started.

According to feature H9, even if the game number condition is met at the stage when the initial number of continuing games is determined, the initial number of continuing games is consumed in the special game state, so that it is possible to ensure that a certain number of games are consumed in the special game state even if the game number condition is met at the start of the special game state.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features H1 to H9. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I1. A special setting means for setting a special game state (pseudo bonus state) (a function for executing a pseudo bonus start process in the master MPU 72);
A game number awarding means (a function for executing the processes of steps S5103 to S5113 in the master MPU 72) for awarding a number of games to a player when a special awarding condition is established in the special game state;
When the special game state ends under the advantageous transition condition, an advantageous transition means (a function for executing the process of step S5205 in the main MPU 72) transitions the special game state to an advantageous game state (ART state ST9) that is advantageous to the player after the special game state ends;
Equipped with
The game number awarding means is
When the special grant condition is satisfied in a situation where the advantageous transition condition is not satisfied, a means for increasing the remaining number of games to be continued in the special game state (a function for executing the process of step S5107 in the master MPU 72);
When the special grant condition is satisfied while the advantageous transition condition is satisfied, a means for increasing the number of remaining games in the advantageous game state (a function for executing the process of step S5109 in the master MPU 72);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature I1, if the special gaming state ends when the advantageous transition condition is met, the game state transitions to the advantageous gaming state after the special gaming state ends, so the player will expect the advantageous transition condition to be met in the special gaming state, which can increase the interest of the game. In this configuration, if the special grant condition is met when the advantageous transition condition is not met, the number of remaining games to be continued in the special gaming state increases. This makes it possible to increase the opportunities for the advantageous transition condition to be met in the special gaming state. On the other hand, if the special grant condition is met when the advantageous transition condition has already been met, the number of remaining games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state increases. This makes it possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the number of remaining games to be continued in the special gaming state increases despite the advantageous transition condition already being met, causing the game in the special gaming state to drag on, and makes it possible to provide an opportunity to increase the number of remaining games to be continued in the advantageous gaming state.

Feature I2. The gaming machine described in Feature I1, wherein the game number awarding means determines the number of games to be awarded to the player after the advantageous transition condition is met in a manner different from the manner in which the number of games is awarded to the player before the advantageous transition condition is met.

According to feature I2, the manner in which the number of games is determined when a number of games is awarded in response to the fulfillment of a special award condition changes depending on whether or not an advantageous transition condition is fulfilled, making it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games is determined in relation to whether or not an advantageous transition condition is fulfilled.

Feature I3. The game number awarding means is
When a number of games is awarded to a player before the advantageous transition condition is established, a means for determining the number of games to be awarded in a determination manner corresponding to the special game state (a function for executing the processing of steps S5103 to S5105 in the master MPU 72);
When the number of games is to be awarded to the player after the advantageous transition condition is established, a means for determining the number of games to be awarded in a determination manner corresponding to the advantageous gaming state (a function for executing the processing of steps S5110 to S5112 in the master MPU 72);
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or I2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature I3, before the advantageous transition condition is established, it is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a manner suitable for the special gaming state, and after the advantageous transition condition is established, it is possible to determine the number of games to be awarded to the player in a manner suitable for the advantageous gaming state.

Feature I4. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, characterized in that the manner in which the number of games is awarded after the advantageous transition condition is met is more advantageous to the player than the manner in which the number of games is awarded before the advantageous transition condition is met.

According to feature I4, since it is more advantageous for the player if the advantageous transition condition is realized early in the special game state, it is possible to increase the player's attention to whether or not the advantageous transition condition is realized.

Feature I5. A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, characterized in that the advantageous transition condition is met when the number of games awarded to the player in the special gaming state exceeds the award reference number of games (the value of the transition condition game number counter 132) or is equal to or greater than the award reference number of games.

Feature I5 makes it possible to increase the player's attention to the number of games awarded to the player in the special game state.

Feature I6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I5, characterized in that the special gaming state and the advantageous gaming state have the same or approximately the same expected number of gaming media to be awarded per unit number of games.

According to feature I6, the expected number of game media awarded per unit number of games is the same or approximately the same in the special game state and the advantageous game state, so that it is possible to prevent any difference in the degree of advantage regardless of whether the number of games awarded to the player is consumed in the special game state or the advantageous game state.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features I1 to I6. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Characteristics Group J>
Feature J1. A predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9) (a function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the master MPU 72);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S2703 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the remaining number of continuing games (the value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined gaming state becomes 0 in the predetermined gaming state;
a game number notifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3506 and S3510 in the presentation side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) among the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state;
a special response execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3718, S3916 and S3920 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a special response effect (special additional effect) corresponding to the non-notification target game number (the value of the stock game number counter 127), which is the difference between the remaining number of continued games and the notification target game number in the predetermined gaming state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature J1, the number of games to be notified that is the number of remaining games to be continued in a specified game state and that is subject to notification is notified to the player through a game number notification, but the number of games not to be notified that is not the number of games to be notified is not notified to the player. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of games not to be notified is executed. This allows an effect according to the number of games not to be notified to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature J2. A game number increasing means (a function for executing an additional process in the master MPU 72) that increases the remaining number of games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined awarding condition is established in the predetermined gaming state;
When the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined game state is increased by the game number increasing means, a means for adding at least a part of the increased number of games to the non-notification target number of games (a function for executing the process of step S3710 in the presentation side MPU 92);
The gaming machine described in feature J1 is characterized by comprising:

According to feature J2, the number of non-notification games is added during a specified gaming state, making it possible to execute a special response effect as a result of the addition.

Feature J3: A notification addition means (a function for executing the process of step S3904 in the presentation side MPU 92) is provided for adding the number of transfer games, which is at least a part of the number of non-notification games, to the number of notification games;
The gaming machine described in feature J1 or J2 is characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the number of games to be transferred being added to the number of games to be notified.

According to feature J3, when at least a portion of the non-notifiable game count is added to the notifiable game count, a corresponding effect is executed. This allows for greater freedom in the timing of the execution of the effect that adds the game count to the notifiable game count.

Feature J4. The gaming machine described in Feature J3, characterized in that the notification addition means selects the number of games to be transferred from among a plurality of game numbers that do not exceed the number of games to be notified, even in a situation where the number of games to be notified, which is the difference between the number of games to be notified and the remaining number of games to be continued in the specified gaming state, is the same number of games.

Feature J4 makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred occurs, thereby making the game more interesting.

Feature J5. The gaming machine described in Feature J3 or J4, characterized in that the special response execution means can execute different types of special response effects even when the number of games to be transferred is the same.

Feature J5 makes it possible to diversify the manner in which special response effects are executed, making it possible to increase the entertainment value of the game.

Feature J6: The notification addition means includes a multiple selection means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3802 and S3803 in the presentation side MPU 92) for selecting the number of transfer games in a single processing of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the non-notification target game number, which is the difference between the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state and the notification target game number;
The special response execution means is a means for performing the addition of the multiple numbers of games to be transferred selected by the multiple selection means to the number of games to be notified in the special response performance that is performed at different times (a function for executing the processing of steps S3721 and S3916 in the performance side MPU 92);
A gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

Feature J6 makes it possible to increase the frequency with which special response effects are executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature J7. The gaming machine described in any one of Features J3 to J6, characterized in that the special response execution means executes a special response effect in which a game number is awarded for each of a plurality of games, and the sum of the awarded game numbers is the transfer target game number that triggered the execution of the additive response effect.

Feature J7 makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases across multiple games, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Feature J8. A game number increasing means (a function for executing an additional process in the master MPU 72) that increases the remaining number of games in the predetermined game state when a predetermined awarding condition is established in the predetermined game state;
a means for executing a function for executing the process of step S3608 in the presentation side MPU 92 to perform an additional presentation corresponding to the number of games added to the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined game state due to the establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special presentation is being performed;
A gaming machine according to any one of features J3 to J7, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature J8, even when a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features J1 to J8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions of the above feature group D, feature group E, feature group F, feature group G, feature group H, feature group I and feature group J can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. A first control means (main MPU 72) for managing the progress of a game;
A second control means (a performance side MPU 92) that controls the execution of the performance based on the information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9) (a function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the master MPU 72);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S3403 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the remaining number of continuing games (the value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined gaming state becomes 0 in the predetermined gaming state;
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3105, S3201, and S3301 in the master MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of games in the predetermined game state when a predetermined awarding condition is satisfied in the predetermined game state;
A first transmission means (a function for executing the process of step S2809 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting first transmission information (ART start command) corresponding to the start of the predetermined game state;
When the remaining number of continuing games is increased by the game number increasing means, a second transmission means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3106, S3202, and S3303 in the master MPU 72) transmits second transmission information (a direct addition command, an A loop addition command, or a B loop addition command) corresponding to the increased number of games;
Equipped with
The second control means is
A predetermined effect starting means (a function of executing the process of step S3511 in the effect side MPU 92) for starting an effect corresponding to the predetermined game state based on receiving the first transmission information;
A reception response means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3607, S3608, S3710 and S4002 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a reception response process for subsequently executing a performance corresponding to an increase in the number of remaining games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state based on the reception of the second transmission information;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature K1, the first control means executes processing for increasing the number of remaining continuing games in a specified game state, and the second control means executes processing for executing a presentation corresponding to the increase in the number of continuing games. This makes it possible to centralize the control of the progress of the specified game state in the first control means, while preventing the processing load on the first control means from increasing even if the presentation corresponding to the increase in the number of continuing games is complex. This makes it possible to optimally control the specified game state.

Feature K2. The first control means is provided with an increase state setting means (a function of executing the processing of step S2922 and steps S3304 to S3315 in the main MPU 72) that sets an increase state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined entry opportunity in the predetermined game state and continues the increase state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
The game number increasing means is configured to increase the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state by a predetermined increased number of games each time the predetermined awarding condition is satisfied in the increased state,
The gaming machine described in feature K1 is characterized in that the second control means is equipped with a total notification means (a function of executing the processing of step S4004 in the presentation side MPU 92) that notifies the player of notification information corresponding to multiple increases in the specified increased game number that have occurred during the increase state.

According to feature K2, the number of remaining games to be played in the specified game state is increased by a specified increased number of games each time a specified awarding condition is met by entering an increased state, so the player will look forward to entering an increased state. In addition, the player is notified of notification target information corresponding to multiple increases in the specified increased number of games that occur in the increased state, so it is possible to notify the player at once that a large number of games has been awarded.

Feature K3. The gaming machine described in Feature K2, wherein the total notification means notifies the player of notification target information corresponding to the number of games awarded in the increased state based on the end of the increased state.

According to feature K3, when an increase state occurs, notification information corresponding to the number of games awarded in the increase state is notified to the player based on the end of the increase state, making it possible to notify the player at once that a large number of games has been awarded.

Feature K4: The total notification means notifies the player of the notification target information in a situation where it is possible to notify that the number of games awarded in the increased state is equal to or greater than a specific reference number of games;
A gaming machine described in feature K2 or K3, characterized in that the specific reference number of games is a number of games that is multiple or more of the specified increased number of games.

According to feature K4, when the notification target information is notified to the player, the player is notified at once that the number of games awarded is more than multiple times the predetermined number of additional games, making it possible to give the player a sense of surprise when the notification is made.

Feature K5. The first control means is
When the increase state ends after the increase of the predetermined increase game number is established a specific reference number or more in the increase state, a means for setting the game to a standby state in which the game progresses based on the player's operation is on standby (a function for executing the process of step S3313 in the master MPU 72);
A third transmission means (a function for executing the process of step S3314 in the main MPU 72) for transmitting third transmission information corresponding to the setting of the standby state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine according to feature K4, wherein the total notification means notifies the player of the notification target information based on receipt of the third transmission information.

According to feature K5, the notification target information is notified to the player while the game progress based on the player's operation is on hold, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the notification target information.

Feature K6. The gaming machine described in Feature K5, wherein the value of the specific reference number of times is a value greater than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature K6, when the information to be notified is notified, it is possible to notify the player that more than the specific reference number of games has been awarded, making it possible to give the player a sense of surprise that the information to be notified has been announced. In addition, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set to a value greater than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the specified increased number of games, even if the number of games awarded in the increased state is consumed during the execution of the increased state, it is possible for the number of games not notified to the player at the time the increased state ends to be equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games.

Feature K7: The receiving means is
A notification means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3603 and S3605 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of games to be notified so that the player can recognize the number of games;
A non-notification means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3710 and S4002 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adding the number of games corresponding to the second transmission information to the number of games to be notified that is not recognizable to the player;
A gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K6, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature K7, when the main control means increases the number of remaining games to be continued in a specified game state, the increased number of games may or may not be immediately notified. This makes it possible to diversify the timing of the notification of an increase in the remaining number of games to be continued, thereby making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, because the control for diversifying the timing of the notification is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K8. The first control means includes a continuing game number storage means (ART game number counter 121) that stores the remaining number of continuing games in the predetermined gaming state;
The gaming machine described in feature K7 is characterized in that the game number increasing means adds the number of games awarded based on the establishment of the specified awarding condition to the continued game number memory means, regardless of whether the notification means adds the number of games to be notified or the non-notification means adds the number of games to be notified.

According to feature K8, regardless of how the notification of the increase in the remaining number of continued games in a specified game state is performed, the first control means only needs to add the number of games awarded based on the establishment of a specified awarding condition to the number of continued games storage means, thereby making it possible to reduce the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K9. The gaming machine described in feature K7 or K8, characterized in that the second control means includes a special response execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3718, S3916, and S3920 in the performance side MPU 92) that causes a special response performance (special additional performance) corresponding to the number of games to be notified to be executed.

According to feature K9, the number of games to be notified that is the number of remaining games to be continued in a specified game state and that is the number of games to be notified is notified to the player by the game number notification, but the number of games not to be notified that is not the number of games to be notified is not notified to the player. Then, a special response effect corresponding to the number of games not to be notified is executed. As a result, an effect according to the number of games not to be notified is executed, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K10: The second control means includes a notification addition means (a function of executing the process of step S3904 in the presentation side MPU 92) that adds a transfer target game number, which is at least a part of the non-notification target game number, to the notification target game number;
The gaming machine described in feature K9 is characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as the special response presentation, a presentation corresponding to the number of games to be transferred being added to the number of games to be notified.

According to feature K10, when at least a portion of the non-notified game count is added to the notified game count, a corresponding effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom in the timing of execution of the effect in which the game count is added to the notified game count. In addition, because the execution control of the effect is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K11. The gaming machine described in Feature K10, characterized in that the notification addition means selects the number of games to be transferred from among a plurality of game numbers that do not exceed the number of games to be notified, even in a situation where the number of games to be notified, which is the difference between the number of games to be notified and the remaining number of games to be continued in the specified gaming state, is the same number of games.

According to feature K11, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred occurs, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, since the control for diversifying the number of games to be transferred is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load of the first control means.

Feature K12. The gaming machine described in feature K10 or K11, characterized in that the special response execution means can execute different types of special response effects even when the number of games to be transferred is the same.

Feature K12 makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the special response effects are executed, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, because the control for diversifying the manner in which the special response effects are executed is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K13: The notification addition means includes a multiple selection means (a function of executing the processes of steps S3802 and S3803 in the presentation side MPU 92) for selecting the number of transfer games in a single processing of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the non-notification target game number, which is the difference between the number of notification target games and the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state;
The special response execution means is a means for performing the addition of the multiple numbers of games to be transferred selected by the multiple selection means to the number of games to be notified in the special response performance that is performed at different times (a function for executing the processing of steps S3721 and S3916 in the performance side MPU 92);
A gaming machine according to any one of features K10 to K12, characterized in that it is provided with:

According to feature K13, it is possible to increase the frequency with which the special response effects are executed, making it possible to improve the entertainment value of the game. In addition, because the control for increasing the frequency with which the special response effects are executed is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects described above while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K14. The gaming machine described in any one of Features K10 to K13, characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as one of the special response effects, a game number for each of a plurality of games, and the sum of the game numbers awarded is the number of games to be transferred that triggered the execution of the additional response effect.

Feature K14 makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases across multiple games, making it possible to increase the interest of the game. In addition, because this control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Feature K15. The gaming machine described in any one of features K10 to K14, characterized in that the second control means includes a means (a function for executing the processing of step S3608 in the presentation side MPU 92) for, when the predetermined award condition is met while the special response presentation is being executed, performing an additional presentation to the special response presentation corresponding to the number of games added to the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state due to the fulfillment of the predetermined award condition being added to the number of games to be notified.

According to feature K15, even when a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified. In addition, since this control is performed by the second control means, it is possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while reducing the processing load on the first control means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features K1 to K15. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in group K of features above can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to appropriately control the execution of a specific gaming state, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature L group>
Feature L1. A predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9) (a function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the master MPU 72);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S3403 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the remaining number of continuing games (the value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined gaming state becomes 0 in the predetermined gaming state;
an increasing state setting means for setting an increasing state (B loop) based on the occurrence of a predetermined entry opportunity in the predetermined game state, and for continuing the increasing state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied;
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S3301 in the master MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of games in the predetermined game state by a predetermined increased number of games each time a predetermined award condition is satisfied in the increased state;
A special effect processing execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S3313 in the master MPU 72) for executing a special effect processing based on the fact that the increase in the predetermined increase game number is established a specific reference number or more in the increase state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature L1, the number of remaining games to be played in the specified game state is increased by a specified increased number of games each time a specified award condition is met by entering an increased state, so the player will look forward to entering an increased state. In this case, a special effect process is executed based on the fact that the increase in the specified increased number of games has been met a specific reference number or more in the increased state, so that when a large number of remaining games to be played in the specified game state is awarded, it is possible to provide the player with an effect that corresponds to that. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature L2. A gaming machine according to feature L1, characterized in that even if the increased state is set, the effect corresponding to the increased state is not executed until the special effect process is executed.

Feature L2 allows the player to be surprised by the sudden execution of the special effect process when the player is not aware that the number of players is increasing.

Feature L3. The gaming machine described in feature L1 or L2, characterized in that the special effect processing execution means sets the special effect processing to a standby state in which the game progresses based on the player's operation.

According to feature L3, when a large number of remaining games to be continued in a given game state is awarded, the game progress based on the player's operation is put on hold, making it possible to emphasize that a large number of remaining games to be continued has been awarded.

Feature L4. A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, characterized in that the special effect processing execution means executes the special effect processing when the increase state ends after the increase in the predetermined increase game number reaches or exceeds the specific reference number in the increase state.

According to feature L4, when an increasing state occurs, a special effect process is executed based on the end of the increasing state, so it is possible to execute the special effect process in a situation where a large number of games have been awarded, and it is possible to notify the player that an increasing state had been set and that the increasing state has ended by executing the special effect process.

Feature L5. A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, characterized in that it is equipped with a total notification means (a function for executing the processing of step S4004 in the presentation side MPU 92) that notifies the player of notification target information corresponding to the total number of games awarded in the increased state when the special presentation processing is executed.

Feature L5 makes it possible to notify all at once that a large number of games has been awarded.

Feature L6. A gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5, characterized in that the value of the specific reference number of times is a value greater than the quotient obtained by dividing the specific reference number of games by the predetermined increased number of games.

According to feature L6, the special effect process is executed when a specific reference number of games or more is awarded in the increased state, so that it is possible to increase the player's attention to the execution of the special effect process. In addition, since the value of the specific reference number of times is set to a value greater than the quotient of the specific reference number of games divided by the predetermined increased number of games, it is possible to execute the special effect process in a situation where the number of games awarded in the increased state that are not yet played is equal to or greater than the specific reference number of games, even if the number of games awarded in the increased state is consumed during the execution of the increased state.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features L1 to L6. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature M group>
Feature M1. A predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9) (a function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the master MPU 72);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S3403 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the remaining number of continuing games (the value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined gaming state becomes 0 in the predetermined gaming state;
a non-notification target storage means (a stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state;
A specific increase state setting means (a function for executing the processes of steps S2912 to S2914 in the master MPU 72) for setting a specific increase state (A loop) based on the occurrence of a specific entry opportunity in the predetermined game state and continuing the specific increase state until a specific end condition is satisfied;
A game number increasing means (a function of executing the process of step S3201 in the master MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of games in the predetermined game state by a specific increased number of games each time a specific award condition is satisfied in the specific increased state;
When the specific increase state is set, a specific response effect control means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3704 and S3705 in the effect side MPU 92) is configured to execute a specific response effect (expected effect) over the specific effect game number;
A non-notification target adding means (a function for executing the process of step S3710 in the performance side MPU 92) for adding the specific increased number of games increased by the game number increasing means in a situation where the specific corresponding performance is being executed to the non-notification target storing means;
a special response execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S3718, S3916, and S3920 in the performance side MPU 92) for executing a special response effect (special additional effect) corresponding to the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means when the specific response effect is executed over the specific performance game number, even in a situation where the specific increase state has not ended;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature M1, when a specific increase state is reached in a specific game state, the number of remaining games in the specific game state is increased by the specific increase number each time a specific grant condition is met, so that the player will expect to enter the specific increase state. In addition, the number of games granted in the specific increase state is temporarily granted as the number of games not subject to notification, while when the specific increase state is set, a specific response effect is executed over the number of games with specific effect, so that the player can expect to know how much the number of games not subject to notification has increased in the situation in which the specific response effect is being executed. In addition, when a specific response effect is executed over the number of games with specific effect, a special response effect corresponding to the number of games not subject to notification at that time is executed even if the specific increase state has not ended. As a result, the player will expect the content of the special response effect to be executed after the execution of the specific response effect. In addition, it is possible to start the special response effect earlier than in a configuration in which the special response effect is not executed until the specific increase state ends.

Feature M2. The gaming machine described in Feature M1, wherein the specific increase state setting means ends the specific increase state if the specific end condition is met even before the specific number of games with effect is played after the specific increase state is set.

Feature M2 makes it possible to create a situation in which the specific increase state ends before the specific response performance is completed, and a situation in which the specific increase state continues even after the specific response performance is completed.

Feature M3. The gaming machine described in feature M1 or M2, characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the number of games to be transferred, which is at least a portion of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, being added to the number of games to be notified to the player.

According to feature M3, a special response effect is executed in which the number of transfer games, which is at least a portion of the number of non-notification games, is added to the notification game number, making it possible to increase the player's attention to the special response effect.

Feature M4. A multiple selection means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3802 and S3803 in the presentation side MPU 92) is provided for selecting the number of transfer target games in a single processing run of the game number selection process within a range not exceeding the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means,
The gaming machine described in feature M3 is characterized in that the special response execution means is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S3721 and S3916 in the presentation side MPU 92) for adding the multiple numbers of games to be transferred selected by the multiple selection means to the number of games to be notified in the special response presentation, which is executed at different times.

Feature M4 makes it possible to increase the frequency with which special response effects are executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature M5. The gaming machine described in feature M3 or M4, wherein the special response execution means executes a special response effect in which a game number is awarded for each of a plurality of games, and the sum of the awarded game numbers is the transfer target game number that triggered the execution of the additive response effect.

Feature M5 makes it possible to create a situation in which the number of games to be notified increases across multiple games, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Feature M6: A game number increasing means (a function for executing the process of step S3105 in the master MPU 72) for increasing the remaining number of games in the predetermined gaming state when a predetermined award condition is established in the predetermined gaming state;
a means for executing a function for executing the process of step S3608 in the presentation side MPU 92 to perform an additional presentation corresponding to the number of games added to the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined game state due to the establishment of the predetermined condition when the predetermined condition is satisfied while the special presentation is being performed;
A gaming machine described in any one of features M3 to M5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature M6, even when a special response effect is being executed, an increase in the number of games to be notified occurs due to a different effect from the increase in the number of games to be notified due to the special response effect. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of surprise regarding the increase in the number of games to be notified.

Feature M7. A gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M6, characterized in that the special response execution means is capable of executing different special response effects even in a situation where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games.

Feature M7 makes it possible to diversify the ways in which special response effects are executed, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

Feature M8. The gaming machine described in Feature M7, characterized in that the special response execution means executes, as the special response effect, an effect corresponding to the number of games to be transferred, which is at least a portion of the number of games stored in the non-notification target storage means, being added to the number of games to be notified to the player, and selects the number of games to be transferred from among a plurality of types of game numbers that do not exceed the number of games to be notified, even in a situation in which the number of games to be notified stored in the non-notification target storage means is the same number of games.

Feature M8 makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the number of games to be transferred occurs, making the game more entertaining.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features M1 to M8. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

<Feature N group>
Feature N1. A predetermined setting means for setting a predetermined game state (ART state ST9) (a function for executing the processing of step S2808 in the master MPU 72);
A predetermined termination means (a function of executing the process of step S3403 in the master MPU 72) for terminating the predetermined gaming state based on the fact that the remaining number of continuing games (the value of the ART game number counter 121) in the predetermined gaming state becomes 0 in the predetermined gaming state;
a game number notifying means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3506 and S3510 in the presentation side MPU 92) for notifying the player of the number of games to be notified (the value of the display counter 126) among the remaining number of games to be continued in the predetermined gaming state;
a non-notification target storage means (a stock game number counter 127) for storing the number of non-notification target games that have not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continued games in the predetermined gaming state;
a continuation presentation execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4106, S4110 and S4114 in the presentation side MPU 92) for executing a continuation presentation (first release presentation, second release presentation, third release presentation) of the specified game state in a manner different from a case where the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is greater than a reference number of games at the end (first release reference value, second release reference value) when the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means and the number of non-notification target games becomes 0;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature N1, since there is a number of non-notification games that has not been notified to the player among the remaining number of continuing games in the specified game state, it is possible to make the player expect that the specified game state will continue even if the number of notification games becomes zero. In this case, if the number of notification games becomes zero when the number of non-notification games is one or more, the continuation presentation of the specified game state is executed in different ways depending on whether the number of non-notification games is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end. This makes it possible to diversify the execution manner of the continuation presentation depending on the number of non-notification games, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature N2. The gaming machine described in Feature N1 is characterized in that the continuation effect execution means includes game number notification execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4110 and S4114 in the presentation side MPU 92) that executes, as the continuation effect, an effect (second release effect, third release effect) in which at least a part of the number of non-notification target games is added to the number of notification target games when the number of non-notification target games becomes 0 in a situation in which the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means and the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is greater than the reference number of games at the end of the game.

According to feature N2, if the number of games to be notified becomes 0 but the number of games not to be notified is equal to or greater than the reference number of games at the end of the game, the specified game state will continue to some extent. In such a case, by notifying the player of at least a portion of the number of games not to be notified, it is possible to give the player a sense of security that the specified game state will continue.

Feature N3. The continuation performance execution means is
a first continuation effect execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S4110 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing an effect (second release effect) in which, when the number of non-notification target games becomes 0 in a situation in which the non-notification target game number corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means and the number of non-notification target games stored in the non-notification target storage means is less than the reference number of games at the end of the game, as the continuation effect, the entire number of non-notification target games is added to the number of non-notification target games;
a second continuation effect execution means (a function for executing the processing of step S3414 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing an effect (third release effect) in which, as the continuation effect, a transfer target game number, which is a part of the non-notification target game number, is added to the notification target game number when the non-notification target game number becomes 0 in a situation where the non-notification target game number corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target memory means and the non-notification target game number stored in the non-notification target memory means is greater than the termination reference game number;
The gaming machine according to feature N1 or N2, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature N3, when the number of games to be notified becomes 0, at least a portion of the number of games not to be notified is notified to the player, thereby giving the player a sense of security that the specified gaming state will continue. In this case, if the number of games not to be notified is greater than the reference number of games at the end, only a portion of the number of games not to be notified is notified to the player. This makes it possible to increase the frequency with which the continuation presentation of the specified gaming state is executed, and makes it possible to give the player hope that the specified gaming state will continue even if the number of games to be notified approaches 0.

Feature N4. The gaming machine described in Feature N3, in which the second continuation performance execution means selects the number of games to be transferred from among a plurality of types of game numbers within a range that does not exceed the number of games to be notified.

Feature N4 makes it possible to diversify the number of games that can be transferred.

Feature N5. The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4, characterized in that the continuation effect execution means includes means (a function for executing the process of step S4106 in the effect side MPU 92) for executing, as the continuation effect, an effect (first release effect) for consuming the remaining number of continued games in the specified game state in a situation where the remaining number of continued games in the specified game state is not notified to the player when the number of non-notification target games corresponding to one or more games is stored in the non-notification target storage means and the number of non-notification target games becomes zero and is less than the reference number of games at the end of the game state.

According to feature N5, when the number of games to be notified becomes 0 and the number of games not to be notified is less than the reference number of games at the end, the number of games remaining to be continued in the specified game state is not notified to the player, thereby making it possible to prevent a decrease in the player's expectations for the continuation of the specified game state.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features N1 to N5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group L, feature group M, and feature group N can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic group O>
Feature O1. A first lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for a false premonition state in the master MPU 72) that executes a first lottery process using numerical information when a first lottery trigger occurs;
A second lottery means (for example, a function of executing a transition lottery process for a chance state in the master MPU 72) for executing a second lottery process using the numerical information when a second lottery trigger occurs;
A predetermined storage means (the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs;
Equipped with
A gaming machine, characterized in that the numerical information of the predetermined storage means is obtained sometimes by the first lottery means and sometimes by the second lottery means.

According to feature O1, the numerical information updated in the specified storage means is used in the first lottery process and in the second lottery process. This makes it possible to reduce the number of means for storing the updated numerical information, and to simplify the configuration.

Feature O2. The device includes a plurality of numerical information storage means (the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means;
This gaming machine is
A reference information storage means (a random number pointer in the main RAM 74) for storing identification reference information that is referenced in order to identify the numerical information storage means from which numerical information is to be acquired;
a means for updating the identification reference information so that, when the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information becomes the target for acquiring numerical information, the next numerical information storage means becomes the target for acquiring numerical information (a function for executing the processes of steps S509 to S511 in the master MPU 72);
Equipped with
The first selection means, when the first selection trigger occurs, acquires numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information;
The gaming machine described in feature O1 is characterized in that, when the second lottery trigger occurs, the second lottery means obtains numerical information from the numerical information storage means corresponding to the specific reference information.

According to feature O2, since the multiple numerical information storage means are targets for acquiring numerical information in a predetermined order, it is possible to prevent the acquisition of numerical information from being biased toward one numerical information storage means. In addition, since the configuration is such that numerical information is acquired from a numerical information storage means corresponding to the identification reference information, it is possible to prevent the processing configuration for identifying the numerical information storage means from which numerical information is to be acquired from becoming complicated.

Feature O3. The device includes a plurality of numerical information storage means (the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) in which numerical information is updated, including the predetermined storage means;
a plurality of acquisition target selection means for acquiring numerical information from the plurality of numerical information storage means, the acquisition target selection means including the first selection means and the second selection means;
The gaming machine according to feature O1 or O2, wherein the number of the acquisition target lottery means is greater than the number of the numerical information storage means.

According to feature O3, the number of lottery processes that acquire numerical information from multiple numerical information storage means is greater than the number of numerical information storage means, making it possible to increase the number of lottery processes while suppressing an increase in the number of numerical information storage means.

Feature O4. The gaming machine described in Feature O3, characterized in that the number of the numerical information storage means is equal to or greater than the maximum number of the acquisition target selection means that are executed in one game.

According to feature O4, by having the number of numerical information storage means be equal to or greater than the maximum number of acquisition target lottery processes to be executed in one game, it is possible to prevent the numerical information of the same numerical information storage means from being used in multiple lottery processes in one game in a configuration in which multiple numerical information storage means are used jointly in multiple acquisition target lottery processes.

Feature O5. A separate numerical information storage means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a) that is provided separately from the predetermined storage means and in which numerical information is updated when an update trigger occurs;
A separate lottery means (a function for executing the processes of steps S601 to S613 in the main MPU 72) for executing a separate lottery process using the numerical information acquired from the separate numerical information storage means when a predetermined lottery trigger occurs;
A gaming machine described in any one of features O1 to O4, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature O5, when the separate lottery process is performed, numerical information is obtained from a separate numerical information storage means that is provided separately from the predetermined storage means. This makes it possible to perform the separate lottery process strictly.

Feature O6. The first lottery means and the second lottery means each include a plurality of numerical information storage means (the first to twelfth shared random number circuits 101a to 101l) that become targets for acquiring numerical information and update numerical information when an update trigger occurs, including the predetermined storage means;
A gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O5, wherein all of the plurality of numerical information storage means have the same number of bits.

According to feature O6, since the multiple numerical information storage means used in common in multiple lottery processes all have the same number of bits, it is possible to obtain and use numerical information with the same number of bits regardless of which numerical information storage means is used in a single lottery process.

Feature O7. The first selection means, when the first selection trigger occurs, acquires numerical information from one of the numerical information storage means;
The gaming machine according to feature O6, wherein the second lottery means acquires numerical information from a plurality of the numerical information storage means when the second lottery trigger occurs.

According to feature O7, even if the lottery means uses numerical information with different bit numbers during lottery processing, it is possible to use multiple numerical information storage means in common with other lottery means.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features O1 to O7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Feature P group>
Feature P1. A first specific lottery means (a function of executing the add-on lottery process using the first add-on table 141 in the main MPU 72) that executes a lottery process (add-on lottery process) by comparing the acquired numerical information with the first lottery information group (first add-on table 141) when an acquisition trigger occurs;
A second specific lottery means (a function of executing the add-on lottery process using the second add-on table 142 in the main MPU 72) that executes a lottery process (add-on lottery process) by comparing the acquired numerical information with a second lottery information group (second add-on table 142) when an acquisition trigger occurs;
Equipped with
The first lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (top-up indexes)
lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and enables the first determination lottery means to determine whether the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information;
It has
The second lottery information group is
Multiple identification information (top-up indexes)
lottery correspondence information (the number of winning random numbers) that is set in correspondence with the identification information and enables the second identification lottery means to identify whether the numerical information corresponds to the corresponding identification information;
It has
The first lottery information group and the second lottery information group are set with the same information as the plurality of identification information,
In the first selection information group, the selection corresponding information corresponding to a predetermined identification information among the plurality of identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information is not selected in the selection process of the first specific selection means,
In the second selection information group, the selection corresponding information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is set so that the predetermined identification information can be selected in the selection process of the second selection means,
This gaming machine is
An information storage means (main ROM 73) for storing a corresponding information group (index correspondence table 145) in which lottery result information (number of added games) is set in correspondence with each of the plurality of identification information;
An information grasping means (a function of executing the process of step S5408 in the main MPU 72) for grasping the lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected by the first identification lottery means or the second identification lottery means from the corresponding information group;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature P1, even though a predetermined identification information is not selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means when the first lottery information group is referenced, a plurality of identification information are set in the first lottery information group so that the first lottery information group is identical to the second lottery information group, including the predetermined identification information. In addition, a corresponding information group in which lottery result information is set in correspondence with each of the plurality of identification information is stored in the information storage means, and lottery result information corresponding to the identification information selected in the lottery process of the first specific lottery means or the lottery process of the second specific lottery means is ascertained from the corresponding information group. With this configuration, it is not necessary to store the corresponding information groups corresponding to each of the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group in the information storage means, so that it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required to store the corresponding information groups in the information storage means.

Feature P2. The plurality of pieces of identification information are set to be consecutive numbers,
The gaming machine described in feature P1 is characterized in that in the lottery process, a determination process is performed (processing of steps S5504 to S5506 in the main MPU 72) as to whether or not to select each identification information as a lottery result according to the numerical order of the multiple identification information.

According to feature P2, the identification information is set as a consecutive number, which allows the lottery process to be carried out efficiently. In this case, if the identification information is treated as different information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, it becomes necessary to prepare corresponding information groups corresponding to the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, respectively. In contrast, by having the configuration of feature P1 and setting the same identification information in the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, it becomes possible to share the corresponding information group between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P3. In the second selection information group, the selection corresponding information corresponding to a specific identification information among the plurality of identification information is set so that the specific identification information is not selected in the selection process of the second selection means;
A gaming machine described in feature P1 or P2, characterized in that in the first lottery information group, the lottery corresponding information corresponding to the specific identification information is set so that the specific identification information can be selected in the lottery processing of the first specific lottery means.

According to feature P3, although the identification information that is not selected in the lottery process differs between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group, the same identification information is set, so that it is possible to make the corresponding information group common between the first lottery information group and the second lottery information group.

Feature P4: The information storage means stores first compressed information (first compressed data 146) corresponding to the first lottery information group,
The gaming machine includes a means for generating the first lottery information group by executing an expansion process on the first compressed information (a function for executing the processes of steps S5402 to S5404 in the master MPU 72),
A gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, characterized in that the lottery-related information corresponding to the predetermined identification information is not set in the first compressed information.

According to feature P4, even if the first lottery information group is set with a predetermined identification information that is not selected in the lottery process, the first compressed information corresponding to the first lottery information group does not have lottery-compatible information corresponding to the predetermined identification information. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while suppressing an increase in the storage capacity of the information required to use the first lottery information group.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features P1 to P4. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group O and feature group P can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above require a configuration that allows the lottery to be conducted efficiently, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristic Q group>
Feature Q1. A history storage execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S4701 to S4704 in the master MPU 72) for storing history information of a game corresponding to a predetermined event that occurs when the game is executed in the history storage means (total game number counter 74a, advantageous game number counter 74b);
An information deriving means (a function for executing the process of step S4707 in the master MPU 72) for deriving behavior information corresponding to a game result during a predetermined period by utilizing the history information stored in the history storage means;
An information display control means (a function of executing the process of step S4708 in the main MPU 72) that controls the display of the information display means (the dual-purpose display unit 66, the advantageous zone display unit 67) so that a display corresponding to the aspect information derived by the information derivation means is performed;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the information display control means is equipped with an end control means (a function of executing the processing of step S4710 in the main MPU 72) that causes the display corresponding to the status information in the information display means to be terminated based on the occurrence of an end trigger.

According to feature Q1, when a predetermined event occurs, the corresponding history information is stored in the history storage means. This allows the gaming machine to store and hold information for managing the number of occurrences or frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event, and by using this managed information, it is possible to appropriately manage the occurrence frequency of the predetermined event. Furthermore, since the history information is stored in the gaming machine itself, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to or unauthorized modification of the history information. Furthermore, by using the history information stored in the history storage means, behavior information corresponding to the results of play during a predetermined period is derived. Then, a display corresponding to the behavior information is performed by the information display means. This makes it possible to grasp the results of management of the game history, such as the frequency of occurrence of the predetermined event. Furthermore, the display corresponding to the behavior information in the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of an end trigger. This makes it possible to prevent the behavior information from being displayed by the information display means in situations where it is not necessary to display the behavior information.

Feature Q2. The gaming machine described in Feature Q1, characterized in that there are multiple types of termination triggers.

According to feature Q2, since there are multiple types of termination triggers, it is possible to improve operability when terminating the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means.

Feature Q3. The information display control means includes a start control means (a function for executing the process of step S4708 in the main MPU 72) that starts displaying the mode information in the information display means based on the occurrence of a start trigger;
A gaming machine described in feature Q2, characterized in that there is only one type of start trigger.

According to feature Q3, by having only one type of start trigger, it is possible to prevent the display corresponding to the mode information in the information display means from being started unintentionally.

Feature Q4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features Q1 to Q3, characterized in that the end control means determines that the end trigger has occurred based on the occurrence of a corresponding event that can occur to establish the conditions for starting a game (output of an ON signal from the start detection sensor 41a, output of an ON signal from the inserted coin detection sensor 45a, output of an ON signal from the inserted credit detection sensors 47a to 49a).

According to feature Q4, the display corresponding to the mode information on the information display means is terminated based on the occurrence of a target event that may occur when starting play, so it is possible to prevent play from being performed while the mode information is still displayed on the information display means.

Feature Q5. A predetermined output means (start detection sensor 41a, credit insertion detection sensors 47a to 49a) that becomes a predetermined output state when a corresponding event occurs;
A means for executing valid response control based on the predetermined output state of the predetermined output means in a valid situation (a function for executing the process of step S402 in the main MPU 72, and a function for making a positive determination in step S404 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features Q1 to Q4, characterized in that the termination control means determines that the termination trigger has occurred based on the specified output means entering the specified output state in a situation that is not the valid situation.

According to feature Q5, even if the situation is not valid, the display corresponding to the status information in the information display means is terminated when the specified output means is in a specified output state, so it is possible to terminate the display corresponding to the status information without waiting for the situation to become valid.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features Q1 to Q5. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features Q can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launch operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known for a pachinko machine, and in this case, the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the reels, and when the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stop result after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is awarded to the player.

Here, gaming machines such as those exemplified above need to be properly managed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature R group>
Feature R1: A symbol display means (reel unit 31) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A stop operation means (stop buttons 42 to 44) that is operated to stop the variable display of the image;
A pattern display control means (a function of executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the pattern display means so that the display of the patterns is started based on the occurrence of a variation start trigger, and the display of the patterns is stopped based on the operation of the stop operation means;
Equipped with
The picture display control means includes a restart response means (a function of making a negative determination at steps S103 and S112 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of making a negative determination at steps S6303 and S6312 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) for starting the variable display of the picture even if the variable display of the picture is not generated when the supply of operating power is stopped and then resumed while the variable display of the picture is being executed;
This gaming machine is characterized by being equipped with a stop regulation means (a function of executing the processing of steps S116 and S117 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function of executing the processing of step S6316 in the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment) that regulates the execution of stop control by operating the stop operation means when the supply of operating power is stopped at least while the changing display of the picture is being executed and then the supply of operating power is resumed.

According to feature R1, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the display of the changing patterns is being performed, the display of the changing patterns will be started when the supply of operating power is resumed, even if the trigger for starting the change does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the execution of the display of the changing patterns from being invalidated by the stop of the supply of operating power. In addition, if the display of the changing patterns is newly started when the supply of operating power is resumed in this way, the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means is restricted. This makes it possible to prevent the stop control of the pattern from being executed immediately after the display of the changing patterns is started when the supply of operating power is stopped and the supply of operating power is resumed with the stop operation means being operated. If the stop control of the pattern is executed immediately after the display of the changing patterns is started, there is a risk that the display of the changing patterns will not be performed normally, but by restricting the execution of the stop control by the operation of the stop operation means as described above, it is possible to prevent such an event from occurring.

Feature R2. The picture display control means is
Acceleration means for generating an acceleration period when the variable display of the pattern is started (a function for executing an acceleration process in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processes of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72);
A means for setting constant speed correspondence information in a constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (a function for executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72);
A means for generating a constant speed period so that the image is displayed variably at a constant speed when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding storage area (a function for executing the process of step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
A means for not executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding storage area, and for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding storage area (a function of making a positive determination in step S801 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing from step S803 onward);
Equipped with
the stop regulating means, when a trigger for stopping the supply of operating power occurs in a situation in which the constant speed correspondence information is set in the constant speed correspondence storage area, causes the constant speed correspondence information to be not set in the constant speed correspondence storage area in a situation after the supply of operating power is resumed;
The gaming machine described in feature R1 is characterized in that the acceleration means generates the acceleration period when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding memory area in a situation where the variable display of the image should be executed.

According to feature R2, when the image variation display starts, an acceleration period occurs first, followed by a constant speed period. Then, since the constant speed response information is set during the constant speed period, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled. As a result, the image variation display is executed in a situation where the image variation display is executed at a constant speed, and it is possible to appropriately execute the image variation control. In this case, if an opportunity to stop the supply of operating power occurs in a situation where the constant speed response information is set, the constant speed response information is not set in the situation after the supply of operating power is resumed. Then, when the constant speed response information is not set in a situation where the image variation display should be executed, an acceleration period occurs. As a result, by using the constant speed response information, when the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where the image variation display is executed, and when the supply of operating power is resumed, it is possible to start the image variation display anew while invalidating the operation of the stop operation means.

Feature R3: An information storage means (main RAM 74) having the constant speed corresponding storage area and storing various information;
An information erasing means (a function of executing the processes of steps S104 and S113 in the main MPU 72) for erasing information stored in the information storage means based on the establishment of an erasure condition when the supply of operating power is started;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature R2 is characterized in that when a trigger for stopping the supply of operating power occurs when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding memory area, even if the information erasing means does not erase information when the supply of operating power is resumed, the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding memory area in the situation after the supply of operating power is resumed.

According to feature R3, if a trigger occurs to stop the supply of operating power in a situation where constant speed response information is set, the constant speed response information will not be set even if the information in the information storage means is not erased by the information erasing means when the supply of operating power is started. Then, if constant speed response information is not set in a situation where the variable picture display should be executed, an acceleration period will occur. This makes it possible to use the constant speed response information to invalidate the operation of the stop operation means and start a new variable picture display when the supply of operating power is being executed and the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature R4. The gaming machine described in feature R2 or R3, wherein the stop regulation means sets the constant speed corresponding information in the constant speed corresponding memory area to a state in which the constant speed corresponding information is not set when the supply of operating power is started.

According to feature R4, if the supply of operating power is stopped while constant speed response information is set, the constant speed response information is set to a state where it is not set when the supply of operating power is resumed. This makes it possible to reliably set the constant speed response information to a state where it is not set when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature R5. The gaming machine according to feature R2 or R3, wherein the stop regulation means sets the constant speed corresponding information in the constant speed corresponding memory area to a state in which the constant speed corresponding information is not set when the supply of operating power is stopped.

According to feature R5, if the supply of operating power is stopped in a situation where constant speed response information is set, the constant speed response information is set to a state where it is not set at that time. This makes it possible to set the constant speed response information to a state where it is not set when the supply of operating power is resumed without performing special processing when the supply of operating power is resumed.

Feature R6. The picture display control means is
A confirmation means for executing a confirmation process for confirming whether or not the stop operation means has been operated based on the occurrence of a confirmation trigger (a function for executing a stop operation determination process of the main MPU 72 in the tenth embodiment);
A history storage execution means (a function for executing the processes of steps S6103 to S6106 in the main MPU 72) for storing information on the confirmation result of the confirmation process in the immediately previous processing round as predetermined history information in the history storage means (history areas 181 to 183);
A means for enabling the display of the variable patterns to be stopped based on the confirmation that the stop operation means has been operated in the confirmation process in a situation where the predetermined history information corresponds to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means has not been operated (a function for executing the process of step S6108 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The stop control means is configured to make the specified history information information corresponding to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means has been operated, at least in a situation where the supply of operating power is stopped while the varying display of the pattern is being executed, and then when the supply of operating power is resumed and the confirmation process is executed thereafter.

According to feature R6, if the supply of operating power is stopped while the display of changing patterns is being performed, when the supply of operating power is resumed and the confirmation process is executed, the specified history information corresponds to a confirmation result indicating that the stop operation means has been operated. Since the configuration is such that the control to stop the display of changing patterns is executed based on the confirmation process confirming that the stop operation means has been operated in a situation where the specified history information indicating that the stop operation means has not been operated is stored, if the confirmation process is executed as described above and the specified history information indicating that the stop operation means has been operated is stored, the control to stop the display of changing patterns is not executed even if the confirmation process confirms that the stop operation means has been operated. This makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described simply by adjusting the content of the specified history information.

Feature R7. The picture display control means is
Acceleration means for generating an acceleration period when the variable display of the pattern is started (a function for executing an acceleration process in the main MPU 72, a function for executing the processes of steps S1103 to S1108 in the main MPU 72);
A means for setting constant speed correspondence information in a constant speed correspondence storage area (constant speed flag 74c) when the acceleration period ends (a function for executing the process of step S918 in the main MPU 72);
A means for generating a constant speed period so that the image is displayed variably at a constant speed when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding storage area (a function for executing the process of step S1110 in the main MPU 72);
A means for not executing stop control even if the stop operation means is operated when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding storage area, and for executing stop control based on the operation of the stop operation means when the constant speed corresponding information is set in the constant speed corresponding storage area (a function of making a positive determination in step S801 in the main MPU 72 and executing the processing from step S803 onward);
A means for causing the constant speed corresponding information to be set in the constant speed corresponding storage area when it is determined that the variable display of the pattern is not being performed normally (a function for executing the process of step S6202 in the main MPU 72);
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature R6, wherein the acceleration means generates the acceleration period when the constant speed corresponding information is not set in the constant speed corresponding memory area in a situation where the variable display of the image should be executed.

According to feature R7, when the image variation display starts, an acceleration period occurs first, followed by a constant speed period. Then, since the constant speed response information is set during the constant speed period, the operation of the stop operation means is enabled. As a result, the image is stopped when the image is displayed in a constant speed, and the image can be stopped appropriately. Also, when it is determined that the image variation display is not performed normally, the constant speed response information is set to a state where it is not set, and when the constant speed response information is not set in a state where the image variation display should be performed, the acceleration period occurs. In this case, even if the supply of operating power is stopped in a state where the constant speed response information is set, when the supply of operating power is resumed, the operation of the stop operation means is effectively disabled because predetermined history information indicating that the stop operation means is operated is stored when the confirmation process is executed thereafter. Then, it is possible to set the constant speed response information to a state where it is not set in a state where the operation of the stop operation means is disabled, and to start a new acceleration period.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features R1 to R7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group R can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, in which the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which a display device or a rotating body is used to perform a changing display of a pattern is also known in pachinko gaming machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, thereby starting the display of changing patterns, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stopped pattern after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to display the changing patterns in an optimal manner, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Characteristics Group S>
Feature S1: A symbol display means (reel unit 31) for displaying symbols in a variable manner;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that is operated to start the variable display of the image;
A role selection execution means (a function of executing a role selection process in the master MPU 72) that executes a role selection process based on the operation of the start operation means;
A pattern display control means (a function for executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) controls the pattern display means so that the display of the patterns is started based on the operation of the start operation means, and the display of the patterns is stopped based on the occurrence of a stop trigger;
A winning control means (a function for executing the process of step S410 in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning control based on the fact that the stopped result of the picture corresponds to the result of the lottery process of the role when the variable display of the picture is stopped;
A first predetermined lottery execution means (a function of constantly executing a lottery process in the main MPU 72) that executes a first predetermined lottery process regardless of the result of the lottery process of the role;
a predetermined bonus granting means for granting a predetermined bonus (a bonus of an additional number of games) to a player based on a winning result in the first predetermined lottery process (a function for executing the process of step S3109 in the master MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the process of step S6411 in the master MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6511 in the master MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature S1, the lottery process for the winning combination is executed based on the operation of the start operation means, and the display of the changing patterns is started. When the display of the changing patterns is stopped, the winning control is executed based on the stopped result of the patterns corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. Therefore, the player plays the game while paying attention to the stopped result of the changing patterns. In this case, the first predetermined lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination, and the predetermined benefit is awarded based on the winning result in the first predetermined lottery process. This makes it possible to create a situation in which the predetermined benefit is awarded in a manner that is not dependent on the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect that the predetermined benefit will be awarded even if the result of the lottery process for the winning combination is not the desired result, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Feature S2. The role selection execution means executes the role selection process by utilizing numerical information acquired based on the operation of the start operation means;
The gaming machine described in feature S1, characterized in that the first predetermined lottery execution means executes the first predetermined lottery process by utilizing numerical information obtained based on the operation of the start operation means.

According to feature S2, even in a configuration in which the first predetermined lottery process is executed regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination, it is possible to make the trigger for acquiring the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process common to the operation of the start operation means, in the same way as the trigger for acquiring the numerical information used in the lottery process for the winning combination. Therefore, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects already described without complicating the trigger for acquiring the numerical information.

Feature S3. The gaming machine described in feature S2, characterized in that the numerical information used in the lottery process for the role and the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process are numerical information updated by a numerical information update means (first dedicated random number circuit 102a, third dedicated random number circuit 102c) that is different from the numerical information used in the lottery process for the role.

According to feature S3, the numerical information used in the first predetermined lottery process is updated by a numerical information update means different from the numerical information update means for updating the numerical information used in the lottery process for the winning combination. This makes it possible to make the result of the first predetermined lottery process completely independent of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination.

Feature S4. A gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3, characterized in that the first predetermined lottery execution means executes the first predetermined lottery process in each game at least in a specific situation (ART state ST9).

According to feature S4, the first predetermined lottery process is executed in each game at least in a specific situation, so that the player can expect to receive a predetermined bonus in each game regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination at least in a specific situation.

Feature S5. A second predetermined lottery execution means for executing a second predetermined lottery process in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the role (a function for executing the processes of steps S3102 to S3104 in the master MPU 72 in the first embodiment, a function for executing the processes of steps S6402 to S6404 in the master MPU 72 in the eleventh embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6502 to S6504 in the master MPU 72 in the twelfth embodiment),
A gaming machine described in any one of features S1 to S4, characterized in that the specified bonus awarding means awards the specified bonus based on a winning result in the first specified lottery process, and awards the specified bonus based on a winning result in the second specified lottery process.

Feature S5 makes it possible to create a situation in which a predetermined bonus is awarded regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination, and a situation in which a predetermined bonus is awarded in a manner corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination. This allows the player to expect that a predetermined bonus will be awarded according to the result of the lottery process for the winning combination, and also that a predetermined bonus will be awarded regardless of the result of the lottery process for the winning combination.

Feature S6. The gaming machine described in Feature S5, characterized in that the degree of advantage of the predetermined bonus granted based on a winning result in the first predetermined lottery process is lower or more likely to be lower than the degree of advantage of the predetermined bonus granted based on a winning result in the second predetermined lottery process.

Feature S6 makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the results of the lottery process for the role when it comes to the awarding of the specified bonus, and makes it possible for the player to look forward to the awarding of the specified bonus even if the result of the lottery process for the role is not the desired result.

Feature S7. The gaming machine according to feature S5 or S6, wherein the predetermined bonus granting means does not grant the predetermined bonus in response to a winning result in the first predetermined lottery process, even if the first predetermined lottery process results in a winning result, when the predetermined bonus is granted based on the winning result in the second predetermined lottery process.

Feature S7 makes it possible to achieve the excellent effects already described while preventing the specified benefits from being excessively awarded.

Feature S8: Equipped with a setting means (a function for executing the process of step S105 in the main MPU 72) for setting a setting value to be used from among a plurality of setting values corresponding to the player's advantage level;
The gaming machine described in any one of features S5 to S7, characterized in that the second predetermined lottery execution means executes the second predetermined lottery process based on winning a specific role in the role lottery process, which has the same winning probability regardless of any of the multiple setting values.

Feature S8 makes it possible to award a specified bonus while making it difficult to predict the set value.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features S1 to S8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above group of features S can solve the following problems:

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, in which the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which a display device or a rotating body is used to perform a changing display of a pattern is also known in pachinko gaming machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, thereby starting the display of changing patterns, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stopped pattern after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature T group>
Feature T1. A random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information;
A random number acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S2104 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6604 in the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment) for storing the specific random number information in a lottery memory area (acquired random number counter 74e) when an acquisition opportunity occurs;
An information update means for updating lottery value information in the lottery memory area after the specific random number information is stored (a function for executing the process of step S2106 in the master MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the process of step S6607 in the master MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
a winning response execution means for executing a winning response process when the lottery value information is updated in the lottery memory area, and the numerical information in the lottery memory area becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from one of the minimum value and the maximum value to the other (a function for executing the processes of steps S2107 and S2108 in the main MPU 72 in the first embodiment, and a function for executing the processes of steps S6608 and S6609 in the main MPU 72 in the thirteenth embodiment);
Equipped with
The lottery storage area is an area of a predetermined number of bits,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific random number information has a specific number of bits which is less than the predetermined number of bits.

According to feature T1, in a configuration in which the winning response process is executed when the lottery memory area is updated with the lottery value information, and the numerical information of the lottery memory area becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information of the lottery memory area is changed from one of the minimum and maximum values to the other, the lottery memory area is an area with a predetermined number of bits, while the specific random number information has a specific number of bits that is less than the predetermined number of bits. As a result, when creating a situation in which the winning response process is executed 100%, it is sufficient to use numerical information that is greater than the maximum value of the specific number of bits as the lottery value information, and it is possible to keep the number of bits of such lottery value information within the range of the predetermined number of bits. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature T2. The information update means derives numerical information resulting from subtracting the lottery value information from the numerical information stored in the lottery storage area,
The gaming machine described in feature T1, characterized in that the winning response execution means executes the winning response processing when the numerical information of the result derived by the information update means becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value by subtracting the lottery value information.

According to feature T2, in a configuration in which numerical information is updated by subtraction during a lottery, the specific random number information is set to a specific number of bits that is less than a predetermined number of bits, so that it is possible to create a situation in which the winning response process is executed 100% simply by using numerical information that is greater than the maximum value of the specific number of bits as the lottery value information.

Feature T3. The gaming machine according to feature T1 or T2, characterized in that the lottery value information includes first lottery value information (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "9" to "16" in the lottery table 113 for high probability) that is information of the predetermined number of bits and is greater than the maximum value of the specific number of bits, and second lottery value information (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8" in the lottery table 113 for high probability) that is information of the predetermined number of bits and is less than the maximum value of the specific number of bits.

According to feature T3, by using the first lottery value information, it is possible to ensure that the winning response process is executed 100% of the time, and by using the second lottery value information, it is possible to ensure that either a situation in which the winning response process is executed or a situation in which it is not executed occurs depending on the specific random number information.

Feature T4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features T1 to T3, characterized in that the specific number of bits is one bit less than the predetermined number of bits.

Feature T4 makes it possible to maximize the range of values that can be used as specific random number information while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Feature T5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features T1 to T4, characterized in that the predetermined number of bits corresponds to a predetermined number of bytes.

Feature T5 makes it possible to handle numerical information in byte units while achieving the excellent effects already described.

Feature T6. The information update means is
A first derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S6605 in the main MPU 72) for deriving numerical information resulting from adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery memory area after the specific random number information is stored;
A second derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main MPU 72) for deriving numerical information resulting from adding the lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features T1 to T5, characterized in that the winning response execution means executes the winning response processing when the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value by adding the lottery value information.

According to feature T6, since the configuration is such that numerical information resulting from adding specific numerical information to specific random number information is added to lottery value information to obtain numerical information resulting from adding specific random number information, it is possible to realize a lottery using an additive formula even if the specific random number information is a specific number of bits that is less than the predetermined number of bits.

Feature T7. The gaming machine described in Feature T6, characterized in that the specific numerical information is set so that the resulting numerical information derived by the first derivation means is not numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value, regardless of the numerical information of the specific random number information.

Feature T7 makes it possible to prevent numerical information corresponding to a winning result from being derived simply by adding specific numerical information to specific random number information.

Feature T8. The lottery value information is set in a plurality of types,
The gaming machine described in feature T6 or T7 is characterized in that the specific numerical information is set so that, regardless of the type of the lottery value information, the resulting numerical information derived by the second derivation means can become numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value.

Feature T8 makes it possible to derive numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of the type of lottery value information used.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features T1 to T8. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

<Characteristic U group>
Feature U1. A random number updating means (fourth dedicated random number circuit 102d) for updating specific random number information;
A random number acquisition means (a function for executing the process of step S6604 in the master MPU 72) for storing the specific random number information in a lottery storage area (acquired random number counter 74e) when an acquisition opportunity occurs;
A first derivation means (a function for executing the process of step S6605 in the main MPU 72) for deriving numerical information resulting from adding predetermined specific numerical information (fixed value) to the numerical information stored in the lottery memory area after the specific random number information is stored;
A second derivation means (a function of executing the process of step S6607 in the main MPU 72) for deriving numerical information resulting from adding lottery value information to the numerical information derived by the first derivation means;
A winning response execution means (a function for executing the processing of steps S6608 and S6609 in the main MPU 72) for executing a winning response process when the numerical information of the result derived by the second derivation means becomes numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information of the lottery storage area is changed from the maximum value to the minimum value by adding the lottery value information;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature U1, numerical information resulting from adding lottery value information to numerical information resulting from adding specific numerical information to specific random number information is derived, and a winning response process is executed if the numerical information corresponds to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value. This makes it possible to appropriately perform a lottery using an addition formula even if the number of bits of the specific random number information is fewer than the number of bits in the lottery memory area. This makes it possible to optimally execute the lottery process.

Feature U2. The lottery memory area is an area of a predetermined number of bits,
A gaming machine described in feature U1, characterized in that the specific random number information is a specific number of bits that is less than the predetermined number of bits.

According to feature U2, the lottery memory area is an area with a predetermined number of bits, while the specific random number information has a specific number of bits that is less than the predetermined number of bits. As a result, when creating a situation in which the winning response process is executed 100%, it is sufficient to use numerical information that is greater than the maximum value of the specific number of bits as the lottery value information, and it is possible to keep the number of bits of such lottery value information within the range of the predetermined number of bits. Therefore, it is possible to execute the lottery process in an optimal manner.

Feature U3. The gaming machine described in feature U2, characterized in that the lottery value information includes first lottery value information (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "9" to "14" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "9" to "16" in the lottery table 113 for high probability) that is information of the predetermined number of bits and is greater than the maximum value of the specific number of bits, and second lottery value information (lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8", "15", "16" in the lottery table 112 for low probability, lottery value information corresponding to winning numbers "4" to "8" in the lottery table 113 for high probability) that is information of the predetermined number of bits and is less than the maximum value of the specific number of bits.

According to feature U3, by using the first lottery value information, it is possible to ensure that the winning response process is executed 100% of the time, and by using the second lottery value information, it is possible to ensure that either a situation in which the winning response process is executed or a situation in which it is not executed occurs depending on the specific random number information.

Feature U4. A gaming machine according to feature U2 or U3, characterized in that the specific number of bits is one bit less than the predetermined number of bits.

Feature U4 makes it possible to maximize the range of values that can be used as specific random number information while still achieving the excellent effects already described.

Feature U5. A gaming machine according to any one of features U2 to U4, characterized in that the predetermined number of bits corresponds to a predetermined number of bytes.

Feature U5 makes it possible to handle numerical information in byte units while achieving the excellent effects already described.

Feature U6. The gaming machine described in any one of Features U1 to U5, characterized in that the specific numerical information is set so that the resulting numerical information derived by the first derivation means is not numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery storage area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value, regardless of the numerical information of the specific random number information.

Feature U6 makes it possible to prevent numerical information corresponding to a winning result from being derived simply by adding specific numerical information to specific random number information.

Feature U7. The lottery value information is set in a plurality of types,
A gaming machine described in any one of features U1 to U6, characterized in that the specific numerical information is set so that, regardless of the type of the lottery value information, the resulting numerical information derived by the second derivation means can become numerical information corresponding to the result after the numerical information in the lottery memory area is changed from a maximum value to a minimum value.

Feature U7 makes it possible to derive numerical information corresponding to the winning result regardless of the type of lottery value information used.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features U1 to U7. This makes it possible to achieve a synergistic effect by combining the features.

The inventions in the above feature group T and feature group U can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, in which the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which a display device or a rotating body is used to perform a changing display of a pattern is also known in pachinko gaming machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, thereby starting the display of changing patterns, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stopped pattern after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to perform the lottery process appropriately, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature V group>
Feature V1. A picture display means (reel unit 31) having a plurality of variable display areas (reels 32L, 32M, 32R) for displaying a variable picture;
An acceleration means (a function for executing the processes of steps S1103 to S1108 and steps S1210 to S1211 in the main MPU 72) for generating an acceleration period of the variable display of the pattern in one of the plurality of variable display areas, and generating an acceleration period of the variable display of the pattern in the next variable display area after the acceleration period ends;
A period determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1204 to S1207 in the main MPU 72) for determining at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variation display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variation display area;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to feature V1, the variable display of the patterns may be started so that the acceleration period in one variable display area ends and then the acceleration period in the next variable display area begins. This allows the player to visually see how the variable display of the patterns begins sequentially. In this case, the period from the end of the acceleration period in one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area may vary. This makes it possible to diversify the start mode when the variable display of the patterns begins sequentially. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the execution mode of the variable display of the patterns.

Feature V2. Equipped with a pattern display control means (a function for executing a reel control process in the main MPU 72) that starts the variable display of the patterns in the multiple variable display areas based on the occurrence of a variable start trigger;
As the fluctuation start trigger, there are a first fluctuation start trigger (a situation in which the reel performance winning flag is not set to "1") and a second fluctuation start trigger (a situation in which the reel performance winning flag is set to "1");
The picture display control means includes:
A first pattern display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S904 to S907 in the main MPU 72) for displaying the patterns in the plurality of variable display areas without causing the period determination means to determine the waiting period based on the occurrence of the first variable start trigger;
A second pattern display control means (a function of executing the processing of steps S908 to S911 in the master MPU 72, a function of making a positive judgment in step S916 in the master MPU 72) that performs a variable display of the patterns in the plurality of variable display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination of the waiting period by the period determination means based on the occurrence of the second variable start trigger;
A gaming machine according to feature V1, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature V2, when a first change start trigger occurs, the image change display is performed in the multiple change display areas without making a decision regarding the waiting period, and when a second change start trigger occurs, the image change display is performed in the multiple change display areas in a manner corresponding to the decision regarding the waiting period. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the image change display is performed.

Feature V3. The gaming machine described in Feature V2, characterized in that the second pattern display control means causes the pattern display means to perform a specific variable display (reel presentation) using the pattern based on the occurrence of the second variable start trigger, and after the specific variable display is completed, causes the game machine to perform a variable display of the pattern in the multiple variable display areas in a manner corresponding to the determination regarding the waiting period by the period determination means.

According to feature V3, when a second variation start trigger occurs, the pattern variation display is started again after the specific variation display is performed. This makes it possible to add an element of surprise to the manner in which the pattern variation display is executed. Also, when the pattern variation display is started again after the specific variation display is performed, the pattern variation display is performed in the multiple variation display areas in a manner corresponding to the decision regarding the waiting period. This makes it possible to diversify the manner in which the pattern variation display is executed when the pattern variation display is started again after the specific variation display is performed.

Feature V4. The gaming machine according to any one of features V1 to V3, characterized in that the period determination means, when starting the acceleration period in one of the variable display areas, determines at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period until the acceleration period in the one of the variable display areas is started in response to a predetermined start trigger, and when starting the acceleration period in the next variable display area, determines at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area.

According to feature V4, when the variable display of the image in one variable display area starts, the period from a predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in the one variable display area can vary. Also, when the variable display of the image in the next variable display area starts, the period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area can vary. This makes it possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the start mode when the variable display of the image starts sequentially.

Feature V5. The gaming machine according to any one of Features V1 to V4, characterized in that the period determination means determines at least one of the presence or absence of the waiting period and the length of the waiting period through a waiting lottery process.

According to feature V5, at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, making it possible to make the manner in which the waiting period is determined irregular.

Feature V6. A predetermined value update means (random number counter) for updating the predetermined numerical information is provided;
The period determination means
A first acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined numerical information when starting the acceleration period in the one variation display area (a function for executing the process of step S1205 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3");
A first determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "3") that uses the predetermined numerical information acquired by the first acquisition means to determine by lottery at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period until the acceleration period in the one variable display area is started in response to a predetermined start trigger;
A second acquisition means for acquiring the predetermined numerical information when starting the acceleration period in the next order change display area (a function for executing the process of step S1205 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2");
A second determination means (a function of executing the process of step S1206 when the value of the start target counter in the main MPU 72 is "2") that uses the predetermined numerical information acquired by the second acquisition means to determine by lottery at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area;
A gaming machine described in any one of features V1 to V5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to feature V6, when the display of the image in one variable display area starts, the period from a predetermined start trigger to the start of the acceleration period in the one variable display area can be changed. Also, when the display of the image in the next variable display area starts, the period from the end of the acceleration period in the one variable display area to the start of the acceleration period in the next variable display area can be changed. This makes it possible to diversify the period until the acceleration period starts for each of the one variable display area and the next variable display area, and as a result, it becomes possible to diversify the start mode when the display of the image changes sequentially starts. Also, since at least one of the presence or absence of a waiting period and the length of the waiting period is determined by lottery, it is possible to make the determination mode of the waiting period irregular. Also, a common predetermined value update means is used regardless of whether the waiting period for the one variable display area or the waiting period for the next variable display area is determined. This makes it possible to achieve the above-mentioned excellent effects while simplifying the configuration.

Feature V7. The gaming machine described in Feature V6, characterized in that the period required for the predetermined value update means to complete one cycle of updating the predetermined value information is shorter than the period required for the acceleration period in one of the variable display areas to be completed.

According to feature V7, in a configuration in which a common predetermined numerical value update means is used to determine either the waiting period for one variable display area or the waiting period for the next variable display area, it becomes possible to perform a lottery for each waiting period independently.

Note that any one or more of the features A1 to A11, features B1 to B11, features C1 to C7, features D1 to D9, features E1 to E7, features F1 to F10, features G1 to G9, features H1 to H9, features I1 to I6, features J1 to J8, features K1 to K15, features L1 to L6, features M1 to M8, features N1 to N5, features O1 to O7, features P1 to P4, features Q1 to Q5, features R1 to R7, features S1 to S8, features T1 to T8, features U1 to U7, and features V1 to V7 may be applied to the features V1 to V7. This allows for a synergistic effect to be achieved by combining the features.

The invention relating to the above feature group V can solve the following problems.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as gaming machines. For example, a pachinko machine has a tray storage section on the front of the machine that stores game balls given to a player, and the game balls stored in the tray storage section are guided to a game ball launching device and launched toward the game area in response to the player's launching operation. Then, for example, when a game ball enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a lottery process is executed, or the game ball is paid out from a payout device to the tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which an upper tray storage section and a lower tray storage section are provided as the tray storage section is also known in pachinko gaming machines, in which the game balls stored in the upper tray storage section are guided to the game ball launching device, and the game balls that are surplus in the upper tray storage section are discharged to the lower tray storage section. In addition, a configuration in which a display device or a rotating body is used to perform a changing display of a pattern is also known in pachinko gaming machines.

In addition, in a slot machine, when medals have been bet and the start lever is operated to start a new game, a lottery process is executed by the control means. When the lottery process is executed, the control means executes rotation start control to start the rotation of the reels, thereby starting the display of changing patterns, and if the stop button is operated while the reels are rotating, the control means executes rotation stop control to stop the rotation of the reels. Then, if the stopped pattern after the reels have stopped rotating corresponds to a winning combination in the lottery process, a bonus corresponding to the winning combination is given to the player.

Here, in gaming machines such as those exemplified above, it is necessary to diversify the manner in which the changing display of patterns is performed, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine that starts the rotation of a rotating body based on the operation of a start operation means, stops the rotation of the rotating body based on the operation of a stop operation means, and awards a bonus to the player based on the image that appears after the rotation has stopped.

10... slot machine, 31... reel unit, 41... start lever, 41a... start detection sensor, 42-44... stop button, 45a... inserted coin detection sensor, 47a-49a... inserted credit detection sensor, 72... main MPU, 73... main ROM, 74... main RAM, 74a... total game number counter, 74b... advantageous game number counter, 74c... constant speed flag, 74e... acquired random number counter, 92... performance MPU, 93... performance ROM, 94... performance RAM, 101a-101l... 1st to 12th shared random number circuits, 102a... 1st Dedicated random number circuit, 102c...third dedicated random number circuit, 102d...fourth dedicated random number circuit, 111...offset table, 112...lottery table for low probability, 113...lottery table for high probability, 121...ART game number counter, 126...display counter, 127...stock game number counter, 132...transition condition game number counter, 141...first add-on table, 142...second add-on table, 145...index correspondence table, 146...first compressed data, 181...left history area, 182...middle history area, 183...right history area.

Claims (1)

A first control means for managing the progress of a game;
A second control means for controlling the execution of a performance based on information transmitted from the first control means;
Equipped with
The first control means is
A zone setting means for setting a game zone to a second zone which is more advantageous to a player than the first zone;
A transition expectation setting means for setting the second section to a transition expectation state;
A means for executing a predetermined lottery process in the transition expectation state;
A means for transitioning to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on a specific winning in the predetermined lottery process;
a means for updating the predetermined reference information stored in the predetermined storage means to approach the predetermined end information based on the occurrence of an update trigger when a game is executed in the advantageous gaming state;
A predetermined update means for updating the predetermined reference information to move away from the predetermined end information when a predetermined grant condition is established in the advantageous game state;
a predetermined transmission means for transmitting predetermined transmission information corresponding to the updated information when the predetermined reference information is updated by the predetermined update means to be away from the predetermined end information;
means for updating the continuation criterion information stored in the continuation criterion storage means to approach the specific end information based on the occurrence of an update trigger during the execution of the game in the second section;
a section end means for ending the second section based on the continuation criterion information becoming the specific end information in the second section;
a means for terminating the advantageous gaming state based on the fact that the predetermined reference information becomes the predetermined end information before the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state in the second section;
When the second section ends based on the fact that the continuation reference information becomes the specific end information in the advantageous gaming state in the second section, a means for ending the advantageous gaming state;
Equipped with
The second control means is
A transition expectation performance control means for performing a transition expectation performance in the transition expectation state;
A reception response means for executing a reception response process for executing a performance corresponding to the predetermined reference information being updated to a side moving away from the predetermined end information based on the reception of the predetermined transmission information;
Equipped with
The section setting means includes a section continuation means for continuing the second section based on the end of the advantageous game state in a situation where the continuation reference information in the second section is information included in a range between specific information that the continuation reference information can reach before reaching the specific end information and an initial information of the continuation reference information ,
The reception support means includes:
a notification means for updating continuation information of a notification target in order to allow a player of the game to recognize the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information;
a later notification means for updating continuation information of a later notification target so as to prevent the updated information corresponding to the predetermined transmission information from being recognized by a player in the game;
Equipped with
the latter notification means includes a means for executing a presentation for making the player recognize the information updated by the plurality of updates collectively when the update by the predetermined update means occurs a plurality of times in a specific situation in the advantageous game state and the total amount of information updated by the plurality of updates is equal to or exceeds a predetermined amount of information;
The gaming machine is characterized in that the transition expectation performance control means includes a means for prioritizing the execution of a specific performance over the execution of the transition expectation performance when the transition expectation state is set by the transition expectation setting means while a specific performance is being executed .

Images